Depending on how you count, there are somewhere around 100,000 lakes in the United States, from tiny spots to the iconic Great Lakes, and everything in between. With so many bodies of water, it’s no wonder so many of us dream of lakefront living. The lakes offer a myriad of charms: indescribable natural beauty, endless water sports and sandy beaches. Check out 10 of our favorite American lakes, then learn how you can discover your lakeside home away from home with Pacaso. 1. Lake Tahoe, California/Nevada Surrounded by the stunning Sierra Nevada mountains, Lake Tahoe is the largest alpine lake in North America. Known for its crystal-clear waters, in some places the visibility is more than 70 feet. In the summer months, waterfront towns on both the California and Nevada shores of the lake are hubs of activity. Watersports outlets are everywhere and sunbathers work up the nerve to go for a swim — even in the heat of summer, the water temperature can take your breath away. When snow falls and Tahoe’s many ski resorts open up, the beauty of Lake Tahoe is best seen from the side of a mountain. Take in gorgeous lake views from high atop ski runs at Heavenly, Homewood and Diamond Peak. 2. Lake Arrowhead, California Lake Arrowhead is less than two hours from Los Angeles, but it’s a world away. Sitting among the San Bernardino Mountains in what’s affectionately known as the “Alps of Southern California,” this lake is the perfect escape for people who want all of the perks of life on the lake without the crowds you’ll find on bigger, more centrally located lakes. This is due, at least in part, to the fact that much of its shoreline is privately owned. Buy a second home or stay in accommodations with lake access and enjoy unfettered access to the lake’s deep blue waters. On the southwest side of the lake, Lake Arrowhead Village has been a hub for lake activity since the 1920s. It features charming Swiss architecture, plenty of seasonal events and over 50 shops and restaurants. For those not staying on the lake (or without watercraft of their own), the village is the departure spot for the Lake Arrowhead Queen, a one-hour guided on-the-water tour. 3. Flathead Lake, Montana As the largest freshwater lake west of the Mississippi, Montana’s Flathead Lake is known for its rugged natural beauty and over 185 miles of shoreline. With almost 200 square miles of water, there’s room to explore on Flathead Lake. Renting a boat or taking a guided fishing trip departing from the towns of Polson, Bigfork or Somers are popular ways to see the lake. It may be a fish tale, but it’s been said that lucky anglers have caught trout as large as 50 pounds. For a truly memorable experience, take a boat or ferry to Wild Horse Island. The largest island in the lake, this pristine natural area is home to wild horses, bighorn sheep, mule deer and bald eagles. Many visitors to Flathead Lake leave time to visit another famous Montana destination: Glacier National Park. Less than an hour north from the lake, this national park features endless hiking trails, historic lodges and yes — more lakes. 4. Lake Coeur d’Alene, Idaho When the last glaciers receded from the Pacific Northwest almost 15,000 years ago, Lake Coeur d’Alene was born. A crown jewel of the Pacific Northwest, the lake is at the center of all the action in this area. Beautiful beaches and an award-winning resort line the shore, and the Coeur d’Alene Resort’s golf course features a famous floating green — so bring extra golf balls! In the summer months, explore the 25-mile body of water on your choice of watercraft, from relaxing chartered boat cruises to the adrenaline-pumping fun of a jet ski excursion. Stand-up paddleboards and kayaks are also popular. Want a birds-eye view of the beauty of Idaho? Take a scenic flight on a seaplane. 5. The Finger Lakes, New York As the name suggests, this vacation destination isn’t a single lake, but rather a collection of eleven long, narrow lakes in picturesque upstate New York. Within driving distance from New York City, Toronto, Boston and Philadelphia, the Finger Lakes region is big on natural beauty. In addition to the lakes themselves, nature lovers will find themselves in awe of the local gorges, waterfalls, state parks and swimming holes. While the Finger Lakes put on a beautiful show every month of the year, the fall is an idyllic time for a visit. Think warm days, cool nights and a rainbow of fall colors on the hillsides that surround the lakes. Still need convincing? The Finger Lakes area is also New York’s premier wine region, with more than 100 different vineyards and wineries and a reputation for a great riesling. 6. Lake Winnipesaukee, New Hampshire You may very well have to ask a local how to pronounce its name when you arrive, but Lake Winnipesaukee is worth the effort. The largest lake in New Hampshire is home to more than 250 islands and plenty of charming small towns. Movie buffs may be interested to know that parts of the 1981 Katharine Hepburn and Henry Fonda film ”On Golden Pond” were filmed here. The lake was also the setting of the less serious but also memorable Bill Murray and Richard Dreyfuss movie “What About Bob.” Every summer, vacationers from the Eastern Seaboard flock to this 72-square-mile lake for boating, fishing, beachcombing, hiking and generally enjoying life at a slower pace. Return in the winter for ice fishing, snowmobiling, dogsledding and more. 7. Crater Lake, Oregon Perhaps the most unique lake on our list, Crater Lake in Oregon is a destination you simply need to see to believe. Created as a result of a volcanic eruption roughly 8,000 years ago, the 1,943-foot-deep lake (the deepest lake in the United States) is a caldera that was filled over thousands of years with rainfall and snowmelt. Because no streams or rivers feed into the lake, it’s considered among the cleanest bodies of water in the world — that’s also why it has become a popular destination for scuba divers, who enjoy visibility of up to 100 feet for exploring underwater lava formations. Unlike other lakes on the list, accessing the water in Oregon’s only national park is part of the adventure. It features steep cliffs on all sides, so you’ll need to take a two-mile hike down the Cleetwood Cove Trail, descending 700 feet of switchbacks to the shoreline. From there, you can board a boat tour that tells you all about the lake’s history and stops on storied Wizard Island, a volcanic cinder cone. 8. Lake Powell, Arizona/Utah Sure, Lake Powell may be a human-made creation — it’s the second-largest reservoir in the United States, created by the damming of the Colorado River at Glen Canyon — but that doesn’t make it any less majestic. Easily one of the most beautiful lakes in the country, Lake Powell wows with orange and red-hued sandstone cliffs and impossibly blue water. Rent a houseboat or a speedboat and spend long summer days exploring the twists and turns of some 90 side canyons that make up this massive lake. Be sure to find your way to Rainbow Bridge National Monument. This 33-foot-wide natural sandstone arch is simply stunning. After all, it’s considered the world’s longest natural arch. 9. Lake Lanier, Georgia Also the result of the damming of a river — the Chattahoochee River, in this case — Georgia’s Lake Lanier is a weekend playground within an hour’s drive of Atlanta. More than 10 million people visit the lake every year, enjoying more than 20 different beaches and lush islands. Despite the large number of visitors, there’s plenty of space, thanks to 700-plus miles of shoreline. Stop by a local marina to rent a pontoon boat, houseboat or jet ski. Book a fishing excursion in search of bass and walleye. Or enjoy food truck fare and live music every Friday at Lake Lanier Olympic Park, which hosted events during the 1996 Atlanta Summer Games. 10. Lake Champlain, New York and Vermont It’s not every day that you can splash around in a lake that has played a pivotal role in not one, not two, but three American wars. But you can do it on Lake Champlain, located on the border of New York and Vermont. Pop into the Lake Champlain Maritime Museum for a crash course on the lake’s storied history, then pick your activities based on the season. In the warm weather months, enjoy a kayak excursion, cast a line for largemouth bass or swim from the shore of a sandy beach. Intrepid winter travelers return for ice fishing, snowmobiling and even a classic game of pond hockey. Discover lakefront luxury Pacaso makes it easy to become a second home owner in a lakeside destination, giving you ample time to explore, adventure and relax. Pacaso co-owned second homes are available in Lake Tahoe, Lake Arrowhead and other dreamy lake destinations. Check out our fully furnished, professionally decorated and managed luxury homes and start living the lake life today.
Vacations can be the perfect way to reset from the daily stress of life and reconnect with your significant other. Where you plan to take your next getaway plays a big role in making that happen. We’ve collected the best vacation spots for couples to make it easy to find a destination that can deliver on your romantic goals. Whether you want your days filled with beachside lounging or seclusion in nature, these 25 places have you covered: Now let’s find your next vacation! 1. Maui, Hawai’i Hawai’i is a popular honeymoon and couples destination for good reason, and Maui offers the best of everything. Sometimes it’s the simple pleasures that bring the greatest satisfaction, and there’s nothing simpler than enjoying an island sunrise or sunset together. For a more indulgent experience, grab a snorkel and flippers to swim with the sea turtles at Turtle Town. Or share a shave ice before spending the day sailing around neighboring Lana’i. 2. Palm Springs, California Palm Springs has all the charm and style to deliver a great couples vacation. It has unique restaurants that provide hard-to-beat dining experiences. Take the aerial tram for a scenic ride through Chino Canyon to dine at the cliffside Peaks restaurant. Spencer’s Restaurant provides al fresco dining under the desert sky. You can also pamper yourselves with a couples spa day. The Parker Palm Springs Yacht Club delivers luxurious amenities with a Mid-Century Modern aesthetic. PS Air is a bar housed in a grounded 737, complete with authentic seats and floor lighting, plus a vintage bar cart. 3. Napa Valley, California Whether for a weekend or a week, Napa Valley has plenty of couples vacation options. Get an unbeatable view of the area from the basket of a hot air balloon with an optional champagne toast at the end. Spend a day at the Carneros Spa where you can participate in yoga, receive skin treatments or enjoy a soothing massage. The French Laundry is a Michelin 3-star restaurant that’s sure to please your inner foodie. Of course, you’ll want to squeeze in a winery visit — or three. The wine trolley is a perfect solution that offers a 5-hour open-air tour of the area’s best wineries. 4. Scottsdale, Arizona Whether you’re looking to lounge poolside or spend your days on the golf course, Scottsdale has all the amenities for couples fun. The Hyatt Regency Scottsdale is a one-stop shop for all of your vacation needs. Rest under a cabana at the pool, test your drive at the exclusive Gainey Ranch Golf Club, and refresh your body and mind at the on-site Spa Avania. For entertainment around the city, head to the Desert Botanical Garden and stroll under towering cacti. Taste the local wine at Carlson Creek Vineyard or explore exhibits at the Scottsdale Museum of Contemporary Art. 5. Sedona, Arizona Sedona is the perfect place to break free from distractions and reconnect with your significant other. The desert is ideal for stargazing, and there are plenty of guides in the area who can lead you to the best locations and explain what you’re seeing. Alternatively, you can go it alone with just a constellation phone app as your guide. Hiking through the red rocks of Sedona is the biggest draw to the area, with sites like Cathedral Rock, Chapel of the Holy Cross and Devil’s Bridge Trail serving as standouts. After a day of hiking, enjoy a glass of wine accompanied by live music on the patio at Vino Di Sedona. 6. New Orleans, Louisiana New Orleans is one of the best couples destinations thanks to its vibrant culture, and it doesn’t hurt that it’s overflowing with entertainment. Let the street musicians determine your playlist as you walk through the French Quarter, observing the unique architecture until you stop at a local cafe to enjoy a beignet. Hitch a ride on a steamboat cruise for an authentic creole dinner accompanied by live jazz. Take a romantic walk through the New Orleans Botanical Garden to see for yourself how the city’s humid climate cultivates lush foliage. 7. Charleston, South Carolina Charleston is a distinctly Southern town offering all the charm one would hope for in a vacation spot for couples. Catch a performance at the Charles Gaillard Center, where the Charleston Symphony Orchestra performs, then hop in a horse-drawn carriage for a tour of the city. Get in a rowboat at Cypress Gardens for a romantic experience straight out of “The Notebook.” Have a three-course meal at the Zero George where you’ll be treated to fine dining in an intimate environment. 8. Savannah, Georgia Savannah emanates old-school Victorian vibes, with ornate buildings and Spanish moss-covered trees lining the streets — perfect for a stroll with your beloved. Jump on a riverboat for a tour of the area in old-fashioned luxury, or head to nearby Tybee Island to look for dolphins and have a fresh seafood lunch. For a spooky adventure, spend a night searching for the supernatural on a candlelit ghost tour of one of the most “haunted” cities in the country. 9. Jackson Hole, Wyoming For idyllic mountain meadows, look no further than Jackson Hole. Unleash your inner cowpoke with a horseback ride through Grand Teton National Park and bask in its natural beauty. Dance at the local saloons to live music with cold drinks in hand, then recover with a spa day at Amangani, which specializes in ancient healing practices. Snap pictures in the town square under Jackson’s famous antler arch. Test your aim on the shooting range for a friendly competition with your significant other. 10. Martha’s Vineyard, Massachusetts Martha’s Vineyard has been a longtime favorite retreat for people looking to relax to the sound of crashing waves — that’s why it's built a reputation as a great vacation spot for couples. Take the bus to Gay Head Light, a historic lighthouse, and follow the trail down to the Aquinnah Cliffs for sweeping views. Take your pick of one of the island’s many public beaches for a day in the sand, or spend the day on the water by chartering a sailboat. Finally, quench your thirst with a cold beer at Bad Martha craft brewery. 11. Montreal, Canada French is undoubtedly a romantic language, but you don’t have to travel all the way to France to be immersed in it. Montreal’s official language is French, and that’s just the beginning of what makes this city one of the best vacation spots for couples. Established in the 1700s, Montreal has retained its old-world feel with cozy streets begging to be meandered through. The Montreal Botanical Garden covers 200 acres and is filled with gorgeous trails of varying themes and Art Deco-style pavilions. Tour the ornate cathedrals of Marie-Reine-du-Monde or St. Patrick’s Basilica. Afterward, make sure to treat yourself to the local delicacy: poutine, a mixture of fries, cheese curds and gravy. Or try your luck at the Casino de Montreal before enjoying a live performance at the concert venue. 12. Uvita, Costa Rica Costa Rica is the idyllic tropical paradise, and Uvita is in the perfect location to experience the best of what it has to offer. Rancho La Merced National Wildlife Refuge provides a number of ways to explore the environment, including horseback riding on the beach, nocturnal hikes through the jungle and birdwatching of more than 300 species. There are also endless opportunities for water-based fun. Go on a whale watching expedition to search for humpbacks and the chance to see dolphins, turtles and other sea life. Explore the Uvita Waterfall, which creates a natural waterslide for travelers to ride down into the pool below. Get your scuba certification and get a view of the coral reefs that can’t be beat. 13. Los Cabos, Mexico Travelers to Los Cabos benefit from its year-round sunshine and miles of beautiful coastline. If your ideal couples getaway revolves around getting pampered and returning home with a tan, Los Cabos can’t be ignored. Have your meals on the beach or opt for terraced seating at Esperanza to overlook the Sea of Cortez. If you have your sea legs, go for a sunset cruise on a sailboat accompanied by live music while you eat dinner. Or rent glass-bottomed kayaks for up-close views of the nearby rock formations and colorful fish. 14. Patagonia, Argentina Patagonia covers the southern part of South America and delivers an abundance of sought-after destinations for couples. Ride the End of the World Train, the southernmost train in the world, in a heated coach for a tour of the Tierra del Fuego National Park. Take a cruise around Beagle Channel and learn about the local penguins and seals. Trek through Los Glaciares National Park to experience the Perito Moreno Glacier. Other activities within the park include mountain climbing and sport fishing. While you’re in the country, you won’t want to miss the chance to eat Argentina’s delicious beef and drink its award-winning wine. 15. Reykjavik, Iceland Touring Iceland is one of the best trips for couples who love to connect with nature. Soak in the Blue Lagoon whose mineral-rich, geothermal heated waters are said to have soothing qualities. The Seljalandsfoss waterfall is one of the most beautiful you’ll come across, with a path leading behind the cascading water during warmer months. Snorkeling isn’t just for the tropics. Throw on a thermal wetsuit and swim in the Silfra Fissure, a gap between the tectonic plates of North America and Europe. Visit between October and March for the best chance at seeing the northern lights. Stay in a specialized rental in the wilderness for a truly unforgettable sight. 16. Dublin, Ireland Dublin is loaded with ideas for fun trips for couples. As the home of Guinness and Jameson Irish Whiskey, factory tours often top visitor to-do lists. Expect each tour to last roughly four hours and come with generous tastings. Or skip the tours and create your own self-guided pub crawl to experience the local drinks, food and people. The River Liffey runs down the middle of the city and can be navigated in rented kayaks for a unique view of your surroundings. Attend an enchanting Irish music and dance show at the Irish House Party and receive a three-course meal from an award-winning kitchen. 17. Marbella, Spain Marbella is a wonderful city on Spain’s southern coast that caters to your inner romantic. The beaches are the big draw, with plenty of food and drink served at beach clubs. Rent jet skis for added excitement, or simply wade into the blue water to cool off. The old town district is filled with boutiques and quaint restaurants. The scene offers a great opportunity to walk around with your loved one. Marbella also has a lively nightlife, complete with rooftop bars that host renowned DJs. 18. Helsinki, Finland It’s almost like Helsinki and the sun are in cahoots to give you as much time as possible to enjoy your summer vacation. The sun is visible nearly around the clock in June and July — venture further north and that time stretches from May to August. Here are some ideas for what to do with that extra daylight. Go to the Kaisaniemi Botanic Garden where you can walk through 10 glasshouses and see over 1,300 plant species from around the world. Explore the Ateneum Art Museum housing Finnish works dating back to the early 19th century. Saunas are deeply embedded in Finland’s culture, so you might want to spring for a private experience with your significant other at the luxurious Loyly Complex. Or hop in the SkySauna for a sauna gondola in a ferris wheel, with views of the city. 19. Bruges, Belgium No town embodies the term “fairytale” quite like Bruges. The medieval city is so well preserved that it’s a protected World Heritage Site by UNESCO. Like Venice, canals running through the city are perfect for a romantic boat cruise. The Minnewater Bridge is said to create eternal love when a couple crosses it together. Bruges, like the rest of Belgium, takes its beer seriously, so don’t hesitate to stop into one of its many breweries to sample the local offerings. 20. Lausanne, Switzerland Lausanne sits on the north shore of Lake Geneva with a stunning view of the Alps. If the natural scenery alone isn’t enough to make you buy a plane ticket, the rest of the city’s offerings surely will. Lausanne’s old town is filled with preserved gothic architecture that needs to be seen to be believed. Tour the Chateau Saint-Maire or the Lausanne Cathedral to take a step back in time and marvel at these medieval wonders. The Hotel Royal Savoy is another aesthetic attraction, and while you’re there you may as well take advantage of its world-class spa. The city’s burgeoning art district is home to three major museums. Take your pick between spending your day in the mountains — where cable cars take you to restaurants that rotate to provide perfect views — or walking around the lakefront. 21. Venice, Italy The gondolas of Venice need no introduction, but there’s more to this city of canals. Walk to the Rialto Bridge at sunset to watch the Grand Canal light up for the night. Watch a ballet or opera at the Theatre La Fenice — just don’t get too distracted by its elegantly golden interior. Share a bottle of wine at the Cantina Do Spade and dine on authentic Venetian cuisine. Tour the Doge’s Palace to get a taste of just how decadent the 11th century could be. Finally, appreciate the craftsmanship of St. Mark’s Basilica with its domes and turrets. 22. Santorini, Greece The scenic cliffs of Santorini draw couples to the area like moths to a flame. The Santorini Cable Car at Fira transports you down the cliffside in comfort. At the bottom, charter a boat in the Old Port area to reach the caldera hot springs. Most tours allow the opportunity to take a quick dip in the warm water. Enjoy fine Mediterranean cuisine with a glass of local wine at La Maison. Then head to Kamari to watch an outdoor movie surrounded by trees. Rent an ATV to quickly get to sites like the Akrotiri Lighthouse. 23. Kyoto, Japan Kyoto is known for its temples, shrines, gardens and palaces — so much so that it’s a UNESCO World Heritage site. Strolling its streets is both romantic and inspiring. Walk down Sannenzaka Slope and gaze at the traditional wooden buildings with their tiled roofs. The Golden Pavilion, aptly named for its gilded exterior, is the stuff of Instagram dreams, with ideal photo spots near the lake. The Yasaka Shrine, founded in 1350, has hundreds of lanterns that are lit each night. And if you’re lucky enough to visit in April, visit Maruyama Park to see the cherry blossom trees in full bloom. Partake in a Japanese tea ceremony, learning the philosophy behind the tradition from a local expert. For dinner, take a food tour that sprawls across two districts and includes a 10-course meal. 24. Singapore Singapore is a city-state in Southeast Asia on the cutting edge of technology. The Gardens by the Bay are a perfect example, blending architectural ingenuity with nature to make visitors feel like they’ve entered a new world. Take your partner to the top of the Supertree Observatory for an unforgettable sight. The Singapore Zoo gives visitors the chance to have breakfast while surrounded by animals in their habitats and even have the chance to meet them. The ArtScience Museum puts on an array of exhibitions that will dazzle you, including the VR Gallery for a thoroughly immersive experience. 25. Bali, Indonesia If long flights don’t intimidate you, head to the infinitely photogenic island of Bali. A top spot for honeymooners, Bali provides all the romance two people can handle. Couples vacation ideas include touring Bedugul and Ubud, which contain landmarks of Bali history. Guides can pick you up right from your hotel and explain the sites you pass on the way. Diamonds may be a girl’s best friend, but handmade jewelry gives them a run for their money. Craft your own gold or silver rings at a workshop led by master craftspeople. Then satisfy your appetite in a Paon Bali Cooking Class, where you can learn to cook traditional Indonesian food. Tips for traveling as a couple Experiencing new things with your partner is a great way to grow closer as a couple and make memories that will last a lifetime. However, travel can also be a stressful experience and strain a relationship. Here are some tips on how to make your next vacation run smoothly: Make the essentials easy to reach: Fill a bag with items like phone chargers, water bottles, snacks and neck pillows. Keep it easily accessible when you’re in transit to make the experience a little more pleasant when times get tough. Review your plans every day: Make sure you’re both on the same page about where you’ll go and what you’ll do. Good communication can prevent blowups down the road. Try to prioritize something special for each of you. Remember to be patient: Whether you’re tired, hungry or annoyed, there’s a good chance the other person is experiencing the same thing. Patience will keep you from reacting negatively and help preserve the spirit of the trip. Alone time is healthy: Constantly being around the same person for days on end can be draining, even when it’s someone you love. Stepping away to collect yourself shouldn’t be taken as an insult. Surprise each other along the way: Stick to the plan, but don’t be afraid to do something unexpected for your significant other. Surprise them with a local trinket or a meal at an undisclosed spot to make them feel special. Manage your expectations: Destinations won’t always deliver on the promises in the brochure. There will be crowds, it might be dirty and it can get expensive. It’s no one person’s fault, and it can be a great opportunity to make the most of it together. The best vacation spots for couples are found around the world, and each one has something uniquely romantic to offer. Find your next relaxing getaway and keep your passion alive.
As leaves turn from green to hues of crimson and gold, the allure of romantic fall getaways becomes irresistible. Autumn's arrival invites us to cozy up with loved ones and explore the most enchanting fall destinations the season has to offer. We'll be your guide to 22 of the most romantic trips for couples around the country. Whether you dream of a serene mountain retreat, a coastal escape or a historic city adventure, these destinations will have you falling in love with fall. 1. Acadia National Park, Maine Why go in fall: A glorious sunrise awaits you Begin an enchanting visit to Acadia National Park early — with a sunrise hike up Cadillac Mountain. You can share a breathtaking view of the first rays of sun painting the park's rugged coastline in warm hues. Afterward, explore the park's extensive network of hiking trails, hand in hand, amid the vibrant fall foliage. End your day at Jordan Pond, enjoying its serene waters and the park's iconic mountain peaks. 2. Nantucket, Massachusetts Why go in fall: Enjoy autumn, island style Take a leisurely bike ride along Nantucket’s picturesque trails, savoring the autumn colors. Explore the charming streets of Nantucket Town, where historic cobblestone lanes lead to cozy cafes and quaint boutiques. In the evening, head to the beach and cozy up under a warm blanket to watch the sunset over the Atlantic Ocean, sharing sweet moments amid the soothing sound of the waves. 3. Cape Cod, Massachusetts Why go in fall: Participate in a cranberry harvest Cape Cod casts an enchanting spell in the crisp fall air. Take a beachside walk along the Cape Cod National Seashore under the mild autumn sun. Follow this with a visit to a local cranberry bog, where you can take a tour and sample delicious cranberry treats. Cap off your day with a romantic sunset cruise on Cape Cod Bay. 4. The Poconos, Pennsylvania Why go in fall: See the mountains at their peak As far as autumn getaways are concerned, this is hard to beat. In the enchanting Poconos region of Pennsylvania, autumn bursts with vibrant colors. Begin your romantic mountain getaway with a scenic hike at iconic Delaware Water Gap — surprise your partner with a picnic for two. Then take on a leisurely drive along the Pocono Wine Trail, visiting charming wineries. 5. Willamette Valley, Oregon Why go in fall: The vineyards shimmer in autumnal hues In Willamette Valley, fall offers a perfect setting for romance. Start your day with a scenic hot air balloon ride, gliding above vineyards as the sun rises. Continue the adventure on the ground with a tasting and picnic at one of the many renowned wineries. In the evening, take a sunset drive along country roads, stopping at cozy farm-to-table restaurants for drinks and a candlelit dinner. 6. Bend, Oregon Why go in fall: Hike your way to a romantic spot Bend offers a delightful canvas for a romantic fall vacation. Paddle down the Deschutes River with your sweetheart, surrounded by the vibrant hues of autumn foliage. Take a scenic hike along the Deschutes River Trail, where the crisp air and changing leaves provide the perfect setting for hand-in-hand exploration. In the evening, savor a romantic dinner at one of Bend's cozy restaurants with farm-to-table cuisine and local craft beers. 7. Sun Valley, Idaho Why go in fall: Enjoy the town’s charm without the snow Head to the Sawtooth National Recreation Area in Sun Valley, where the crisp mountain air and colorful foliage provide a picturesque setting for an intimate adventure. Take a leisurely bike ride through the charming streets of Ketchum, stopping at quaint cafes and art galleries along the way. As night falls, head to a cozy restaurant to share a romantic dinner and views of the stunning Sawtooth Mountains. 8. Aspen, Colorado Why go in fall: Take a scenic gondola ride In the stunning mountain oasis of Aspen, autumn unveils one of the most romantic trips around. Begin your getaway with a scenic gondola ride to the top of Aspen Mountain, where you can enjoy breathtaking vistas of fall foliage. Follow this with a leisurely hike through the Maroon Bells, two iconic peaks adorned with vibrant aspen trees. Relish a cozy fireside dinner at one of Aspen's upscale restaurants, with fine wines and great conversation. 9. Steamboat Springs, Colorado Why go in fall: Ride horses through golden aspen groves Start your romantic getaway to Steamboat Springs with a drive through Yampa Valley, where you can witness the changing leaves and mountain vistas. Follow this with an exhilarating hike or horseback ride through the golden aspen groves. As evening descends, relish a cozy evening by a crackling fire pit at one of the town's charming lodges or resorts, sipping local craft brews. 10. Telluride, Colorado Why go in fall: Relish the peace of Alpine Meadows Ride the scenic gondola to the top of the mountain in Telluride, where you can admire the breathtaking views of the colorful aspen groves and rugged peaks. Take on a peaceful hike through the Alpine Meadows, surrounded by beautiful fall foliage. Share a romantic meal at one of Telluride's cozy restaurants, where you can savor locally inspired cuisine and fine wines. 11. Park City, Utah Why go in fall: Enjoy the landscape before snow and skiers arrive Who needs snow? Park City is a great fall destination. Take a hot air balloon ride, drifting above the colorful treetops and enjoying the crisp mountain air together. Take a scenic chairlift ride to the top of the mountains and enjoy panoramic views of fall foliage. And check out historic Main Street, where charming boutiques and cozy restaurants await. 12. Jackson Hole, Wyoming Why go in fall: The views don’t get any better than this Head to the Grand Teton Mountains, where you can share awe-inspiring views of the rugged landscape and serene lakes of Jackson Hole. Continue your adventure with a peaceful hike in Grand Teton National Park, surrounded by the golden hues of aspen trees. As night descends, enjoy a cozy dinner at a rustic mountain lodge, indulging in hearty fare and local spirits by a roaring fireplace. 13. Carmel-by-the-Sea, California Why go in fall: Miss the busy summer tourist season The charming coastal town of Carmel-by-the-Sea is one of the most romantic vacation destinations on the West Coast. Take a leisurely stroll along the pristine Carmel Beach at sunset, where you can experience the power of the Pacific Ocean. Explore the town’s quaint streets, admiring the fairytale cottages and boutiques. Or take a wine-tasting excursion to the nearby Carmel Valley, savoring local vintages amid vineyards and rolling hills. 14. Big Sur, California Why go in fall: See the stunning coastal cliffs Begin your date day in Big Sur with a scenic drive along Highway 1, winding through towering redwoods and along coastal cliffs. For an intimate hike, trek to McWay Falls, a secluded cove with a waterfall cascading onto the beach — an enchanting backdrop for a picnic for two. As night falls, retreat to one of the cozy cliffside inns, where you can savor a glass of local wine and watch the stars come to life. 15. Lake Tahoe, California Why go in fall: Savor the area before snow falls Lake Tahoe, with its stunning alpine scenery, is an idyllic getaway destination during the fall season. Kick off your romantic adventure with a kayak or paddleboard excursion on the lake. Explore the charming lakeside villages, like Tahoe City, where you can enjoy boutique shopping and intimate lakeside dining. Finally, share a breathtaking sunset at Emerald Bay State Park, one of Tahoe's most iconic vistas. 16. Napa Valley, California Napa Valley sets the stage for fall romance amid its vine-covered hills. Take a scenic drive up the valley, from Napa to Calistoga, stopping for leisurely wine-tastings and winery tours. As the sun dips below the horizon, indulge in a gourmet dinner at a Michelin-starred restaurant, accompanied by a bottle of fine Napa wine. 17. Asheville, North Carolina Why go in fall: Drive the colorful Blue Ridge Parkway Start your day in Asheville with a scenic drive along the Blue Ridge Parkway, where you'll see breathtaking vistas of the surrounding mountains draped in autumn colors. Then explore historic Biltmore Estate and toast each other with a glass at its in-house winery. Then savor with a romantic dinner at one of Asheville's fine dining establishments, where you can sample local cuisine in an intimate setting. 18. Charleston, South Carolina Why go in fall: Travel back in time amid the changing colors A trip to Charleston is a dreamy fall destination. Impress your partner with a horse-drawn carriage ride through the historic district, where you can admire the charming cobblestone streets and antebellum architecture. Take a leisurely walk through Waterfront Park, where the fall breeze carries a hint of salt from the nearby harbor. In the evening, dine at one of Charleston's renowned seafood restaurants where you can savor local delicacies like frog-free Frogmore stew. 19. Savannah, Georgia Why go in fall: Take a romantic riverboat cruise Adorned in fall colors, Savannah exudes timeless romance. Take a walk through Forsyth Park, where the changing leaves and historic fountains create a serene setting. On a romantic riverboat cruise along the Savannah River, you can enjoy the city's iconic skyline while savoring a Southern-inspired dinner. Take an evening stroll along the historic district's cobblestone streets, creating the perfect ambiance beneath centuries-old oak trees. 20. The Keys, Florida Why go in fall: The mild climate is perfect for beachside adventure The Florida Keys, with its warm and inviting waters, is one of the most romantic vacation spots to enjoy in the fall. Begin your day with a sunrise kayaking adventure through the crystal-clear waters of Bahia Honda State Park, where you can explore secluded beaches and coral reefs teeming with marine life. Or take a leisurely drive along the Overseas Highway, stopping at charming waterfront cafes and tiki bars for fresh seafood and tropical cocktails. As the sun sets, savor a beachfront dinner for two. 21. Sedona, Arizona Why go in fall: Beat the desert heat Take a scenic drive to explore the stunning red rock formations and famed vortexes of Sedona. Or take a hike along the West Fork Trail, meandering through vibrant autumn foliage along the banks of Oak Creek. As the day concludes, savor a candlelit dinner at one of Sedona's upscale restaurants with panoramic views of the majestic canyons, aglow in the soft hues of sunset. 22. Flagstaff, Arizona Why go in fall: Enjoy the star-studded night sky Flagstaff's historic streets offer charming shops and photo opportunities. Drive to Lockett Meadow, where you can enjoy an alpine hike amid the fall foliage. In the evening, cozy up by the fire pit at one of the town's rustic lodges, sharing stories and sipping local craft beers under a star-studded night sky. Enjoy romantic getaways all year-round when you co-own a luxury second home. We offer turnkey, fully managed luxury homes in sought-after vacation destinations across the country.
Although Napa Valley is gorgeous year-round, Napa in fall is another level of beauty. The autumn atmosphere elevates your wine-tasting experience, and seasonal activities abound. From grape stomping to gondola rides, Napa in fall has something for everyone to enjoy. Pour a glass and toast to autumn delights as we guide you through the best winery tours, experiences to savor and trails to explore in Napa Valley this fall. Where to sip back and relax Whether you want to stay in Napa at a winery that doubles as a luxury inn or simply spend the day in the company of golden grape vines, we’ve got you covered. Check out these popular autumn spots. 1. Chateau Montelena Winery Great for those who want to be near the water Stroll through Chateau Montelena’s lush gardens, where the vines take on an array of autumnal colors. You must taste world-famous Chardonnay and cabernet sauvignon while you’re there. And don’t miss the chance to take photos by Jade Lake, framed by fall foliage. 2. Sterling Vineyards Great for enjoying a Mediterranean ambiance Start your visit to this iconic winery with a scenic aerial gondola ride, granting you breathtaking views of the valley's colorful vineyards. Once at the winery, embark on a guided tour to explore the winemaking process and Mediterranean-inspired architecture. Conclude your day on the elegant terrace with a wine tasting, where you can savor Sterling's exceptional vintages. 3. Harvest Inn Great for an overnight stay in Napa At Harvest Inn in Napa Valley, you can relish curated wine tastings from esteemed local wineries, an exclusive activity for guests. Unwind by the inn’s crackling fireplace with a glass of fine wine. Harvest Inn epitomizes the essence of Napa Valley in the fall, offering a blend of unspoiled nature and luxurious hospitality. 4. Rutherford Hill Winery Great for those who love merlot As you arrive at Rutherford Hill Winery in Napa Valley, you're in for a treat. The area’s vibrant autumn colors provide a stunning backdrop as you sample the exceptional wines, particularly the renowned merlots. Explore the unique caves that run deep within the hillside. When you’re through adventuring for the day, unwind on the terrace to enjoy an outdoor wine tasting while admiring the sunset over the valley. 5. Chappellet Winery Great for those who love a good cab Embark on a guided vineyard tour at Chappellet Winery, where you'll stroll through rows of grapevines adorned with vibrant autumn foliage while learning about the winemaking process. Savor a wine-tasting session in the courtyard as you sample acclaimed wines, including the renowned cabernet sauvignon. Chappellet also offers gourmet picnic options with locally sourced treats. 6. Far Niente Winery Great for those who love chardonnay Take a tour of Far Niente’s vineyards to uncover the artistry behind its renowned chardonnay and cabernet sauvignon production. Then, indulge in a tasting session of exquisite wines, complete with a view of autumn leaves. Opt for a luxury picnic under the trees for the ultimate Napa Valley autumn experience. Travel tip: Book a picnic to enjoy a meal perfectly paired with Far Niente wines. 7. Stags' Leap Winery Great for those who want to sip somewhere famous After a tour through the Stags’ Leap estate and vineyards, indulge in a tasting of the winery’s renowned cabernet sauvignon and petite sirah. Take in the sweeping views and fall foliage of Stags Leap Palisades, the prominent row of cliffs that provide the volcanic soil which makes the district’s wine unique. Fall for Napa’s other autumn activities There’s much more to do in Wine Country this fall than tasting wine. Here are just a few. 8. Schramsberg Crush Camp Great for budding wine connoisseurs Immerse yourself in the art of winemaking like never before. Roll up your sleeves to participate in the season’s grape harvest. Under the guidance of expert vintners, witness the meticulous process of crafting sparkling wine. This hands-on adventure offers an intimate and educational glimpse into the world of Schramsberg's renowned sparkling wines, giving you newfound appreciation for every bubble in your glass. 9. Grape stomping Great for those who love hands-on experiences Participate in the age-old tradition of grape stomping during your trip to Napa Valley this fall. Kick off your shoes and step into the bins filled with freshly harvested grapes. With each stomp, you release the juice, and the sweet aroma of fall at the vineyard fills the air. After immersing yourself in the winemaking process, relax with a glass of the winery’s best vintage in hand. Travel tip: Pack an outfit that you don’t mind getting stained with grape juice. 10. Downtown St. Helena Great for those who love small-town charm St. Helena is a Napa Valley town that boasts a charming blend of quaint shops and vibrant autumn hues. In the fall, the downtown streets are adorned with golden trees, creating a warm atmosphere to wander in between trips to the wineries. Explore boutique stores, try local eats at an outdoor cafe and sample wine from the nearby vineyards. 11. Nimbus Arts paint n’ sip Great for artists of all levels As you settle into a picturesque outdoor setting for this class, you'll be guided by talented artists to create your own masterpiece — all while sipping on legendary local wines. The serene vineyard views and the gentle Napa breeze add to the ambiance, making Nimbus Arts the perfect setting to let the heart of Wine Country inspire your artwork. Travel tip: Head to Napa Valley in October to sip a vintage red while painting something spooky 12. Napa Valley Gondola Great for those who value luxury Old World Venice meets New World Napa! The Napa River is an ideal fall spot to enjoy an authentic Venetian gondola ride. The private cruises are marked by the sounds of Italian music and a singing gondolier as they row you gently through the heart of downtown. 13. Balloons Above the Valley Great for thrill seekers and photographers Ascend into the early-morning sky while the world below transforms into a patchwork of vineyards and the sprawling Napa River. ‘With Balloons Above the Valley, you can head to the clouds early enough, and you’ll catch the sunrise illuminating the valley — perfect for professional and amateur photographers alike. Unwind in Napa nature Autumn is arguably the best Napa Valley season to enjoy a hike or drive, with the foliage turning to warm hues. From lush trails to scenic highways, Napa has all the autumn views you could want and more. 14. Bothe-Napa Valley State Park Great for avid hikers Bothe-Napa Valley State Park is a prime destination to enjoy Napa Valley fall colors. The park's lush forests transform into a kaleidoscope of reds, oranges and yellows, creating a picturesque backdrop for your hike. Head to the state park’s Redwood Trail for a serene walk under towering redwood and oak trees. 15. Oak Knoll Avenue near Napa Great for photography lovers Oak Knoll Avenue is lined with a stunning tunnel of autumn foliage — making it the perfect setting for a scenic drive or a leisurely bike ride. It is also a wonderful photo spot to take Instagram-worthy portraits that will leave your followers craving those Wine Country views. 16. Highway 12 (Wine Road) Great for those who love to cruise As you drive along Highway 12, also known as Wine Road, the hills come alive with a vibrant tapestry of autumn colors. You'll find yourself immersed in the heart of Wine Country, with the vineyards framing your journey. Fallen in love with Napa Valley? Napa in fall is a wine lover’s paradise and is full to the brim with seasonal activities. If you can see yourself sipping from a glass here every autumn, consider buying a second home in the heart of Wine Country. Having a fully managed co-owned home away from home means you can make your autumn adventure through Napa Valley as cozy and customized as you’d like. Plus, you’ll have a front-row seat to some of the best wineries in the world.
Searching for a place to enjoy the magnificent colors of fall in California? From apple picking to fishing in lakes surrounded by warm hues, autumn in California is full of seasonal delights. Whether you’re in the mood for small-town charm or epic hikes through unspoiled wilderness, we’ll show you 22 beautiful places to enjoy fall in California in 2023 and beyond. Just don’t be surprised if you begin to crave a vacation home in or near one of these cozy Cali destinations: 1. Big Bear Lake Lace up your hiking boots and explore the vibrant trails that wind through the mountains near Big Bear Lake, offering breathtaking views of the changing foliage and crisp air that invigorates your senses. Or you can navigate the scenic paths on a rented mountain bike. For a more relaxed outing, take a leisurely boat tour around the lake. 2. Lassen Volcanic National Park Lassen Volcanic National Park promises an unforgettably beautiful experience in the fall. You’ll be awed by the expansive views of golden aspen leaves from atop Cinder Cone and iconic Lassen Peak. Enjoy volcanic features like steaming fumaroles and bubbling mud pots, and immerse yourself in the serenity of the alpine lakes, their surfaces reflecting the golden hues of autumn. 3. Napa Valley Drive along Napa Valley’s Silverado Trail where the vineyards are awash in vibrant hues of red, orange and yellow, stopping at wineries along the way for a quick tasting (or two!). Or take a leisurely bike ride through the vineyard-lined paths and stop for a picnic among the changing colors. And for unparalleled views of Napa Valley, enjoy a hot air balloon ride at sunrise. 4. Bass Lake Fall is a great time to take leisurely hikes along the well-marked trails around Bass Lake, a 5-mile-long reservoir in the Sierra National Forest. Just a half-hour south of Yosemite National Park, the recreation area also offers kayak rentals. Autumn colors make this the perfect setting for picnics, fishing and watching serene sunsets. 5. Healdsburg This charming town offers farm-to-table dining experiences where the region's flavors come alive. Explore local wineries and taste the best Sonoma County has to offer. Whether you're biking through the countryside or simply soaking in the magic of the season in town, Healdsburg promises to be an enchanting autumn escape. Fun fact: Healdsburg is located in Sonoma County, where wineries abound. 6. June Lake Explore the breathtaking trails that wind through the Eastern Sierra landscape, surrounded by the vibrant hues of autumn foliage. Enjoy a scenic drive along June Lake Loop, where the reflection of golden aspens dances on the tranquil waters. Cast your fishing line into the crystal-clear lakes that dot the region, enjoying the serene atmosphere. 7. Lake Tahoe With a stunning backdrop of fall foliage, Lake Tahoe has a treasure trove of fall activities waiting for you. Drive around the entire lake to witness a vibrant tapestry of forest colors. If adventure calls, hit the mountain bike trails that wind through the area. Water lovers can enjoy a serene boat ride or unwind on the shore, watching the sunset paint the sky in warm hues. 8. Bishop Creek Canyon Bishop Creek Canyon is the perfect place to unwind with your family, enjoy a solo day in nature or stroll with your partner amongst autumn leaves. Immerse yourself in the dazzling foliage as you hike well-marked trails, surrounded by the rich hues of golden aspens and fiery maples. Explore the series of stunning alpine lakes, reflecting the vivid colors of the surrounding forest. Enjoy fishing in the pristine water and trekking to many nearby waterfalls. Fun fact: Fishers flock here to test their luck catching prize-worthy rainbow trout. 9. Truckee Truckee, a gorgeous resort town near Lake Tahoe, is the perfect place to enjoy fall in Northern California. Wander the town's charming streets to admire the rustic architecture and explore boutiques and galleries. Immerse yourself in nature by hiking the nearby trails, like the Donner Lake Rim Trail, enveloped in the rich hues of changing leaves. Consider a scenic drive along Donner Pass or through Martis Valley to witness the picturesque landscape. Travel tip: Visit Truckee in late autumn to get a head start on skiing practice. 10. Rock Creek Lake Rock Creek Lake is an angler’s paradise with an impressive mountain backdrop. Not only a premier fishing destination, Rock Creek Lake offers great hiking in the surrounding forests, river rafting and picnicking spots amongst the trees, and a variety of campgrounds. Try to catch a glimpse of sunrise or sunset over the lake before heading home. 11. Yosemite National Park A world of natural wonders and seasonal delights awaits you in Yosemite National Park. The iconic granite cliffs and graceful waterfalls are even more spectacular when contrasted with the warm and vibrant hues of autumn, creating a breathtaking backdrop for your explorations. Whether you're hiking under the towering sequoias or rafting along the Merced River, Yosemite is the ultimate family-friendly fall vacation. 12. Sonora Head to Gold Country to enjoy the autumn delights of California. Sonora invites you to savor its small-town charm and embrace the ambiance of downtown. After you explore Yosemite and the High Sierra, head to town for shops and eateries — street lamps light up the fall colors at night. 13. Sacramento Take a leisurely stroll along the tree-lined streets of Midtown Sacramento, where the leaves become a brilliant tapestry of reds and oranges. Savor the flavors of the season at local farmers markets, where you can pick up freshly harvested apples, pumpkins and artisanal treats. The city's historic sites come alive with fall festivals and events, allowing you to immerse yourself in the state’s capital. Travel tip: Visit Sacramento County’s American River Parkway and enjoy a bike ride as the sun sets. 14. Hope Valley Hit the road to enjoy picturesque routes like Highway 88 or Blue Lakes Road, and witness Hope Valley adorned in a stunning palette of fall colors. Explore the hiking trails and immerse yourself in the golden beauty of aspen groves and sweeping meadows at 7,000 feet. Check out the meandering West Carson River and the 2,869-acre Hope Valley Wildlife Area. 15. Quincy Stroll along the picturesque streets of this small American Valley town, and enjoy seasonal delights at the weekly Quincy farmers market where fresh produce and artisanal goods showcase fall flavors. Take a scenic drive like Bucks Lake Road or the Feather River Scenic Byway to witness the vivid spectrum of fall foliage. Explore the natural beauty of the area by hiking the Spanish Creek Trail or tackle numerous mountain biking trails. 16. Lake Sabrina Explore the captivating allure of Lake Sabrina with a range of local activities that embrace California in the fall. Take a leisurely stroll around the lake's tranquil shores, where the surrounding aspens create a vibrant tapestry of colors. Engage in fishing, as the cooler temperatures make for a peaceful angling experience. Embark on nearby hiking trails, such as the Sabrina Basin Trail, and immerse yourself in the fall season in California. 17. Julian This small Gold Rush mining town near Palm Springs is the perfect place to enjoy fall in Southern California. Savor the flavors of autumn by indulging in Julian's famous apple pies and freshly pressed cider. Immerse yourself in the natural beauty by hiking the Volcan Mountain Preserve or exploring nearby trails, where the changing leaves create a beautiful backdrop. Before you leave, consider visiting Julian's many orchards for apple picking with your loved ones — a must-try California fall activity. 18. Redding Explore the Sacramento River Trail, where the changing leaves create a picturesque backdrop for both hiking and biking. Immerse yourself in nature by visiting Redding’s Turtle Bay Exploration Park and its McConnell Arboretum, where you can wander among the vibrant fall foliage. Take a scenic drive to Whiskeytown National Recreation Area, where fall colors adorn the landscape. 19. Lake Arrowhead Take in the natural splendor of Lake Arrowhead by hiking the local trails, like the Deep Creek Trail, which offers breathtaking views amidst the changing leaves. A leisurely boat ride on the lake is also a great way to enjoy the reflecting pool of vibrant California fall colors. From relaxing on the shore to climbing challenging peaks, there is something for every autumn lover to enjoy. Travel tip: Don’t miss Oktoberfest, a favorite autumn event. 20. Oak Glen Indulge in the quintessential charms of Oak Glen during the autumn season. Begin your day by exploring local apple orchards where you can enjoy apple picking, cider tasting and browsing local artisanal goods. Immerse yourself in nature by hiking the trails at Riley's Farm or Wildlands Conservancy, enveloped in vibrant foliage. End the day with a leisurely stroll through the village, where shops brim with autumn-inspired crafts and baked goods. 21. Mammoth Lakes Take in the charm of Mammoth Lakes in autumn. Hike trails that wind through the stunning landscape, such as the Lakes Basin Trail, where you'll be surrounded by the golden hues of fall foliage. Immerse yourself in the tranquility of the lakeshore, witnessing the reflections of colorful trees on the water's surface. Enjoy a scenic drive along the Mammoth Scenic Loop, with picturesque vistas and vibrant fall colors. 22. Grover Hot Springs State Park No trip to Grover Hot Springs State Park is complete without taking a relaxing dip in the natural hot springs, surrounded by the crisp air and colorful fall foliage. Hike along trails that wind through the serene landscapes, such as the Hot Springs Creek Trail. Enjoy a leisurely picnic amidst the tranquil surroundings, savoring the soothing atmosphere and the sound of rustling leaves. Although you can enjoy fall destinations anywhere, California boasts plenty of autumn hues and small towns full of cozy charm. If you can see yourself enjoying fall in California every year, consider the benefits of owning a luxury second home in your favorite place.
Ready for the rush that comes from a day of mountain biking? We’ve identified five of the best mountain biking destinations in the United States. Grab your kit — mellow meadows, gnarly cross-country trails and epic downhill descents await. 1. Lake Tahoe The whole Lake Tahoe region is well known for its endless outdoor recreation options, and mountain biking is no exception. Lake Tahoe offers trails for all ages and experience levels, from low-key wildflower and waterfall rides to heart-pounding singletracks. Many of Lake Tahoe’s ski runs double as downhill trails in the summer months when the snow has melted. Within the greater Lake Tahoe area, which spans the California-Nevada border, Truckee is the preferred destination for mountain bikers in the know. While South Lake Tahoe has some good trails — including the famous six-mile-long Mr. Toad’s Wild Ride — Truckee offers easy access to hundreds of miles of trails, with fewer tourist crowds to contend with. Best time to visit Since Lake Tahoe sits at an elevation of over 6,000 feet, it can take a while for the snow to melt and the trails to reappear. The best time for a mountain biking trip to the Tahoe area is mid-June to mid-October. You’ll find peak crowds in July and August, with things thinning out once September hits. Trails to try Downieville Downhill: As the host of one of the most challenging mountain bike races in the country, the Downieville Classic, this 14-mile ride is best for intermediate to advanced riders. You’ll fly down 5,000 vertical feet in 15 miles filled with rocky, technical features. Expect to see snow in places through May. The Flume Trail: Known as one of the most beautiful rides in the region, the Flume Trail is a challenging 14-mile ride that hangs out at an elevation of between 7,000 and 8,000 feet. Expect over 1,000 feet of leg-pumping climbing during the first third of the ride. After the hard work, you’ll be rewarded with views of beautiful Marlette Lake and a long descent. Start and end at Flume Trail Mountain Bikes, which can hook you up with a bike rental, a shuttle or simply point you in the right direction. 2. Vail Your first clue that Vail is a biking town is the sheer number of bike shops in the area. During late spring, summer and early fall, this Colorado town and its surrounding landscape are best explored on two wheels. It’s also a great place for beginners, who can simply pedal flat and paved terrain, while still enjoying beautiful views. Adrenaline seekers can be whisked up the mountain (bike included) via gondola to access incredible downhill tracks. Best time to visit Like Lake Tahoe, Vail is a mountain town, so you’ll want to keep a close eye on snowmelt — it can vary quite a bit from one year to the next. Generally speaking, you’ll find good conditions between early May and late October. Trails to try Vail Pass Bike Path: The 14-mile path runs along Interstate 70 between Vail and Copper, and features beautiful mountain views. While it’s a paved path, don’t be fooled: You’ll be covering a 1,500-foot elevation gain at already high elevations. Spend a couple days in Vail first to get acclimated to the altitude. Radio Flyer: The resort’s most popular trail, this downhill track descends 1,257 feet through a variety of terrain, including sections of sculpted rollers that present a fun challenge. Tabletops mark the section, and if you’re not ready to call it a day, you can connect to the 1.8-mile Hank’s Hideway and make your way through a picturesque aspen grove. 3. Jackson The town of Jackson and the whole Jackson Hole Valley is an outdoor lover’s dream, no matter the time of year. In the winter months, this Wyoming wild west town draws winter sports lovers in search of perfect powder. But when the snow melts, a whole new outdoor playground emerges. Grab your bike and head to this mountain biking mecca — and don’t forget to make time to visit nearby Yellowstone National Park. Best time to visit Most trails are melted and ready to use by June, making July, August and September the peak mountain biking months. By September, you can expect trails to be fairly dusty, but the goal of mountain biking isn’t to stay clean. Trails to try Jackson Hole Bike Park: Not a trail but instead a massive bike park perfect for honing your skills, Jackson Hole Bike Park has everything from novice trails to advanced jump tracks. Ride to the bottom of the mountain on your choice of downhill or freeride trails, then hop the chairlift or gondola to do it again. It’s adaptive biking-friendly and even offers bike camps for kids looking to build their MTB skills. Thursday Ladies’ Laps clinics are designed for women to gain the skills needed for more technical riding. Big Holes: A network of trails totaling almost 80 miles and covering more than 3,000 vertical feet, Big Holes is a playground for advanced riders. Choose from 29 thrilling trails with good flow, technical features and incredible ridgeline views. 4. Moab Bike surrounded by the rugged beauty of the Utah desert in and around Moab. A home base for exploring two of the country’s most beautiful national parks — Arches National Park and Canyonlands National Park — Moab draws outdoor adventurers of all types. In between biking expeditions, enjoy rock climbing, horseback riding, whitewater rafting and camping. Best time to visit As a desert destination, Moab is simply too hot to enjoy on two wheels in the summer, when temperatures can be 90 degrees Fahrenheit or higher. September and October, along with April and May, are the best months to take a mountain biking trip to Moab, as temperatures are more moderate and you’re less likely to encounter snow on higher elevation rides. Trails to try Slickrock Bike Trail: More than 100,000 mountain bikers traverse this challenging trail every year, and it’s easy to see why. The 12.7-mile singletrack route covers a mix of petrified sand dunes and ancient seabed, with steep, sustained climbs and tricky sandpits. Not sure if you’re up for the challenge? Test your skills on the practice loop first. The Whole Enchilada: The name of this trail says it all: It has a little bit of everything. Start high above the alpine treeline and wind your way down almost 8,000 feet, through steep sandstone rollers and over red rock. Consult a local bike shop or shuttle service before embarking on this full-day expedition. Late-season snow can make the window to ride the full trail short, and shuttles are recommended. 5. Asheville The United States’ best mountain biking towns aren’t limited to the western half of the country. Case in point: Asheville. This charming North Carolina town is perhaps the most popular outdoor recreation hub in the Southeast. You’ll want to leave plenty of time to explore the region. Hundreds of miles of mountain biking trails await, as do other activities like paddling, rafting, hiking and exploring Asheville’s quirky arts district. It’s also home to more breweries per capita than any other U.S. city! Best time to visit Asheville’s mild spring and fall months are ideal, but often crowded. Summer can be a surprisingly good time to visit, too. The surrounding Blue Ridge Mountains can be a welcome respite from sweltering temperatures in town. Trails to try Pisgah National Forest: With over 500,000 acres, Pisgah is more than just a single trail. Rather, you’ll find three distinct trail networks that crisscross the forest. Bent Creek is more beginner-friendly, and closer to town. Mills Creek has multiple routes and rugged, backcountry terrain. Davidson River offers both singletrack and doubletrack routes that are best suited for experienced bikers. DuPont State Forest: Another state forest near Asheville, this one boasts 100 miles of trails across 10,000 acres for mountain bikers of all skill levels. Take your time exploring features like slickrock routes, waterfalls and lush forest. Note that many trails are shared use with hikers and equestrians, so take care when heading around the many blind corners in the park. Plan your outdoor escape with Pacaso For outdoor adventurers of all types, there’s nothing quite like having a home base in your favorite destination. Pacaso offers co-owned vacation homes in the best outdoor recreation areas, from Lake Tahoe to Vail to Jackson Hole and beyond. Best of all, these second homes are designed for adventure lovers. They’re located near all the outdoor action and boast features like ample gear storage, hot tubs to soothe sore muscles and plenty of space for your fellow adventurers.
Craving Bavarian charm, no passport required? Bavarian villages in the United States deliver fairytale beauty, German fare, delicious beers and fun-filled seasonal events. From the Pacific Northwest to the Midwest to the South, you might be closer to a Bavarian town in the USA than you think. What is a Bavarian village? Taking inspiration from Germany’s Bavaria region in the foothills of the Alps, Bavarian villages in the United States offer a little slice of German culture closer to home. While each of the best Bavarian towns offers unique experiences, you’ll commonly find Alpine architecture, Oktoberfest celebrations, locally brewed beers and more bratwurst and pretzels than you can eat in a lifetime. Top 5 must-visit Bavarian villages in the U.S. 1. Leavenworth, Washington Framed by the dramatic Cascade Mountains two hours east of Seattle, Leavenworth is a logging town-turned-Bavarian getaway. Every building in town boasts alpine touches, from the countless beer halls to the quirky Nutcracker Museum. The town is best known for its annual Christmastown Village of Lights. During this holiday celebration that spans from Thanksgiving to the end of February, over half a million lights — plus the occasional snowfall — make visitors feel like they’re inside a snow globe. Leavenworth also hosts a fun-filled (and family-friendly) Oktoberfest and year-round recreational opportunities. 2. Frankenmuth, Michigan Founded in 1845 by German immigrants, Frankenmuth is known as “Michigan’s Little Bavaria.” This historic town hosts 18 events and festivals each year, from a Bavarian Easter Celebration to the World Expo of Beer and the Summer Music Fest. Like many other Bavarian villages, Frankenmuth really comes alive during the holiday season, with a Christmas tree lighting and an open-air Christmas market. No visit to Frankenmuth is complete without a stop at Bronner’s Christmas Wonderland, the self-proclaimed world’s largest Christmas store. 3. Helen, Georgia The alpine town of Helen is an unexpected Bavarian village in the Blue Ridge Mountains, roughly 100 miles northeast from Atlanta. Helen is known as a hub for outdoor recreation, with activities like zip lining, river floating, a mountain coaster and hiking. Cobblestone streets line the two-square-mile town, which offers wine tasting, mini golf, a water park and plenty of German cuisine. September and October are popular times to visit because of the Oktoberfest celebration, but Christkindlmarkt is a holiday must-see. 4. Fredericksburg, Texas Like Frankemuth, Fredericksburg was founded by German settlers in the mid-1800s. Originally known for the unique German dialect spoken by its early residents, Fredericksburg is now a popular vacation destination in Texas Hill Country. The colorful town features storybook architecture, including a replica of a 19th century German church, and an awesome local wine scene — the region is home to over 100 wineries and vineyards. Close enough for a day trip from Austin or San Antonio, Fredericksburg hosts more than 400 festivals and special events each year. This includes a three-day Oktoberfest, fall Food & Wine Fest, Christmas parade and a bluegrass festival. 5. Vail, Colorado While the architecture may be a combination of Swiss and German, we’d be remiss to skip over the winter wonderland of Vail. Like the other villages on our list, Vail is big on charm. One of the most popular ski destinations in the United States, Vail is a true winter wonderland. Wander the cobblestone streets, dine on authentic Austrian-Bavarian foods at Alpenrose and stay in one of the warm and friendly Bavarian-inspired lodges. Vail has fewer than 5,000 year-round residents, but it’s a popular second home destination. If a weekend in this alpine escape isn’t enough, consider becoming a regular! Pacaso offers co-ownership of fully managed luxury vacation homes in the heart of Vail, so you can soak up endless European charm while enjoying easy access to world-class skiing and snowboarding.
Fall vacations are full of the cozy ambiance, golden hues and the cooler weather you’ve been dreaming of. To make the most of autumn, here are 41 great fall vacation destinations across the United States, in no particular order, along with some fun things to do in each one. 1. Pocono Mountains, Pennsylvania Average fall temperatures: 31-70 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Hike a section of the Appalachian Trail The Pocono Mountains are a paradise for hikers who love the brisk autumn temperatures and the foliage along the Appalachian Trail is breathtaking. Explore charming towns like Jim Thorpe and Stroudsburg as you travel through the region. If hiking isn’t your cup of tea during a mountain getaway, take a scenic drive along Route 6 for stunning views of the changing leaves. 2. Woodstock, Vermont Average fall temperature: 27-73 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Marvel at the fall colors along Route 100 Take a scenic drive along Route 100, where the rolling hills are ablaze with the fiery hues of fall foliage. Explore the charming streets of Woodstock, where you'll find artisanal shops and cozy cafes. As the sun sets, take a leisurely walk through the Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historical Park, surrounded by the season’s vibrant colors. 3. Hudson Valley, New York Average fall temperature: 38-77 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Pick apples at a local orchard Drive along Route 9W, where the rolling hills are painted in vibrant autumn colors. Indulge in local apple picking at orchards like Fishkill Farms, enjoying freshly pressed cider while you’re there. Explore historic sites like Kykuit, the Rockefeller estate, and Washington Irving's Sunnyside. 4. New York City, New York Average fall temperature: 42-76 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Stroll through Central Park To kick off a great fall vacation in New York City, stroll through Central Park, where the leaves turn brilliant shades of red and orange. Then head to Greenwich Village and pop into cafes as you wander the charming streets. Don't miss the chance to take a scenic ferry ride to see the Statue of Liberty against the crisp autumn skyline. Warm up in one of the city's world-class museums, like the Metropolitan Museum of Art, The Guggenheim or MoMA. 5. Long Island, New York Average fall temperature: 38-77 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Visit a pumpkin patch Long Island has charming towns like Greenport and Southold, perfect for browsing in antique shops and boutiques. Families will enjoy visiting pumpkin patches and apple orchards, and adults will savor local wineries adorned with fall colors. As the sun sets, dine at a waterfront restaurant. 6. Catskill Mountains, New York Average fall temperature: 26-63 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Hike in a forest preserve Drive along Route 28 to see the rolling hills and vibrant foliage create a picturesque fall setting. Explore the hiking trails in the Catskill Forest Preserve, such as Kaaterskill Falls and Overlook Mountain, to witness the fall colors in all their glory. Nearby, small towns like Woodstock and Phoenicia offer a variety of art galleries, cozy cafes and farm-to-table dining. 7. Salem, Massachusetts Average fall temperature: 36-73 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Learn about the Salem Witch Trials The rich history of Salem, Massachusetts, comes alive in autumn. Begin your journey with a visit to the Salem Witch Museum to learn about the infamous witch trials. Stroll along the historic streets and visit the House of the Seven Gables, an architectural gem. There are many Halloween festivities — including haunted tours and ghostly reenactments — to enjoy as the sun sets. Immerse yourself in the eerie atmosphere of Salem's candlelit cemeteries and historic sites, making your fall getaway a truly bewitching experience. 8. Boston, Massachusetts Average fall temperature: 38-73 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Stroll through a gorgeous garden Immerse yourself in Boston’s rich history and vibrant autumn ambiance with a stroll through Boston Common and the Public Garden, the first public botanical garden in the country. The leaves transform into a tapestry of reds and yellows — perfect for fall photoshoots. Take a leisurely walk along the Charles River Esplanade to witness the city's skyline ablaze with autumnal colors as the day ends. 9. Chicago, Illinois Average fall temperature: 39-74 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Enjoy fall foliage along the Chicago Riverwalk No trip to Chicago is complete without a visit to Millennium Park, where the Bean and surrounding gardens are adorned with fall colors. Take a scenic stroll along Lake Michigan's shoreline, where the crisp breeze and changing leaves create a serene atmosphere. As evening approaches, the city's skyline lights up along the Chicago Riverwalk and the city’s legendary jazz clubs come alive. 10. Black Hills, South Dakota Average fall temperature: 13-66 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: See Mount Rushmore amid fall foliage Autumn is the perfect time for a scenic drive through the Black Hills National Forest, where the vibrant fall foliage paints the landscape in a mosaic of reds, yellows and oranges. After a hike or two, catch a glimpse of the free-roaming buffalo herds at Custer State Park. End your fall getaway with a visit to Mount Rushmore and Crazy Horse Memorial. 11. Door County, Wisconsin Average fall temperature: 31-71 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Harvest fresh cherries The Door County Coastal Byway showcases the shores of Lake Michigan in gorgeous fall foliage. Hike the trails at Peninsula State Park, taking in breathtaking views from Eagle Bluff. Stop by small villages like Ephraim and Fish Creek for a charming day trip. Visit a local orchard for apple picking to indulge in the seasonal harvest. End the night with a glass of wine and local cheese as a reward for your hard work adventuring. 12. Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming, Idaho and Montana Average fall temperatures: 13-62 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Spot roaming bison Bask in the geothermal wonders of Old Faithful where steam mingles with crisp fall air. Explore the park's diverse landscapes, from the colorful canyons of Yellowstone to the fiery hues of aspens and willows along the Lamar Valley. Watch for the park's wildlife, including elk and bison. Stop by the thermal pools at the Mammoth Hot Springs, where the fall colors contrast beautifully with the clear water — making it the perfect place to end your day of autumn adventure. 13. Jackson Hole, Wyoming Average fall temperatures: 17-71 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: See the breathtaking fall autumn colors in national parks Located just south of Yellowstone and Grand Teton National Park, Jackson Hole’s natural beauty will leave you breathless. From September to November, visit the National Elk Refuge to hear the unique sounds of elk bulging. Go back in time to the Old West and explore Jackson’s historic downtown. Artist lovers will enjoy the Jackson Hole Fall Arts Festival. 14. Seattle, Washington Average fall temperatures: 43-67 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Check out the arboretum’s colorful Japanese maples A good first stop is Pike Place Market, where you can sip on warm apple cider and explore stalls brimming with seasonal produce and artisanal crafts. After, stroll through the lush Washington Park Arboretum and its Japanese maple grove to witness the trees painted in stunning shades of red and gold. For photo ops, ride the Seattle Great Wheel on the Elliott Bay waterfront, then check out one of the city’s many independent coffee shops. 15. Columbia River Gorge, Oregon Average fall temperature: 37-71 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Indulge in fall harvests at local cideries Eagle Creek and Multnomah Falls burst with vibrant autumn colors that pop against the lush greenery, making them the perfect fall hiking destinations. Explore the charming towns of Hood River and Cascade Locks, known for their local cideries and wineries. For panoramic views of the Columbia River framed by golden foliage, take a scenic drive along the Historic Columbia River Highway. 16. Portland, Oregon Average fall temperature: 42-75 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: rab a book and head to one of the city’s lush parks Portland’s unique blend of urban charm and natural beauty makes it one of the best places to visit in the fall. Visit Powell's City of Books, one of the world's largest independent bookstores, then explore the city's lush parks, like Forest Park or Washington Park, where the fall foliage is on full display. As the day winds down, take a leisurely stroll along the waterfront of the Willamette River to see the city’s illuminated bridges.. 17. McKenzie River, Oregon Average fall temperature: 41-79 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: What to do in autumn: Chase waterfalls Start your journey on the Historic Columbia River Highway, where waterfalls and colorful foliage line your path. To see lava fields framed by golden trees, explore the McKenzie Pass-Santiam Pass Scenic Byway. Along the way, visit charming small towns like Hood River and Sisters, where local harvest festivals and cozy cafes await. 18. Napa Valley, California Average fall temperature: 43-83 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Sample great vintages at over 500 wineries As the premiere winery destination of the United States, Napa Valley is an elegant fall vacation destination. Autumn is the perfect time to visit Napa and its surrounding towns as grapes are harvested well into October. Then take in the stars at the Napa Valley Film Festival in early November. Looking for something more low-key? Fill your days with private wine tastings and winery tours. 19. San Francisco, California Average fall temperature: 51-71 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Enjoy a foggy walk across the Golden Gate Bridge With a warm cup of coffee in hand, take a walk across the iconic Golden Gate Bridge, where the fog adds an enchanting atmosphere to your journey. Head to Golden Gate Park to witness the trees adorned in fall colors and visit the Japanese Tea Garden for a serene escape. Don't miss a drive down scenic Highway 1 to admire the rugged coastline and colorful autumn hues of nearby vineyards. 20. Redwood National Park, California Average fall temperature: 38-69 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: See the redwoods in all their glory Few places compare to the splendor of these ancient giants. Explore the park's scenic coastal trails, like the Fern Canyon loop, for a blend of lush greenery and vibrant fall colors along the Pacific coastline. To see some of the tallest trees on earth, visit the Tall Trees Grove. At dusk, witness the park's starry skies, free from light pollution, for a truly mesmerizing experience. 21. Yosemite, California Average fall temperature: 32-84 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Test your nature photography skills Hike to iconic sites like Yosemite Falls and Half Dome for amazing views of the changing leaves. Now is your chance to capture stunning photographs of the changing leaves reflected in the crystal-clear waters of Mirror Lake. If you’re thinking of camping, plan ahead because reservations are required and sell out quickly. 22. Livermore, California Average fall temperature: 42-86 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Sip and savor local wines Soak up the region's wine country charm and scenic beauty in Livermore. Savor wine tastings and learn about the winemaking process amidst the gorgeous fall colors. Explore the Livermore Valley Wine Country Trail, taking in the breathtaking views of rolling hills and grapevines. Adventurers can take a hot air balloon ride for a bird's-eye view of the stunning landscape. Savor farm-to-table cuisine at local restaurants and cafes. 23. Mammoth Lakes, California Average fall temperature: 23-71 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Explore golden Aspen groves Enjoy California’s crisp autumn weather during a hike along Eastern Sierra trails like the Crystal Lake Trail, where the aspen groves burst with brilliant fall colors. Explore the Mammoth Lakes Basin for sweeping views of the natural landscape. For even better views, take a gondola ride up to the Mammoth Mountain summit for panoramic views of the surrounding peaks, ablaze in autumn hues. 24. Lake Tahoe, California Average fall temperature: 31-74 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Enjoy a scenic cruise on the lake Lake Tahoe is an idyllic mountain lake that sits on the border of California and Nevada. With 72 miles of shoreline and more than 10 cities to choose from, there’s no shortage of towns to visit in the fall. Take a cruise on Lake Tahoe or drive to Apple Hill to pick apples or a stroll through the pumpkin patch. 25. Palm Springs, California Average fall temperature: 52-102 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Take a tour of historic architecture Though most may think of it as a snowbird destination, Palm Springs is also a beautiful place to visit in the fall. Lovers of vintage architecture will love Modernism Week in October where you can tour Mid-Century Modern homes throughout the city. Families will love spending warmer days on hiking and biking trails around the city. Visit Joshua Tree National Park and check out the stunning rock formations. 26. Park City, Utah Average fall temperature: 21-71 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Watch the mountain foliage turn red Park City is an ideal place for people looking for a luxurious fall vacation. As an old mining town, there’s a lot of history to unearth in the historic downtown and local ghost tours. The fall colors peak in early October, so you can watch the mountains turn from yellow to bright red. In Park City, it starts to snow in the fall, which makes this one of the best ski towns in the United States. 27. Ouray, Colorado Average fall temperature: 23-69 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Soak in hot springs Hot springs and hikes make Ouray, Colorado, one of the best fall vacations in the U.S. Hike in the nearby San Juan Mountains, where aspen trees blaze with golden foliage. Don't miss a drive on the Million Dollar Highway, known for its dramatic vistas and winding roads. After a day full of adventure, relax in the soothing hot springs Ouray is famous for. 28. Colorado Springs, Colorado Average fall temperature: 25-75 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Take a ride on the famous cog railway Begin your Colorado Springs adventure by exploring nearby trails, like the Manitou Incline or Barr Trail, for scenic hikes amidst the vibrant foliage. Don't miss a ride on the Pikes Peak Cog Railway for panoramic views of the surrounding mountains and valleys dressed in fall colors. Then stargaze at the Cheyenne Mountain State Park for an amazing celestial experience. 29. Aspen, Colorado Average fall temperature: 20-70 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Ride a gondola fit for a queen Embrace the enchanting beauty of the Rocky Mountains in autumn in Aspen. You can hike or take a scenic drive through Maroon Bells to see the stunning reflection of the golden aspens in Maroon Lake. Explore the town's vibrant arts scene, with galleries showcasing local talent and outdoor sculptures set amid fall foliage. Ride on the Silver Queen Gondola for panoramic views of the changing leaves and indulge in luxury dining at one of Aspen's world-class restaurants. 30. Vail, Colorado Average fall temperature: 15-67 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Explore the dramatic Rocky Mountains Sitting in the Colorado Rocky Mountains, Vail is one of the most lush mountain towns for fall vacations. Plus, it’s one of the best mountain biking cities in the United States. If you’re a lover of beer, Vail celebrates Oktoberfest and is home to many small breweries. For those looking to create a luxurious getaway, there’s no shortage of spas in the city so you can treat yourself and practice self-care. 31. Telluride, Colorado Average fall temperature: 14-68 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Walk along charming streets Indulge in the breathtaking autumn beauty of the San Juan Mountains and the charming mountain town of Telluride, Colorado. Take a scenic hike through the golden aspen groves of the Telluride Valley Floor, where fall foliage is at its peak. Explore the historic streets of Telluride, with its Victorian architecture and artisan shops. Take a free gondola ride for stunning views of the surrounding peaks. 32. Flagstaff, Arizona Average fall temperature: 23-74 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Stargaze like a pro Flagstaff is more than a quaint town near the Grand Canyon — it’s the jumping off point for lots of outdoor adventures.. Hiking in the Coconino National Forest is the best way to enjoy the vivid colors of maple trees in fall. Take a scenic drive along the San Francisco Peaks Scenic Byway to see the volcanic peaks and autumn colors amidst breathtaking views. Consider visiting the Lowell Observatory for stargazing under the clear autumn skies. 33. Santa Fe, New Mexico Average fall temperature: 25-77 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Check out the city’s famous arts scene The adobe buildings and vibrant fall colors of the Southwest create a unique atmosphere to explore. Experience the city's renowned art scene with visits to the Georgia O'Keeffe Museum and local galleries. Drive through the Sangre de Cristo Mountains to see golden aspens, and end your day by stargazing under the clear desert skies. 34. Albuquerque, New Mexico Average fall temperature: 34-84 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Take a hot-air balloon ride Witness the fiery hues of sunrise and fall foliage from above with a hot air balloon ride over the Rio Grande Valley. Explore Old Town Albuquerque, where adobe buildings and artisan shops create a charming atmosphere. And spend a day at Petroglyph National Monument, where you can witness ancient rock carvings. 35. Austin, Texas Average fall temperature: 50-90 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Visit the capital of the Lone Star State Don't miss a visit to the Texas State Capitol, where you can learn about the state's history and enjoy the picturesque grounds in autumn. In the evening, take a leisurely walk around Lady Bird Lake to watch the sunset over the city's skyline. Ride bikes along the scenic Barton Creek Greenbelt, where the fall foliage lines the trails. And no trip to Austin is complete without checking out a live performance at venues like the Continental Club. 36. Dallas, Texas Average fall temperature: 47-89 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Dress up for the State Fair of Texas Head to the Dallas Arboretum and Botanical Garden, where the fall foliage is a spectrum of colors. Grab your cowboy hat and head to the24-day State Fair of Texas, a quintessential fall event full of fried foods and lively entertainment. Nature lovers can enjoy the mild weather with a picnic at White Rock Lake or a hike in the nearby Cedar Ridge Preserve. Don’t miss trying a seasonal craft beer at one of the local breweries. 37. Oklahoma City, Oklahoma Average fall temperature: 39-85 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Cruise down the Oklahoma River The Myriad Botanical Gardens is a feast for the eyes during fall. Or head to the scenic Oklahoma River, where you can take a stroll or rent a kayak or paddle board for an adventure on the water. Get a taste of local cuisine and enjoy live music in the always-vibrant Bricktown district. 38. Asheville, North Carolina Average fall temperatures: 38-78 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Hike in the Pisgah National Forest Asheville is a stunning destination, especially in fall. Take a scenic drive along the Blue Ridge Parkway, where the foliage explodes with vibrant hues of red, orange and yellow. Enjoy a leisurely hike in the Pisgah National Forest, surrounded by the beauty of changing leaves. Afterward, sip on local craft beers at one of Asheville's many breweries and dine on farm-to-table cuisine in the charming downtown. 39. Williamsburg, Virginia Average fall temperature: 40-81 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Feel like royalty at the Governor's Palace Step back in time and relish the charms of this historic town. Watch costumed interpreters bring the 18th century to life amidst the backdrop of autumn leaves in Colonial Williamsburg. Explore the Governor's Palace gardens or drive along the Colonial Parkway, which offers picturesque views of the James River and surrounding woodlands. 40. Gatlinburg, Tennessee Average fall temperature: 35-80 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Take a ride to the SkyBridge Ready to embrace the autumnal splendor of the Smoky Mountains? Begin your day with a drive along the Newfound Gap Road to get a dose of fall colors. Explore Great Smoky Mountains National Park, hiking trails like Alum Cave or Laurel Falls to bask in the colorful foliage. Visit the quaint shops and restaurants of Gatlinburg, savoring local treats. For panoramic views of the fall landscape, take a scenic chairlift up Crockett Mountain to the SkyBridge, the longest pedestrian cable bridge in the country, spanning 700 feet over a deep valley. 41. Charleston, South Carolina Average fall temperature: 53-83 degrees Fahrenheit What to do in autumn: Enjoy fall on the beach To have the best fall vacation in Charleston, immerse yourself in the city's historic charm and coastal beauty. Stroll through the historic district, where centuries-old oak trees are adorned with Spanish moss, creating a magical autumn ambiance. Take a boat tour to nearby barrier islands like Morris Island, where you can enjoy serene beaches. Savor local cuisine, like shrimp and grits, at nearby restaurants. Experience the sunset over Charleston Harbor for a perfect ending to your fall getaway. If one of these destinations feels like it could be your home away from home, consider the benefits of co-owning a second home there. With a second home, you can enjoy fall vacations in a luxurious place of your own.
Northern California’s bucolic Napa Valley is arguably the country’s most famous wine region, producing vintages sought by wine lovers the world over. And while locals and visitors alike do spend plenty of time sipping and savoring wines from the region’s nearly 500 wineries, that’s not all there is to do in Napa Valley. With an irresistible Mediterranean-type climate, plenty of unspoiled nature and distinctly lovely communities, Napa Valley offers something for everyone. If you’re considering making the Napa Valley area your home away from home, you’ll want to add these 10 great activities to your to-do list. 1. Savor world-class cuisine Where there’s great wine, there’s usually great food, and that’s definitely true in Napa. The valley is home to more than a few acclaimed restaurants. Perhaps the best-known is The French Laundry in Yountville. Located in a historic building dating back to 1900, this Thomas Keller restaurant serves classic French fare and has been awarded three Michelin stars. Can’t get a reservation? Try his Bouchon Bakery nearby. Farm-to-table restaurants make the most of the region’s bounty, whether you’re eating at a fine dining establishment, casual bistro or Napa’s Oxbow Market, a 40,000- square-foot marketplace filled with local food vendors, casual cafes and organic produce. 2. Get an aerial view Crisp, early morning breezes and incredible vistas await when you start your day with a hot air balloon ride over the valley. Take in views of rolling hills, Mount Saint Helena and acres and acres of vines. If you’re lucky enough to take flight on an exceptionally clear day, you may be rewarded with views of the San Francisco skyline! 3.Treat yourself to a spa day The north end of the valley boasts soil with high volcanic ash content (one of the reasons Napa Valley is an ideal grape-growing region) and geothermal hot springs, especially in the area surrounding the town of Calistoga. The town’s therapeutic and rejuvenating mud and mineral baths have made it a haven for spa-lovers. Whether you’re looking for one simple treatment or indulging in a full spa getaway, Calistoga boasts more than a dozen spas to fit your needs. 4. Hop aboard the dinner train What’s more romantic than enjoying a gourmet meal on a beautifully restored 1915 Pullman train car as you roll through vineyards and watch the sun set over the valley? Not much — and that’s why the Napa Valley Wine Train is one of the valley’s most popular attractions. Over the course of three hours, the elegant, historic train travels 36 miles from Napa to Saint Helena and back. The Wine Train also offers a lunch train service with seating in a vintage two-story observation-style dining car. 5. Explore charming towns The valley is studded with many small towns, each with a distinctive vibe and plenty of things to do. Calistoga, at the northern tip of the valley, has an old-world feel, with a wooden sidewalk, the previously mentioned natural hot springs and authentic Victorian architecture. Continue south and you’ll find yourself in St. Helena. Walk down charming Main Street and stop in unique shops, galleries and restaurants. Next comes Yountville, and make sure you’re hungry. This town is a foodie paradise, boasting more Michelin stars per capita than any other town in America! Finally, the town of Napa is the most cosmopolitan — it even plays host to the Napa Valley Film Festival each November. 6. Take a hike Nature lovers will find plenty to do in Napa Valley. Beat the summer heat with a walk along a creek in the redwood and madrona forests of Bothe-Napa Valley State Park. Take the 1.3-mile loop to Linda Falls near Calistoga — the namesake waterfall is most spectacular in the winter and early spring. Looking for more of a challenge? Hike to the top of Mount Saint Helena, the highest peak in the region. The 10-mile hike has an elevation gain of 2,230 feet, and when you reach the top, your efforts will be rewarded with 360-degree views of the countryside. 7. Explore on two wheels Burn off all those fine meals and wine tastings with a bike ride on the Napa Valley Vine Trail. This 12.5-mile paved path goes from South Napa to Yountville. Eventually the trail system, which is being developed by a grassroots non-profit organization, will stretch 47 miles and connect the entire Napa Valley, from Vallejo to Calistoga. 8. Hit the links With gorgeous scenery and unbeatable weather, Napa Valley is a great place to work on your golf game. The aptly named Chardonnay Golf Club features 18 holes of championship golf surrounded by 150 acres of chardonnay vineyards. If you’re more of a spectator than a participant, you’ll want to snag tickets to the PGA Tour Safeway Open, which happens every fall at the Silverado Resort and Spa. 9. Enjoy the nightlife In Napa Valley, the after-dark scene is more focused on the arts, theater and music, and less about nightclubs and bars. Be sure to check out the Napa Valley Performing Arts Center at Lincoln Theater in Yountville for symphony performances, the Napa Valley Conservatory Theater for performing arts (and theater classes, if you’re feeling brave), and Napa’s Lucky Penny Community Arts Center for stage plays and musicals in an intimate setting. 10. Check out the art scene From pottery to paintings, Napa Valley has a thriving arts community. The 217-acre di Rosa Center for Contemporary Art in Napa is a must-see, as it houses over 2,000 works by Northern California artists. You’re also likely to come across many charming and inventive galleries just as you walk through the various towns in the valley. Looking for something specific and not sure where to start? The Arts Council Napa Valley can point you in the right direction. Make Napa Valley your second home With endless activities, fantastic dining and great entertainment, Napa Valley is a delightful second home destination. And Pacaso makes owning a second home easy, even in sought-after wine country. Check out our Napa Valley listings.
There’s plenty to do in Palm Springs — the town’s Hollywood-influenced glamour makes for great people watching, boutique shopping and swanky happy hours. But if you’re looking to broaden your horizons, you can also travel to the desert, mountains or ocean in two hours or less. Pack some snacks and strap in the kids, and enjoy these 10 fun and family-friendly day trips from Palm Springs. Laguna Beach If you want to trade a dip in the pool for a splash in the ocean, head to Laguna Beach for a day on the water. Walk the beautiful sandy beaches or explore sea caves and tide pools scattered along miles of coves. The more adventurous in your family can take to the water — there are several good snorkeling and dive spots — or sign up for a surfing lesson. If you prefer to see marine life while on dry land, visit the Pacific Marine Mammal Center. Once you’ve had your fill of the beach, check out the public artworks on display throughout the town, which has its roots as an art colony. Drive time: About 2 hours Julian A world away from the glitz of Palm Springs, Julian is an adorably authentic mining-era town that seems to belong in another time. There’s no club scene here, but you’ll find quaint antique and craft shops, and lots of tasty apples. Yup, apples — the town is known for its many local varieties, and if you visit in the fall, you can stop by an orchard and pick a few. Year-round, stroll down the historic main street or let the kids pan for gold at the Eagle Mining Company. Situated in the Laguna Mountains, Julian has more distinct seasons than a typical Southern California town, so it’s one of the day trips from Palm Springs you can enjoy at any time of year. Drive time: About 2 hours Pioneertown Unlike Julian, Pioneertown is not exactly authentic, but it has a quirky historic charm of its own. Established in 1946 at the heyday of the Western film era, it was envisioned as a “living movie set” — part filming location, part vacation destination, part full-time residence. The grander plans for the town never came to be, and the demand for Westerns faded, but the town remains a unique destination for families looking for something a little different. You’ll find a selection of Western-themed shops selling leather goods, art and pottery, and can dine at the local barbecue joint. Photo ops abound, and you might even see a gunfight on “Mane” Street if you visit on a summer weekend. Drive time: 40 minutes Lake Arrowhead A resort town tucked away in the San Bernardino Mountains, Lake Arrowhead provides a welcome respite from the desert heat. You can pursue almost any outdoor activity here, or explore the shops, dining and seasonal events in the picturesque village. Although the lake and beaches are private, hop aboard the Arrowhead Queen for an up-close tour from the water. And for a full day of excitement, check out Skypark at Santa’s Village. The village will delight children with Santa-themed activities, ice skating and holiday experiences (crafting with Santa’s elves — could you ask for more?), and the adventure park offers thrilling bike trails, climbing walls, zip lines and more. Drive time: 1 hour and 30 minutes Big Bear Lake Another mountain lake in the San Bernardinos, Big Bear also offers a welcome escape from the heat of the Coachella Valley. Big Bear is larger than Lake Arrowhead — both the town and the lake — making it a more popular and thus more crowded place to visit. Its big advantage over Lake Arrowhead is water access: The lake and shoreline are public, so you can enjoy a full day of water play, making it a desirable choice for family day trips from Palm Springs. The marinas rent kayaks, pontoon boats, SUPs and fishing boats, or you can charter a boat for water skiing or wakeboarding. Waterfront parks and beaches are also a great place for a picnic. Other notable kid-friendly activities include a trip to the Big Bear Alpine Zoo, which is dedicated to wildlife rehabilitation, and the Magic Mountain Recreation Area featuring the Alpine Slide and Soaring Eagle seated zip line. Drive time: 1 hour and 45 minutes Tahquitz and Indian Canyons The Coachella Valley has been inhabited by indiginous people for millennia, and the Cahuilla remain an active presence in the region, working to preserve their culture and provide opportunities for visitors to gain an indiginous perspective on the area. The Agua Caliente Band of Cahuilla Indians owns the land occupied by the Tahquitz and Indian Canyons, both culturally and ecologically significant sites, and offers admission to the public. Choose from among a variety of trails ranging from easy to strenuous, depending on your family’s stamina and motivation, and explore the gorgeous desert landscape or the Tahquitz Falls. Because the sites are located just outside of town, you won’t even be in the car long enough to hear, “Are we there yet?” Drive time: 10 minutes from downtown Joshua Tree National Park If you ask someone to list the top day trips from Palm Springs, a visit to Joshua Tree will probably be number one, and for good reason — this iconic national park is a unique and stunning mecca for anyone who appreciates the natural world. Spanning two deserts with different ecosystems, the Colorado and the Mojave, visitors will see fascinating contrasts between the low and high desert regions. The quirky namesake trees, massive granite cliffs and boulders, and flowering cactus gardens are among the notable and sometimes surreal features of this vast landscape. Take your pick of hikes, enjoy a scenic drive, marvel at the panoramic views or even take a rock climbing lesson. Drive time: About 1 hour to the west entrance Anza-Borrego Desert State Park California’s largest state park, Anza-Borrego offers a distinctly different type of desert environment — here you’ll see dramatic rock formations, colorful badlands, twisting canyons, natural springs and oases. You may even spot the park’s namesake bighorn sheep (borrego means sheep in Spanish). Many of the dirt roads within the park are rough and recommended for high-clearance 4WD vehicles; or, let someone else do the driving, and sign up for a jeep tour of the park. If you’d rather explore on foot, you can hike to your heart’s content. And don’t miss the incredible outdoor art installation, not far from the visitor center on Borrego Springs Road — 130 enormous metal sculptures created by artist Ricardo Breceda that emerge from the desert landscape. Drive time: About 1 hour and 30 minutes to the visitor center Amboy Crater The Amboy Crater, a National Natural Landmark, is a geological and geometric marvel — an almost perfectly symmetrical volcanic cinder cone. If your kids aren’t excited by the math and science references, just tell them it’s a massive crater caused by a volcanic eruption, and it’s surrounded by lava lakes and basalt flows, and frequented by cute desert lizards. This cone is a distinctive “bump” on the landscape, and if you hike to the rim, you’ll be rewarded with panoramic views of the Mojave. It’s just about three miles roundtrip, but best undertaken in the cooler months — there’s no shade, and summer temps top 100. Drive time: About 2 hours Coachella Valley Preserve Not far from town, the Coachella Valley Preserve was established to protect the native (and threatened) Coachella Valley fringe-toed lizard, and while you may not see the elusive reptile, you’ll enjoy the beautiful boardwalk trail at Thousand Palms Oasis. Be on the lookout for birds and other wildlife, and take note of the many interesting native plants. There are additional trails to explore, and the preserve makes for one of the easier and more serene day trips from Palm Springs if you only have a few hours to spare. Drive time: 25 minutes Find your private oasis Pacaso offers exceptional second homes in desirable locations. Find luxurious second homes in Palm Springs with resort-like amenities and plenty of sunshine. Co-ownership with Pacaso lets you enjoy all the benefits of a second home without all the hassles — it’s a dream come true. View our listings to get started.
Nearly every region of the United States has a mountain range that’s a fitting backdrop for your next mountain getaway — or, better yet, a mountain getaway that doubles as your second home. To help narrow your search, we’ve selected 29 of the best mountain getaways (in no particular order), including where, when and why to visit each. 1. Great Smoky Mountains (Tennessee) Second home buyers looking for a charming mountain town that has it all cannot afford to skip over Gatlinburg, Tennessee. Enjoy strolling Gatlinburg’s Parkway, riding the trolley or checking out the quaint shops and bustling nightlife amidst the Smokies. Where: This getaway is located in the mountainous regions of North Carolina and Tennessee. Gatlinburg is a tiny town with big views of the Smoky Mountains and has plenty of attractions to offer individuals, couples and families. When: If you’re hoping to spend the majority of your mountain getaway in the great outdoors, take a trip to the Smokies in autumn. Nature’s fall color palette will not disappoint, and the mild climate is irresistible Why: Did you know that the Smoky Mountains are the namesake of America’s most visited national park? Camping, hiking and firefly light shows are some of the many family-friendly attractions that keep this park firmly seated in the top spot. 2. Sangre de Cristo Mountains (New Mexico) Considering a second home in the mountains? Taos, New Mexico, offers optimal views of the Sangre de Cristo Mountains and everything that an art lover could desire: sculpting workshops, galleries and indigenous culture museums. Where: This subrange of the Rocky Mountains is located in Colorado and New Mexico, representing the southernmost tip of the Rockies. When: Summer is arguably the best season to enjoy Colorado mountain getaways, especially if you’re planning to hike or camp on the Colorado side of this range. Why: If the red hue these mountains give off in the morning sun isn’t enough to entice you, how do giant sand dunes and unbridled views of the Rio Grande sound? No wonder the Sangre de Cristo Mountains were declared a National Heritage Area (NHA) in 2009. 3. La Sal Mountains (Colorado) Grand Junction, Colorado, offers stunning views of this slice of the Rocky Mountains. Like Telluride and Aspen, this Colorado town is close to everything mountaineers love and offers proximity to an airport and national parks across the state border. Where: Head to Colorado or Utah to visit the Manti-La Sal National Forest where this range is located. Like most mountains that spill over the Colorado border, the La Sal Mountains are also a subsection of the Rockies. When: Spring and summer are great seasons to enjoy mountain getaways at high elevations. Aim for when the weather is just warm enough to venture out on a hike, yet cold enough to snuggle by the fire when the day’s adventures are over. Why: It’s not every day you have the opportunity to enjoy a natural wonder that is around 25 million years old. This is a must-see mountain getaway for geology fans and history buffs alike. 4. Blue Ridge Mountains (Georgia) Blue Ridge, Georgia, is perfect for second home seekers who want to stay close to the sunshine and warm winters of the South. If relaxation is a top priority for your next mountain getaway, this mountain town has some of the best wineries and breweries in the state. Where: The Blue Ridge Mountains can be accessed from Georgia, the Carolinas and even as far north as Pennsylvania and Maryland. As a physiographic region of the ever-popular Appalachian Mountains, every section of this range boasts views that never disappoint. When: Searching for the best mountain getaways in the winter? Look no further than Georgia's slice of the Blue Ridge. Winter in Georgia is full of sunshine and gorgeous views of the Blue Ridge Mountains. Why: This Southern delight was named one of the top mountain destinations of 2022. Hop on the Blue Ridge Scenic Railway to marvel at the pristine views of the mountains and surrounding forests. 5. Sierra Nevada (California) Lake Tahoe is many second home seekers’ dream getaway — and for good reason. This adventurous destination is close to big cities yet tucked away in a serene mountain setting. Head to California to experience the magic for yourself. Where: The Sierra Nevada lines the eastern border of the state of California with a tail that spills into Nevada. It is home to the world-famous Lake Tahoe. When: Springtime in California can keep you away from summer tourists. Take advantage of the West’s mild climate by enjoying one of the most exclusive California mountain getaways in the months of April and May. Why: Hiking in one of the many stunning forests within the Sierra Nevada will be an adventure full of waterfalls, wildflowers and plenty of untouched nature. 6. Alaska Range (Alaska) Anchorage is Alaska’s largest city, with plenty of attractions for second home buyers who want to invest in a snowy retreat for the whole family to enjoy. Where: The Alaska Range lines the southeastern edge of Alaska, and the summits provide peak views of the Gulf of Alaska. When: Summer is when tourists arrive in Alaska. After a long, dark winter, conditions are not considered favorable for mountain getaways until the peak season — primarily June through August. Why: The end of peak season awards patient mountain-goers the chance of a lifetime: a glimpse at the northern lights. Also known as aurora borealis, this natural phenomenon is said to be one of the most enchanting experiences on Earth. 7. Mount Rainier (Washington) When the mountain is “out,” it’s cause for celebration all around the Seattle-Tacoma area. Mount Rainier is an active volcano, but the last major eruption was in 1894. The mountain boasts wildflower meadows and ancient forests. Where: Mount Rainier (also called Tahoma) is the highest peak in Washington State and the Cascade Range, coming at 14,410 feet above sea level. When: Given its snow-capped peaks, summer is the best time to visit the Pacific Northwest if hiking and mountain trekking are high on your list. Why: If scaling an active volcano is not really your thing, there’s still plenty to do at the foot of the mountain. Mount Rainier has inspired a wave of breweries and restaurants to create gourmet treats for all to enjoy on their mountain getaways. 8. Mount Hood (Oregon) Hood River and Sandy, Oregon, are considered the gateway to Mount Hood. Although Portland makes venturing to the mountains an easy day trip, the smaller mountain towns near Mount Hood have a magical vibe that’s perfect for a mountain vacation home. Where: Located in the state of Oregon, Mount Hood is another beloved icon of the Pacific Northwest. Only 90 minutes away from Portland, a visit to Mount Hood is considered one of the city’s best day trips. When: Late spring is a wonderful time to take in the sights and sounds of Oregon’s natural parks. It’s still cold enough to enjoy winter sports like skiing, but warm enough to try your hand at hiking and fishing. Why: Mount Hood is the perfect complement to the eclectic city life of Portland and surrounding towns. The mountain, =accessible via public transportation, is the perfect place for romantic mountain getaways. 9. Adirondack Mountains (New York) Visitors and second home buyers with kids will fall in love with the weeklong winter festivals in the Adirondacks. The area’s best known city, Lake Placid, hosted two Winter Olympic Games and is a hub for winter sports of all sorts. Where: The Adirondack (ADK) Mountains are the jewel of Upstate New York. Leaving from New York City? Expect to drive roughly five to six hours before reaching the serenity of the ADKs. When: This mountain range has been the site of winter carnivals for over a century, making a trip to the Adirondack Mountains one of the best weekend mountain getaways for New Yorkers to enjoy in the wintertime. Why: The ADKs offer the ultimate mountain getaways for couples and families from New York and New Jersey who are in need of a refresh away from city life. 10. Catskill Mountains (New York) Those hailing from the New York and New Jersey area can breathe easy in the fresh air of the Catskill Mountains. Owning a second home here means having the ultimate outdoor playground at your front door. Where: In contrast to the jagged peaks of the ADK, Catskill summits are less steep, making this range ideal for beginner climbers and families. When: Fall is when you’ll be able to enjoy the full spectrum of autumn colors and cool climate of the Catskill Mountains. Why: Fishing enthusiasts will be overjoyed to learn that the Catskill Mountains are known as the birthplace of fly fishing in America. Plus, the dome-shaped peaks of the Catskills make for a great training ground for taller summits around the country. 11. Aleutian Range (Alaska) Having a second home near the Aleutian Range means being surrounded by snow-capped mountains and sparkling ocean views. It’s the perfect place to feel like you’re in the middle of nowhere with the benefit of having nearby towns like Akutan and King Cove. Where: This breathtaking mountain range is located in the southwestern region of Alaska and extends all the way to the tip of the Alaska Peninsula, helping to form the Aleutian Islands. When: Summer is the best time to island-hop. Take advantage of the ferries that operate during this season to get the most out of your mountain getaway. Why: Island-hopping, gazing at the northern lights and retiring to cozy mountain cabin getaways are all waiting for you in the rugged Aleutian Range. 12. Laguna Mountains (California) Not ready to say goodbye to city comforts? Then you’ll like the close proximity of the Laguna Mountains to urban hubs like San Diego, California. Couples will especially enjoy the wide range of activities to choose from in SoCal, including some of the best nightlife scenes in the country. Where: The Laguna Mountains are the pride and joy of San Diego County in Southern California. Prepare to be surrounded by thick patches of chaparral and wildflowers when you traverse this semi-desert landscape. When: Although Southern California is graced with a warm climate year-round, fall is perhaps the best time to head up to the mountains. Summer may be too warm to hike, but autumn offers the perfect amount of sunshine and cool breezes. Why: Follow the Laguna Creek hiking trails for a relaxing stroll by the water or trek to the gorge for enchanting waterfall views. 13. San Francisco Mountains (Arizona) Flagstaff, Arizona, is the perfect jumping off point to enjoy the San Francisco Mountains. You’ll be surrounded by lush forests, and you'll get experience all four seasons. Where: You may be surprised to learn that the San Francisco Mountains are actually located in Arizona, far from the California city that shares its name. When: Fall means you’ll miss the summer tourists but it’s still be warm enough to enjoy a day full of family-friendly activities. Why: Arizona has a magical vibe of its own that is only heightened by natural wonders like the San Francisco Mountains and the Grand Canyon. Enjoy the best of both worlds — lush forests and sprawling deserts — when you stay in this mountain destination. 14. Ko’olau Range (O’ahu, Hawai’i) The east side of the island of O’ahu is home to some of the most exclusive luxury real estate on the market. The Ko’olau Mountains are responsible for the near-perfect climate and lush flora. Exquisite beaches keep second home buyers drooling for a chance to call the nearby communities of Kailua and Lanikai their home away from home. Where: O’ahu’s east side is blessed with some of the best weather in the country, thanks to the Ko’olau Mountain Range. When: Winter is probably the best time to visit the Hawaiian island of O’ahu if you’re hoping to encounter the least amount of tourists possible. Why: Due to its white sandy beaches, the cosmopolitan capital city of Honolulu and its melting pot of culinary cultures, O’ahu is home to some of the most luxurious mountain getaways for couples to enjoy all year round. 15. Olympic Mountains (Washington) Families will revel in the abundance of adventures on Washington State’s Olympic Peninsula, a half-day of travel from the hubs of Tacoma and Seattle. Where: This snow-capped ridge is located in Washington State and is home to iconic mountain peaks like Mount Olympus. When: Summer is when all the park facilities are open and operating at full capacity. The local flora and fauna are at their best during this season, so make sure to pack your camera to capture the breathtaking views. Why: Olympic National Park protects nearly 1 million acres of land comprised of old-growth forests, Pacific coastlines and majestic mountain ridges. Bring your raincoat and explore four stunning rainforests. 16. Mount Shasta (California) Mt. Shasta is a tiny town at the foot of majestic Mount Shasta, a potentially active volcano in the southern end of the Cascade Range. It tops out at 14,179 feet. Where: Located in Northern California, Mount Shasta is the epitome of majestic mountain getaways. Luxury is never far from this volcanic summit, which is well known for its spiritual essence that keeps visitors coming back for more. When: If flower-filled meadows and picturesque natural landscapes are why you love mountain getaways, then spring is one of the best seasons to visit Mount Shasta. Why: Charming Mt. Shasta offers all the artisanal eateries, art markets and local breweries you could want. 17. Wichita Mountains (Oklahoma) Oklahoma City, Lawton and even Dallas, Texas, are ideal locations for a second home if you want to be within driving distance of the Wichita Mountains. Where: Head to southern Oklahoma if you want to behold the beauty of this mountain range and enjoy the biodiversity of the Wichita Mountains Wildlife Refuge. When: Spring is a great time to hike, fish or simply watch local wildlife in action. The prairie at the foot of the mountain range offers stunning views of the peaks above. Why: One of America’s most iconic animals, the buffalo, can be seen roaming the protected lands of this wildlife refuge. Birdwatchers will also be delighted to know that there are nearly 300 bird species that stop here during their annual migrations. 18. Black Hills (South Dakota) Nature lovers and history buffs searching for a second home won’t want to miss Keystone, South Dakota. It’s full of historic charm and is dotted with wood sculptures of Bigfoot, Smokey Bear and other whimsical creatures that kids will love. Where: South Dakota is home to the Black Hills mountain range and many other noteworthy attractions like the Badlands and Custer State Park. When: Autumn is the perfect time to embark on an adventure to one or all of the natural attractions that the Black Hills area has to offer. Why: The Black Hills boasts more than 5 million acres of protected land that’s home to Mount Rushmore, American buffalo and a spring-fed water park. 19. Haleakalā (Maui, Hawai’i) Maui is home to some of the most beautiful beach houses imaginable. The island is the perfect romantic getaway for couples who want a second home in paradise. Where: Haleakalā National Park calls the island of Maui home. Haleakalā volcano is an active shield volcano that rests on the east side of the island. When: Winter is one of the better seasons to escape the tourists. When you visit any Hawaiian island, however, popular spots like this will always attract crowds. Why: The summit of Haleakalā is one of the only accessible places in the world where you can view the sun rising over the clouds. Reservations are required, but it’s worth it for this once-in-a-lifetime opportunity. 20. Guadalupe Mountains (Texas) El Paso, Texas, is the ideal setting for second home seekers who want the beauty of Mexico at their fingertips without having to cross country borders. Where: The Guadalupe Mountains are the focal point of the Chihuahuan desert in West Texas. There, you can find sand dunes, reef fossils and the highest peaks in the state. When: Although West Texas is fairly warm year-round, visiting the Guadalupe Mountains in the spring means optimal conditions for hiking, camping and backpacking. Why: This mountain getaway is set in the Wild West. Take cowboy vibes to the next level by booking a horseback trail ride through the heart of the desert. 21. Pocono Mountains (Pennsylvania) Residents of Philadelphia and New York City can enjoy owning a second home near the Pocono Mountains. Perfect for a fall getaway, the Poconos area is dotted with tiny towns that make for charming day trips. Where: The Pocono Mountains can be found in the northern region of Pennsylvania, with its lush forests and serene water-lined hiking trails. When: Autumn is, without question, the best time to venture into the Pocono Mountains. In fact, there are over 20 ways visitors can experience the vast array of autumn hues in the Poconos. Why: The striking colors exhibited from the area’s 127 tree and plant species make the Poconos one of the most majestic mountain getaways around. Ziplining, train rides and lakefront beaches also await adventure seekers. 22. White Mountains (New Hampshire) Consider opting for a second home in coastal Maine if you want to enjoy the splendor of the White Mountains in nearby New Hampshire. Where: This mountain range is a subsection of the Northern Appalachian Mountains and is located within the state of New Hampshire. When: Spring in New England can create the perfect conditions for a luxurious mountain getaway in the White Mountains, even though this range is host to popular attractions year-round. Why: This mountain getaway has it all — caves to explore, horses to ride and nearly a dozen 100-foot waterfalls to enjoy as you hike one of the many well-preserved trails. 23. Grand Tetons (Wyoming) Teton Village and Jackson, Wyoming, offer stunning views of the Grand Tetons and nearby Yellowstone National Park, making this second home mountain getaway ideal for any nature lover. Where: Grand Teton National Park is located in northwestern Wyoming. The valley at the foot of the mountain range is home to the highly sought-after Jackson Hole area. When: Visitors may be surprised to learn that Grand Teton National Park is open to the public 24/7 every day of the year. Summer, however, is the most popular time of year to explore the Grand Tetons. Why: The snow-covered peaks of the Grand Tetons offer a variety of climbing options for experienced mountaineers looking for their next challenge. There are also plenty of cycling trails and scenic drives to take around the park for those hoping for a relaxing mountain getaway. 24. Uinta Mountains (Utah) Park City is the place to be if day trips to the Uinta Mountains are high on your second home wish list. Enjoy all the amenities of big city living while being close to Ashley National Forest and Great Salt Lake. Where: The Uinta Mountains are situated in northern Utah. Unlike the rest of the state’s topography, this area is home to green valleys and lush forests. When: Summer creates great conditions for extended stays in the mountains for those interested in camping or backpacking through the rugged range. Why: Thrill seekers can enjoy white water river rafting and 2,800 miles of off-road ATV trails. The nearby spas and amusement parks are Uinta Mountain getaway itinerary options as well. 25. Bighorn Mountains (Wyoming) Sheridan, Wyoming, is the ultimate in quaint mountain towns, rich in history and charm. Families and friends can relax in the great outdoors when they call the Bighorn region their home away from home. Where: Visit southern Montana or northern Wyoming to catch a glimpse of what is considered to be the Rocky Mountain’s sister range. When: Springtime is when Bighorn National Forest is in full bloom. Enjoy hiking among fragrant patches of alpine meadows on this majestic mountain getaway. Why: This protected national forest offers not one but three scenic byways that culminate in over 100 miles of beautiful views. The Cloud Peak Wilderness is another highlight of the protected area, and offers unspoiled alpine nature at its best. 26. Pine Valley Mountains (Utah) St. George, Utah, is a mountain town full of old-world charm. A second home in the Pine Valley area will award you plenty of space to get away from it all. Where: Enjoy Utah’s dramatic desert scenery whenever you visit the Pine Valley Mountains. This mountain range is also home to one of the largest mountain laccoliths (dome-shaped rock formations) in the world. When: The Pine Valley Mountains can be enjoyed in every season, but winter in this arid desert offers some of the best snowboarding and skiing opportunities in Utah. Why: Enjoy a unique ecosystem full of outdoor activities like boating, bouldering and backpacking through the striking landscape of the Dixie National Forest with the Pine Valley Mountains as the ultimate backdrop. 27. Taconic Mountains (New York) Residents of Albany, New York City and even Boston, Massachusetts, can enjoy the year-round splendor of the Taconic Mountains when they purchase a luxury second home in the area. Where: You can find this subrange of the Appalachian Mountains in the states of Connecticut, New York, Massachusetts and Vermont. When: Summer is when outdoor activities like waterfall trekking and lake fishing abound in the Taconic Mountains. Check the region’s website for more information about the official swimming season. Why: Take a carriage ride next to the Hudson River or backpack through charming woodlands whenever you stay in a luxurious mountain getaway home in the Taconic Mountains. 28. San Gabriel Mountains (California) Los Angeles is the perfect place to call your second home if being close to the stunning San Gabriel Mountains is your top priority. Where: This mountain range lies on the edge of SoCal’s most dynamic city. Locals and tourists alike flock to the San Gabriel Mountains for the impressive scenery and abundant biodiversity. When: Fall in Southern California offers an unbeatable climate for hiking, bouldering and trekking to the world-famous observatory at the summit of Mount Wilson. Why: A San Gabriel Mountain adventure is the perfect way to balance out a Los Angeles getaway. After you enjoy all the city has to offer, head to the mountains for some peace, quiet and spectacular skylines. 29. Mount Waialeale (Kaua’i, Hawai’i) The island of Kaua’i — also called the Garden Isle — may be small, but it is full to the brim with breathtaking views of Mount Waialeale, the Pacific Ocean and thick groves of tropical forests. Families, couples and solo travelers will definitely be caught daydreaming about their vacation home in paradise. Where: Mount Waialeale, in the heart of Kauaʻi in the state of Hawai’i, is widely considered to be one of the wettest places on the planet. When: Winter can be one of the best times to visit the Garden Isle due to a lower number of tourists. This time of year can also yield impeccable views of the Pacific Ocean while you scale the mountain. Why: Apart from the island’s beautiful sandy beaches, Mount Waialeale is also home to 800-foot waterfalls and Waimea Canyon on its western edge. If you’re looking for a mountain getaway that offers it all, this is the place for you. How to pack for a mountain getaway Before you head up the mountain, double-check that you’ve packed these mountain getaway essentials: Thermal layers Hiking boots Raincoat Sunscreen Bear spray and insect repellent First-aid kit Hammock Camera Water bottle Hydrating snacks Staying hydrated and warm is important to enjoying a mountain getaway to the fullest. Depending on the region of your destination, the weather can drastically change from the foot of the mountain to the summit, so dress accordingly.
There’s something magical about autumn: hillsides awash in color, a welcome chill in the air, the lure of a cozy fireplace. After the busy summer season, fall is the perfect time to enjoy a slower pace of life in a second home. Find your year-round getaway in one of these idyllic destinations. Aspen The chic mountain town of Aspen, Colorado, is best known as a can’t-miss winter getaway for skiers and snowboarders. Aspen may be a bit overlooked as a fall destination, but that’s a good thing. Fall in Aspen is delightfully low-key, with fewer crowds than in the peak winter season, yet plenty to do. Peep the fall colors throughout the White River National Forest, become a regular at local restaurants or enjoy hiking before the snow starts falling. Vail Another charming Colorado retreat, Vail is less than 100 miles from downtown Denver, making it the perfect place for a fall weekend getaway — of course, you’re welcome to stay longer! Autumn outdoor activities abound in this town of just over 5,500. Spend crisp fall days fishing, hiking, cycling, golfing or horseback riding, all against the backdrop of golden aspen trees. Napa Fall is harvest season in California Wine Country, making it the perfect time for wine lovers to visit. Toast the change of season at wineries throughout Napa Valley and Sonoma County, many of which host special tastings, harvest parties and farm-to-table dinners. With daily highs lingering in the mid 60s into November, Napa is the perfect place to enjoy all of the charms of fall. Charleston Do you love all things spooky? Fall is the perfect time to plan a trip to Charleston, South Carolina, said to be one of the most haunted places in the country. At the very least, you’ll find inspiration for your Halloween costume, as you’re regaled with local lore about pirates, shipwrecks, thieves and ghosts at historical sites all over town. Palm Springs For those who lament the end of summer every year, Palm Springs is the perfect place to make summer last a while longer. As the hotter-than-hot summer temperatures subside, Palm Springs comes alive. Enjoy temperatures in the 70s and 80s, perfect for poolside lounging, Sunday brunching and exploring the unique beauty of nearby Joshua Tree National Park. Second home destinations Pacaso offers co-ownership of fully managed, turnkey second homes that offer something special year-round. Browse and tour luxurious retreats in more than 40 world-class destinations virtually or in person.
Fall is a great time to take in some gorgeous autumn color and visit places that are too crowded (or too pricey) to fully enjoy in the hotter summer months. If you’re not ready for summer to end, you can find plenty of spots with the warmth of a sunny beach or the allure of a tropical breeze. Here are our picks for the top fall travel destinations that can help you embrace — or escape — the season. For stunning fall foliage If you’re inspired by the reds and golds of blazing autumn trees, your fall travel should definitely include these fall fan favorites. California Wine Country From scenic vineyards to farm-to-table eateries, Napa Valley and Sonoma County come alive in autumn. Enjoy stunning sunset views of the changing leaves on the Mayacamas Mountains while you sip fine vino and enjoy the freshest fare at one of the many wineries. If you’re not into wine, we’ve rounded up 10 other fun things to do in Napa Valley. Burlington, Vermont If there’s any destination where fall is practically legendary, it’s Burlington, Vermont. From the fiery red and gold mountainsides to its cozy sweater weather, Burlington is a must-visit if you want a genuinely autumnal experience. Shelburne Farms offers walking trails, hayrides and cheesemaking, and you can pick apples at Shelburne Orchards. Other top attractions include a variety of craft breweries, the ZipTour Adventure at Stowe Mountain and the Island Line Bike Trail that will take you along the shore of Lake Champlain. Boston, Massachusetts If you prefer a big city vibe for your fall travel but you still want plenty of autumn color, plan a stop in Boston. Enjoy one of the best views of the city from atop historic Bunker Hill, or see the city from the water on a sunset dinner cruise. Visit one of Boston’s many historic graveyards like Copp’s Hill or Granary Burying Ground, then drive about an hour to check out the Salem Witch Museum. For less spooky seasonal fun, try the Connors Farm corn maze or stroll the tree-lined streets near Harvard. Asheville, North Carolina Another legendary fall travel destination, Asheville boasts stunning autumn color across the beautiful Blue Ridge Mountains and the Great Smokies. The town is just an hour east of Great Smoky Mountains National Park and just two hours east of Gatlinburg, Tennessee (another noteworthy fall travel destination). Asheville is home to several craft beer breweries, a bustling arts scene and the incredible Biltmore Estate which covers 8,000 acres and is the closest thing the U.S. has to a castle. For fewer crowds When school is in session, these popular travel destinations should be a little quieter and more peaceful than they are from June to August. Grand Canyon National Park, Arizona As temperatures begin to cool in the Grand Canyon, the crowds start to thin at this popular destination, and you’ll have more breathing room to take in one of the seven natural wonders of the world. You’ll also find lower room rates, but visitor services start to taper off near the end of October. Take a hike through the Inner Canyon Trails of the South Rim, and be sure to bring extra layers to deal with the inevitable chill in the air. Yellowstone National Park, Wyoming Another tourist magnet during the summer months, Yellowstone is quieter during autumn, but no less majestic. In fact, you’ll see more wildlife activity because it’s mating season for elk, and other critters are preparing for hibernation. Most of the park is covered in evergreen trees, but in early fall you’ll see gorgeous golden leaves on the aspens. Autumn is also a great time for fishing in Yellowstone, with 600 lakes and ponds, and 1,000 rivers and streams. Access to certain areas of the park starts to close near the end of October to prepare for winter weather, so plan ahead. Zion National Park, Utah Are you catching the national park theme when it comes to fewer crowds in fall? Zion National Park in Utah is no exception. Summer brings triple-digit temperatures, but fall temps in Zion range between the 40s and 70s. Despite its reputation for stark sandstone cliffs and red rock formations, Zion has pretty spectacular fall foliage that provides a vibrant contrast to the natural rocky outcroppings. Take a hike on the Canyon Overlook Trail, and be sure to bring your camera to capture the picturesque views. For an extended summer Bask in the sunshine a little longer by visiting these summer-like destinations. Island of Hawaii, Hawaii The “Big Island” of Hawaii is an ideal destination when you're not quite ready to leave behind the carefree days of summer. Temperatures in September and October are much the same as summer, and only cool slightly in November. The off-peak season also provides the same sunny beaches with less expensive lodging, and you’ll be more likely to be able to book island adventures like snorkeling and helicopter tours without a lot of competition from other island visitors. While on the island, be sure to check out Hawai’i Volcanoes National Park and Rainbow Falls. San Francisco, California It might be located in “sunny California,” but oddly enough, San Francisco isn’t particularly sunny until fall. Autumn brings warmer temperatures to this coastal city, along with less wind and clearer skies (bye-bye fog!), making it the perfect time of year to enjoy The Golden City. Take a boat to Alcatraz to tour the historic prison, or visit Marin Headlands in the Golden Gate National Recreation Area for hiking and views of the bay. Fall events in San Francisco include cultural favorites like the Autumn Moon Festival in Chinatown and Fleet Week along the waterfront. Big Sur, California With fall temperatures in the 60s and 70s, Big Sur might not be as warm as Hawaii, but it offers plenty of sunshine and natural wonders. Whales are especially active in the Monterey Bay National Marine Sanctuary during the fall, and you’ll be able to spot hundreds of monarch butterflies settling in for the winter in the eucalyptus trees at Cooper Grove in Andrew Molera State Park. Pfeiffer Beach in Los Padres National Forest and the towering redwoods of Pfeiffer Big Sur State Park are also worth a visit. Find your dream destination Enjoy a second home for all seasons with Pacaso, whether it’s a Napa farmhouse bordered by vineyards, or a Malibu beach house steps from the sand. Browse our listings to find your perfect place for year-round relaxation.
From winter skiing to summer hiking and everything in between, Steamboat Springs, Colorado is an outdoor lover’s dream. No matter what brings you to this charming mountain town, one thing’s for sure: With so many recreational opportunities to enjoy, you’re going to work up quite an appetite. Luckily, the culinary scene is top notch. Check out our guide to the best Steamboat Springs restaurants. Breakfast & brunch Winona’s Restaurant A Steamboat Springs mainstay in the heart of historic downtown, Winona’s is known for classic all-American breakfasts. You’ll find scrambles, breakfast burritos, biscuits and gravy, and five types of eggs Benedict. The restaurant has a warm, casual atmosphere, and the service is just as friendly. Local tip: Winona’s plate-sized cinnamon rolls are the stuff of legend — soft, chewy, plenty of cinnamon flavor and topped with a mountain of gooey frosting. Yampa Valley Kitchen Yampa Valley Kitchen operates under the motto “uncompromised food.” That means they source local, organic and sustainable ingredients, down to the spices and oils. When you dine at YVK (as the locals call it), you can expect an ever-changing menu that makes the most of the seasonal bounty. Breakfast is served every weekday, and the weekend brunch is luxuriously long — lasting until 3 p.m. You’ll find fabulous frittatas, crepes and breakfast sandwiches. Pair your meal with a specialty latte, organic tea or mimosa while preparing for the day’s adventures. Local tip: In the warmer months, nothing beats dining in the outdoor garden — but the early bird gets the table! Lunch Salt & Lime A colorful interior and an inviting deck create the perfect backdrops for flavorful Mexican fare at Salt & Lime. The menu offers a unique mix of classic and modern cuisine using traditional cooking methods and inventive ingredients. Fan favorites include a Colorado bison burrito, chicken tinga tacos, loaded guacamole and veggie queso fundido. Local tip: Head to the rooftop deck and soak up the Colorado sunshine while enjoying tacos, burritos and all-day happy hour drink specials. The Paramount Located at the base of the Steamboat Resort, this friendly spot offers ski-in, ski-out access. The Paramount is known for using seasonal ingredients, creating homemade sauces and mayo, and serving up made-from-scratch offerings, including grilled sandwiches, fresh salads, flavorful soups and hand-cut fries. Local tip: The Paramount serves a great breakfast, too. Grab a breakfast sandwich, vegetarian breakfast pita, Nutella and toast, or chicken and waffles before hitting the slopes. Dinner Mazzola’s Italian Diner Mazzola’s has been creating classic Italian fare in downtown Steamboat since 1970. Come hungry, as every part of the menu has wonderful options. Start with the Tuscan white bean dip and Sicilian steamed mussels. Move on to classic pasta dishes, seafood-laden cioppino or chicken piccata. Pizzas are another great option, thanks to the homemade dough and roasted garlic-infused olive oil. Local tip: The wine list at Mazzola’s is packed with Italian wines, from crisp pinot grigios to hearty sangiovese blends. Sauvage One of the newest restaurants on the Steamboat culinary scene, Sauvage is the perfect location for a special occasion. The handcrafted cocktails are a thing of beauty and the dishes just beg to be posted to Instagram. The French fusion menu changes seasonally, and the three- and six-course tasting menus are the perfect way to sample a little bit of everything. Local tip: Several days a week, budget-minded diners can sample the most popular cocktails, half-priced beers and small plates on their happy hour menu, which showcases Sauvage’s French-American inventions. Or you be the chef! While restaurant dining has its appeal, making meals in the comfort of your own home can be very appetizing. As a co-owner of a Pacaso second home in Steamboat Springs, you’ll enjoy a fully stocked gourmet kitchen, professional-grade appliances and beautiful dining spaces for gathering with family and friends.
Santa Barbara is more than a California coastal destination – it’s a lifestyle. Sun, surf, restaurants and distinctive architecture abound. And when you’re looking for a second home in Santa Barbara, there’s nothing quite like an authentic Santa Barbara-style home. Inspired by Mediterranean and Spanish Revival-style architecture, classic Santa Barbara-style homes have eight easy-to-spot characteristics. 1. White stucco walls Pure white stucco and plaster walls are a hallmark of Santa Barbara architecture, much like you’d find in Spain – after all, a Spanish explorer staked his claim on Santa Barbara way back in 1602. White walls serve as a blank canvas for the more dynamic elements of Santa Barbara-style architecture, including the ones that follow. 2. Arched windows, doors and walkways Rounded corners add a feeling of California casualness to Santa Barbara-style homes. You’ll find everything from subtle rounded tops on doors and window casings to dramatic floor-to-ceiling arches framing walkways, indoors and out. 3. Exposed wood beam ceilings Visible wood beams on the interior of Santa Barbara homes warm up the white walls and keep living spaces feeling cozy and welcoming. Whether structural or decorative, dark-stained wood beams add a sense of sophistication, especially in great rooms with high ceilings. 4. Earth tones Santa Barbara-homes style make wonderful use of earth tones and rich woods, providing another contrast to the stark white stucco and plaster walls. You’ll find warm tones in ornate wood doors, elegant light fixtures, handmade ceramic tiles, and decorative accents like rugs and linens. 5. Red tile roofs An homage to true classic Spanish hacienda architecture, red roof tiles are a must-have. Typically made of terracotta or slate, these curved roof tiles are found atop privately owned homes and local landmarks like the Santa Barbara County Courthouse and El Presidio. 6. Stone fireplaces Classic Santa Barbara homes always have a grand fireplace. But grand doesn’t mean dark – these homes often have fireplaces in the same neutral color palette of the surrounding plaster, or accented with Santa Barbara sandstone. The locally sourced stone has a muted golden or buff color. 7. Wrought iron accents Ornate wrought iron is another hallmark of this architectural style, and you’ll find it on balustrades, stairways, door and window hardware, and light fixtures. In some more dramatically designed homes, you may even find a spiral staircase crafted entirely from iron. 8. Inviting courtyards Santa Barbara’s gorgeous year-round weather lends itself to indoor-outdoor living, so homeowners can often be found enjoying charming stone courtyards, surrounded by lush foliage. Find your Santa Barbara second home Can’t resist the charms of a Santa Barbara home? Make the Central California Coast your second home destination with Pacaso. Become a co-owner of a luxury second home, and surround yourself in style.
It’s only about 220 miles from San Diego to Santa Barbara — roughly a 3.5- to 4-hour trip, assuming L.A. traffic isn’t bad. But as you travel between these two sunny cities, give yourself ample time to explore. Choose one or two of the following destinations, or extend your adventure and check out all seven as you make your way north. Just pack your favorite road trip snacks, buckle up, and hit the road! Grab a Hodad’s burger in San Diego A San Diego institution for over 50 years, Hodad’s Burgers, located in the heart of the Ocean Beach neighborhood, is the best place to chow down before you start your drive. They’re famous for their gigantic burgers, mountains of crispy onion rings and thick milkshakes, which hungry diners line up for every day in a queue that can wrap around the block if you come right at lunchtime. (These burgers are worth the wait.) Catch some waves in Encinitas The quintessential SoCal beach town of Encinitas is just up the road from San Diego proper, along historic Highway 101. Nearby Moonlight State Beach is the perfect place to walk the wide sandy beaches, go for a swim or play a game of beach volleyball. With gentle waves, Moonlight has multiple surf schools offering lessons for everyone, even if you’re a Barney (that’s a first-timer). Rather leave the surfing to the experts? Swami’s Beach is a great place to watch local surfers show off. Embrace your inner child at Legoland Just 10 miles north of Encinitas is Legoland California, a must-visit for families with kids or anyone who can’t get enough of those little bricks. Buy a one-day ticket to ride, build and play to your heart’s content. Or you can stay on site at the fun-filled Legoland Hotel or Legoland Castle Hotel. Choose from room themes like Knights & Dragons, Royal Princess, Ninjago or Lego Friends. And don’t forget your swimsuit to enjoy the Lego-themed water park next door. Get back to nature at Crystal Cove For an alternative to the Legoland crowds, continue driving an hour north to Laguna Beach, and discover one of Orange County’s largest open wilderness areas, Crystal Cove State Park, which boasts 2,400 acres of backcountry wilderness and 3.2 miles of pristine coastline. If you time your visit to align with low tide, you can explore the park’s well-known tidepools, spotting creatures like sea anemones, sea urchins, sea stars, hermit crabs, snails and — if you’re really lucky — octopuses. The park is also a great place to stretch your legs, with 18 miles of hiking trails that offer incredible ocean views. Play tourist at Santa Monica Pier Travel for another 60 or so miles to reach Santa Monica, just west of Los Angeles. As a National Historic Landmark and the western end of iconic Route 66, it’s no wonder Santa Monica Pier is one of California’s most photographed locations. You can stroll the pier and snap a few Instagram-worthy photos or spend a whole day in this fun-filled destination. Fish off the pier, shop for souvenirs, ride the historic merry-go-round, try your luck in the classic arcade or experience the unique talents of the area’s many street performers. Live the celebrity life in Malibu From Santa Monica, a quick 30-minute drive along a southern stretch of coastline brings you to the chic enclave of Malibu. When you arrive, keep your eyes peeled — many Hollywood celebrities call this beach town home, so you never know who you’ll spot. And while you’re in Malibu, you can embrace the laid-back luxury, no matter your celebrity status. Sink your toes into the sand during low tide at Carbon Beach (dubbed Billionaire’s Beach), treat yourself to sushi at famed Nobu, or simply shop your way through the well-known Malibu Farmers Market, happening every Sunday morning. Take a detour to the Channel Islands Due west of Malibu in the Pacific Ocean, the five islands that make up Channel Islands National Park are nothing short of spectacular. Leave your car on the mainland and take a scenic one- to three-hour boat ride or a half-hour plane ride to these unspoiled islands. They offer ample opportunities for hiking, snorkeling, kayaking, bird watching and whale watching (depending on the time of year). Stay for the day or make reservations for a rustic, walk-in camping experience. Say cheers at a Santa Barbara winery Back on the mainland, and a little over an hour from Malibu, you’ll reach Santa Barbara. The town has a great reputation among wine lovers, and it’s easy to see why. Right in town, you’ll find a whopping 28 tasting rooms along the Urban Wine Trail. With all the tasting rooms located within a few blocks of each other in the downtown core, spending an afternoon sampling local wines is a great way to get the lay of the land. After your tasting experience, grab a bite to eat at one of Santa Barbara’s many beachfront restaurants. Want to explore further? Travel 45 minutes to the Santa Ynez and Santa Maria Valleys and visit the wineries themselves. Find your own California paradise If you fall in love with one of these great destinations, why not become a regular? Buy a Pacaso in Southern California or the Central Coast for as little as ⅛ the cost of full ownership, and have ample time to explore.
Whether you’re road tripping through SoCal or hoping to catch a wave at one of many Santa Barbara surf spots, you can’t skip a dining experience at one of the top Santa Barbara restaurants on the beach. From gourmet seafood to classic California cuisine using fresh, local ingredients, we've rounded up 13 beachside restaurants that can take any Santa Barbara stay to the next level, and we've ordered them from most affordable to most expensive: 1. On The Alley Average rating: 4.5 stars Cost: $ Cuisine: American Tucked away near the Santa Barbara Maritime Museum, On The Alley offers quick counter service with outdoor picnic tables close enough to the water that you can feel the ocean breezes. On The Alley serves breakfast all day, with simple and delicious favorites like breakfast bowls, oatmeal with fresh blueberries, waffles, French toast sticks and fresh fruit smoothies. Headed out boating? Order ahead on their website and enjoy a takeout breakfast on the water. 2. Chad’s Average rating: 4.4 stars Cost: $$ Cuisine: Breakfast With an enviable location adjacent to Santa Barbara Harbor, Chad’s offers breakfast classics like omelets, eggs Benedict, French toast and oatmeal, as well as a unique take on the California breakfast burrito — with bacon, avocado and french fries! Adventurous diners will want the 911 Emergency Omelet, which is packed with chorizo, roasted green chiles and jalapeños. You also won’t want to miss the mimosa flight. 3. Shoreline Beach Cafe Average rating: 4.4 stars Cost: $$ Cuisine: American Grabbing a bite to eat before a day spent at the beach is easy when your restaurant of choice is literally on the beach. Shoreline Beach Cafe offers outdoor dining on the beach as well as on a shaded deck. Sink your toes into the sand of Leadbetter Beach while enjoying breakfast favorites like pancakes with fresh fruit, scrambles, breakfast burritos and huevos rancheros. Come back in the afternoon for weekday happy hour! 4. Santa Barbara Shellfish Company Average rating: 4.5 stars Cost: $$ Cuisine: Seafood You can’t get more waterfront than dining on a pier! Santa Barbara Shellfish Company has been a mainstay since 1980, with favorite dishes like Dungeness crab, shrimp ceviche, oysters, clams and lobster. The restaurant is popular, so don’t be surprised if there’s a wait. If you’re in a rush, you can always order from the walk-up window. 5. Boathouse at Hendry's Beach Average rating: 4.5 stars Cost: $$ Cuisine: Seafood For sunset cocktails, a romantic dinner or a celebratory evening, book a table at the Boathouse at Hendry's Beach. The restaurant features a cozy heated patio and a menu that goes on and on. There are extensive raw bar offerings, plus plenty of seafood starters. Main course options include (you guessed it) fresh seafood, or opt for classically prepared Harris Ranch steaks. 6. Moby Dick Average rating: 4 stars Cost: $$ Cuisine: Seafood Moby Dick is a popular seafood spot located on Santa Barbara’s historic Stearns Wharf. The restaurant offers a variety of dishes, from fresh fish and lobster to burgers and salads, all with a stunning view of the Pacific Ocean. The restaurant is open for breakfast, lunch and dinner, and also hosts special events such as weddings and parties. 7. Brophy Bros Average rating: 4.5 stars Cost: $$$ Cuisine: Seafood Enjoy American cuisine overlooking the Santa Barbara Marina at Brophy Bros. Grab a table on the patio and treat yourself to an impressive variety of fresh seafood. Start with steamed clams or mussels, ceviche or oyster shooters. Main course specials vary, but popular dishes include grilled swordfish, Cajun sea bass and beer-battered fish and chips. 8. Bluewater Grill Average rating: 4.3 stars Cost: $$$ Cuisine: Seafood Specializing in seafood and local cuisine, Bluewater Grill offers a variety of dishes, including oysters, lobster and the ever-popular fish tacos. The restaurant has a full bar with wine, beer and cocktails. Bluewater Grill is open daily for lunch and dinner, andr brunch on weekends. The restaurant has a classic Santa Barbara atmosphere, with indoor and outdoor seating options. Bluewater Grill is a popular destination for those who enjoy fresh and delicious food, friendly service and scenic views of the harbor. 9. Tydes Average rating: 4.3 stars Cost: $$$ Cuisine: Seafood Enjoy indoor-outdoor fine dining at Tydes, a chic restaurant in the Four Seasons Resort The Biltmore. In addition to jaw-dropping views, Tydes features incredible dishes like poached local halibut, grilled lobster with black truffle gnocchi and Wagyu beef short ribs. The upscale atmosphere makes it the perfect venue for a Santa Barbara date night. If you can see yourself enjoying all that Santa Barbara has to offer — including its rapidly growing food scene — consider owning your own second home in the area. 10. Padaro Beach Grill Average rating: 4.3 stars Cost: $$ Cuisine: Californian Padaro Beach Grill is a casual dining restaurant specializing in local dishes with fresh ingredients. The restaurant has a full bar, a spacious patio and a playground for kids. Padaro Beach Grill is a great place to enjoy a relaxing meal with family and friends while taking in the stunning views of the ocean and mountains. 11. Bella Vista Average rating: 4.4 stars Cost: $$$ Cuisine: Californian Bella Vista is a popular destination for locals and tourists alike. The restaurant offers a variety of dishes, from pasta and pizza to seafood and steak. The atmosphere is cozy and elegant, with stunning ocean and mountain views. Bella Vista is open for breakfast, lunch and dinner, and also hosts special events and catering services. 12. Toma Restaurant & Bar Average rating: 4.6 stars Cost: $$$ Cuisine: Italian Open for dinner only, the award-winning Toma Restaurant & Bar is an upscale Mediterranean eatery on the waterfront. Start by sharing handcrafted flatbread before enjoying an incredible array of house-made pastas, risottos and main dishes like braised beef short ribs or seared scallops. There’s also an extensive wine list featuring selections from both California and Italy. Time for an after-dinner beach walk? Cross the street and you’re on the sand of West Beach. 13. OKU Restaurant Average rating: 4.6 Cost: $$$ Cuisine: Japanese OKU restaurant is a popular destination for sushi lovers and Asian fusion cuisine enthusiasts. The chef uses fresh, high-quality ingredients such as wild-caught fish, organic vegetables and homemade sauces. The restaurant also has a full bar, featuring sake, cocktails, wine and beer. But the best part is the stunning view of the ocean — perfect to enjoy while eating sushi. Savor the good life Want to turn Santa Barbara into your go-to vacation destination? Become a co-owner of a beautiful luxury second home and return year-round to relax, dine and explore everything the Central California coast has to offer.
With beautiful beaches, championship golf and so many year-round outdoor activities — on both land and water — Cabo San Lucas is a world-class vacation destination. More than three million people visit this Baja hotspot every year, and Cabo is well equipped with accommodations, amenities and attractions. Cabo San Lucas is located on the southernmost tip of the 1,000-mile-long Baja Peninsula. It’s bordered by the Pacific Ocean on the west and the Sea of Cortez on the east. The town is about 40 minutes southwest of the airport. Cabo San Lucas is the undisputed tourist hub of the region, but visitors sometimes choose to stay in quieter San José del Cabo, a quieter town east of Cabo San Lucas, on the other side of the tourist corridor — more on that later. So where should you stay on your next trip to Cabo? It all depends on the experience you’re looking for. Consider these six distinct neighborhoods for your Cabo vacation. And if you want to enjoy regular getaways to your favorite neighborhood, take a peek at Pacaso's co-owned second homes in Los Cabos. 1. The Marina Cabo is known as one of the best sport fishing destinations in the world, so it’s no wonder there is a vibrant marina area. It’s the base for most fishing charters and whale watching cruises, but it’s also a great place to stay. You’ll find charming hotels, a vibrant nightlife scene and plenty of great dining. Seafood restaurants abound, some of which have a “you hook it, we’ll cook it” policy, meaning that you can bring whatever you’ve caught back to the restaurant and have it expertly prepared. Part of the Malecon — Cabo’s waterfront promenade — is home to what’s known as the Marina Golden Zone. It’s a luxury shopper’s paradise, with boutiques and easy access to the Puerto Paraiso Mall. 2. Downtown Downtown is a great choice for travelers who want a more affordable and, perhaps, more authentic experience. You’ll find a range of accommodations at different price points, a charming town square and authentic Mexican fare, often served up at family-owned restaurants. At open-air stalls and in boutiques, vendors sell a wide range of traditional arts and crafts, including ever-popular Talavera pottery and Taxco silver jewelry. Many tour operators have offices nearby, making downtown a perfect home base for travelers who plan on exploring the broader Baja California area. It’s also worth noting that two of Cabo’s most famous nightlife spots, El Squid Roe and Cabo Wabo, are located downtown. 3. Medano Beach Playa el Medano, or Medano Beach in English, is the epicenter of Cabo’s famous spring break scene. Its golden sand beaches are a hub of activity, with beachfront cantinas, watersports rentals and roaming vendors ready to tempt you to try and make a deal on a souvenir. Most of the accommodations in Medano Beach are in the high-rise hotels that line the beach and deliver incredible water views. You’ll find a range of options, from all-inclusive hotels to luxury properties to hotels geared toward revelers — think palapa-shaded swim-up bars and live DJs. 4. Pedregal A luxury enclave tucked away on a hillside overlooking the Pacific Ocean, Pedregal is where you’ll find the city’s most luxurious hotels and vacation rentals. Pedregal is the ideal neighborhood for those looking for rest and relaxation. Instead of raucous nightclubs, Pedregal’s after-dark scene is more about swanky hotel bars. The neighborhood also has quite the reputation among foodies. In addition to an organic farmers market every Wednesday and Saturday, Pedregal is where you’ll find great fine dining restaurants, many with incredible views as their backdrop. Visitors staying in Pedregal also have access to some incredibly pristine and beautiful beaches. They’re ideal for strolling, relaxing in a lounge chair or watching the sunset, but strong rip currents make it a dangerous place to swim. 5. Tourist Corridor The Tourist Corridor is a 20-mile stretch of Sea of Cortez coastline that connects Cabo San Lucas with neighboring San José del Cabo. This area is home to many sprawling resorts, including many upscale options. You’ll also find a handful of boutique hotels for those who want a more intimate experience. Many of these exclusive properties are paired with world-class golf courses, making this the ideal neighborhood for those planning on hitting the links. There are more than a dozen golf courses in this area, including coveted courses designed by Jack Nicklaus and Robert Trent Jones II. Another key benefit to staying in the Tourist Corridor is that the beaches are swim- and snorkel-friendly (compared to the less-friendly riptides on the Pacific Coast). And while you won’t find the around-the-clock nightlife of Cabo San Lucas here, there are plenty of friendly seafood restaurants, low-key hangouts and a charming surf culture that’s worth experiencing. 6. San José del Cabo While it can’t exactly be considered a neighborhood in Cabo San Lucas, no Cabo exploration would be complete without talking about San José del Cabo. If you follow the Tourist Corridor east roughly 20 miles, you’ll find yourself in charming San José del Cabo. It’s a popular destination for people who enjoy art, history and a slower pace of life. This quiet town is simply bursting with Spanish colonial charm, boasting sites like the 18th-century Misión de San José del Cabo Añuití. On the coast, you’ll find Playa Hotelera, or Hotel Beach, home to a collection of all-inclusive resorts. For those looking for a resort vacation, these properties offer the best of both worlds: You’re away from the hustle and bustle of Cabo San Lucas and near the picturesque San José del Cabo, but you can still enjoy a resort experience. If you’d rather stay right in town, you’ll find an eclectic mix of boutique hotels, guesthouses and hostels. Pick your favorite … and become a local Most travelers can agree that Cabo San Lucas is a dynamic destination and the perfect place for a second home. Pacaso co-ownership puts vacation homes within reach for more people. For just ⅛ the cost, find your luxury vacation home in the Los Cabos area. Every home is professionally decorated, fully furnished and expertly managed. That means you can just arrive, unpack and sink your toes into the sand … or board a fishing charter … or play 18 holes … or dance the night away.
With warm weather, ocean breezes and an impossibly beautiful coastline, it’s hard to go wrong with a trip to Cabo San Lucas. But the very best time of year to visit this popular destination on Mexico’s Baja Peninsula depends on what you’re looking for. Here’s our breakdown of what to expect in Cabo during each of the four seasons. Winter The whole Los Cabos area (which includes both Cabo San Lucas and neighboring San José del Cabo) is a popular wintertime destination. Many people from colder climates in the United States like to spend the holidays in Cabo, where wintertime temperatures hover around the mid-70s. While you’ll want to bring a jacket for evening beach strolls and morning whale-watching expeditions, you can expect generally mild and comfortable conditions. And speaking of whale watching, winter is the peak season for spotting humpback whales. Between December and April, thousands of whales migrate from the cold waters of the Arctic to the warmer waters surrounding the Baja Peninsula to mate and give birth. Whale-watching expeditions are a popular activity, with guided tours leaving Cabo’s downtown marina throughout the day. Those interested in scuba diving may want to avoid winter travel to Cabo, as the water is its coldest during these months. Dive tours are available all year, though, so you may just want to pack a wetsuit. Spring Spring in Cabo San Lucas brings warmer temperatures … and spring breakers. Especially during the months of March and April, the town’s many resorts are absolutely packed with revelers, driving up hotel prices and making it more challenging to get into your favorite restaurants, shops and tours. The spring months are also popular with families, as temperatures peak in the mid-80s and storms during this time of year are rare. Family-friendly activities include horseback riding, surf lessons, visiting a turtle conservation center and — of course — plenty of beach time. After the spring break crowds have subsided and before the hot summer weather arrives, savvy travelers can enjoy this idyllic shoulder season, where temperatures are warm but not too hot and accommodations are more affordable. Summer Some like it hot, and if that’s you, summer might just be the best time to visit Cabo. Temperatures peak in July and August, with daytime highs regularly exceeding 90 degrees Fahrenheit. The pace of life is a little slower in the summer, which many visitors like. Days are more likely spent lounging by (or in) the pool or splashing in the ocean. Visitors in late July and throughout August should be prepared for the occasional summer rainstorm. August and September are typically peak hurricane season in the Pacific. While it’s rare for a hurricane to make landfall on the Baja Peninsula, the area does get the occasional tropical storm. Luckily, there are plenty of indoor activities to enjoy while you wait out the rain — time for a spa day? Fall Summer heat and unpredictable rainfall taper off in fall, making it a perfect time for outdoor activities like hiking, four-wheeling, diving, sailing, golfing and more. Fall is also considered the best time of year for sportfishing. Anglers from all over the world arrive in Cabo in search of tuna, blue marlin, wahoo and sailfish. In October and November, the town plays host to multiple fishing tournaments. While weather at home may be turning cold and rainy, Cabo offers a picture-perfect destination for a sunny fall getaway. You’ll beat the holiday rush and be more likely to snag that perfect patch of sand at Lover’s Beach or find the perfect lounge chair overlooking the pool. Enjoy year-round adventures in Cabo When you co-own a luxury second home in Los Cabos, there’s no bad time of year to visit. In fact, you’ll have ample days to relax in your professionally designed and decorated vacation home, while enjoying the best of the picturesque Baja Peninsula.
More than three million people visit Los Cabos (the region encompassing Cabo San Lucas and San José del Cabo) each year, and for good reason. Located on the tip of Mexico’s Baja Peninsula, the area boasts beautiful beaches, oceanfront resorts and a serious nightlife scene. But there’s more to Cabo San Lucas than suntans and margaritas. The region is simply bursting with unforgettable experiences, from golfing to hiking. Here are six ways to take your trip to Cabo to the next level. 1. Go whale watching Between December and April, humpback whales and gray whales migrate down to the warm waters of the Sea of Cortez and the Pacific Ocean to mate and give birth. Seeing the whales breach, slap their tails on the water and swim alongside their calves is nothing short of amazing, and every excursion offers a different experience. There are many tour companies offering whale watching tours in the area, and peak viewing months are January through March. Be sure to choose an operator dedicated to eco-friendly practices and responsible whale watching. 2. Take a cooking class with a local chef The Baja region has a rich culinary history, and there’s no better way to experience the local flavors than to cook a meal yourself, alongside an expert local chef. Whether you’re looking to learn how to make flavorful street tacos, fresh guacamole or authentic mole, it’s all available. Most classes start with a guided tour of a local market, where you’ll pick out fresh ingredients. Then, the fun really begins. Some classes even take place in the home of local Cabo residents, giving you a feel for everyday life. Not into cooking on vacation? A local food tour is another great option. 3. Hike in the Sierra La Laguna Biosphere Reserve Just 16 miles outside of San José del Cabo, Sierra La Laguna is a UNESCO protected biosphere known for its biodiversity. Most notably, it’s the main breeding sanctuary for two species of native hummingbirds. A day spent hiking in the reserve gives you the opportunity to spot the hummingbirds as well as more than 900 plant species, while escaping the crowds back in town. Multiple trails wind through the hilly terrain, ranging from quick day hikes to multi-day backpacking routes. Explore on your own, or take an excursion alongside an expert local guide. Either way, the best time of year to visit is between November and April to avoid both oppressive summer heat and the heavy rains that hit the area in early fall. 4. Sail to Land’s End at sunset Cabo’s most famous landmark is undoubtedly El Arco, the craggy, arched rock formation that rises up from the waters where the Sea of Cortez meets the Pacific. It’s the centerpiece of the area known as Land’s End and a popular tourist attraction. While it’s a beautiful boat ride any time of day, taking a sunset sail is definitely the way to go. Board a sailboat from the downtown marina in Cabo San Lucas and be whisked away. As you sip a cocktail, you’ll enjoy epic views of the Cabo coastline before encountering the main event: the rocky beauty of Land’s End set against the watercolor backdrop of the evening sky. 5. Take a day trip to Todos Santos A small coastal town at the foothills of the Sierra Laguna mountains, Todos Santos is big on charm and history. Once a Jesuit mission and then a hub for sugar production, today this town of 7,000 is both an artists’ haven and a surfer’s dream. Spend a day wandering the town’s cobblestone streets, marveling at the colorful colonial facades and browsing in local galleries and boutiques. Of course, save enough time to sink your toes into the surrounding white-sand beaches. 6. Soak up the sun on Playa del Amor Because it’s most easily accessed by boat, Playa del Amor, or Lover’s Beach, tends to be less crowded than the beaches in town. Tucked away between two rocky cliffs, this beach boasts golden sands, impossibly turquoise waters and some of the best swimming and snorkeling in the area. Be sure to swim only on the bay side — the Pacific side, comically called Playa del Divorcio (Divorce Beach) is known for its punishing waves and powerful riptides, so swimming is not recommended. Take a quick water taxi or glass bottom boat ride to arrive at this little stretch of paradise. Or, if you’re feeling like a little exercise, rent a kayak or stand up paddleboard and get there on your own. Find endless summer in Cabo There’s so much to do in and around the Los Cabos area, it would take a lifetime to see it all. Enjoy the sights and surf at a leisurely pace when you become the co-owner of a second home on the Baja Peninsula. With a luxury vacation home in Cabo, you’ll be perfectly poised to soak up the Mexican sunshine while exploring everything the area has to offer.
With pristine Sea of Cortez coastlines, Sierra de la Laguna Mountain hikes, world-class restaurants and over a dozen Cabo San Lucas golf courses to choose from, you’ll never run out of things to do in Cabo — especially if hitting the links is your favorite thing. We’ve rounded up 18 Cabo San Lucas golf courses on par with even the most experienced golfer’s expectations. Private lessons, pro shops and spa packages await: 1. Cabo Real Golf Course Average rating: 4.7 stars Neighborhood: La Playa Access: Public The Cabo Real Golf Course is a 18-hole championship course, designed by Robert Trent Jones Jr. that features a variety of terrain. The course offers holes chiseled into the foothills of rugged desert peaks, broad fairways and views of the Sea of Cores from every hole, — and you can enjoy them in every season. A part of the Questro Golf family, the Cabo Real Golf Course has hosted several prestigious tournaments, including two Senior Slams. 2. Palmilla Golf Club Average rating: 4.7 stars Neighborhood: Palmilla Access: Public Now is your chance to play a 27-hole course designed by the legendary Jack Nicklaus. The Palmilla Golf Club boasts stunning views of the Sea of Cortez and has three distinctive nines: the Mountain, the Ocean and the Arroyo. Each has its challenges and scenery, but they all share the same impeccable conditions and service. After a round, cool off at the Palmilla Grill and Cantina or book a luxury stay at the One&Only Palmilla five-star resort. 3. Club Campestre San Jose Average rating: 4.6 stars Neighborhood: San José Access: Public Club Campestre San Jose is a prestigious golf resort tucked in the rolling foothills of the Sierra de la Laguna Mountains, offering spectacular views of the Sea of Cortez and the surrounding desert landscape. It is a world-class experience for golfers with its Nicklaus-designed 18-hole championship course, luxurious accommodations and amenities — making it an ideal luxury vacation destination for solo travelers and couples alike. 4. Cabo Del Sol Golf Club Average rating: 4.6 stars Neighborhood: Del Sol Access: Public Cabo Del Sol Golf Club offers two championship courses, the Ocean Course and the Desert Course, designed by world-renowned golf architects Jack Nicklaus and Tom Weiskopf. The Ocean Course features stunning views of the Sea of Cortez from every hole, and the Desert Course winds through the desert landscape of the Baja Peninsula. This club also provides a variety of amenities and services for its guests, including a clubhouse, pro shop, practice facility, restaurant, bar and spa. 5. Questro Golf Average rating: 4.4 stars Neighborhood: La Playa Access: Public Questro Golf offers three world-class courses designed by renowned architects Jack Nicklaus, Tom Weiskopf and Greg Norman. Each has its unique features and challenges. Questro Golf also provides exceptional amenities and services, such as professional instruction, club rentals, practice facilities, restaurants and bars. 6. Cabo San Lucas Country Club Average rating: 4.4 stars Neighborhood: El Tezal Access: Public Cabo San Lucas Country Club offers a challenging and scenic 18-hole course designed by Roy Dye, plus a restaurant, bar, and driving range. The course features over 80 bunkers, a 610-yard hole, and stunning views of the desert, mountains and beach. Cabo San Lucas Country Club is a paradise for golfers of all levels, as well as those who want to enjoy the natural beauty of Los Cabos. 7. Vidanta Los Cabos Average rating: 4.3 stars Neighborhood: Zona Hotelera Access: Public Vidanta Los Cabos is a nine-hole course features challenging and enjoyable holes for golfers of all skill levels. Jack Nicklaus designed the course that offers rental clubs, golf carts, and caddies. Whether you are looking for a relaxing round of golf with your friends or a competitive tournament with your colleagues, Vidanta Los Cabos is for you. 8. Querencia Golf Course Average rating: 4.7 stars Neighborhood: La Querencia Access: Private Querencia Golf Course is an exclusive golf community with a stunning setting. Designed by Tom Fazio, the 18-hole par-72 course covers over 300 acres of scenic land. It also features a 12-acre practice facility, a clubhouse with dining and spa services, and a variety of tournaments and events throughout the year. 9. Diamante Average rating: 4.7 stars Neighborhood: Playa Diamante Access: Private Diamante is a luxury resort that offers two of the most spectacular golf courses in the world: the Dunes Course, designed by Davis Love III, and El Cardonal, designed by Tiger Woods. The resort also features a state-of-the-art spa, and a fitness and recreation center. There are multiple restaurants and bars, plus direct access to Diamante Beach. 10. El Dorado Average rating: 4.7 stars Neighborhood: Tourist Corridor Access: Private El Dorado is the perfect destination for travelers who want to enjoy the beauty and tranquility of the Baja California peninsula while also experiencing the comfort and elegance of a world-class resort. Another members-only Nicklaus course, El Dorado is perfectly positioned along two miles of rugged coastline between Cabo San Lucas and San José del Cabo. After playing 18 holes, grab your swimsuit and make a splash at the El Dorado Beach Club. 11. Solmar Golf Links Average rating: 4.7 stars Neighborhood: Playa El Suspiro Access: Public Designed by Greg Norman, Solmar Golf Links offers perfect views of the Pacific Ocean from every hole. The course features a variety of challenges, such as sand dunes, arroyos, cacti and palm trees. Solmar Golf Links is part of a resort and residential community with luxury accommodations, dining options, spa and beach club. 12. Old Lighthouse Golf and Ocean Club Average rating: 4.6 stars Neighborhood: Colinas del Cabo Access: Private The Old Lighthouse Golf and Ocean Club is a premier destination for golf enthusiasts and beach lovers. This exclusive resort features a golf course designed by Jack Nicklaus, complete with a panoramic view of the Pacific Ocean. The resort boasts luxurious accommodations, fine dining and spa services. 13. Quivira Golf Club Average rating: 4.6 stars Neighborhood: Colinas del Cabo Access: Private Jack Nicklaus designed Quivira Golf Club, which features challenging holes that test the skills of players of all levels. The golf club also has an elegant clubhouse, a fine dining restaurant and a spa for guests to enjoy after a round of golf. With beachfront access, it will be easy to spend an entire day enjoying the luxury amenities that this golf club and resort has to offer. 14. Chileno Bay Los Cabos Average rating: 4.6 stars Neighborhood: Playa el Tule Access: Private Chileno Bay Los Cabos is a luxury beachfront resort and residential complex featuring a Tom Fazio-designed championship course. The resort offers spacious villas and guest rooms with top-shelf amenities. Guests can enjoy swimming, snorkeling, golfing, dining and relaxing at the spa. Chileno Bay Los Cabos is the perfect destination for those seeking an upscale golfing getaway. 15. Rancho San Lucas Golf Club Average rating: 4.6 stars Neighborhood: Todos Santos Access: Private If you want a great golfing experience in Cabo San Lucas, swing by Rancho San Lucas Golf Club. The legendary Greg Norman designed this golf course that offers stunning views of the Pacific Ocean and the surrounding desert landscape. The course features 18 holes that challenge players of all skill levels, with five sets of tees and various hazards and bunkers. The course also has a state-of-the-art practice facility, pro shop, and a clubhouse with a restaurant and bar. 16. Costa Palmas Golf Club Average rating: 4.5 stars Neighborhood: East Cape Access: Private Costa Palmas Golf Club is the only course on the East Cape and one of a few walkable courses in the entire region. The club features an 18-hole championship course designed by Robert Trent Jones II, each six-hole section features a different landscape, and the last six holes offer views of the chic Costa Palmas Marina. The club also has a practice facility, pro shop, clubhouse and restaurant. Costa Palmas Golf Club is part of the Costa Palmas resort community, which includes a marina, beach club, hotel and luxury residences. 17. Puerto Los Cabos Golf Club Average rating: 4.5 stars Neighborhood: La Playa Access: Private Puerto Los Cabos Golf Club is a unique 27-hole golf resort featuring three distinct courses designed by two of the sport’s most legendary figures, Greg Norman and Jack Nicklaus. The club is on a pristine coastal stretch along the Sea of Cortez, just east of the San Jose del Cabo estuary. Puerto Los Cabos Golf Club is a mixed-use resort community with gated residential neighborhoods, hotels and a world-class marina. 18. Cove Club Average rating: 4 stars Neighborhood: Del Sol Access: Private Located in the resort community of Cabo Del Sol, Cove Club is a public-turned-private course reserved for club members and their guests. If you become a member (or have a friend who invites you to play), you’ll enjoy another challenging Jack Nicklaus-designed course. Be sure to stop at Bambi, a vintage Airstream-turned-beachside taco stand between holes 9 and 10. Cabo San Lucas golf courses can challenge amateur and seasoned players with their pro-designed fairways and greens. With so many ways to golf in Cabo San Lucas, knowing where to stay is essential. And if you fall in love with Cabo San Lucas, consider owning a second home in this Mexican paradise. Pacaso’s fully managed co-ownership model makes it easy and hassle-free.
There’s so much to love about Lake Tahoe, from its world-class skiing and snowboarding to the sparkling clear waters of the lake. Conveniently located right on the border of California and Nevada, this outdoor lover’s paradise draws more than 15 million visitors every year. And they stay on all sides of the lake, as each town offers something unique. If you’re considering visiting Lake Tahoe (or maybe even buying a second home there), picking the right location is key. Here’s what you need to know about the five most popular cities near Lake Tahoe so you can pick the right home base for all your adventures. 1. Tahoma: Quiet and natural While many parts of the Lake Tahoe area can get crowded during peak summer and winter seasons, the hamlet of Tahoma on the lake’s western shore remains blissfully low key. While you won’t find any glittering casinos or apres-ski hotspots here, you will find plenty of unspoiled lakefront and easy access to hiking trails and campgrounds. Accommodations in Tahoma include cozy cabin rentals, small lakeside resorts and cozy bed and breakfasts. Don’t miss: Meeks Bay Beach and Sugar Pine Point are perennial favorites for swimming, boating, picnicking and playing in the water. 2. Truckee: Action packed Located in the Sierra Nevada mountains just 12 miles from the north shore of Lake Tahoe, Truckee is the perfect home base for year-round outdoor adventures. In the winter months, Truckee is between 15 and 45 minutes from seven ski resorts, including over 3,000 skiable acres at Northstar and the beginner and intermediate-friendly terrain of Sugar Bowl. Once the snow melts, a whole new world of adventure awaits in and around Truckee. Go whitewater rafting on the Truckee River, hike Johnson Canyon for views of Donner Lake or golf at one of nine area courses. When you’re sufficiently tired, head to Truckee’s Old West-inspired downtown for California cuisine, locally brewed beers and live music. Accommodations in Truckee run the gamut, from small historic inns to luxury vacation rentals and mountainside resorts. Don’t miss: Learn about the famous Donner Party with a visit to Donner Memorial State Park and the Emigrant Trail Museum. 3. Incline Village: Upscale living The town of Incline Village is tucked away on the far north end of the lake, within a short drive of both Mt. Rose Ski Resort and Diamond Peak Ski Resort. It’s located right on the water, on beautiful Crystal Bay between Speedboat Beach and Lake Tahoe State Park. It was once a humble, 19th century logging town, named for its Great Incline Tramway, but today it’s arguably Lake Tahoe’s most upscale destination. Visitors can enjoy championship golf, luxury hotels, incredible dining and indulgent spas. The town also plays host to the Lake Tahoe Shakespeare Festival every summer. You’ll find accommodations at every price point in Incline Village, from budget-friendly inns to family-friendly hotels to massive, all-encompassing resorts. Don’t miss: Take a hike on the 19th century Flume Trail — 14 miles long and reaching a peak elevation of over 8,100 feet! It’s not a casual stroll, but adventurous hikers will be rewarded with unparalleled views from high above Lake Tahoe’s eastern shore. A shorter, 4.4-mile out-and-back trail is also an option. 4. Tahoe City: Family fun Located on the northwest shore of the lake, the Gold Rush town of Tahoe City is a great destination for families and history buffs alike. It’s located where the Truckee River meets Lake Tahoe, which means it’s also a great place for watersports. Warm-weather days are best spent splashing in the lake and barbecuing at Commons Beach, browsing the farmer’s market or floating the Truckee River. In the winter, skiers and snowboarders of all ages flock to nearby Homewood Mountain Resort and Palisades Tahoe. Formerly known as Squaw Valley, Palisades Tahoe is the site of the 1960 Winter Olympics. Feel like sledding instead? The Granlibakken Ski and Sled Area is the place to be. Year-round, Tahoe City boasts family-friendly dining, museums that showcase the interesting history of the region and casual shopping. When it’s time to rest, choose from casual inns, vacation rentals and cozy condos. Don’t miss: Get your adrenaline pumping at Tahoe Treetop Adventure Park. With elevated aerial trekking courses, a high ropes course and ziplines, it’s challenging fun for the whole family. 5. South Lake Tahoe: Something for everyone As the largest city along the lake, South Lake Tahoe is the ideal jumping-off point for any kind of Lake Tahoe vacation. You’ll find abundant natural spaces, plenty of recreational activities and incredible views, among other attractions. The South Lake Tahoe area straddles the California-Nevada border and sits right at the base of the world-class Heavenly Mountain Resort. In the winter, Heavenly boasts more skiable acres than any other Lake Tahoe resort, with everything from wide-open runs for beginners to challenging backcountry conditions for pros. During the summer months, ride the gondola to the peak for incredible lake views. Off the mountain, the south shore boasts watersports on the lake or two rivers, great hiking, championship golf, local craft breweries and casinos — on the Nevada side of town. As the largest lakeside town, you’ll have plenty of options for lodging. Choose from convenient ski-in, ski-out condos or hotels, rustic lodges, luxury resorts and more. Don’t miss: Just 12 miles south of town is Adventure Mountain, 40 groomed acres built for tubing. Groomed runs are designed for every age and thrill level, from mini tubers for the youngest visitors to long, fast runs up to 500 feet long. Live the lake life Can’t get enough of Lake Tahoe? Once you’ve found your favorite part of the Tahoe area, why not set down roots? With its year-round recreation, beautiful surroundings and convenient location, Lake Tahoe is the perfect second home destination. Pacaso second homes in Lake Tahoe gives you the benefits of owning a vacation property without having to shoulder the full cost. As a ⅛ owner of a Lake Tahoe second home, you’ll enjoy luxury living without the hassles of maintenance and management.
With more than 400 wineries, 90 tasting rooms, 14 Michelin-starred restaurants and picture-perfect weather, Napa Valley is a dream vacation destination. Known for producing some of the world's best wines, Napa Valley is 30 miles long and five miles in length, with over 45,000 acres of vineyards. Scattered across the lush valley are a variety of individual towns, each with its own charm and appeal. If you’re planning a trip to Napa Valley and you’re not sure where to stay, here’s a quick rundown of five of the most popular towns, from north to south. No matter which you choose, you’re within easy access of tasting rooms, wineries, restaurants, outdoor activities, art and more. 1. Calistoga Quiet, relaxed and tucked away on the very north end of the valley, Calistoga is known as a wellness destination, thanks to its natural hot springs. As the self-proclaimed “Spa Capital of Northern California,” Calistoga has more than two dozen spas and massage therapy salons, with some located inside luxury hotels. Lincoln Avenue is Calistoga’s main street, and it pairs small-town ambience with upscale shopping and dining. It’s best explored on foot, so you can stop in a local tasting room, browse local galleries and grab a bite to eat. Popular wineries located in Calistoga include Schramsberg Vineyards, Chateau Montelena and Vincent Arroyo. Without a doubt, the most famous is Castello di Amorosa, built to resemble a medieval castle. After a sip of their reserve wine, you might just think you’re in Tuscany. After a long day of wine tasting across the valley, there’s nothing quite like returning to your hotel for a mineral soak or a spa treatment. Luckily, many of the properties in Calistoga fit the bill. Check out Calistoga Spa Hot Springs, Indian Springs Calistoga or Solage Resort & Spa, to name a few. 2. St. Helena Just south of Calistoga, the town of St. Helena is best described as sophisticated and historic. The town is affectionately nicknamed “Napa Valley’s Main Street,” due to its central location. The half-mile long downtown is perfectly walkable, featuring boutiques, dessert shops, cafes and specialty boutiques. St. Helena is a dream for foodies. The Culinary Institute of America (CIA) at Greystone offers tours and cooking classes, while their Spice Islands Marketplace is where you can stock up on all things cooking related, including a selection of over 1,700 cookbooks. Gourmet farm-to-table restaurants abound in St. Helena, from the cozy outdoor patio at the Charter Oak to The Restaurant at nearby Auberge du Soleil, which boasts 13 consecutive Michelin stars. The wineries in St. Helena are known for their incredible views. Pack a picnic lunch and enjoy the vineyard views at Rombauer, watch the sunset over the vineyards at Joseph Phelps, or head high atop Spring Mountain for sweeping valley views from Barnett. St. Helena is known for its luxury and boutique accommodations. Stay just outside of town, surrounded by nature, at Meadowood Napa Valley. Or stay within walking distance of wineries at Southbridge or Wydown Hotel. Wine Country Inn & Cottages is a popular stay for those looking for an immersive Wine Country experience — the property is within a working vineyard. 3. Yountville Continuing south through the valley, Yountville is another can’t-miss foodie destination. Perhaps best known as the home of Thomas Keller’s famous restaurant, The French Laundry, Yountville has more Michelin stars per capita than any other town in the United States. Since Yountville is only about 1.5 square miles, exploring on foot is the way to go. Browse gourmet chocolate shops, art galleries and upscale boutiques. You also won’t want to miss the self-guided Yountville Art Walk, a great way to get some steps in before an award-winning dinner. Another way to get the lay of the land? Hire Napa Valley Balloons to take you on a hot air balloon ride high above the valley. Yountville is known for its luxurious accommodations, but you won’t find large international hotel chains here. The accommodations are mostly intimate boutique hotels, vacation rentals and bed and breakfasts. Bed and breakfasts in Yountville are a lovely way to stay, as many come with amenities like farm-to-table breakfasts, afternoon wine tastings and complimentary bikes so you can explore the ever-expanding Napa Valley Vine Trail. 4. Napa The town of Napa is the perfect place to stay for those who need easy access back to San Francisco or wine lovers on their first trip to Napa Valley. It’s also ideal for those who only have a few days to explore, as there are dozens of tasting rooms, wine bars and restaurants right in the heart of town. Napa’s historic downtown is big on charm, thanks to its riverfront location. On a sunny day, you’ll see kayakers paddling the Napa River. The most popular attractions in town include the Oxbow Public Market, a 40,000 square-foot marketplace with an eclectic mix of local food vendors, and the Napa Valley Film Festival, which happens every November. You’ll have your pick of accommodations in Napa, whether you prefer a large resort like the Carneros Resort and Spa, set on 27 bucolic acres, or a centrally located hotel like the Andaz Napa. You’ll also find some historic properties and quaint bed and breakfasts. 5. American Canyon An up-and-comer at the southern end of Napa Valley, American Canyon is popular with those who want to visit the valley on a budget. Choose from a range of national hotel chains and save your vacation dollars for a world-class dinner out or a case of your favorite cabernet. To access the majority of the wineries and restaurants, you’ll need to make the 10-mile drive to Napa, but don’t overlook everything American Canyon has to offer. The small town is known for its beautiful scenery. It’s located adjacent to a bay and wetlands, which makes it a dream destination for bird watchers — don’t miss the Napa River Bay Trail and Glass Beach. Say cheers to a second home in Napa Valley If you’re becoming a Napa Valley regular (or want to be!), owning a second home might be your best bet. Say goodbye to the cost and hassle of booking a hotel and hello to your own Wine Country wonderland. Pacaso offers co-ownership opportunities across Napa Valley, from wellness-focused Calistoga to historic St. Helena, and beyond. Ownership shares are available for as low as ⅛ the total home price, and every Pacaso home is professionally decorated, fully furnished and ideally located. Raise a toast to your own Wine Country retreat.
Once a tiny hot springs town, Steamboat Springs has now become one of Colorado’s most popular tourist destinations — especially in the summer. While the hot springs are still thriving, a local foodie scene and dozens of outdoor activities have sprung up as well. Read our guide to learn all about the top 22 Steamboat Springs summer activities that are perfect for the whole family to enjoy in 2023, including: 1. Marvel at Fish Creek Falls If you’re looking for a tranquil adventure in Steamboat Springs, head over to Fish Creek Falls. This scenic waterfall is one of the most popular attractions in the area, and it offers something for everyone. You can hike along the trails that surround the falls, enjoy a picnic at the shaded tables or cool off in the pristine water. The best time to go is early in the morning or late in the afternoon when the sun isn’t too harsh and the crowds are smaller. You can park in the main lot near the entrance for a small fee, or find free spots along the road if you don't mind walking a bit to reach the waterfall wonderland. 2. Stroll through Yampa River Botanic Park Yampa River Botanic Park is a beautiful oasis of flowers, ponds and trails that showcases the natural beauty of the Yampa Valley. You can stroll through the different gardens, each with its own theme and design, and enjoy the sights and smells of local plant species. If you’re feeling adventurous, you can rent a kayak to explore the Yampa River and a bike to pedal through the park. Or simply enjoy the native birds and wildlife while sitting on a park bench and watching the kayakers pass by. Whether you want to relax or be active, this park is a great place to enjoy summertime Steamboat activities. 3. Relax at Steamboat Ski Resort Steamboat Ski Resort is a popular destination for winter sports enthusiasts, but it also offers plenty of fun activities for the summer season. Take advantage of the mild climate with a round of golf or set out on one of the many hiking trails. This resort is full of amenities that will help you relax and recharge for more adventuring the next day. Book excursions like horseback riding and ziplining, or become a regular at the resort’s nightly sunset happy hours. 4. Take a dip at Old Town Hot Springs This historic recreational facility offers eight pools with healing mineral water, a world-class gym and a variety of fitness classes to sign up for while you're in town. This magical place is so much more than a hot spring — not only can you enjoy soaking in the warm water, but your whole family can slide down waterslides and practice new yoga poses together. You can also explore the nearby downtown area of Steamboat Springs, which has many shops, local restaurants and attractions to enjoy. Whether you’re a local or a visitor, a visit to Old Town Hot Springs is one of the best things to do in Steamboat Springs. 5. Try a new sport at Howelsen Hill Ski Area Howelsen Hill Ski Area is a historic and scenic destination for outdoor enthusiasts in Steamboat Springs, Colorado. Whether you are looking for a relaxing or adventurous way to spend a summer day, you’ll find plenty of options at this versatile park. Picnics are a popular activity for families to enjoy in the summer, but skiing is also available. Yes, you read that right — skiing in the summer. You can even ski jump in the summer at Howelsen Hill Ski Area, thanks to the plastic surface that covers the jumps. Watch the athletes practice their skills or sign up for a lesson and try it yourself. 6. Become a history buff at the Tread of Pioneers Museum If you’re looking for a fun and educational way to spend a summer day in Steamboat Springs, you need to visit the Tread of Pioneers Museum. This museum showcases the rich history and culture of the Yampa Valley and its people, from the Ute Native Americans to the early settlers and ranchers. Explore exhibits on local skiing, mining and agriculture practices. You can also see historic buildings such as a pioneer home, a schoolhouse, a cabin and a barn. The museum offers guided tours, special events and interactive programs for all ages. Whether you are interested in learning about the past or enjoying the present, the Tread of Pioneers Museum is one of the top Steamboat Springs things to do. 7. Bike the Yampa River Core Trail Steamboat Springs is known as “Bike Town USA,” thanks to its many paved trails and some 500 miles of single-track mountain biking trails. For casual cyclists, the 7-mile Yampa River Core Trail is a great place to start. This picturesque paved trail follows the path of the Yampa River through town, connecting one side of Steamboat with the other. On a warm summer day, it’s a popular spot for both cyclists and walkers, many of whom stop along the way to grab a bite to eat or a cold drink. Since the path is mostly flat and you can hop on and off wherever you want, it’s a popular activity for families with kids of all ages. 8. Have a ball at Howelsen Ice Arena Howelsen Ice Arena is a year-round facility that offers winter activities like ice skating and hockey, making it one of the coolest things to do in Steamboat Springs in the summertime. If you want to learn how to skate or improve your skills, you can sign up for a group or private lesson with one of the certified instructors. Lessons are available for all ages and levels, from beginner to advanced. You can also join a hockey clinic or camp if you’re interested in playing the sport while you’re in town. 9. Soak away stress at Strawberry Park Hot Springs Practice self-care at Strawberry Park Hot Springs. This scenic destination offers a variety of natural mineral pools with different temperatures and sizes, surrounded by lush forests and mountains. After soaking in the healing waters, enjoy a massage or yoga class and explore the nearby trails. Reservations are recommended. 10. Sample the seasonal bounty at the Steamboat Springs Farmers Market Come hungry to the Main Street Steamboat Farmers Market. With a friendly and upbeat vibe, the market is the best place to taste locally grown produce and get a sense of the local culture. Taking place every Saturday from early June through mid-September on Main Street, the market gathers vendors offering fruits and vegetables, fresh baked goods and locally ranched bison, plus crafts by area artisans. Arrive early to shop before the crowds, then stay to enjoy some live music. 11. Hike the Zirkel Circle With almost 160,000 acres of pristine wilderness, the Mount Zirkel Wilderness area is a must-visit for outdoor adventurers. While there are some 150 miles of hiking trails in the area, the Mount Zirkel Loop Trail is a perennial favorite for hikers looking for a challenge. The trail spans 10.3 miles and has almost 2,500 feet of elevation gain, leading intrepid hikers through expansive wilderness areas and meadows filled with summer wildflowers, and rewarding them with gorgeous alpine lakes. At the midpoint of the hike, you’ll find yourself at Gilpin Lake — a perfect place for a picnic lunch. Pro tip: The loop hike can be done either clockwise or counterclockwise, but counterclockwise gives you a more gradual ascent. 12. Take a day trip to Steamboat Lake The 27-mile scenic drive from Steamboat Springs to Steamboat Lake is nothing short of beautiful, and the lake at the end of your drive doesn’t disappoint either. Pack a picnic and head to the lake for the day, where you can rent boats, canoes and paddle boards. Fishing and hiking are also popular activities at the lake, which is nestled below Hahns Peak. If a day isn’t enough, there’s also on-site camping and cabin rentals. 13. Take flight on a hot air balloon ride On crisp summer mornings, look up and you’re likely to see colorful hot air balloons dotting the sky over Steamboat Springs. A hot air balloon ride is a wonderful (and exhilarating!) way to take in the beauty of the whole Yampa Valley from above. Multiple purveyors in town offer hot air balloon rides. Arrive at sunrise and watch your balloon inflate. Then climb into the basket and allow yourself to be whisked away over 1,000 feet above town. 14. Take a day trip to Mount Werner Mount Werner is a popular ski resort in the winter, but it also offers many activities in the warmer months. Take a scenic gondola ride to the top of the mountain, where you can enjoy breathtaking views of the Yampa Valley and the surrounding peaks. You can also hike or bike on one of the many trails that crisscross the mountain, or try your hand at disc golf. If you’re feeling more adventurous, you can zipline through the trees or climb the ropes course or the rock wall. 15. Take a Steamboat Springs food tour If you’re looking for a delicious way to spend a summer day in Steamboat Springs, you might want to consider joining a Steamboat Springs food tour. The guided walking tour takes you to some of the best local restaurants and cafes in town where you can sample a variety of dishes and drinks, and learn about the history and culture of the area. You might even be able to meet some of the chefs and owners behind the local food scene. A food tour is a great way to explore the culinary scene in Steamboat Springs, as well as discover some hidden gems and local favorites you might not find on your own. 16. Gaze over the town atop Emerald Mountain Emerald Mountain is a popular destination for outdoor enthusiasts in Steamboat Springs. If you enjoy hiking, you can choose from several trails that range from easy to challenging. Some of the trails offer panoramic views of the Yampa Valley and the Steamboat Ski Resort, while others take you through lush forests and meadows. You can also hike to the historic Howelsen Hill ski jump, where many Olympic athletes have trained. There are also horseback riding and biking opportunities available. Whatever you choose to do on Emerald Mountain, you will have a memorable summer day in Steamboat Springs. 17. Tube down the Yampa River One of the best ways to enjoy a summer day in Steamboat Springs is to go tubing down the Yampa River. The Yampa River is a scenic and refreshing waterway that flows through the heart of the town. Tubing is a simple and inexpensive way to experience the river, as you just need a tube, a life jacket and some sunscreen. The most popular section of the river for tubing is from 5th Street Bridge to James Brown Soul Center of the Universe Bridge — a 2-mile stretch that takes about an hour and a half to complete. This section has gentle rapids and waves that add some excitement to the ride, but nothing too challenging or dangerous. You can also extend your trip by starting from Fetcher Park or ending at Rotary Park, which will add another mile or two to your journey. 18. Explore King Solomon Falls If you’re looking for a thrilling way to spend a summer day in Colorado, you might want to check out King Solomon Falls near Steamboat Springs. This hidden gem is a spectacular waterfall that plunges into a deep pool surrounded by cliffs and rocks. It is a great spot for swimming and fishing — even cliff jumping for the risktakers in your group. After about a mile of hiking, you’ll be greeted by a stunning sight of water cascading down from about 70 feet into a clear pool. King Solomon Falls is a unique and beautiful destination that offers a lot of fun and excitement for those who are willing to make the effort. It is also a well-kept secret that not many people know about, so you might have it all to yourself if you go on a weekday or early in the morning. 19. Camp under the stars at Routt National Forest Routt National Forest is a hub of activity for travelers coming to Steamboat Springs and seeking adventure. Hiking, horseback trail rides, fishing and more are a short walk away when you camp in the forest. Some popular trails include Fish Creek Falls, Mad Creek and Rabbit Ears Pass. You can also kayak, raft or tube on the Yampa River that flows through Steamboat Springs. After a long day of thrills, cool off in one of the many nearby creeks and prepare yourself for a gorgeous night under the stars. 20. Fly over Steamboat Springs in a helicopter tour For an unforgettable way to experience the beauty of Steamboat Springs in the summer, consider taking a helicopter tour. This tour will give you a bird's-eye view of the stunning scenery, from the lush green valleys and meadows to the majestic peaks and ridges of the Rocky Mountains. You’ll also get to see some of the landmarks and attractions of Steamboat Springs, such as the Steamboat Ski Resort, the Yampa River and Fish Creek Falls. You can choose from different tour packages and durations, depending on your budget and preferences. Some tours even offer landing options, where you can get out of the helicopter and explore some of the scenic spots on foot. A helicopter tour is your opportunity to see Steamboat Springs from a different perspective. 21. Dance the day away at a concert If you’re looking for some entertainment in Steamboat Springs, you might want to check out concerts that are held throughout the year. Whether you enjoy rock, jazz, bluegrass or classical music, there is a genre for everyone at these events. Music on the Green is held at Yampa River Botanic Park, Steamboat Free Summer Concerts are performed at the Howelsen Hill Amphitheater and the Strings Music Festival hosts artists at different venues across Steamboat Springs for a small fee. 22. Two-step at the local rodeo One of the most popular events in Steamboat Springs is the Steamboat Pro Rodeo, which runs every Friday and Saturday night from late June to late August. The summer rodeo in Steamboat Springs is a thrilling spectacle that showcases the skills and courage of cowboys and cowgirls from all over the country. You can watch bull riding, barrel racing, team roping, bronc riding and more. The rodeo also features entertainment for the whole family, such as clown acts, mutton busting, a calf scramble and live music. The rodeo grounds are located just a few minutes from downtown Steamboat Springs, where you can enjoy shopping, dining and nightlife. Although Steamboat Springs' summer activities are full of adventure, it’s also enjoyable year-round, making it an ideal location for a second home. If the breathtaking views, relaxing hot springs and adorable downtown keep you coming back for more, then consider co-owning a luxurious second home in Steamboat Springs.
If you love the activities that make Vail, Colorado, a famous winter destination, you’ll love all of the things to do in Vail in summer as well. Vail is a resort town with plenty to offer solo adventures, couples and families who are eager to enjoy Colorado’s hiking trails, scenic mountain views and food scene. From golf and garden exploring to fly fishing and white water rafting, our guide offers 25 top activities to enjoy during your trip to Vail this summer. 1. Wander the Betty Ford Alpine Gardens Topping our list is one of the most popular things to do in Vail. As the world’s highest-altitude botanical garden at 8,200 feet, the Betty Ford Alpine Gardens are bursting with color during the summer months. More than 120,000 visitors wander this idyllic spot every year. If you have a green thumb, you can even do some drop-in volunteer gardening on Mondays and Thursdays. 2. Visit the Colorado Snowsports Museum and Hall of Fame The Colorado Snowsports Museum and Hall of Fame is a must-see attraction for anyone who loves winter sports like skiing and snowboarding. The museum showcases the history and culture of snowsports in the state, from early pioneers to modern champions. You can explore exhibits featuring artifacts, memorabilia, photographs and videos that tell the stories of the people and places that shaped Colorado's snowsports scene. 3. Sample 10th Mountain Whiskey & Spirits 10th Mountain Whiskey & Spirits Co. is a distillery that produces a variety of spirits, such as bourbon, rye, vodka and gin, using local ingredients and water from the Rocky Mountains. The distillery is named after the 10th Mountain Division, a group of ski soldiers who trained in Colorado during World War II and fought in the Alps and Apennines. In the summer, visitors can enjoy tours and tastings at the distillery, as well as live music and events. 4. Try new sports at Vail Ski Resort Vail Ski Resort is one of the most popular ski destinations in Colorado — and the entire country. In summer, Vail Ski Resort has a scenic gondola, mountaintop yoga, hiking, fly fishing, golf and bike hauls. 5. Sip some brews at Vail Brewing Company Vail Brewing Company is a craft brewery with two taprooms — one in Eagle-Vail and one in Vail Village. Customers can enjoy the beers on tap or take them home in cans and growlers. The brewery hosts live music, food trucks and other events throughout the year. 6. Explore Lionshead Village Scenic Lionshead Village offers a variety of lodging options — from luxury hotels to cozy condos — as well as shops, restaurants and entertainment venues. To keep vacation costs low, visitors can take advantage of the free shuttle service that connects Lionshead Village with Vail Village and other nearby attractions. 7. Enjoy outdoor concerts at The Amp Fittingly located next door to the Betty Ford Alpine Gardens, the Gerald R. Ford Amphitheater is home to all kinds of outdoor entertainment, from the popular Hot Summer Nights weekly concert series to chorale, theater and classical music performances. “The Amp,” as it’s affectionately known, offers both a covered seating area and grassy hillside, the latter providing beautiful views of the surrounding hills. 8. Taste summer’s bounty at the Vail Farmers Market If you are looking for a fun and delicious way to hang out in Vail in the summer, you should check out the Vail Farmers Market. For more than two decades, the Sunday market features dozens of tents full of local food and artisan products. You can taste delicious treats made in Colorado and browse through a variety of handmade jewelry, pottery, paintings and clothing. 9. Play outside at Piney River Ranch Piney River Ranch is a popular destination for outdoor enthusiasts who want to enjoy the natural beauty of summer in Vail. The ranch offers hiking, fishing, canoeing, horseback riding and wildlife viewing. The ranch is located at the edge of Piney Lake, which reflects the majestic peaks of the Gore Range. The ranch also has a lodge and cabins for guests who want to stay overnight and experience the tranquility of the wilderness. 10. Play a round of golf surrounded by mountains The award-winning Vail Golf Club is an 18-hole, par 71 course surrounded by incredible vistas of the Gore Range. With tree-lined fairways and challenging bunkers and ponds, this course will test your skill. The best part? Because of Vail’s high altitude, your ball will fly about 10% farther! 11. Have an adventure at Epic Discovery A true mountain playground for daredevils of all ages, Epic Discovery is home to the Forest Flyer Mountain Coaster that weaves its way 3,400 feet down the mountain. You’ll also find zip lines for kids and adults, a climbing wall, a bungee trampoline and an aerial adventure course and summer inner tubing on a special course. 12. Get your blood pumping at Vail Nordic Center Vail Nordic Center is a popular destination for cross-country skiing and snowshoeing in the winter, and it offers a variety of activities in the summer. You can enjoy hiking, biking, disc golf and yoga on the scenic trails and fields of the center. The center has a pro shop that rents and sells equipment, clothing and accessories for your outdoor adventures. 13. Ride the Eagle Bahn Gondola The Eagle Bahn Gondola is a scenic ride that takes you from Lionshead Village to the top of Eagle's Nest in Vail, Colorado. In the summer, you can enjoy breathtaking views of the Rocky Mountains and the valley below, as well as access to various activities such as hiking, biking and zip lining. The gondola operates daily from late June to early September and on weekends in May and October. The ride takes about 15 minutes each way and can accommodate up to 10 people per cabin. 14. Take a self-guided art walk at Vail Village Vail Village is a charming Bavarian-style ski village, making it a lovely place to spend an afternoon. Discover the incredible 55 works of public art that are spread throughout town. To see them all, you’ll want to stop by the welcome center to pick up a free map. Guided tours are also available during the summer. 15. Catch a sunrise or sunset at Bighorn Park Bighorn Park is a popular destination for nature lovers and outdoor enthusiasts in the summer, perfect for hiking, biking, fishing and camping. The park is home to a large herd of bighorn sheep, which can be seen grazing on the grassy slopes or climbing the rocky cliffs. The park also has stunning views of the surrounding mountains and valleys, especially at sunrise and sunset. 16. Make friends with a llama Yes, really. Paragon Guides offers unique guided hikes with a llama to carry your gear and a picnic lunch. Gentle and curious creatures, llamas turn an ordinary hike into a memorable adventure. Kids are welcome, and you can choose from a variety of hiking trails to fit your group’s abilities and preferences. 17. Explore the Vail Nature Center The Vail Nature Center is located on a 7-acre 1940s homestead between a mountain meadow and the banks of Gore Creek. Explore the many trails on your own, or sign up for a birding tour, wildflower viewing, stargazing excursion or nature tour. The center also offers fun and educational programs for kids. 18. Go whitewater rafting Cool off on a hot summer day with an exhilarating ride down the Colorado and Arkansas Rivers. Local outfitters offer a range of rafting options, from kid-friendly introductory trips to technical rafting experiences with rapids up to Class IV. Looking for something a little more relaxing? Opt for a low-key float trip through Browns Canyon, where your guide will do all the paddling. 19. Sample wines from around the world Root & Flower is a chic wine bar that’s perfectly suited for a pre-dinner happy hour or a nightcap after a day of adventures. The menu features 50 wines by the glass, as well as a hand-picked selection of bottles from all over the world. And be sure to check out the bar’s wine tasting classes. 20. Enjoy tubing in Vail Relish in the thrill of tubing in Vail while being surrounded by the greenery and beauty of the Colorado mountains. Eagle's Nest Tubing is a 550-foot tubing hill that is accessed by the Adventure Bahn carpet at Adventure Ridge. It’s open from June to October, but it requires a scenic gondola lift ticket to access. 21. Fly through the sky on a zip line Soar through the air and enjoy the scenic views of Colorado. If you are looking for a zip line adventure in Vail, you have plenty of options to choose from in the summer. You can zip line over the Colorado River, through the alpine forests or across the Rocky Mountains. Tours vary in length, difficulty and price, but they all guarantee a memorable and exciting experience. Whether you are a beginner or an expert, you can find a zip line tour that suits your level of adventure and budget. 22. Bike Vail’s trails Vail offers many trails and paths for cyclists of all levels and abilities. You can enjoy the fresh air and stunning views as you pedal along the paved and dirt roads or cruise through downtown Vail. Whether you want to challenge yourself with steep climbs and descents, or relax and enjoy the scenery at a leisurely pace, there is a route for you in Vail. 23. See Vail on horseback Horseback riding in Vail is a great way to enjoy the scenic beauty of summer in the Rocky Mountains. Whether you are a beginner or an expert rider, you can find a trail that suits your skill level and preferences. You can choose from half-day, full-day or overnight trips, and explore the alpine meadows, aspen forests and wildflower fields with your friendly steed. 24. Spend the day fly fishing Vail is a popular destination for fly fishing enthusiasts, as it offers a variety of rivers and streams to explore. Some of the best spots for fly fishing in Vail are Eagle River, Gore Creek and the Colorado River. You will need a fishing license, which you can buy online or at local shops. Enjoy the scenic views and the fresh mountain air that make Vail a perfect place for fly fishing. 25. See it all with a hot air balloon ride If you’re looking for one of the most thrilling things to do in Vail in summer, consider taking a hot air balloon ride. A hot air balloon ride is a great way to experience the stunning scenery of the Rocky Mountains from a bird's-eye view. You can soar over the lush green valleys and sparkling rivers, enjoying the peace and tranquility of the clear blue sky. Vail, Colorado, is a nature lover's dream. Although the town is famous for its winter sports scene, there are plenty of things to do in Vail in summer as well. If you could see yourself in this year-round paradise, skip the vacation rentals and consider investing in a second home in Vail.
Sit back, close your eyes and picture your dream vacation destination. Are you envisioning warm tropical breezes, swaying palm trees and tropical drinks with little umbrellas? Or are you thinking of white-capped mountain peaks, falling snow and a crackling fire? When it comes to the eternal beach vs. mountains debate, both are clear winners for differing reasons. Check out our list of five things to love about each option. Why beaches are best 1. Year-round warm weather Especially for travelers looking to escape harsh winters, most beach destinations offer sunny skies, balmy weather and warm breezes much of the year. Did you know Miami’s average high temperature in February is 75 degrees? Even Southern California beach communities like San Diego, Malibu and Newport Beach boast beautiful year-round weather. 2. Wonderful watersports While many beachgoers simply want a lounge chair and a good book, beach getaways are also great for the more active set. Depending on the beach you choose, you’ll find all kinds of great on-the-water (and in-the-water) activities. Spend sunny days sailing, fishing, kayaking, swimming, paddle boarding, surfing or even parasailing. 3. A sunny social scene You’re not the only one who loves the beach — a vibrant social scene usually emerges as people flock to the shore. Whether you prefer casual beachside restaurants, al fresco fine dining, or clubs and nightlife, you can find it all in many beach towns. 4. Ample opportunities to relax There’s something about the sound of crashing waves that washes away all your worries. Go ahead: Tie up that hammock between two palm trees, climb in and start to unwind! 5. Easy to access Getting to a great beach doesn’t require lots of logistics and multiple modes of transportation. Jetsetters can easily access popular beach destinations on both the Pacific and Atlantic coasts with direct flights, even if you only have a few days to spend. Why mountains are a must 1. Cozy time Is there anything more idyllic than a mountain home in winter? With snow falling outside and a warm fire inside, a mountain retreat is the perfect place for a winter getaway. Who needs to go outside, anyway? 2. Outdoor adventures When the mountains are calling, bundle up and head out to enjoy skiing, snowboarding, snowshoeing, snowmobiling or even dogsledding! Plus, if you’re lucky enough to have a second home in a popular resort destination like Lake Tahoe, Vail or Aspen, you could even enjoy ski-in, ski-out access. 3. Apres-ski activities After a long day on the slopes, there’s no better way to relax than with a craft cocktail and an award-winning meal. In popular ski destinations like Breckenridge and Park City, you’ll find world-class cuisine just steps from the ski lifts. 4. Natural beauty There’s something almost magical about life in the mountains. A mountain retreat encourages disconnecting from the hustle and bustle (set the smartphone down!) and reconnecting with the simpler pleasures of life. Gorgeous mountain vistas and incredible flora and fauna don’t hurt, either! 5. Superb solitude Do you hear that? It’s the sound of … silence. People seeking peace and quiet often head to higher altitudes to escape the crowds, surround themselves with nature and enjoy the myriad benefits of a little time to themselves. Beach vs. mountain: Find your ideal escape No matter your choice, Pacaso offers a smarter way to buy and own a second home. As a co-owner of a Pacaso, you never have to worry about maintenance or management. Simply arrive, unpack and hit the beach — or the slopes. Check out our latest listings.
Impeccably designed, super exclusive and located in the best locations, members-only social clubs are the sought-after places to be in Los Angeles. While there are plenty of clubs to choose from — if you can score an invitation, that is — Soho House is easily the most iconic brand on the social club scene. Soho House offers multiple locations in the greater Los Angeles area, each with a distinct vibe. Soho House West Hollywood is the original LA location. Just down the street you’ll find Holloway House, the newest LA location. Soho Warehouse in downtown LA has a cool industrial vibe. Finally, Little Beach House Malibu is an intimate waterfront oasis away from the hustle and bustle of the city. Among the Southern California creative set, a Soho House membership is coveted: You need to complete an online application, have referrals from two current members, and make it past the membership committee, which reviews applications each month. If you make it in, you’ll have a choice between a single club membership or one that gives you access to most Soho House locations around the world — including the other LA-area clubs. Here’s what you need to know about the LA locations so you can set your sights on the one you love the most. And if you're looking to visit SoHo regularly, consider co-owning a second home in Los Angeles. Soho House West Hollywood Located in the heart of Sunset Boulevard, Soho House West Hollywood is an incredible 20-story glass building with panoramic Los Angeles views from the rooftop garden. It features spaces for both work and play, like meeting spaces, a restaurant, red velvet screening room and a calendar full of exclusive events. It’s also an art lover’s paradise. Soho House West Hollywood is home to an incredible collection of artwork by artists born, based or trained in LA. The entire collection was refreshed in 2023, so there’s always something new to see. Holloway House Also located in West Hollywood, Holloway House was added to the Soho House portfolio in 2022. Lovers of the Mid-Century Modern vibe will love this location, which also has a more casual feel than other Soho House locations. Holloway House offers a rooftop deck, meeting space, a restaurant with booths clad in burgundy leather, and plenty of live music and events. Like many Soho House clubs, there are overnight bedrooms to book just like a hotel. While members will get the best rates on their pick of 34 rooms with five distinct layouts, non-members are able to book an overnight stay, which is a great way to see the club for yourself. Soho Warehouse Soho Warehouse has a look and feel all its own. Located in a converted warehouse-turned-recording studio in downtown LA, it has an industrial-chic aesthetic and is the only Los Angeles Soho House property with a rooftop pool. With interiors that showcase local street art, Soho Warehouse is the perfect place to find creative inspiration. The on-site drawing room regularly hosts events and creative workshops. Soho Warehouse also features a two-story gym with a boxing ring, garden, restaurant, 48 bedrooms and an outdoor art commission by Shepard Fairey. Little Beach House Malibu Soho House’s Malibu outpost is a chic and serene destination. Located in an oceanfront building right off the Pacific Coast Highway and next door to Nobu, Little Beach House Malibu is the most intimate of all the LA houses. It’s also ultra-exclusive. Only existing Soho House members with an add-on Malibu Plus membership are invited in. If you can manage an invitation, you’ll be rewarded with views of Carbon and Surfrider beaches. There are plenty of places to work, relax and congregate, from an open air bar to an indoor sitting room and a sun-drenched terrace. During low tide, you can descend the ladder to the sand and take a walk on the beach. Soho House for non-members Can’t wrangle an official invitation for membership? There are two other ways to experience the Soho House brand for yourself. First, enjoy a co-working day at Soho Works. Located in West Hollywood and with the same gorgeous aesthetic as all Soho House properties, Soho Works features meeting rooms, desks, lounge areas and a communal kitchen for creative professionals. Monthly memberships are available in a range of tiers, based on how often you visit and what kind of space you need. Second, Soho Home Studio on Melrose is a furniture and interior design store that features many of the same pieces you’ll find in Soho House properties around the world. Grab a drink from the on-site coffee shop and spend some time picking out furnishings that will make your home feel like a private Soho House. Discover your own Southern California getaway Soho House clubs aren’t the only way to live your best life in Southern California. Pacaso puts luxury second homes within reach in many crave-worthy neighborhoods. Become a co-owner of a professionally designed and decorated property — it’s a place you can call home every time you visit LA.
The social club scene in Los Angeles has been the stuff of legend for decades. It’s where Hollywood celebrities gather, red carpet events abound and powerful business leaders meet to make connections. Soho House West Hollywood was the club that started it all, with an envy-inducing Sunset Boulevard location and killer views. Today, it’s just one of many members-only clubs, each catering to a specific clientele and offering a unique set of amenities. Ready to get your name on the list for one of Los Angeles’ hottest private clubs? Here’s our rundown of the best of the best, so you can find your favorite. 1. Soho House West Hollywood The scene Soho House West Hollywood is one of three LA locations and, with more than 110,000 members worldwide, SoHo House is the most well known brand in the world of private clubs. The West Hollywood venue wows with floor-to-ceiling windows, epic Hollywood Hills views, a vintage wood-paneled bar and a 50-seat screening room. The Sunday brunch is easily the biggest draw. The clientele The vibe at Soho House is glamorous and highly focused on privacy. Members must turn in their phones upon entry, due to the strict no photos policy. The membership list is equally hush-hush. The club has even been known to deny membership to celebrities who bring with them a large paparazzi following. Becoming a member The membership committee reviews applications each month. You’ll need to complete an online application and have referrals from two current members. If you’re accepted, you’ll be able to choose from a single-club membership, just for SoHo West Hollywood, or one that gives you access to Soho House locations around the world. For members under 27, the annual cost is $1,351 for one club and $2,481 for all clubs. For those over 27, the single membership cost is $2,481 and the all-club membership is $4,961. Looking to visit SoHo West Hollywood regularly? Consider owning a second home in Los Angeles. Pacaso makes it easier with co-ownership. Looking to visit SoHo West Hollywood regularly? Consider owning a second home in Los Angeles. Pacaso makes it easier with co-ownership. 2. Soho Warehouse The scene While it’s part of the Soho House brand, Soho Warehouse has a look and feel all its own. It’s housed in a seven-story former warehouse building and showcases industrial design and street art from the surrounding downtown area — don’t miss the outdoor commission by Shepard Fairey. Soho Warehouse boasts a 48-room hotel, rooftop pool and a two-story gym with a boxing ring. In the basement, you’ll find the Warehouse Studio, a creative space that hosts workshops and events for members. The clientele Soho Warehouse’s convenient downtown location means it’s always bustling with the effortlessly cool. There’s an unofficial “no suits” policy, giving a casually upscale feel throughout. Artistic types are always coming and going, taking advantage of meeting space, dining, fitness spaces or simply soaking up the sun on the chic rooftop patio. Becoming a member Just like SoHo House West Hollywood, prospective members must complete an online application and have referrals from two current members. A single club membership for members under 27 is $1,341 a year for a single club and $2,464 for all clubs. Members over 27 pay $2,683 yearly for a single club membership and $4,928 for all clubs. 3. Jonathan Club The scene Jonathan Club is undoubtedly on the more traditional end of the LA social clubs, thanks in large part to its storied history. It was founded in 1895 and today includes two locations: the towering, 12-story European Renaissance-styled Town Club in downtown LA and the Beach Club, which has been the Santa Monica outpost for members since 1927. Town Club amenities include wellness facilities, on-site overnight accommodations, a rooftop terrace and signature dining. The three-acre Beach Club has a restaurant, bar, lounge and plenty of beach access. The clientele Given its long history and traditional feel, the club appeals to those in classic professional careers — think doctors, lawyers and politicians. While they don’t publicize a list of members, it’s safe to say its membership as a whole enjoys socializing and networking. Jonathan Club hosts more than 200 events throughout the year, including plenty of family-friendly events. Becoming a member Jonathan Club is notoriously tight-lipped about the details of becoming a member, but it’s commonly known that the application and vetting process can take more than a year, and that a five-digit initiation fee is the norm, followed by monthly dues. A single membership gets you access to both locations. 4. The Britely The scene One of the newest social clubs on the LA scene, The Britely opened in April 2021 with a founding member class of 500-600. The club is a feast for the senses. It’s bright, colorful, decadent and pays homage to old Hollywood glamour. You won’t find meeting rooms or co-working spaces here. The Britely is built for enjoyment, with two Wolfgang Puck restaurants, a rooftop pool, music venue, 24-hour gym and even a bowling alley. The clientele The Britely’s goal is to attract members who work in a variety of fields. Members show up at the club for a wide range of social, cultural and wellness events, whether that’s yoga classes, movie screenings, happy hours or live music. Becoming a member Even though The Britely has only been open for a few years, there’s already a sizable waitlist. Knowing current members is a plus, as referrals go a long way. If you make it in, be prepared for a yearly membership fee of roughly $3,000. 5. NeueHouse The scene NeueHouse opened in 2016 as a members-only co-working space, located in the old CBS Broadcasting building in Hollywood. It has expanded its offerings over the years, now calling itself a “work and social club.” In addition to beautifully designed working spaces, a NeueHouse membership gives access to private music performances, dining, cultural events and more. It’s worth noting that the Hollywood location is one of three NeueHouse clubhouses. There’s also Bradbury in downtown LA and a new Venice Beach location. The clientele Because it’s a work space above all, NeueHouse positions itself as a “community for creators, innovators and thought leaders.” NeueHouse’s reciprocal memberships and VIP access and pricing to local art events and festivals make it popular for those who are active in the LA cultural scene. Becoming a member NeueHouse offers a range of flexible memberships for individuals and businesses. Their full membership, called a Salon membership, starts at $3,600 a year. The Off-Site membership provides collaborative working space for teams and starts at $3,000 per year, per member. Finally, individuals can choose a Resident membership, taking advantage of open and private workspaces and starting at $900 a month. 6. San Vicente Bungalows The scene Lush and hush-hush are the best words to describe the San Vicente Bungalows. Located in West Hollywood, the pink-and-green clubhouse boasts a verdant garden patio, eight overnight guest rooms, a screening room, on-site restaurant and much more. Because privacy is paramount and the club is meant to be a place for relaxation, phones are never allowed and laptops are only allowed in certain parts of the building, and only until 5 p.m. The clientele Club creator Jeff Klein follows the mantra that “privacy is the new luxury,” so it's no surprise that the club is ultra-exclusive and even more hush-hush. It’s hard to know who of the LA elite class are members here, although occasional leaks have uncovered visits from Prince Harry and Steven Spielberg. Its vigilant stance on the utmost privacy makes it an oasis for those who are so instantly recognizable, everyday outings like lunches and meetings become paparazzi-laden affairs. Becoming a member Annual dues start at $4,200, but above and beyond that, the membership process is kept under wraps. Non-members aren’t allowed to tour the club, so if you want a sneak peek before deciding to apply, you’ll need to visit as the guest of a member. The membership team places high value on nominations from current members, so connections are key. 7. The California Club The scene The California Club is one of the oldest and most storied private social clubs in Los Angeles. For over a century, it’s been a downtown home away from home for the ruling class of LA. The current clubhouse has been housed in a seven-story Beaux-Arts building in downtown LA, which became listed on the National Register of Historic Places in 2010. The club offers a dining room, patio, bar, spa and overnight accommodations, all richly decorated in the European Renaissance style. The clientele Not much information is available about who the California Club members are, but it stands to reason that the club appeals to a similar demographic set as Jonathan Club: business leaders and politicians with long family histories in Los Angeles. Becoming a member Membership is by invitation of current club members only, and the membership office does not take inquiries from non-members. It’s rumored that a membership invitation requires nominations from no less than six current members, but other details, including pricing, aren’t published. Enjoy your own exclusive retreat If you’re a regular visitor to Southern California, why not own your own luxurious retreat? Pacaso offers second homes in LA with club-like amenities: incredible views, outdoor dining space, swimming pools, wine cellars and dedicated work spaces. aAll starting at 1/8 the price. Learn more about the benefits of co-ownership.
Warm weather. Stunning ocean views. World-class golf. Incredible dining. Majestic whale watching. We could go on and on about all the things to love about Cabo. And it’s not just bustling Cabo San Lucas. Together with laid-back San Jose del Cabo, these two Baja Peninsula towns bookend a beautiful stretch of coastline that’s a dream destination for luxury travelers. The Los Cabos area has an incredible array of accommodations for discerning travelers, from classic beachfront hotels to boutique properties and golf resorts. And if you want to stay a little longer and opt for a smarter choice than luxury hotels, take a peek at Pacaso's co-owned second homes in Los Cabos. The Cape Come for the views, stay for the chic rooms. The Cape, a Thompson Hotel is perched high above picture-perfect Monuments Beach, with views of the famous El Arco rock formation and, during the winter months, a front-row seat to migrating whales. This boutique hotel features 157 guest rooms, suites and villas, all with unobstructed water views. Soak in the beauty of Baja from your private balcony or simply relax in spacious accommodations that feature mid-century Latin American furnishings. Upgrade to a one-bedroom residence to enjoy your own private plunge pool and a full kitchen. If you can bear to leave your room for a bit, the property features a stylish rooftop bar that’s perfect for watching the sunset. Another can’t-miss is the Sunday brunch at the Ledge. After all, what’s better than an outdoor brunch with ocean views, food stations and live music? Montage Los Cabos Sleek, serene and sun-soaked, Montage Los Cabos is where discerning travelers go to relax and unwind. This beautiful resort is located just steps from Santa Maria Bay, providing easy access to swimming, diving and snorkeling. The resort’s low-profile architecture lets the natural beauty of the region stand out, and the 122 guest rooms, suites and casas take every opportunity to show off the view. Choose from rooms with ocean views, private pools and ample outdoor space. For the ultimate in privacy, consider one of the property's freestanding homes which come with complimentary butler service. The Spa at Montage Los Cabos is not to be missed. In fact, it’s considered one of the best spas in Los Cabos. In addition to signature treatments, the Spa at Montage is known for its wellness journeys. Inspired by local culture and traditions, these whole-body wellness treatments invite profound relaxation and healing. Esperanza The only private beach resort in Los Cabos, Esperanza Auberge Resort is located between Cabo San Lucas and San Jose del Cabo on the Punta Ballena coastline. This nature-inspired resort is family-friendly, with roomy multi-bedroom accommodations and complimentary kids’ meals and activities during the summer. Casitas and suites start at 925 square feet, and every one features a large private terrace and infinity-edge hot tub. Upgrade to an oceanfront villa for that home-away-from-home feeling, paired with sweeping ocean views. Spend time reconnecting over fresh seafood at Cocina del Mar or kid-friendly wood-fired pizzas at Las Estrellas. There’s even a cooking class for families — even the youngest chefs are welcome. On-site amenities at this action-packed resort include tennis, pickleball and basketball courts, a kids club and teens club, bocce ball, putting greens, spa, art studio and multiple pools (some family-friendly, others just for adults). Zadún Ritz-Carlton Reserve properties are the most ultra-luxurious hotels in their collection, and Zadún is the only one in Mexico. Located in San Jose del Cabo and designed to be a secluded enclave away from the hustle and bustle of Baja, this 20-acre property is located within the exclusive Puerto Los Cabos development. Both architecture buffs and nature lovers will appreciate the way the buildings — many open air — are built into the hillside. Zadún showcases art, textiles and finishes made by Mexican artisans, and multiple on-site restaurants feature inventive food and cocktails using indigenous spices and family recipes. Choose from Mexican street food at El Barrio, ceviche at the adults-only X (Equis), freshly baked pastries at Azul Cafe, or bespoke mezcal cocktails at Candil. Choose from 113 rooms, suites and villas offering private terraces and plunge pools. One&Only Palmilla Designed for relaxation and pampering, One&Only Palmilla is a mainstay of the Los Cabos luxury resort scene. Located between Cabo San Lucas and San Jose del Cabo, the resort is the perfect base from which to explore this beautiful region where the ocean meets the desert. Every room faces the ocean, so you can’t go wrong with choosing your accommodations. Opt for a stylish hotel room, spacious suite, grand suite with private plunge pool, or coveted casita suite with personal butler service and direct beach access. What’s more, every room comes with daily breakfast for two. The team at the One&Only Palmilla knows just what it takes to craft the perfect vacation. Relax at the 22,000-square-foot spa and enjoy a treatment in one of 13 private treatment villas. Sample food from around the world at four distinct restaurants, including Seared by One&Only, a signature restaurant by Michelin-star chef Jean-Georges Vongerichten. When more active pursuits beckon, it’s easy to enjoy watersports, family activities, golf and festivals. Viceroy Los Cabos The best word to describe Viceroy Los Cabos is dramatic. It’s both dreamy and modern, with floor-to-ceiling windows and a curated collection of visual art, including a massive mural by artist Spencer Mar Guilburt. Rooms are minimalist yet well appointed, with furnished balconies, luxury bath amenities and complimentary turndown service. For a little extra space, treat yourself to a suite with a soaking tub, rainfall shower and balcony daybed. For a large family vacation or friends’ getaway, check out the spacious waterside villas, penthouses and casitas. It’s easy to see why Viceroy won a Conde Nast Traveler’s 2022 Readers’ Choice Award. Viceroy’s on-site dining options are all about the experience. Head to Cielomar Rooftop for wood-fired dishes and epic sunset views. Sample fresh ceviche and sushi in Nido, with its incredible nest-like structure. Make it an evening to remember with private dining on the beach. Or sign up for a private cooking class and learn to make guacamole, salsas and seafood from Viceroy’s talented chefs. Your own private paradise Pacaso co-ownership is the modern way to own in Los Cabos. Each luxury property is professionally designed and managed, so you just unpack and relax. Check out Pacaso’s luxury second home listings in Los Cabos.
Tucked away high in the San Juan Mountains of southwestern Colorado, Telluride is an adventurer’s playground for its nearly 2,600 year-round residents and a multitude of visitors. Whether you’re in for adrenaline-pumping adventure sports, to be surrounded by nature, or to take in a bit of historic charm, you can do it all in Telluride. Here are 25 things to do in Telluride, including recommended time commitments for each so you can plan your trip and make the most of it. 1. Hit the slopes Time commitment: Four hours minimum If you’re lucky enough to be in Telluride in the winter, you’ll find yourself in a powder paradise. Telluride Ski Resort spans multiple peaks, with 19 lifts serving an incredible 120 runs and over 2,000 acres of skiable terrain. While it’s known as a winter wonderland for black diamond-level skiers, 23% of their runs are ranked beginner and 36% are ranked intermediate. And compared to some of Colorado’s other famous ski resorts, you’re less likely to find long lift lines and crowded amenities in this low-key town. Looking to take a day off your skis but don’t want to miss out on those awesome mountain views? Plenty more Telluride attractions await. 2. Go on a hike Time commitment: Two hours minimum Telluride isn’t just a winter destination. In fact, Telluride and its surrounding landscapes are just as impressive in the warm-weather months. Endless hiking options abound, beginning with the must-see Bridal Veil Falls, a 365-foot-high waterfall that’s simply breathtaking to witness. It’s the tallest free-falling cascade in Colorado, surrounded by peaks as high as 14,000 feet. It’s an easy trip to fit into your weekend in Telluride since you can reach the base of the falls in just 1.8 miles. Or venture to the top in about 3 miles. Other popular hikes include Bear Creek Falls and Jud Wiebe Trail, both of which offer abundant wildflowers if you time it right. Remember to factor in Telluride’s altitude (8,750 feet) when planning your hikes. 3. Ride the gondola Time commitment: 30 minutes round trip The only free transportation of its kind in the United States, the Telluride and Mountain Village Gondola has shuttled an incredible 2.8 million skiers, snowboarders, mountain bikers, hikers and sightseers since it opened in 1996. This 13-minute route connects historic Telluride with the resort hub of Mountain Village, letting you avoid the 20-minute drive to the ski resort. But most riders aren’t there to avoid the commute when they visit Telluride — they’re riding to take in the incredible views of the 10,500-foot Coonskin Ridge. On a clear day, you can see all the way to the La Sal Mountains in Utah. 4. Visit Mountain Village Time commitment: Three hours Mountain Village is the end stop for the gondola, making it a convenient destination to add to your itinerary. It started as a European-style ski resort and has evolved into a bustling town with shops and restaurants well worth the visit. 5. Go fly fishing Time commitment: Four to eight hours Telluride has some of the country’s finest alpine streams for trout fishing. Buy a fishing license at a local sporting goods shop and you're good to hit the waterways for a day of solitude. Local guides are available for hire, helping novices learn the ropes and experienced anglers find the best spots. If you plan to visit during the winter, bring your fishing pole — fishing maintains its status as one of the top things to do in Telluride year-round because the environmental conditions for trout are even better at that time of year. 6. Take a walking tour of downtown Time commitment: One to three hours When you’re at a loss for what to do in Telluride, a walking tour is well worth the time. With an Old West vibe that feels like something out of a movie, downtown Telluride started as a silver mining camp and is nothing if not charmingly historic. It’s just eight blocks wide and 12 blocks long, and the entire downtown seems to be miraculously pinned inside a narrow canyon. An afternoon is well spent wandering the quaint shops and restaurants of downtown Telluride. 7. Raft down the San Miguel River Time commitment: Four hours to three days The rivers around Telluride are good for more than just trout fishing. Hop on a raft for a trip down the San Miguel River. Trips range from 9 ½-mile half-day trips to multi-day adventures, with family-friendly trips on the easier end up to intermediate class 3-rated adventures. Other popular rafting expeditions include the Dolores River and Colorado River. 8. Experience tandem paragliding Time commitment: 20 minutes in the air Get a thrilling view of Telluride and the Rocky Mountains from the harness of a paraglider. Passengers must have the ability to run on takeoff and landing, making this activity accessible to people 5 and older. Some instructors even offer the option to pilot the glider yourself after teaching you the basic controls. Paragliding flights are highly dependent on safe weather conditions, so have a backup plan if rain or fog sets in. 9. Visit the arts district Time commitment: One hour minimum Established in 1971, the Telluride Arts District showcases the work of local artists and performers in traditional and contemporary styles. Art pieces adorn the streets with live performances providing spontaneous entertainment. The historic Transfer Warehouse hosts art exhibitions in an open-air environment for an intimate cultural experience. 10. Rock climb at Via Ferrata Time commitment: Four to eight hours Skiing isn’t the only thing Telluride’s mountains are good for. Check out climbing at Via Ferrata. Routes on the surrounding mountains are accessible to novice climbers or challenging enough for the most experienced mountaineers. Equipment is available to rent with qualified guides to show you the ropes (literally). Climbing can be done year-round, with ice climbing up a frozen waterfall providing a unique winter experience. 11. Drive Black Bear Pass Time commitment: Three hours This 8½-mile scenic drive will take you to elevations of nearly 13,000 feet. This famous road is recommended for experienced drivers in 4x4 vehicles with high clearance. Those willing to brave the hazards will get a view of the highest waterfall in Colorado at Bridal Veil Falls and have the thrill of steep switchbacks on their descent. Black Bear Pass is also accessible to hikers and bikers. 12. Ride the Durango and Silverton Narrow Gauge Railroad Time commitment: Five and a half hours to nine and a half hours This railroad is a national landmark, and provides an authentic 1882 train experience through the mountains. The free museum shares the history of railroading and mining in the area with optional guided tours. Special events are offered year-round, with a Polar Express-themed ride in winter. 13. Bike the Galloping Goose Trail Time commitment: One hour minimum The Galloping Goose Trail offers 20 miles of dirt and gravel paths taking you through the forest and along rocky overlooks. Other options to experience the trail include horseback riding and cross-country skiing. Starting at Lizard Head Pass and heading south provides an easy downhill ride. For a more challenging excursion, start near Telluride and head north. 14. Go on an off-road tour Time commitment: Two to six hours Thanks to Telluride’s roots as a mining town, the area has off-road trails to remote ghost towns and alpine lakes. You can choose to rent a Jeep for a self-guided trip, or contract a guide to experience the more difficult terrain. Favorite destinations include the Smuggler-Union Mine and the Tomboy ghost town. 15. Explore the historical museum Time commitment: One and a half hours The Telluride Historical Museum preserves the history of the region by showcasing exhibits and offering educational programs. Learn about what life was like in the area during the 19th and early 20th centuries, the miners who dug into the San Juan Mountains and more. Artifacts fill the building and a photo archive documents the town’s history. 16. Camp in the San Juan Mountains Time commitment: One day minimum If a hike is not enough to satisfy your outdoor appetite, camping surely will. There are multiple campgrounds in the region that offer a range of amenities. The Priest Lake Campground is free to use, allowing visitors to stay for up to seven days. The Town Park Campground has 28 vehicle sites for visitors to glamp in luxury and even hosts festivals throughout the summer for added entertainment. 17. Snowshoe Hope Lake Trail Time commitment: Three hours Add an extra challenge to your hike by strapping snowshoes to your feet and trekking through the fresh Telluride snow. Hope Lake Trail is a 6-mile out-and-back trek that offers a moderate challenge to people looking to explore the Colorado wilderness. It’s also popular for birders and hikers. 18. Tour the Old Hundred Gold Mine Time commitment: 45 minutes While visiting Telluride, head over to nearby Silverton to tour the Old Hundred Gold Mine from late spring through mid autumn. The guided tour goes ⅓ mile into Galena Mountain, giving visitors a sense of what it was like for miners over 100 years ago. Real mining equipment is still stored in the tunnels, with demonstrations of how they operated. Visitors can pan for precious metals for free with the price of their ticket and are allowed to keep what they find. 19. Go on a guided horseback ride Time commitment: One hour minimum Riding a horse through the mountains and meadows of the Rockies is one of the best things to do in Telluride and makes unforgettable memories. Experienced guides lead groups along winding trails to gain a unique view of the local wildlife and stunning scenery. Family-friendly tours are available so no one gets left out, and more advanced options ensure experienced riders aren’t bored. 20. Ice skate at the Madeline Hotel Time commitment: One hour or more This full-service ice rink located in the plaza of Mountain Village provides one of the more affordable Telluride activities the whole family can enjoy. There is a free skate hour when the rink is in operation, with options to purchase single admissions, multi-visit punch cards and season passes. Skates are included with the price of admission. 21. Take a dip in the hot springs Time commitment: One and a half hours When it’s time to take a break from the more physically demanding activities in Telluride, soak in one of the nearby hot springs. While this can be done at any time of year, it’s an especially memorable experience in the winter, when a chance snowfall can turn a relaxing dip into something magical. Certain locations also offer spa services like massages, facials and body treatments. 22. Visit Canyons of the Ancients Time commitment: One day Formerly called the Anasazi Heritage Center, Canyons of the Ancients National Monument is a museum dedicated to the prehistoric cultures in the Four Corners region. Apart from housing almost 2 million artifacts, the center holds interactive exhibits to gain a hands-on understanding of native cultures. Visitors can grind cornmeal, weave on a loom and touch some of the authentic artifacts. 23. Enjoy spa time at The Peaks Resort Time commitment: One hour minimum The Peaks is the largest spa in Colorado, offering luxury services to rejuvenate bodies and minds. The spa has on-site stylists and offers pedicures and Roman tubs, to name just a few of their services. Guests also have the option to meet with a dietitian to create a personal wellness plan and keep the benefits of their visit going long after they leave. 24. Grab a drink at Telluride Distilling Company Time commitment: One hour or more This small distillery crafts a range of spirits, winning awards for its schnapps and vodka. The tasting room provides a cozy atmosphere to enjoy your cocktail, with a pool table and darts for added entertainment. Patrons can also treat themselves to a dish from Telluride Distilling Company’s rotating menu specializing in wild game. 25. Play golf at Telluride Ski and Golf Club Time commitment: Two to four hours This 18-hole golf course is among the highest in the world, at an elevation of 9,500 feet. Even if you don’t have time to play a full round, visiting the practice area can be satisfying, thanks to its impressive views of the area. Don’t be surprised to find your drives feel like they go farther than normal — at this elevation, the air has less resistance on the ball. Make Telluride your second home For a small town, Telluride has plenty of things to do. If you find yourself returning year after year for the activities you didn’t get to last time, it just might be time to make it your second home.
There’s a lot to love about Newport Beach. A classic Southern California coastal town, Newport Beach is simply bursting with postcard-worthy scenes. Dramatic cliffs, golden-sand beaches, surf-worthy waves, a bustling marina and beautiful Balboa Island are just some of this city’s many charms. Luxury travelers and second home owners flock to Newport Beach for its year-round sunshine, waterfront lifestyle, family-friendly activities, and local events including the Newport Beach Jazz Festival, Balboa Island Parade, Newport Beach Wine & Food Festival and the Christmas Boat Parade. Can’t wait to discover everything Newport Beach has to offer? Check out our list of the very best Newport Beach luxury hotels, with insider tips to make the most of your trip. Or are you ready to live like a local? Check out Pacaso second home listings in Newport Beach and throughout Orange County. 1. The Resort at Pelican Hill The Resort at Pelican Hill is a true luxury escape, offering residential-style accommodations that boast sweeping ocean views from almost every room. Set on a hillside a few miles inland, this 504-acre retreat is less than 10 miles from Newport Beach’s central core. Settle into your own spacious bungalow guest room featuring almost 850 square feet of space, a limestone fireplace, marble bathroom and a furnished terrace. Or upgrade to a 1,639-square-foot bungalow suite with a separate living area. If you’re in search of even more space and more privacy, stay in one of the two-, three-, or four-bedroom villas with gourmet kitchens, exclusive clubhouse access, private garages and concierge services. The Resort at Pelican Hill takes design inspiration from the grand villas of the Venetian countryside and 16th century architect Andrea Palladio. No detail has been overlooked — the stunning Coliseum Pool is lined with 1.1 million hand-cut glass mosaic tiles. Buildings on the property are surrounded by groves of olive trees, towering cypresses and fig trees. You might just feel like you’re in Italy! While you might want to explore Newport Beach, you may never want to leave the resort. After all, you’ll find 36 holes of Tom Fazio-design championship golf, an incredible spa and on-site dining experiences at two distinct restaurants, all just steps from your bungalow, suite or villa Insider info: Just a 20-minute walk from the resort is Crystal Cove State Park, a pristine, 3.5-mile-long stretch of Pacific coastline that appeals to surfers, sun worshippers and tidepool explorers. 2. Marriott’s Newport Coast Villas Situated on a bluff overlooking the Pacific Ocean, Marriott’s Newport Coast Villas put you in the heart of everything the Newport Beach area has to offer. It’s just steps from the beach and minutes from area attractions like Balboa Island, Fashion Island and Knott’s Berry Farm. Since this property is part of the Marriott Vacation Club, the accommodations aren’t simply hotel rooms. Instead, they’re spacious, family-friendly two-bedroom villas. Each one features a full kitchen, welcoming living area and fully furnished outdoor space. Newport Coast Villas has tennis courts, basketball courts, putting greens, a fitness center and three separate outdoor swimming pools. If relaxation is on the menu, the Spa by the Sea features a wide range of spa treatments, including massages, facials, body wraps, manicures and more. Insider info: If you’re traveling with the whole family and can’t convince the kids to leave the pool, enjoy lunch at La Vista Pool Bar & Grill. With plenty of outdoor dining space within splashing distance from the pool, everyone will be happy. Grab a fresh fruit smoothie for the kids and a specialty margarita for the adults, and then sit back and soak up the sun. 3. VEA Newport Beach Also a Marriott property, VEA Newport Beach is a chic high-rise property located adjacent to the can’t miss Fashion Island shopping destination. Those who love to see and be seen won’t want to miss the opportunity to stay at this sophisticated hotel, just steps from world-class shopping, dining and entertainment. Many rooms and suites feature territorial and Pacific Ocean views, but with so much to do, you may not spend much time in your room. On-site amenities include a 5,000-square-foot fitness center with outdoor yoga lawn, serene spa with saltwater pool and a massive pool framed by luxury cabanas. VEA’s Play Chalet rentals connect travelers with everything they need for SoCal outdoor fun, including beach cruisers, boogie boards and lounge chairs. When you’re ready to explore beyond the grounds of the hotel, just contact one of the hotel’s emcees. These local experts can snag you a table at the hottest restaurant, plan unforgettable experiences and get you into can’t-miss nightlife venues. Insider info: Book a dinner at the on-site VIEW Restaurant & Lounge for the perfect combination of outdoor dining, sunset views and live music. 4. Lido House While many of the accommodations in Newport Beach and greater Orange County can be defined as sprawling resort estates, Lido House stands apart as a refreshing boutique property that feels more like a welcoming beach house than a hotel. On the site of the former city hall, Lido House has an enviable location in the heart of Newport Beach near both Balboa Island and Lido Isle. Serious coastal vibes await, wrapped in classic Cape Cod architecture with plenty of nautical flair. Designed for fun and relaxation, amenities at this charming retreat include a saltwater pool, a soothing spa, outdoor lawn with family games, and Newport Beach’s only rooftop bar (yes, really!). The on-site Mayor’s Table Pacific Pub & Kitchen is another big draw. On any given evening, you’ll find a combination of locals and hotel guests gathered around the communal bar. Indulge in local seafood, raw bar items and flavorful cocktails. Accommodations at Lido House include 130 coastal-chic guest rooms, plus five exclusive, tri-level private cottages. Each cottage was designed by a local design firm, so no two stays are the same. Insider info: In the late afternoon, head up to the rooftop Topside bar and stake out your spot for the perfect happy hour. Choose from an incredible range of cocktails and zero proof drinks, plus inventive seafood dishes like Hawaiian tuna tostadas, ceviche with grilled pineapple juice and plenty of oysters. 5. Balboa Bay Resort Life is better on the water. Balboa Bay Resort is situated on 15 unmatched acres right on Balboa Bay, giving guests unprecedented access to Newport Beach’s aquatic-inspired lifestyle. A mainstay on lists of the best waterfront resorts in the country, Balboa Bay Resort tempts with incredible water views and jaw-dropping sunsets. Even though it is fronted by multi-million-dollar yachts in the marina, Balboa Bay Resort has an understated elegance. Guest rooms and suites feature contemporary furnishings and an ocean-inspired color palette, with plenty of space to relax and enjoy the view from your private balcony. When it’s time to get out and about, be sure to stop by the dedicated recreation concierge desk. They can pair you with the perfect outdoor activity, whether it’s a boating day onboard a private Duffy boat, a kayak paddle through the dynamic waterways of Newport Harbor or a bicycle excursion along the picturesque Pacific Coast Highway. Insider info: After a day spent on the water, your hair might need a little TLC before an evening out. Luckily, there’s an on-site Drybar in the resort. Pop by for a blowout, which always comes with a complimentary glass of sparkling wine. A private luxury getaway When Newport Beach is calling, a luxury hotel isn’t your only option. Savvy travelers are turning to Pacaso to enjoy a true home away from home in Orange County. Instead of hotel hopping with every visit, you can own a luxury home for just 1/8 the cost. As a co-owner of a Pacaso second home in Newport Beach, you’ll get the best of both worlds: You’ll enjoy a professionally designed vacation home without the hassle of maintaining it. Learn more about how Pacaso works, then find your dream second home in Newport Beach.
Downtown Napa is an ideal jumping-off point for exploring California Wine Country. Not only does it serve as the southern gateway to the eponymous Napa Valley, but it’s a charming small city in its own right, with a vibrant arts scene, a beautiful riverfront, ample outdoor activities and more than 40 tasting rooms. While the town of Napa spans only 18 square miles, it offers a range of lodgings, from small B&Bs to upscale hotels and everything in between. Many are within walking distance to everything Napa has to offer, and all of them put you within driving distance of the most important wine tasting areas in Northern California. Here are eight favorites. Archer Hotel Chic, modern Archer Hotel is located in Napa’s super-walkable downtown core. This five-story hotel has 200-plus rooms and suites, many with private balconies offering downtown views. The best vistas are undoubtedly from the rooftop bar, which offers appetizers, cocktails and (of course) wine. There’s also a reservation-only whiskey bar, a spa and Archer’s Water Deck, a guest-only shallow water deck with lounge chairs and cabanas. Blackbird Inn Lovers of architecture will want to book a stay at the Blackbird Inn. A wonderful California Craftsman built in the Arts & Crafts style, Blackbird Inn welcomes guests with a river rock and brick porch. Inside, there’s a cozy stone fireplace, period lighting and beautiful stained glass. Breakfast is included each day, as are afternoon wine, tea and hors d’oeuvres. You can even end your day with freshly baked cookies. Milliken Creek Inn This romantic hotel gives visitors the best of both worlds: You’re just a short walk or bike ride to downtown restaurants and shops, yet you’re surrounded by nature. Milliken Creek Inn is located on three acres alongside the Napa River. A boutique property with just 11 rooms, Milliken offers top-notch service and pampering amenities like daily breakfast delivered to your room and an afternoon wine and cheese hour. Hennessey House For those looking for unique accommodations, check out Hennessey House. You can’t miss it when walking through downtown Napa: a monochromatic purple Victorian home that’s been converted into a charming 10-room bed and breakfast. Best of all, it is within walking distance from the Napa Wine Train Depot and less than a mile from the Oxbow Public Market. Andaz Napa With more traditional hotel accommodations, Andaz Napa offers rooms wow with hardwood floors, marble bathrooms, rainfall showers, glass fireplaces and soaking tubs. There are dog-friendly rooms stocked with doggy beds, bowls and cookies for those traveling with their pup. The al fresco Mercantile Terrace is a great place to end your day. Sample items from the farm-to-table menu while cozying up around a fire pit. Napa River Inn The Napa River Inn has an enviable location in the heart of downtown. Guests enjoy a waterfront location within the historic Napa Mill and a wide range of amenities. River-view rooms are available and the on-site spa offers massages and facials, making the Napa River Inn a wonderful place to relax. Did we mention free pastries are delivered daily? The George Inn Commissioned in 1891 as a private residence, the George Inn is listed on the National Register of Historic Places in recognition of its late 19th century architecture. With just nine rooms, the George is an intimate luxury accommodation that combines historic charm with all the best of today’s amenities — think heated bathroom floors, Matouk luxury linens and Molton Brown bath amenities. Common areas include a grand living and dining room and a beautiful garden. Westin Verasa Napa The Westin Verasa Napa is a great pick for travelers who want a resort feel without sacrificing location: across the street from the Napa Wine Train and down the road from Oxbow Public Market. Be sure to book a table at the Westin’s La Toque Restaurant, the French-California fusion restaurant from Michelin Star-awarded chef Ken Frank. The restaurant also boasts Wine Spectator’s Grand Award for wine pairings. Set down roots in Napa Can’t resist the call of California Wine Country? Instead of booking a hotel, find your own home away from home with Pacaso. Thanks to our hassle-free co-ownership model, you’ll have time to sip and savor the bounty of the region year-round. Every Pacaso is professionally decorated and managed, so you can just unwind surrounded by effortless luxury. Check out our current listings and find your Wine Country retreat.
It’s no surprise that California’s Napa Valley is a go-to destination for discerning travelers. With world-class wineries, award-winning cuisine, a dynamic arts scene and less than two hours from San Francisco, Napa Valley is the stuff of dreams. The Napa Valley region includes 16 distinct American Viticultural Areas (AVAs) or microclimates, and each has a distinct feel. For example, the town of Napa is the see-and-be-seen epicenter of California Wine Country. To the north, St. Helena is big on charm and local history, while Calistoga appeals to the laid-back, outdoorsy set (hello, hot springs!). No matter where in Napa Valley you decide to start your Wine Country sojourn, you can choose from a wide range of upscale accommodations. Read on to discover some of our favorite places to stay, plus why they might be the right fit for your next Napa escape. Would you rather set down roots than stay in hotel after hotel? Consider becoming a co-owner of a luxury wine-lovers escape in or around Napa Valley. 1. Solage Resort & Spa The city of Calistoga was built in the 1800s around a bubbling natural hot springs, which local Native American tribes valued for its healing powers. Today, that dedication to wellness is woven into the fabric of the Calistoga experience, including at Solage Resort & Spa. The vibe This resort is all about relaxation. Lounge by the pool, enjoy a mineral-enriched spa treatment or take a yoga class. The accommodations Natural materials, spacious layouts and clean lines make Solage’s studios and suites are relaxed and subtly elegant. Every room boasts its own outdoor patio, and rooms range in size from 515 to 1,900 square feet. The location Solage is located on the outskirts of Calistoga, making the most of the area’s natural beauty of while still giving guests easy access to the best attractions in Napa Valley. 2. Montage Healdsburg While we have to confess that while Montage isn’t technically in Napa Valley, it remains on the list as a true can’t-miss. Located on 258 lush acres in neighboring Sonoma County, Montage Healdsburg takes design cues from the surrounding landscape, and the end result is nothing short of captivating. The vibe Montage Healdsburg seems to rise unassumingly from the Northern California landscape. The property is surrounded by verdant vineyards, in alignment with the property’s goal of dedicating at least one third of each space to outdoor living. The accommodations The 130 bungalow-style guest rooms and suites feature floor-to ceiling windows with vineyard, forest or mountain views, balconies with fire pits and ample natural materials. The location Montage Healdsburg is just four miles from downtown Healdsburg. This Sonoma County outpost is the perfect home base for exploring wine regions including Russian River, Dry Creek and Alexander Valley. Don’t forget to ask the concierge for recommendations! 3. Four Seasons Napa Valley For true luxury in California Wine Country, look no further than the Four Seasons Napa Valley. This Calistoga property has everything upscale travelers are looking for: ultra-private suites, farm-to-table fine dining, world-class wines and a tranquil spa. The vibe The property is surrounded by an active winery, lending a feeling of authenticity to the property. Guests have the opportunity to sample Elusa Winery wines throughout the stay, including the signature cabernet sauvignon, a Calistoga AVA staple. The accommodations Choose from well-appointed hotel rooms, roomy suites with separate sleeping and living spaces, or sprawling, multi-bedroom villas for those who want privacy and plenty of outdoor space. The location The property, set against the Vaca and Mayacama Mountains, offers incredible views. Yet it’s still just a short distance from downtown Calistoga. Walk there in about 15 minutes or hop on one of the property’s complementary bicycles and find yourself in downtown Calistoga in five minutes. 4. Auberge du Soleil With a reputation for true luxury, Auberge du Soleil is a sophisticated escape tucked away in Rutherford. It’s also home to the restaurant of the same name, which was established in 1981 as Napa Valley’s first fine-dining restaurant. Take your pick of prix fixe menus, then don’t miss the opportunity to sample sparkling wine from the tableside cart. The vibe Looking around Auberge du Soleil, you might just think you’re in the south of France. The adults-only property spans 33 terraced acres, surrounded by olive and oak trees. Opportunities for relaxation are everywhere, whether you want to do an art walk in the sculpture garden, enjoy a private picnic or take a yoga class in La Pagode, a Japanese ryokan-style pavilion. The accommodations Auberge du Soleil offers 50 guest rooms and suites, housed in separate maisons named for towns in the south of France. Rooms are bright and airy, each opening up to its own private terrace. The location This iconic property is located in Rutherford, a small town in the heart of Napa Valley between St. Helena and Yountville. This central location gives you easy access to everything you want to explore in California Wine Country. 5. Stanly Ranch Also an Auberge property, Stanly Ranch opened in April 2022 on 712 picturesque acres. Formerly a working ranch dating back to the 1850s, the property is in the midst of evolution from ranch to vineyard, and while it will be a few more years before they can start harvesting grapes to make their own wines, it’s interesting to see the work in progress. The vibe The aura at Stanly Ranch is casually chic. Both the accommodations and the on-site experiences are designed to showcase the connection between the land and the people inhabiting it. There’s ample outdoor community space and plenty of room to roam. The accommodations Guestrooms, suites and freestanding villas at Stanly Ranch feature a modern farmhouse vibe and are designed with creature comforts like casual seating areas, private fire pits and outdoor showers. The location Stanly Ranch is located on the southern edge of Napa Valley, south of the town of Napa and alongside the Napa River. It’s perfectly placed for quick getaways from the Bay Area that feel a world away. 6. Meadowood Napa Valley Located on a 250-acre wine country estate, Meadowood Napa Valley is surrounded by natural beauty. This Relais & Chateaux property is a hotel, private country club and home to a restaurant with three Michelin stars. The all-suite, award-winning spa is flanked by two sanctuary gardens, inviting you to linger after your treatments. The vibe This property is undoubtedly luxurious, but it’s never stuffy. It has a low-key, relaxing feel that makes it the perfect escape for those wanting to trade the hustle and bustle of everyday life for a bit slower pace. The accommodations There are five categories of accommodations at Meadowood, and not a single one has the feel of a standard hotel room. Choose a Treeline Suite for hillside views from a private deck. Go with a cozy Oakview Room for its wood-burning fireplaces and vaulted ceilings. Or treat yourself to ultimate privacy in Hill House, a one-bedroom suite set back in a wooded hillside near the spa. The location Meadowood is located in St. Helena, in the middle of Napa Valley. Guests enjoy complementary car service to downtown St. Helena and Yountville, so you can easily explore the many wonders of the valley. Luxury you can call your own Napa Valley is a luxury traveler’s dream, thanks to a wide selection of great hotels, award-winning dining and some of the world’s best wine tasting. Yet the ultimate in luxury isn’t found in a hotel — it’s having your own second home in California Wine Country. Pacaso offers a selection of private homes in locations like Calistoga, St. Helena and Napa. Our unique co-ownership model allows up to eight co-owners to share the cost of buying a luxury property, while giving each owner equitable access to scheduling. Homes are fully furnished and professionally decorated in styles inspired by the beauty of the region. Enjoy your own vacation property in your favorite part of Napa Valley, and let Pacaso worry about all the details. Every time you arrive, you can simply relax and toast the good life.
There’s so much to love about California wine country that choosing between Napa and Sonoma almost feels like choosing a favorite child. Both have their unique charms, incredible food, memorable experiences, amazing scenery and, of course, delicious wine. But if your vacation time is limited or you’re trying to decide which wine-focused location is the best for your second home getaway, something’s gotta be the tie-breaker. Here is our summary of the things you’ll love about each destination, so you can find the right wine country location for you. Cheers! First, a word on geography Sonoma and Napa are both less than 60 miles north/northeast of San Francisco. Both are incredible Northern California destinations which, together, welcome millions of wine-loving visitors every year. But geographical confusion abounds even among California natives. For example, both “Napa” and “Sonoma” refer to towns, counties and valleys. Here’s a quick overview. The Sonoma Valley stretches roughly 17 miles north to south, bordered by the Sonoma Mountains to the west and the Mayacamas Mountains to the east (Sonoma County itself extends west as far as the Pacific Ocean). More than 30 cities and towns are part of Sonoma County, as are roughly 425 wineries and tasting rooms. The most famous towns in Sonoma County are Sonoma and Healdsburg. The Sonoma region has a long and storied wine-producing history, spanning back to the 1850s. As far as varietals go, Sonoma County is known for its chardonnay, pinot noir (cultivated close to the cool breezes of the Pacific Ocean), zinfandel and sparkling wines. Smaller in acreage but arguably much more famous in the wine world, Napa Valley boasts 390 wineries that produce over 1,000 brands of wines. A narrow valley that is only five miles at its widest point, Napa Valley is home to four key tourist towns: Napa, Yountville, St. Helena and Calistoga. The Napa area is best known for its chardonnay, merlot and cabernet sauvignon, and is widely considered to be one of the premier wine regions. Benefits of Sonoma While Sonoma may be the less-famous cousin to world-renowned Napa, there’s much to love about spending time in Sonoma. First, Sonoma is almost double the size of Napa, which means there’s more space, more grapes and fewer crowds. The Sonoma area boasts 70,000 wine-producing acres and 13 sub-American Viticultural Areas (AVAs). Sonoma has a laid-back and casual feel, which appeals to many visitors looking for a relaxing vacation. Whether your home base is in the town of Sonoma or Healdsburg and the Russian River area, you’ll find multiple wine routes. If you’re staying in the town of Sonoma, consider renting a bike to visit close-in wineries. If more far-flung wineries are on your must-visit list, be sure to hire a car or wine tour company. Compared to Napa, Sonoma is considered the more affordable wine destination. Reasonably priced wines abound, tasting room fees won’t leave you with sticker shock, and even hotel accommodations and restaurants can be considerably more affordable in Sonoma than Napa. Benefits of Napa Simply put, Napa Valley is a bucket-list destination for wine lovers, so prepare to be wowed. With close to 400 wineries, it’s hard to know where to start. Luckily, there are multiple easy-to-navigate wine routes along Highway 29 and the Silverado Trail, so you can’t travel very far without running into yet another winery to try — don’t forget to hire a driver! Napa Valley is nothing if not luxurious, so be prepared to embrace your most upscale self during your visit. The area is brimming with premier restaurants and 95+-point wines. Whether you’re starting each day in Napa, Yountville, St. Helena or Calistoga, there are plenty of ways to indulge. Tasting room prices are often more expensive than in neighboring Sonoma, with the price per bottle following suit. Napa Valley is also home to many fine dining establishments, including the Michelin-starred French Laundry, La Toque, the Restaurant at Auberge du Soleil, Kenzo Napa and Bouchon Bistro. Find your wine country getaway A weekend is never enough in California wine country. Become a regular when you buy a second home in California wine country. And when you own a Pacaso, we take care of all the management and maintenance, so you can just arrive, unpack and head out to your favorite winery.
Ask a group of skiers about the best ski towns in the country, and chances are you’ll hear more recommendations than you can keep track of. Some might say it’s all about the mountain, while others will gush about the local vibe and après-ski experience. There’s no right answer — it just depends on what you’re looking for. But if you want to check out someplace new on your next ski vacation and your requirements include great skiing and a great place to enjoy your off-slope time, these 10 communities are among the best the U.S. has to offer. Let's take the tour! 1. Vail, Colorado Vail is one of the country’s best-known ski towns, and for good reason. Nestled in a valley between two mountain ranges, Vail boasts spectacular views from any vantage point and is the gateway to Colorado’s largest ski area, Vail Ski Resort. Covering 5,300 acres, the resort is known for its big-powder bowl skiing and advanced runs, but it also offers a nice mix of gladed terrain and beginner-friendly runs. Setting itself apart from the other best ski towns in Colorado, Vail was intentionally built as a ski community. Modeled in the style of a Bavarian village, the town is designed for pedestrians to pop into one of the many upscale shops and restaurants that are just steps away from Vail’s assortment of luxury hotels. The small-town yet swanky atmosphere attracts celebs and CEOs, but the skiing and scenery draws anyone who loves the mountains. Just be prepared for high-end prices, from lodging, dining and shopping in town to lift tickets at the resort. 2. Aspen, Colorado South of Vail, Aspen rivals its neighbor to the north as one of the country’s best ski towns, with epic skiing and plenty of off-the-slopes amenities. Like many small towns in the region, it was originally a mining camp — historic buildings line the main street today. It offers easy access to four ski areas: Aspen Mountain is closest to town, with a mix of intermediate and advanced runs. Snowmass is the biggest Aspen-area resort, with ski-in, ski-out lodging and a bustling base area. Buttermilk has gentler slopes for beginners and a good number of intermediate runs. Aspen Highlands is known as the locals’ mountain, and has smaller crowds, expert runs and unmatched terrain. When you’re not on the mountain, the town has plenty to offer, including fine dining, galleries, festivals and museums showcasing the area’s history. Like Vail, the A-list crowd flocks to Aspen, and it’s a popular second home location for the rich and famous, so don’t expect bargains unless you visit during the off-season. 3. Breckenridge, Colorado Less than a two-hour drive southwest of Denver, Breckenridge is easily accessible from the capital city and bursting with charm. Founded during the Colorado Gold Rush, Breckenridge is a down-to-earth ski town with Victorian-era roots. You’ll find its historic main street lined with cute shops, a handful of local breweries and a variety of lodging options. When you’re ready to ski, hop on a free shuttle from town and head up to Breckenridge Ski Resort. The mountain is known for its five peaks each with unique terrain, and offers the highest lift-served terrain in North America. With a good balance of beginner/intermediate and advanced/expert runs spread across 187 trails, skiers of all levels can enjoy the experience. Unlike Vail and Aspen, both the mountain and town of Breckenridge cater to more of the local crowd, while still providing plenty of amenities for travelers looking for a more laid-back, less ritzy atmosphere. 4. Telluride, Colorado Located in southwestern Colorado on the Western Slope, Telluride is another former mining town that has gradually transformed itself into a premier ski vacation destination. Telluride Ski Resort is a family-friendly resort with 2,000 acres of skiable terrain, including both plenty of trails for beginners and long steep runs like a 4.6-mile run covering a portion of the mountain’s 4,425-foot vertical drop. The mountain gets lots of sunshine and loads of snow, which means beautiful views and big powder throughout the ski season. It's easy to get around with the free gondola that shuttles skiers between the base and downtown Telluride. The ski town has an authentic Western sensibility, smaller crowds compared to the state’s chic resorts, and a more relaxed community atmosphere. You can expect good times in town and great skiing on the mountain. 5. Bend, Oregon Bend is known for its year-round outdoor adventures, including rock climbing, water sports, golf (including three courses at the luxury Sunriver Resort just south of town) and, of course skiing, at nearby Mt. Bachelor, Oregon’s premier ski resort. The largest city in Central Oregon’s high desert, Bend was once a sleepy logging town, but it has grown into a lively city and vacation hotspot in recent decades. The revitalized downtown core offers a plethora of small distilleries and craft breweries, earning it the status of “Beer City USA.” However, it’s also a haven for families with a mix of boutiques, cafes and an active arts community. This ski town is an ideal base camp for skiers heading up to Mt. Bachelor, one of the top 10 largest ski resorts in the country with more 4,300 acres of lift-accessible terrain. Terrain is evenly split between beginner/intermediate and advanced runs, so novice and expert skiers alike can enjoy plenty of challenging runs all day long. 6. Lake Tahoe, California and Nevada The Lake Tahoe region, high in the Sierra Nevadas, is home to some 14 major ski areas, so there’s truly something for everyone. It’s hard to choose a single best ski town, but standout resorts include Palisades Tahoe and Heavenly — the two largest near the lake. Palisades Tahoe is famous for hosting the 1960 Winter Olympics and offers long, steep runs with stunning views. Its two mountains boast a combined area of 6,000 acres and a fairly even distribution of beginner, intermediate and advanced runs. The base town, The Village at Palisades Tahoe, was designed with après-ski in mind. You’ll find resort-quality lodging and dozens of boutiques and restaurants. Plus, you don’t have to drive far to reach several other quaint North Lake Tahoe communities, each with unique personalities and ski-town amenities. Heavenly Ski Resort spans South Lake Tahoe, California, and Stateline, Nevada. The resort offers 4,800 skiable acres and the highest elevation in Tahoe. South Lake Tahoe is both a ski town and party town known for its nightlife and club scene, making it one of the best ski towns to live in year-round. Over in Stateline, you can try your luck at one of the many casinos. 7. Park City, Utah The former Utah mining town of Park City has come a long way from its rustic roots. Considered by many as one of the best ski towns in Utah, Park City couples historic charm with modern amenities. Cinema lovers and stars flock here for the annual Sundance Film Festival, and you’ll find chic dining and shopping establishments throughout downtown. Luxury lodging, boutiques, spas and breathtaking scenery make Park City an upscale vacation destination. Take your pick of two world-class ski resorts near town: Park City Mountain and Deer Valley Resort. Both resorts hosted events during the 2002 Winter Olympics and remain a training ground for the U.S. Ski Team. Park City Mountain has the largest ski area in the country, and seasoned skiers can hone their skills on the mixed terrain. At around 2,000 acres, Deer Valley is considerably smaller — but it’s also less crowded and offers more beginner runs, making it a great option for newer skiers. 8. Jackson, Wyoming Picture a classic Western mountain town, and you may envision a place like Jackson, Wyoming. Situated in the Jackson Hole valley among forests and two mountain ranges and far from major cities, Jackson feels remote and rugged. As the area’s industry transitioned from timber to tourism in recent years, Jackson has gained increasing popularity as one of the best ski towns in the West. It has all the amenities like shops, restaurants and luxury lodging while retaining its frontier-like appeal. You won’t find the glitz and glam of Vail or Squaw Valley, but Jackson offers beautiful wilderness and a relaxed pace of life. It’s also the gateway to three ski resorts, including the popular being Jackson Hole Mountain Resort. The resort encompasses 2,500 acres and provides an abundance of advanced runs, plenty of intermediate runs and a few beginner trails. The resort borders Grand Teton National Park, and you’ll get the best views by taking the aerial tram up to the resort’s highest point on Rendezvous Mountain. For experienced skiers, the tram also provides access to one of the steepest runs in North America: Corbet’s Couloir, a chute that terrifies and thrills skiers who dare to test their skills. 9. Sun Valley, Idaho Sun Valley, Idaho is one of the oldest planned ski towns in the country and was developed at a time when alpine skiing was starting to gain momentum in the U.S. The resort opened in 1936 and included the world’s first chairlifts (don’t worry, they’ve been replaced since then). Throughout the decades, Sun Valley has attracted celebrities and other icons, from Ernest Hemingway in the 1930s to Arnold Schwarzenegger, who currently owns a second home there and has a ski run named after him. The Sun Valley area includes the town of Ketchum just west of the resort, which is an outdoor paradise with a vibrant arts community. As newer, swankier resorts have cropped up throughout the West, Sun Valley Resort may feel a bit old school to some — but it’s also more affordable, with excellent skiing for all levels. Novice skiers can access gentle trails on Dollar Mountain and large proportion of beginner runs, while experts will find fun and challenging bowls on Bald Mountain. 10. Stowe, Vermont Stowe is a picture-perfect New England ski town. This quaint Vermont village exudes Americana — think malt shops, white steepled churches and main street parades — plus a healthy dose of the Austrian Alps. In fact, the real von Trapp family settled here in the 1940s after fleeing their native Austria because the town reminded them of their alpine home. They built the Trapp Family Lodge, which was later rebuilt after a fire and now offers a full European-style resort experience. Stowe offers lots of local charm, with live music, breweries, friendly residents and affordable family activities. Stowe Mountain Resort packs 116 quality trails across 485 acres, with a mix of beginner and expert runs and a large variety of intermediate trails. If a trip to the West is out of reach, this gem of the East is a great choice for skiers of all levels and deserves its spot at the top of the list of the best ski towns in Vermont. Pacaso has stunning second homes in some of the best ski towns in the West. So, if Park City, Lake Tahoe, or any of the Colorado mountain towns caught your eye, there might be a luxury home with your name on it.
The Florida Keys are one of the most unique vacation destinations in the U.S. Composed of hundreds of islands along a 125-mile-long archipelago, the Keys have an island vibe unlike anywhere else. From close-to-the-mainland Key Largo to Key West, the southernmost point in the continental U.S., these islands attract all types of travelers, from all over the world. But when should you go? Read our recommendations, based on what you’re looking for in your vacation. For the best weather Thanks to the Keys’ tropical-maritime climate, the temperature doesn’t fluctuate by more than about 10 degrees Fahrenheit between seasons. But, humidity levels and rainfall amounts vary considerably depending on the time of the year. The Keys have a rainy season and a dry season. The rainy season runs from May through October, and during that time, the islands get three-quarters of their yearly rainfall. The rainy season also brings very high humidity, making days feel hotter than the mercury reads. For ideal weather, aim to visit the Keys in the dry season, between November and April. You’ll still enjoy temperatures in the 80s, but you’re less likely to encounter rain — and you avoid the summer hurricane season. To warm up Plenty of snowbirds flock to the Keys during the winter to avoid snow, rain and cold temperatures, making winter the peak tourist season. If you travel to the Keys between Thanksgiving and New Year’s, you’ll enjoy wonderfully warm weather, but you’ll have to deal with crowds and higher costs. To avoid the crowds If you’re looking for a slower pace and fewer people, head to the Keys during the summer. You’ll pay less for accommodations, be less likely to get stuck in traffic driving to and from the mainland, and have less trouble getting restaurant reservations. However, there’s one downside to visiting in the summer: It’s hurricane season. If you visit the archipelago between June and November — and especially in the typically peak hurricane months of August and September — be sure to keep an eye on the weather report before and during your trip. Also, hurricanes aside, be prepared for very humid weather. For the best fishing The Florida Keys, and especially the island of Islamorada, are a popular destination for anglers all year long. However, April and May are the best months for catching big fish. In the spring, Mahi mahi, wahoo, tarpon, blue marlin and yellowtail are in their prime. If you’re looking to snag a specific type of fish, ask one of the local fishing charter companies for recommendations of where and when to visit. To save money For a budget vacation, hurricane season is your best bet. Because fewer people visit during this part of the year, hotels drop their prices and more affordable activities and amenities can be found. As long as you keep an eye on the weather forecast and remain flexible with your plans, a budget-friendly vacation can be enjoyed in the Keys. Savvy travelers who visit during this time of year recommend travel insurance in case a storm changes (or ruins) your plans. For festivals and events These islands have a celebratory feel every month of the year, so if you’re looking for exciting festivals and fun-filled events, there’s really no wrong time to visit! Some of the most popular yearly events are March’s Marathon Seafood Festival, April’s 7-Mile Bridge Run, June’s Key West Pride Week and the Key Lime Festival, Hemingway Days in July and the holiday Key Largo Boat Parade in December. Find year-round fun with a second home in the Keys When you own your own slice of paradise in the Florida Keys, you can explore all year round. With Pacaso, you can co-own a luxury home on your favorite island, without all the hassle and expense that comes with traditional second home ownership. Can you feel the ocean breezes already?
Marbella is more than a place, it’s a cultural icon – the summer playground of Europe’s rich and famous. The name translates into English as “Beautiful Sea,” but what makes Marbella so iconic is the year-round beautiful weather, beautiful landscape, beautiful villas, plus golf, shopping and restaurants. For a place that’s so key in contemporary popular culture, Marbella has a surprisingly long history, stretching back to Roman times, when it was known as Salduba (“Salt City”). Yet most of its fame and stature has come recently. As late as 1950, it was only a small, jasmine-scented village with only 1,000 inhabitants. This Old Town (Casco Antiguo) is extremely well preserved, including the town hall built in 1568, as well as several churches and chapels from the same period, along with the remains of a castle and walls from Moorish times. But that was then, and this is now. Whereabouts in modern-day Marbella are the best places to live? Here’s our guide to the best neighbourhoods this delightful, relaxed and sun-drenched spot has to offer. 1. The Golden Mile La milla de oro is the epicentre of fashionable Marbella. The area actually stretches about 4 miles (6½ kilometres) along the coast between the Old Town and the harbour of Marbella and Puerto Banús. This is the most exclusive district on the entire Costa del Sol, with grand villas, high-end retail, opulent dining and chic nightlife. Nagüeles Daytime activity clusters around the stunning Nagüeles beach, where those who want to see and be seen throng to the Marbella Club and Puente Romano beach clubs. It's an ideal location, handy for both Marbella and Puerto Banús, and right on the shore. 2. Nueva Andalucía/Puerto Banús This is probably the most exciting neighbourhood in the Marbella area. Nueva Andalucia (New Andalusia) was the brainchild of José Banús, a property developer who had a vision to create a new and totally exclusive European resort, designed by Noldi Schreck, one of the key architects who developed Beverly Hills in Los Angeles. Puerto Banús The core of the area, Puerto Banús, opened in 1970 with a ceremony was attended by billionaire Aga Khan IV, director Roman Polanski, singer Julio Iglesias, Playboy founder Hugh Hefner, and Prince Rainier and Princess Grace of Monaco. This star-studded launch set the tone for the area’s future. Nueva Andalucía These days, the glitzy Puerto Banús serves as the city centre and focus of the Nueva Andalucía neighbourhood. Celebrities and the ultra-rich focus on the port area, where it’s common to see stars shopping, dining and strolling, driving expensive cars and partying on yachts. Golf Valley Inland, it’s Golf Valley, with villas clustering around the Las Brisas, Aloha and Los Naranjos golf courses. Nueva Andalucía is also famous for its Saturday Artisan Market next to the bullring where you will find stalls selling anything and everything: spices, crafts, paintings, textiles, antiques and furniture. And if the shopping gets a bit all too much, the marketplace is surrounded by chilled-out cafés where you can sip a cortado and watch the world go by. 3. Sierra Blanca If you fancy something a little more private and secluded, then Sierra Blanca is the place for you. Situated behind Marbella and the Golden Mile, it’s a tranquil, secure and safe neighbourhood that offers a respite from the hurly-burly and frenzy of coastal Marbella in high season, whilst being a few minutes’ drive from said hurly-burly and frenzy when you fancy dipping your toes in the scene. 4. La Zagaleta If privacy and exclusivity are your bag, then La Zagaleta is the place for you. It’s a millionaires’ playground, beloved of superstars who want to take advantage of the discretion and privacy it has to offer. This ultra-luxury resort has some of the highest property prices in all of Spain, and its ample sporting and leisure facilities are restricted to residents only. If your dream is to rub shoulders with Rod Stewart or challenge Hugh Grant to a game of tennis, this is your spot – both own properties here. 5. San Pedro de Alcantara If all the glitz and glamour are a bit much, there’s lovely, slightly more down-to-earth San Pedro de Alcantara, west of Puerto Banús. It’s a typical working Spanish town with an industrial heritage, including a former sugar mill which is now the Ingenio Cultural Centre. San Pedro de Alcantara isis a charming mix of narrow, cobbled streets lined with tapas bars and boutiques, and a delightful seaside promenade with beautiful sandy beach dotted with chiringuitos (beach bars). Its enchanting informality provides a counterpoint to the obligatory glamour of Marbella’s more upscale neighbourhoods. The adjacent area of La Guadalmina has possibly one of the best golf courses anywhere in the region – The Guadalmina Golf Club. 6. Los Monteros To the east of Marbella is Los Monteros. The name means “the hunters,” and this is the place if you’re hunting for stunning beaches with natural dunes, great golf courses, access to the countryside and forests, as well as luxury homes. The neighbourhood is peaceful and exclusive, but only five minutes’ drive from Marbella centre. Los Monteros is an excellent spot to enjoy the best of both worlds – tranquility and excitement, relaxation and sociability. Marbella offers so many great neighbourhoods, and Pacaso offers a range of properties catering to a variety of tastes. Take a look for yourself and find a spot to match your dreams!
The United States has no shortage of great vacation destinations to choose from, but if relaxation is your top priority, then certain cities stand out above the rest — especially if they’re easy to travel to. Whether you prefer the beach or the city, we analyzed what makes a relaxing getaway and discovered there’s a lot to consider. You might be surprised to see which cities topped our list. Why visit a relaxing destination? When life gets a little hectic, it’s essential to make time for yourself. Escaping to a new place can help you recharge and feel happier in your day-to-day life. A relaxing destination is one that offers the space, activities and attractions you need to reset, relieve stress and get away from it all. In this study, we looked at destinations with the highest number of top-rated parks and spas, levels of noise pollution and air quality, crime indexes and walkability to get a full picture of what each city is like. These factors contribute to the ease of finding comfort and feeling refreshed in a new city. After combining those factors, we curated a list of the most relaxing places to visit in the United States in 2022. 20 most relaxing places to visit Peruse these locations, choose your most zen destination, then get packing — whether it’s for a one-time relaxing vacation or to scope out a future second home destination. 1. Alexandria, Virginia Next door to the nation’s capital, Alexandria wears the crown as the most relaxing place to visit in the United States. With two major airports nearby and multiple train lines into the city, it’s easy to get there, and the free public bus system is a convenient way to get around while you’re visiting. The city has about 950 acres of green space and 30 recreation centers to help its residents and visitors de-stress. The Mount Vernon Trail connects miles of paved paths for joggers and cyclists to enjoy along the waterfront. The historic Old Town section of the city is extremely walkable, making it easy to visit its many shops and restaurants. 2. Boulder, Colorado Only 25 miles northwest of Denver, Boulder is the peaceful alternative to the congestion of big city life. Nestled near the foothills of the Rocky Mountains, Boulder can provide the necessary fix of nature you need to feel rejuvenated. The nearest major airport is almost 50 miles away. While that may add an extra hurdle for out-of-staters looking for a vacation spot, it also greatly reduces the overall amount of noise pollution you’ll experience while you're there. If your idea of relaxation still requires a bit of activity, the surrounding area offers world-class rock climbing routes of varying difficulty. Chautauqua Park provides popular hiking trails around the Green Mountain Flatirons. Boulder has also been featured on other top-city lists like AARP’s Top 10 Healthiest Cities to Live and Retire and the Gallup-Healthways Well-being Index, showcasing the quality of life it has to offer its visitors and residents. 3. Madison, Wisconsin People are starting to recognize the many advantages of living in Madison — which may be why it's the fastest-growing city in Wisconsin, according to the 2020 census. The city has the highest number of public parks per capita when compared to the 100 largest cities in the country. There are 12.7 parks and seven playgrounds for every 10,000 residents. Mad City received the “Platinum Bicycle Friendly Community” rating by providing safe bike paths to its residents, greatly increasing its appeal as a peaceful place to visit in the U.S. since you could potentially ditch your car altogether. Recreational enthusiasts have a variety of year-round options. The many state trails are used by bicyclists in the summer and cross-country skiers in the winter. Madison's five surrounding lakes — Mendota, Monona, Waubesa, Kegonsa and Wingra — allow you to spend time sailing or ice fishing, depending on the season. The Dane County Farmers Market is the largest producer-only farmers market in the country, satisfying all your fresh produce, meat and cheese needs in an open-air environment. 4. Clearwater, Florida Situated next to the Gulf of Mexico, Clearwater has all the sun and sand your inner beach bum can hope for in a vacation spot. Tripadvisor ranks Clearwater Beach as one of the top 25 beaches in the country. Unlike many Florida beach towns, Clearwater doesn’t get overrun with wild spring break energy. It’s known as a calm family vacation destination with unbeatable weather. Clearwater is close to two international airports, making it a convenient destination for out-of-staters. The Clearwater Jolley Trolley provides easy and cheap commuting throughout the city and the beach. To further simplify travel, the Clearwater Ferry allows you to bypass traffic and parking hassles at multiple locations throughout Pinellas County. 5. Charleston, South Carolina Charleston has a thriving tourism industry that often puts it at the top of city rankings. In 2016, Travel + Leisure named it the greatest city in the world, but what makes it one of the best relaxing places to visit in the U.S. in 2022? For starters, it has the beachfront access and amazing weather many people seek out for their vacations. Get beautiful city views from atop a paddleboard or from the comfort of a chartered boat in Charleston Harbor. Visit one of Charleston’s many top-tier spas to be surrounded by a relaxing atmosphere while receiving body treatments or massage therapy. Or spend the day at a golf resort to receive your daily dose of vitamin D and physical activity. But it’s not only the activities that will help you to relax — Charlestonians can also help you to decompress. Southern Living named Charleston the most polite and hospitable city in America. 6. Tampa, Florida Our second Florida destination is the third-most populated city in the state and a neighbor to Clearwater. Tampa visitors benefit from some of the accommodations one would expect in a big city while retaining the leisurely spirit of a relaxing destination. Enjoy sunny waterfront views along the 2.5-mile Tampa Riverwalk as you walk or bike to many local attractions. Rent a bike from stations all over the city. Or ride the rails — the TECO line streetcar connects downtown with historic neighborhoods. Tampa has over 30 top-rated spas to keep your body loose and your mind free, plus 2,286 acres of beaches and parkland for lounging to your heart’s content. 7. Virginia Beach, Virginia Virginia Beach, our second relaxing destination in Virginia, has less of the relaxed professionalism of Alexandria and more of an East Coast surfing vibe. This oceanfront city is well-known for its resorts, with hundreds of hotels filling its coast. Virginia Beach is in the Guinness Book of Records for the longest pleasure beach in the world, at about 35 miles. The Resort City has one of the best park systems in the country, with over 4,000 acres of green space. In 2013, the park system was ranked eighth in the nation by the Trust for Public Land. The city is served by two international airports for ease of access. Although the city has the lowest walkability score out of our top ten cities, it has comprehensive bus and train services to ease travel during your stay. 8. Providence, Rhode Island Providence is one of the most densely populated cities in the country, which helps explain why it has the highest walkability score among our top 10 cities. At one time, the city boasted the eighth-highest percentage of pedestrian commuters in the country, making it the perfect vacation spot for visitors without cars. The city has roughly 1,200 acres of parkland. Roger Williams Park alone has about 472 acres and houses a zoo, planetarium and botanical center. Staying true to its New England roots, it has cobblestone paved walkways giving it a quaint charm. It was one of the first cities established in the U.S., so it is teeming with historical buildings that are prime for a walking tour. 9. Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania Pittsburgh regularly ranks high in lists of the most livable cities — and many of those livability factors also make it one of the most peaceful places to visit in the U.S. The city has a great mixture of urban density, making it easy to get around, while also having spacious neighborhoods and parkland to offer mental release. Frick Park contains 664 acres of woodland that bird watchers visit to spot more than 100 species of birds. The City of Bridges even has a program underway that converts former railroad tracks to recreational trails. Pittsburgh’s inland location means it faces little risk of natural disasters in the form of hurricanes, earthquakes, tornadoes and wildfires. This provides stability to the businesses in the area and the families that visit it. 10. Honolulu, Hawai’i Branching away from the continental U.S., we find our final top 10 city in Hawai’i. The state’s largest city, Honolulu, is complemented by beautiful tropical weather, serene beaches and breathtaking natural beauty. The city received up to 15,000 visitors per day pre-pandemic, so it is well-equipped to accommodate your dream vacation. Whether you are a land or water lover, Honolulu has something to offer, from playing golf to snorkeling in the stunning Hanauma Bay. It has the highest number of top-ranked spas of all the cities in our study, with 92. The city currently lacks a train network, but it ranks among the highest in per-capita bus use in the country. 11. Scottsdale, Arizona Surrounded by the stunning beauty of the Sonoran Desert, Scottsdale is a popular getaway for those chasing the sun, and has a vibe that’s all its own. The heart of Scottsdale is its historic Old Town, where you’ll discover a charming Western-inspired town with a wide range of shops, restaurants, art galleries and nightlife that’s walkable from many neighborhoods. Beyond Old Town, you’ll find more than 200 golf courses, plenty of hiking trails (including Pinnacle Peak), the Desert Botanical Garden and even an authentic southwestern ranch to spend worry-free afternoons. Scottsdale is also a prime wellness destination, with over 50 luxury resorts and day spas, most of which offer desert-inspired treatments to help you clear the mind and re-energize the body. 12. Huntington Beach, California Known as the “Surf City,” Huntington Beach is an evergreen vacation destination, thanks to its sunny weather and 10 miles of pristine coastline. You'll have beautiful local beaches for epic surfing, picnics and sunbathing. Plus, it’s a pet-friendly destination for you and your best furry friend to relax. After a day of frolicking on the beach, try some fresh coastal seafood, or experience the California classic In-N-Out Burger. With Huntington Beach’s many hotels, restaurants and overall relaxed vibes, you’ll easily find a spot to recharge and reset in this Southern California beach town. 13. Raleigh, North Carolina Long known as a “city in a park,” Raleigh attracts visitors with its lush wooded scenery and variety of options for outdoor recreation. You’ll find more than 10,000 acres of parkland that offer kayaking spots, bike routes, running trails and wide open spaces for an invigorating all-day adventure. When you need a break from relaxing in the outdoors, Raleigh also offers an outstanding arts and culture scene, thriving music scene and renowned culinary options for all foodies. Get lost in the downtown area’s beautiful historic buildings or enjoy delicious Southern barbecue and farm-to-table cuisine. 14. Miami, Florida Known as the “Magic City,” Miami delivers good times year-round with its fabulous weather — temperatures rarely fall below 70 degrees. Sunny days, however, aren’t the only thing that make Miami a relaxing destination. Miami’s laid-back vibes, diverse neighborhoods and exciting entertainment scene make it the perfect place for much needed R&R. Kick off your adventure at South Beach, where you’ll discover pristine white sand beaches, al fresco dining and trendy bars. Or head into the Wynwood district to see iconic art murals. If you’re with family, you can stroll through Zoo Miami, paddle the beautiful waters of Biscayne National Park and explore the Renaissance-style Vizcaya Museum and Gardens. 15. Carlsbad, California Located in North San Diego County along the Pacific Ocean, Carlsbad is a magnificent getaway offering California’s charming coastal lifestyle. The up-and-coming city is graced with mild year-round weather, offering an idyllic setting for you to relax during your next vacation. Luckily, Carlsbad offers limitless rejuvenating activities. Get an energizing mud facial at the Carlsbad Mineral Water Spa, savor award-winning wine at Carruth Cellars, grab a picnic at the gorgeous Ponto Beach and find your inner zen as explore The Flower Fields. 16. Bend, Oregon Bend The Central Oregon city of Bend is a haven for outdoor enthusiasts and recreation seekers alike. Located only 20 miles from Mount Bachelor, the sixth-largest ski resort in North America, Bend is the perfect basecamp for mountain biking, hiking, rock climbing, rafting, paddle boarding, winter sports and any activity where you need to release stress. Bend also boasts 300 days of sunshine, making it both a relaxing winter destination and bright year-round escape. Whether you’re looking for an extended break or a quick weekend in Bend, you’ll find plenty to do in the city beyond outdoor recreation. Enjoy their famous craft beer scene, savor bites from the many food carts, meander through outdoor artwork in downtown Bend or enjoy an outdoor concert at Hayden Homes Amphitheater. 17. Henderson, Nevada Located just 20 minutes from Las Vegas, Henderson is the second largest city in Nevada and offers a relaxing alternative to the high energy of Sin City. Henderson is home to unique museums, culinary experiences, a vibrant beer and wine scene, and natural beauty. You can enjoy a scenic bike ride along the River Mountain Loop Trail, see lions at the Lion Habitat Ranch or stroll through Henderson Bird Viewing Preserve. Treat yourself to spa treatments at the Lake Las Vegas Resort and then immerse yourself in scenic views at their stunning 320-acre man-made lake. You can also use Henderson as a starting point for Nevada’s other must-see attractions like Lake Mead, Hoover Dam, the Colorado River and Valley of Fire State Park. 18. Springfield, Missouri Famous for being the origin of the U.S. Highway 66, Springfield is an ideal destination for a rejuvenating road trip. Considered the Gateway to the Ozarks, the region offers many natural attractions like the Lake of the Ozarks State Park, where you can enjoy the peace and quiet of an undeveloped cove, open woodlands and small springs. Or, you can participate in the park’s wide variety of recreation activities on the lakefront. When you head to the city itself, there’ll be even more for you to see, from the historic Pythian Castle and Fantastic Caverns to famous civil war historic sites and winery tours. Whether you want to be laid-back or lively, this quintessential American city has it all. 19. Wilmington, North Carolina Home to roughly 120,000 residents, the port town of Wilmington is big on Southern charm and history. Explore the National Register Historic District on foot, where you’ll wander past historic churches, stare in awe at classic Southern architecture and walk under the beautiful moss-draped live oaks. The almost two-mile Wilmington Riverwalk is a scenic walkway that connects you to lively markets, boutiques, galleries and restaurants. Hop on a water taxi and tour the World War II Battleship North Carolina, or take a short car ride to the coastal communities of Carolina Beach, Kure Beach and Wrightsville Beach, where you can spend relaxing summers among boardwalks and festivals. 20. McKinney, Texas While McKinney is less than 30 minutes from downtown Dallas, its atmosphere is all its own. Frequently rated as one of the country’s most livable cities, McKinney offers a charming historic downtown, a plethora of lush trails and acres of vibrant vineyards. It also has a low crime rate, making it a safe place to relax and rejuvenate. In addition, McKinney is known for having some of the best culinary experiences in Northern Texas, including wineries and farm-to-table restaurants. After a satisfying meal, you can browse the city’s elegant boutiques and specialty shops, discover local artwork, catch a show at the McKinney Performing Arts Center and get lost in Adriatica Village, a beautiful Croatia-style village with cobblestone streets, unique shops and serene residential neighborhoods. The 100 most relaxing places to visit in the U.S. There are many other relaxing places to visit in the U.S. that did not make our top 10. Explore the rest of the cities that round out our top 100 relaxing vacation destinations for more ideas on where to visit — or make a second home. If your primary goal for a vacation is to have quality time to unwind and enjoy relaxing vibes, then consider visiting some of the cities unearthed in our study. Spending time in these relaxing places will have you recharged and ready to take on your daily life. Many of these cities make great locations to plant permanent roots with a second home too. Our methodology This study was conducted in April 2022. To determine the most relaxing places to visit in the U.S., we compared six ranking factors across a sample of mid-size cities in the U.S. (populations ranging from 100,000 to 500,000 people), sourced from the U.S. Census Bureau. Our ranking factors were used to determine how relaxing a city is and how easy it is to visit. They included and were assigned a weight out of 100 as follows: Number of parks — 25 points Number of spas — 25 points Noise pollution — 15 points Walkability — 15 points Crime index — 15 points Air quality — 5 points Each city was then given a score based on these factors and assigned an overall ranking. The cities with the highest scores were deemed the most relaxing places to visit in the U.S. Our data was sourced from Tripadvisor, Google Maps, AirNow.gov, City-Data.com, Walk Score, and the National Transportation Noise Map.
When you hear “Lake Tahoe,” you may be tempted to grab your skis and parka, but this is more than a top skiing destination. More people visit Lake Tahoe in summer than at any other time of year. It’s one of the most scenic spots in the United States and a popular location for second homes. We’ve identified 19 fun things to do around Lake Tahoe (in no particular order) that will provide unforgettable experiences for visitors and residents alike: 1. Soak up some sun on a Lake Tahoe beach With 72 miles of shoreline, Lake Tahoe is perfect for spending time at a beach. Most beaches have fine-grained white sand lapped by beautiful clear glacier water. Beaches are the best way to experience the water of Lake Tahoe, since shallower depths mean the water is warmer. Unfortunately, most Lake Tahoe beaches are not dog-friendly, and you’ll probably have to pay for parking, but it’s well worth it for a day of fun in the sun. Here are some of our favorite beaches in North Lake Tahoe: Kings Beach State Recreation Area: At the largest beach in North Lake Tahoe you’ll find the warmest water for swimming, plus a playground and picnic area. It’s also near shops and restaurants to grab necessities. Sand Harbor: Established as a public beach in 1958, Sand Harbor is one of the most popular beaches in Lake Tahoe, with opportunities for scuba diving, swimming and kayaking. Locals and tourists alike consider it to be the most beautiful beach in the Lake Tahoe area. Lake Forest Beach: If you prefer a more laid-back and private beach, check out Lake Forest Beach. It’s small, so be sure to arrive early to stake out your spot for some swimming, birdwatching or a game of horseshoes. Chimney Beach: This park got its name from a lonely stone chimney on the shore — all that remains from a caretaker’s cabin. Chimney Beach has gorgeous views, but it’s only accessible via a short hike. You might want to leave the kids at home for this one — meeting a few nude beachgoers is not unusual. Commons Beach: A bit on the smaller side, Commons Beach is a great family beach spot with playgrounds, grassy areas for picnics and easy access to local restaurants and shops when you need to take a break from the sun. There are also some great beaches in South Lake Tahoe: Baldwin Beach: If you’re looking for the warmest water in South Lake Tahoe, check out Baldwin Beach featuring one of the lake’s gentlest slopes into the water. Baldwin Beach also has great access to water activities like kayaking, windsurfing and paddle boarding. Pope Beach: Only accessible via a short trail, Pope Beach is wide and sandy, making it a popular destination for families. You can also rent kayaks from the beach. El Dorado Beach: With its relaxed atmosphere, El Dorado Beach is a great spot for families to picnic and swim. It’s also one of the best places in Lake Tahoe to watch a sunset over the mountains. Nevada Beach: Bring your dog to Nevada Beach to enjoy panoramic views of Lake Tahoe and the Sierra Nevada Mountains. Located on national forest land, Nevada Beach offers two distinct ecosystems and easy access to camping facilities. Learn more about all the beaches Lake Tahoe has to offer and the rules for each beach from the Tahoe Fund. 2. Put some miles on your hiking boots One of Lake Tahoe’s biggest summer activities is hiking, and there’s a perfect trail for every level of hiker. Explore the sequoia and pine tree forests, walk around Lake Tahoe or venture into the mountains to see gorgeous waterfalls and stunning granite cliff faces. The Tahoe Rim Trail is a 165-mile trail system that loops around the lake and has eight official trailheads. Fortunately, there’s no rule that you have to hike the entire trail! Hop on and off at whatever trailhead you like. For more leisurely treks, check out: Fallen Leaf Lake Trail, a 3.6-mile out-and-back hike primarily on a paved path Emerald Point Trail, a mostly flat 4.4-mile out-and-back trail along the northern shore of Emerald Bay Glacier Meadow Loop, a ½-mile loop through a meadow If you want to venture up a mountain, explore the Mount Tallac Trail. It’s 10.5 miles out and back, with an elevation gain of about 2,000 feet in 2.4 miles. Start your trek early in the morning or later in the afternoon to avoid the sun at its height on the sun-exposed part of the trail. Other stunning hikes include: Eagle Falls hike to Eagle Lake (1.9 miles point to point) Rubicon Trail (18.2 miles point to point) Glen Alpine Falls/Springs Trail (6.8 miles point to point) Meeks Bay Trail (9.8 miles out and back) The Lake Tahoe Basin Management Unit breaks down all the hikes in Lake Tahoe and links to trail maps so you can plan your hike. 3. Go waterfall hopping With gorgeous mountains and cliffsides, Lake Tahoe has some truly stunning waterfalls. Spend a day hiking to different waterfalls around the lake, take some beautiful photos and enjoy a picnic. Some of the best waterfalls include: Eagle Falls: The 1-mile hike has a gentle slope and a set of stairs carved into the stone taking you to the 60- and 90-foot falls. More adventurous hikers can continue the rest of the path to Eagle Lake (though you’ll need a permit for Desolation Wilderness). Horsetail Falls: Several different trails lead to Horsetail Falls, an 800-foot waterfall off Highway 50. The Wilderness Boundary Trail takes you to the base of the falls, while the Pyramid Creek Trail follows the creek. Both are relatively easy, but Pyramid Creek is better for families. Glen Alpine Falls: Located off Highway 89, Glen Alpine Falls stair-steps down the cliff face. This is one of the easier falls to access since there’s no hiking necessary (although there are trails you can take around the falls). 4. Make a splash with some water sports Lake Tahoe is the biggest North American alpine lake and the second deepest lake in the United States at 1,645 feet. The lake is 22 miles long and 12 miles wide, ringed by tall mountains covered in sequoia and pine forests. With all that lake, there’s no shortage of water activities you can do. The lake is smoothest in the morning, so venture out early to see up to 70 feet down into the lake. Remember that the water is warmest near the shore, so if you are in the deeper parts of the water, you may want to use a wetsuit to stay warm. Consider kayaking to explore shorelines you can’t get to otherwise. We recommend the 6-mile kayak trip from Cave Rock to Nevada Beach or the 13-mile kayak trip from Sand Harbor to Cave Rock. If you’re at Emerald Lake, kayak out to Fannette Island to see the ruins of a tea shop from the early 1900s. Parasailing is also a favorite Lake Tahoe pastime. No prior experience is necessary to get into the air for some thrilling panoramic views. Jet skiing and paddle boarding are also popular, and there are places around the lake where you can rent both. You can go fishing for trout or river rafting in the rivers that lead into or out of the lake. 5. Transport to Scandinavia with a visit to Vikingsholm In 1928, Josephine Knight — enamored with Scandinavian architecture — commissioned a Norwegian-style castle on the shore of Lake Tahoe, and the result is the beautiful Vikingsholm. You can access the property via a short hike from the Highway 89 parking lot or take a boat like Mrs. Knight’s guests did. Tour the 38-room castle to see the stunning Scandinavian antiques, brilliant stone and metalwork and massive carved wooden beams. Cool off with a swim at the beach and munch on snacks from the cafe. Just watch out for the ghost! Captain Richard Barter, a caretaker at a local resort, lost his toes to frostbite when his boat capsized in the lake one winter’s night. Guests report seeing him on the property, shaking a box (rumored to contain his frostbitten toes) and saying, “Them’s my toes!” to anyone who will listen. 6. Visit historic Truckee Considered the gateway into Lake Tahoe, the historic town of Truckee is packed with Old West architecture. Bike the 6-mile Truckee River Legacy Trail following the Truckee River, or stay in town to explore quaint shops, bars and wineries. Take the historical walking tour or visit the Old Jail Museum for a peek into Truckee history. The jail, which operated from 1875 to 1964, housed famous outlaws like “Machine Gun” Kelly, “Baby Face” Nelson and “Ma” Spinelli over the years. 7. Explore Tahoe City Tahoe City is a quintessential mountain town with a friendly vibe. On the west shore of Lake Tahoe, the town is home to some of best restaurants in the area. Commons Beach is great for swimming, sunbathing and picnicking, and features free concerts on Sundays and free movies on the beach on Wednesdays. 8. Experience history at the Donner Memorial State Park In 1846, more than 80 men, women and children crossed into the Sierra Nevada mountains during their trek to California. After a series of bad decisions and bad luck, the group became stranded and spent four brutal winter months not far from Lake Tahoe before help arrived. Nearly half the group perished from sickness, starvation, extreme cold and even murder, with some resorting to cannibalism to survive. The Donner Memorial State Park preserves the Donner Camp and includes a visitors center detailing the history of the area. Pioneer Monument memorializes the Donner Party and others who made the difficult journey to California in the 1840s. The park also offers numerous hiking trails and camping spots. 9. Ride the Heavenly Gondola The Heavenly Gondola transports skiers up Heavenly Mountain in winter, and in summer offers sightseers unmatched views of the lake, Carson Valley and Desolation Wilderness. Park in Heavenly Village (grab a treat at Heavenly Donuts first!) and ride 2.4 miles up an incline of more than 9,000 feet. At the top, stop at Tamarack Lodge for snacks and coffee, or check out one of the many activities, including: Zipline tours 4x4 mountain tours The Ridge Rider Mountain Coaster Ropes courses Hiking trails 10. Cruise around the lake If you aren’t into water sports, don’t worry — you can still experience the beauty of the water with a cruise around the lake. Lake Tahoe companies offer a variety of charter and cruise options, so whether you prefer the peace of a sailboat, a sunset cruise with dinner and dancing, a relaxing catamaran or an old-fashioned paddle wheeler, there’s a perfect option for you. 11. See Lake Tahoe on horseback Ready to explore Lake Tahoe trails on four legs? Multiple companies around the lake offer guided horseback tours through the forest. Camp Richardson Corral and Zephyr Cove Resort Stables are two of the best. 12. Bike around the lake Want to explore but not willing to get jostled on horseback? Luckily for you, Lake Tahoe is a bike-friendly community with plenty of bike rental shops and trails that will satisfy everyone from first-timers to experienced mountain bikers. For relaxing rides, consider the South Lake Tahoe or West Shore Bike Paths, or rent an e-bike on the East Shore. If you’re looking for more of a challenge, check out the Corral Trail or Mr. Toad’s Wild Ride. For those who want a bit more thrill in the ride, don’t miss the Downhill Mountain Bike Park at Northstar Resort, California’s biggest mountain biking park with more than 100 miles of challenging trails. 13. View the lake from a helicopter or hot air balloon The only thing more beautiful than looking up at the mountains from Lake Tahoe is looking down at the lake from a helicopter or hot air balloon. You’ll fly over Lake Tahoe and other lakes in the area, take in the mountains and see aerial views of waterfalls while pilots identify points of interest. 14. Travel to the Wild West in Virginia City If you love the Old West, travel to nearby Virginia City, Nevada. A mining town from the mid-1800s, the town features wooden sidewalks, saloons, vintage homes, churches and museums from the Gold Rush era. Hop on the Virginia & Truckee Railroad for a 35-minute trip to Gold Hill or participate in one of the town’s many ghost tours. 15. Take a trip to Yosemite About three and a half hours south of Lake Tahoe lies Yosemite National Park, and the drive is just as gorgeous as the park itself. Take scenic Highway 395 for the best views, and pass through historic towns like the ghost town of Bodie. Consider stopping at a hot spring or two. Or take a guided tour to the park so you can focus on the scenery instead of driving. Spend the day at Yosemite exploring the more than 1,000-square-mile park. See the granite monoliths, hike to the stunning Yosemite Falls or soak up the views from Glacier Point or the Wawona Tunnel. Plan ahead if you want to camp overnight or stay at one of the local lodges before driving back to Lake Tahoe. 16. Hop in your car for a scenic drive If you want to get your bearings at Lake Tahoe, go for a scenic drive around the lake. The 72-mile drive covers three highways (US 50, NV 28 and US 89), and will take you about three hours with no stops. But trust us — you’ll want to stop at the multiple pull-off spots to take photos of the gorgeous views. Note that traffic on these highways is heavier on the weekends, so take your scenic drive for a weekday if you can. 17. Get an adrenaline rush at Tahoe Treetop Adventure Parks If you’re an adrenaline junkie, check out Tahoe Treetop Adventure Parks. The parks contain 10 different courses ranging from beginner to advanced. After a short training session, anyone 6 years or older can explore the 27 ziplines, 60 bridges and 97 tree platforms in the three parks. 18. Tour the night sky with Tahoe Star Tours The Lake Tahoe area is one of the best places to see the night sky. Its dry air and persistent western on-shore marine airflow pattern means an annual average of 300 clear nights. The darkness on the lake and the surrounding forest means there’s not enough light pollution to interfere with the starlight, so grab a blanket and some hot chocolate and head to the best places to see the stars, including: Spooner Lake Emerald Bay Camp Richardson Hope Valley For a more educational evening of stargazing, go with Tahoe Star Tours. Each year they choose a different destination, and on Thursdays and Sundays from June through Labor Day, they’ll set up seating, fire pits and outdoor heaters, provide an astronomy presentation with a laser tour of the sky, and offer telescope observations. 19. Mountain climb at Tahoe Via Ferrata Tahoe Via Ferrata offers a unique mountain climbing experience that amateur and advanced mountain climbers alike will enjoy. Climb the side of an 800-foot vertical cliff face with the security of a harness and the help of ropes, ladders, steps and suspension bridges. No previous rock climbing experience is necessary, so anyone in decent shape and at least 3 feet, 11 inches tall can join the 2-, 3- or 4-hour group tour with a professional guide. Make Lake Tahoe your second home Visiting Lake Tahoe in the summer and visiting in the winter are so different you can almost think of them as two separate destinations. No matter the time of year, the area is one of the top vacation destinations in the country, thanks to its natural beauty. Whether you love soaking up the sun or speeding down the mountain on skis, there’s plenty to do in Lake Tahoe. Consider making it your second home so you can see everything Lake Tahoe offers, regardless of the time of year.
Every winter, harsh temperatures prompt many retirees to head south to enjoy warmer weather. These “snowbirds” spend winter soaking up the sun and enjoying the warmth before returning to their primary residence in the spring. The snowbird season typically ranges from October through April, and sends thousands upon thousands of people flocking to warmer, affordable snowbird states like Texas, Arizona and Florida. We’ve crunched the numbers to determine the top 50 snowbird destinations in 2023. To determine the best snowbird locations, we analyzed weather conditions, cost of living, safety and healthcare access in the area. And spoiler: Whether you plan to visit for a few weeks or plant your roots with a second home, these are the top 10 best snowbird destinations you might consider in 2023: Here’s what makes each of the top 10 snowbird destinations worth the journey, plus 40 more warm winter spots. 1. Missouri City, Texas Just a half-hour from downtown Houston, Missouri City is at the top of our list of the best snowbird destinations. Whether you’re an avid fisherman or you never miss a morning walk, the Show Me City has many parks and lakes to enjoy during the comfortable 73-degree winters. While snowbirding in Missouri City, you can easily take advantage of everything downtown Houston has to offer, including its ethnically diverse dining scene, which is ranked as one of the Best Foodie Cities in America. Whether you’re feasting on some of the country’s best barbecue at Feges BBQ or grabbing a burger at the award-winning Goode Co. Taqueria, your tastebuds will never get bored throughout the snowbird season. Missouri City is also home to Quail Valley, which hosts two of the best golf courses in the Houston area. If traditional golf isn’t your style, you can try MacNaughton Park, which features the only MultiGolfPark in the United States. This fun take on traditional golf courses allows you to play three different forms of golf: foot golf, disc golf and park golf. Plus, Missouri City's crime rate is well below the national average, making it one of the best places to spend winter months. Percentage of population over age 60: 23% Average temperature October-April: 73 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 2. Pearland, Texas Pearland, Texas, is one of the fastest growing cities in the United States, but that doesn't mean the town is losing its small-town feel. Known as the city Where Town Meets Country, Pearland is home to over 175 acres of gorgeous parks and miles of trails. Not only that, but Pearland offers stunning sightseeing experiences such as the Sri Meenakshi Temple. This architectural wonder features intricate stonework and glimmering white towers you’d find in southern India. Pearland is also home to some of the best barbecue in Texas, including Killen’s Barbecue. Killen’s is a must-stop for every foodie — and it shows, with the line regularly extending out the door for lunch and dinner. If you’re a shopper, you’ll feel right at home at the Pearland Town Center, is the perfect place to shop until you drop. This beautiful outdoor mecca for shoppers and bargain hunters is home to over 100 stores and restaurants. Percentage of population over age 60: 15% Average temperature October-April: 72 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 3. Pasadena, Texas Our third Texas snowbird destination is located southeast of Houston, extending all the way out to Trinity Bay. This Houston suburb offers warm winters and no shortage of things to do, making it one of the best places to winter. For space buffs, Pasadena is just minutes from the iconic NASA Johnson Space Center, the subject of the famous quote, “Houston, we have a problem.” Not only that, but you can visit Space Center Houston to learn more about the area's role in the history of space exploration. If you enjoy spending your free time reconnecting with nature, you’ll love Pasadena’s Armand Bayou Nature Center, one of the largest wilderness preserves in the United States. This preserve is home to over 370 animal species and 2,500 acres of natural wetlands and forest habitats. Residents of Pasadena also enjoy quick access to scenic beaches like El Jardin Beach. If you’re looking for a relaxing day on the water, you can make a short trip to Seabrook, which offers 11 miles of waterfront and a vibrant coastal community. Percentage of population over age 60: 14% Average temperature October-April: 72 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 4. Pembroke Pines, Florida Located 22 miles north of Miami, Pembroke Pines sits between the sandy beaches of Hollywood and the lush wetlands of the Everglades. In this suburb, you’ll find well-manicured lawns, gated communities and numerous lakes and waterways. Featured as one of the 50 Best Places to Live by Time magazine in 2014, this Miami suburb is one of the best places for retirees to spend the winter. With an average temperature of 81 degrees during the snowbird season, you’ll catch plenty of rays, whether playing 18 holes at one of the five golf courses or spending an afternoon canoeing at the Chapel Trail Park Nature Preserve. You can also spend your time strolling through brand-name stores at the luxurious open-air Shops at Pembroke Gardens, featuring 50 stores and 26 restaurants and eateries. For arts and theater lovers, you can catch a live performance at the Pembroke Pines Theatre of Performing Arts. Percentage of population over age 60: 25% Average temperature October-April: 81 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 5. Margate, Florida Also part of the Miami metropolitan area, Margate is located just east of the Everglades. Known for its beautiful golf courses, safe neighborhoods and close proximity to the ocean, Margate is one of the best places for a second home to spend your winters. Whether you’re looking for a relaxing day at scenic Pompano Beach or you’re feeling lucky enough to visit the Seminole Casino Coconut Creek, you’ll never have to travel far for something to do. If exploring nature is more your thing, you can check out Butterfly World, the largest butterfly park in the world. This 10-acre habitat is home to over 20,000 exotic butterflies from all over the globe. Butterfly World also contains exotic birds, botanical gardens and a bug zoo. Plus, enjoying everything Margate has to offer won’t break the bank, as its cost of living index is just barely above the national average, making it one of the most affordable winter home locations. Percentage of population over age 60: 33% Average temperature October-April: 81 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 6. Tamarac, Florida Known as the City For Your Life, Tamarac sits south of Margate and is the last city from the Miami metropolitan area in our top 10. With 251 sunny days per year, Tamarac is a beautiful place to spend the winter season. While snowbird living in Tamarac, you’ll have quick access to the picturesque white sand beaches of Pompano Beach and Fort Lauderdale. Not only that, but you can take advantage of all the lush Everglades have to offer, from taking a guided airboat tour at Sawgrass Recreation Park to a thrilling helicopter ride with Keen Fly. For those relaxing days, you can spend time at the marvelous Woodmont Country Club. This stunning facility has everything you might need to enjoy the snowbird season, from a 27-hole golf course to a state-of-the-art fitness center. Nearby, you can also enjoy the Woodmont Natural Area, which is the largest remaining natural habitat in Tamarac, offering amazing views of pine flatwoods and wetlands. No matter your reasons for traveling, you’ll be sure to find plenty to do under the warm Florida sun. Percentage of population over age 60: 34% Average temperature October-April: 80 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 7. Gilbert, Arizona Once known as the Hay Shipping Capital of the World, Gilbert is home to families and snowbirds alike. Located just southeast of Phoenix, Gilbert offers views of the cactus-lined San Tan Mountains. With a vibrant dining scene, you’ll have plenty of restaurants and patios to choose from, whether you want to enjoy a fine meal at Culinary Dropout or a pint at the dog-friendly OHSO Brewery and Distillery. If shopping local is your thing, the Gilbert Farmers Market is open every Saturday and features more than 60 vendors. At this lively market, you'll find everything from locally grown produce to wild-caught seafood. Be sure to visit on an empty stomach so you can enjoy the many food trucks the market has to offer. Gilbert is also a great place for those looking to get outside to enjoy the warm winter weather. From taking a walk at San Tan Mountain Regional Park to catching stunning views of the Sonoran Desert or birdwatching at the Riparian Preserve at Water Ranch, you’ll have plenty of captivating sights to see throughout the snowbird season. Percentage of population over age 60: 14% Average temperature October-April: 75 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 8. Clearwater, Florida Nestled between the Gulf of Mexico and Tampa Bay, Clearwater is known for its gorgeous white sand beaches and Clearwater Beach, a 3-mile-long barrier island dotted with hotels and restaurants. Winning the title of America’s No. 1 Beach several times, Clearwater is a must-stop for travelers and snowbirds alike. When you aren’t relaxing on a beach, you can take in all the sights Clearwater has to offer, from dolphin sightseeing cruises to the Clearwater Marine Aquarium. Music lovers can attend the Clearwater Jazz Holiday, which brings world-renowned jazz musicians to the waterfront Coachman Park every year. If you’re a sports fan, you can catch a game at BayCare Ballpark, the spring training home of the Philadelphia Phillies, as well as their Single-A affiliate team, the Clearwater Threshers. Better yet, the amazing sights, fun experiences and comfortable snowbird winters in this relaxing city can be enjoyed affordably, as the cost of living in Clearwater comes in just below the national average. Percentage of population over age 60: 29% Average temperature October-April: 76 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 9. Mesa, Arizona Surrounded by the spectacular Sonoran Desert, Mesa sits southeast of Scottsdale and is a great place to spend the snowbird season. With access to nearly 200 golf courses in the Phoenix metropolitan area, you’ll have plenty of courses to explore and beautiful desert views to take in. For sports enthusiasts, Mesa is the spring training home of the Chicago Cubs and Oakland Athletics, making it one of the most popular snowbird destinations for baseball fans. To add to Mesa’s entertainment value, you’ll be near Mesa Amphitheatre, an open-air venue known for its lush lawn and rocking concerts, from REO Speedwagon to Bon Iver. When you’re not out hitting the links or catching a game, you can spend an afternoon marveling at all there is to see at the Mesa Arts Center. This 210,000-square-foot arts center hosts a multitude of events, from comedy shows to ceramics classes. If you’re an adventurer at heart, you can kayak the Lower Salt River, where you’ll float by wild horses and breathtaking scenery. No matter your interests, you’ll have plenty to do during the comfortably warm winter months. Percentage of population over age 60: 22% Average temperature October-April: 75 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches 10. Chandler, Arizona Also located in metropolitan Phoenix, Chandler sits northwest of the jagged San Tan Mountains. You'll have lots to enjoy while snowbirding in Chandler, from the endless number of golf courses to the vibrant downtown. Whether perusing one of downtown Chandler’s boutique shops or enjoying one of the 60 events that take place every year, you’ll never get tired of strolling the charming trellis-covered walkways. In addition, you’ll have entertainment options aplenty, from listening to live music at the unpretentious Murphy’s Law Irish Pub to catching a dance performance at the Chandler Center for the Arts. And be sure to pack light, as you can get everything you need for the snowbird season at Chandler Fashion Center, the second largest mall in Arizona. Percentage of population over age 60: 17% Average temperature October-April: 76 degrees Average snowfall October-April: 0 inches The 50 best snowbird destinations in the U.S. There are many other worthy locations for a second home during the snowbird season that did not make our top 10. Explore all 50 best places to spend the winter as a snowbird. Snowbird checklist Before you can head south to enjoy a warm, relaxing snowbird winter, you’ll want to leave your primary residence in good shape. Here’s a snowbird checklist to help get you and your home ready for your time away. Winterize your home It’s crucial that you winterize your home to help reduce the risk of any damage that could take place while you’re away. This includes making sure to: Turn on your heat. Setting your thermostat between 55 and 60 degrees can reduce the risk of your pipes freezing while you’re away. Shut off your water. To further prevent plumbing issues, shut off your water completely. That way, you won’t have to worry about any water leaks damaging your home while you’re gone. Make sure to also shut off your water heater — or turn it to its lowest setting — and cover all your drains to prevent odors from entering your home. Prep your appliances. Before you leave, be sure to empty your fridge and leave the doors open to prevent any mildew. You’ll also want to leave the doors open on your dishwasher, washer and dryer. Then, unplug your fridge and any other appliances to help cut down on energy costs. Perform exterior maintenance. It’s important to perform an exterior check of your house to make sure everything is in good shape before you leave. This includes cleaning your gutters and putting away outdoor furniture and anything else you wouldn’t want left unattended. Perform interior maintenance. Similarly, you should also check the inside of your home, including putting new batteries in your smoke detector. If you have a fireplace, be sure to close the flue and put a guard on top of your chimney if necessary. Put unneeded services on hold. If you’re going to be away for months, you may want to put some services on hold to help save money, like cable and internet. Forward any important information Next up, you’ll want to make sure any important information is passed along to your new home. This includes making sure to: Forward your mail. Make sure you contact the post office and set up mail forwarding so you don’t miss out on any important communications. Forward your calls. Similarly, you’ll want to forward your calls to your new number if you have a landline so you can keep up with any important calls. Update your mailing address. Be sure to update your mailing address for important organizations such as financial institutions and insurance agencies. Transfer your prescriptions. If you take any medications, be sure to transfer your prescriptions from your existing pharmacy to a new one at your snowbird destination. Make sure the snowbird pharmacy accepts your drug prescription plan. Tidy up the house After spending your winter in the sun, the last thing you want is to return to a messy home. Be sure to: Clean your house thoroughly. Cleaning your home before you leave is one of the best steps you can take to prevent pests or odors from taking over your home. Clean out your pantry, fridge and freezer. Before you head south, empty your pantry, fridge and freezer of any perishable items. If you plan on unplugging appliances, make sure they are completely empty and the doors are left open. Empty all your garbage cans. Be sure to empty all your garbage cans before you leave to help prevent pests and foul odors. Finish up any laundry. To ensure your house is in pristine shape upon your return, be sure to finish up and put away all your laundry. Secure your home Another concern for snowbirds is leaving your house unattended for months at a time. Fortunately, there are steps you can take to help improve the security of your home. Before going south for the winter, be sure to: Lock all doors and windows. Before you leave, be sure to lock and double-check all your windows and exterior doors. Alert your neighbors. It may be helpful to inform a neighbor you trust about your travel plans. You’ll also want to give them your contact information and let them know if anyone nearby has a key to your house. That way, they can keep an eye out for anything suspicious while you’re gone and contact you if needed. Inform the local police department. You may also want to fill out a form at the police department letting them know of your travel plans in case anything arises while you’re away. Set up light timers. Setting up light timers is a great way to make it look like your home is occupied while you’re snowbirding for the winter. Set up a security system. Depending on where you live, you may want to invest in a security system to help monitor your home while you’re away. Arrange to have someone check on your home. It’s a good idea to ask someone you trust to keep an eye on your home while you’re away. This can include taking care of your plants and shoveling your walkways to make it appear as if your home is still occupied. Now that your home is secure, you’re one step closer to enjoying your snowbird destination of choice. Pack your bags With your house prepared for the winter season, it's time to pack your bags! Aside from clothes and other obvious necessities, here are some important items to keep in mind while packing for your second home: Medications List of prescriptions Health records Identification documents Insurance cards This way, if anything arises while you’re at your snowbird destination, you’ll have everything you need to respond accordingly. Enjoy the sunshine Congratulations! With everything squared away at your primary residence, the only thing left to do is enjoy the sunshine at your snowbird destination. No matter where you end up, you’re sure to find plenty to do during the warm winter months. If snowbirding sounds like the way you’d like to spend your winters, consider trying out one of these gorgeous snowbird destinations. These cities not only provide you with endless outdoor enjoyment and an abundance of things to do, but they also make great places for a second home. Our methodology This study was conducted in November 2022. To determine the best snowbird destinations in the United States, we compared five ranking factors across a sample of cities with the highest population over the age of 60, sourced from the U.S. Census Bureau. The following ranking factors were used to determine how suitable a city is for snowbirds and assigned out of a weight of 100: Annual snowfall — 20 points Average temperature (October-April) — 10 points Cost of living — 25 points Crime rate — 15 points Number of hospitals within 25 miles — 30 points Each snowbird destination was given a score based on these factors and assigned an overall ranking. The destinations with the highest scores were deemed the best snowbird destinations in the United States. Our data was sourced from the U.S. Census Bureau, BestPlaces, NOAA and Medicare.gov. Snowbird destinations FAQ Here are answers to some common questions about snowbird destinations. Where is the cheapest place to be a snowbird? Of our top 50 snowbird destinations, Port Charlotte, Florida, is the cheapest, with a cost of living index of 88.9. This means that living in Port Charlotte is roughly 11% cheaper than the national average. How do snowbirds afford two homes? Snowbirds can afford a second home in a variety of ways. Some snowbirds may rent a second home, whereas others may live in a Vrbo or Airbnb. Other snowbirds may buy a vacation home independently or as a co-owner, allowing them to have a beautiful second home at a fraction of the cost. What state has the most snowbirds? Florida tends to have the most snowbirds, with upwards of 810,000 retirees flocking to the Sunshine State each winter to soak up the warm weather and enjoy beautiful white sand beaches. According to other studies like our own, Texas and Arizona could also be considered states with the most snowbirds. What is the average age of a snowbird? Because most snowbirds are retirees, the average age of a snowbird is around 61 years old. But you can enjoy the benefits of a second home at a snowbird destination at any age. What are the benefits of being a snowbird? One of the biggest benefits of being a snowbird is having a second home to escape the cold winter months. That way, you can enjoy your primary residence spring through the fall while having a warm getaway in the wintertime, allowing you to enjoy the outdoors all year round. Are there any disadvantages to being a snowbird? Snowbirding does have a few inconveniences, including forwarding your mail to your second home and asking someone to look after your primary residence while you’re away. Other hassles may include switching over prescriptions to a new pharmacy and finding doctors you can go to during the winter months.
Oregon’s rugged and unspoiled coastline is a treat no matter the time of year, but it holds a special charm in the spring. Spring on the Oregon Coast is a time of extremes, with some of the lowest tides of the year uncovering untold treasures, and unpredictable weather putting on sometimes dramatic shows. While you’ll rarely find swimsuit-worthy weather on the Oregon Coast (in any season), visitors in the spring will be rewarded with fewer crowds, lower prices and expansive natural spaces without another person in shouting distance. So where should you start? Here are 10 of our favorite springtime destinations on the Oregon Coast, from north to south. 1. Astoria Located where the Pacific Ocean meets the Columbia River, the town of Astoria has a long history as a fishing town. In fact, anglers from all over the country head here to catch the spring run of salmon, plus steelhead and crab, depending on the season. This city of fewer than 10,000 residents is also brimming with historical sites, among them Lewis and Clark National Historical Park and Fort Stevens State Park, where you can see the remains of a 1906 shipwreck. 2. Seaside One of the most popular beach destinations on the Oregon Coast, Seaside is a true resort town, with family-friendly attractions like an old-fashioned arcade, miniature golf, oceanfront promenade, watersports rentals and broad, sandy beaches. Seaside can get crowded in the spring, as families from Portland (just 90 minutes away) flock to the beach for spring break fun. 3. Cannon Beach Cannon Beach is known for its unspoiled natural beauty, especially towering Haystack Rock which, on a gloomy spring morning, seems to rise out of the fog. Cannon Beach has a quaint and low-key vibe, and the town is the perfect home base for outdoor adventures. Consider spending a day at Ecola State Park on the northern end of town. It offers walking trails, unspoiled beaches and truly breathtaking views. 4. Three Capes Scenic Loop Just off scenic Highway 101 between Tillamook and Pacific City is the perfect mini-road trip for nature lovers: Three Capes Scenic Loop. It leads you to incredible views at Cape Meares, Cape Lookout and Cape Kiwanda. Cape Meares boasts a restored 1890 lighthouse, colonies of nesting tufted puffins and (if you’re lucky) views of seals sunning on the Cape Meares Rocks. Cape Lookout rewards hikers who traverse the five-mile, out-and-back trail with incredible coastline views, and Cape Kiwanda ushers you into the beach town of Pacific City. 5. Tillamook Tillamook is for cheese lovers. Yes, really. This farming town on the Oregon Coast is home to the famous Tillamook Creamery, and many cheese fans travel here just to get a behind-the-scenes look at the cheesemaking process, sample delicious ice creams and take home a package of famous “squeaky cheese” (cheese curds). Of course, there’s more to this part of the coast than just cheese. Tillamook and the surrounding area offer scenic views, beautiful beaches and plenty of spots for hiking. 6. Newport Newport, on Oregon’s central coast, is home to the Oregon Coast Aquarium, which welcomes 40,000+ students and hundreds of thousands of nature lovers every year. Visitors can observe the seabird aviary, marvel at a giant Pacific octopus, view sea otters and harbor seals, and walk through the shark tunnel. Other Newport highlights include Oregon’s tallest lighthouse, the Yaquina Head Lighthouse, charming Victorian architecture and a picturesque marina. 7. Devil’s Punchbowl Without a doubt, Devil’s Punchbowl is one of the coolest spots on all of the Oregon Coast. Located between Newport and Depoe Bay, this geological formation is a collapsed sea cave, and whether you see it from above and below, it’s simply captivating. View it from above via a 0.8-mile out-and-back walk to view the waves crashing in the bowl. Or, during low tide, you can hike into the bowl itself and explore the tidepools — just be aware of currents and tide tables. 8. Oregon Dunes Just outside Coos Bay is the Oregon Dunes National Recreation Area, a true wonderland for adventurers. Incredibly, these dunes were formed when coastal sand spread 2.5 miles inland, piling up to 500 feet above sea level in places. There are plenty of ways to explore the dunes: hikes, ATVs, dune buggies and sandboards. Best of all, no two visits are the same. Shifting winds mean the dunes are always changing shape and elevation. 9. Bandon Further south still, the town of Bandon is an anchor point on the southern Oregon Coast. This area is warmer in the spring than points north, allowing for more exploration. The Bandon area’s offshore rock formations make it one of the most beautiful stretches of oceanfront in the state. Bandon is also home to the famous Bandon Dunes Golf Resort, with six Scottish-style courses perched high atop a bluff overlooking the Pacific Ocean. 10. Gold Beach So far south that it’s almost at the Oregon-California border, the town of Gold Beach offers plenty of perks, including warmer weather than you’ll find on most Oregon beaches. Gold Beach is located where the Rogue River meets the Pacific Ocean, which means that both saltwater and freshwater adventures await. Hike through Samuel H. Boardman State Scenic Corridor for incredible views, go fat biking on the beach or try whitewater rafting on the Rogue River. The Oregon Coast awaits No matter which beach town on the Oregon Coast suits your fancy, there’s nothing quite like it. Become a coastal regular when you buy a Pacaso second home in Oregon. Relax in style as the co-owner of a luxury second home, soaking in everything this rugged corner of the world has to offer.
Year-round warm weather. Postcard-perfect beaches. A vibrant al fresco dining scene. Natural beauty. There are so many reasons Florida cities make wonderful getaways for couples. Whether you’re planning a surprise engagement, celebrating an anniversary or just looking to reconnect with the one you love, there’s a Florida destination for every couple. Here are five of our favorites. Island getaway in the Florida Keys While this island chain begins just off of mainland Florida south of Miami, the Florida Keys have a way of making you feel like you’re on a remote island in the middle of the tropics. This archipelago includes hundreds of islands, with the 44 inhabited islands connected by a whopping 42 bridges. Where you and your sweetheart decide to stay depends on your interests and how much time you have. Key Largo is great for a weekend getaway, as it’s the closest to the mainland. It’s also home to John Pennekamp Coral Reef State Park, popular with snorkelers and divers. Road-tripping couples with more time can drive the entire length of the Keys along the 133-mile Overseas Highway, ending in Key West. It’s easily one of the most beautiful drives in the country. Fun-filled Fort Lauderdale Just 30 miles north of Miami, Fort Lauderdale has its own vibe: more laid back, absolutely packed with beautiful beaches, and an ideal escape for sun-worshipping couples. You’ll discover 24 miles of beautiful golden-sand beachfront, wide-open natural spaces along the Intracoastal Waterway, and easy access to the winding boardwalk of Hollywood Beach, the perfect place to take a selfie together. Cultural West Palm Beach North of Fort Lauderdale is West Palm Beach, a city of roughly 100,000 that is brimming with cultural activities. It plays host every spring to SunFest, Florida’s largest waterfront music festival. Year-round, check out the Kravis Center for the Performing Arts and the highly respected Norton Museum of Art. Oh, and if you believe that the couple who shops together stays together, shop the designer boutiques along Worth Avenue. Action-packed Miami See-and-be-seen Miami Beach is the perfect destination for stylish couples, and your options are nearly endless: Taste your way through Miami’s Little Havana neighborhood on a food tour. Walk through the chic Art Deco Historic District. Treat yourself to a private sailboat charter. Enjoy a romantic meal at one of Miami’s amazing outdoor restaurants. Book a spa treatment for two at one of Miami’s many luxury hotels. And Miami’s nightlife scene is second to none, so pack your dancing shoes. Endless activities in Naples On the Gulf of Mexico side of the state, Naples boasts an average of 280 days of sunshine a year — no wonder it’s a popular vacation destination and ideal for couples who like to stay busy. Dining options range from food truck parks to fine dining. There are plenty of places to stroll, like the Naples Botanical Garden and the historic 130-year-old Naples Pier. And, since Naples is on the west side of the state, it’s the perfect place to watch the sun set. A vacation home for two (or more) Lovebirds who buy with Pacaso can enjoy second home ownership without all the hassle. Browse our Florida listings and buy a share of your dream second home, for as little as ⅛ of the full price.
Nothing says romance like sun, sand and sipping Central Coast wines. It’s no wonder Santa Barbara is a popular getaway destination for couples. Whether you’re planning a proposal, celebrating an anniversary or simply seeking out a beautiful place to reconnect with the one you love, Santa Barbara might be the perfect venue. Check out these five romantic activities to see why. 1. Wine tasting Santa Barbara offers exceptional experiences for wine lovers. If you're staying downtown or have limited time for tasting, the city’s Urban Wine Trail takes you through an incredible 28 tasting rooms, all within walking distance of each other. The wine trail is set up in such a way that you can easily pop in and out of the wineries that catch your eye. About 45 minutes outside Santa Barbara you’ll find the Santa Ynez and Santa Maria Valleys. Since the area boasts a range of soils (not to mention that crucial ocean air!), a huge variety of grapes are grown here. Toast to your love with everything from chardonnay and sparkling wines to flavorful syrah and hearty Bordeaux-style wines. Let a local take care of all the details (and the driving) when you book a private wine tour. 2. Enjoy dinner and a show Built in 1924, the beautifully restored Granada Theater gives an air of Old Hollywood that’s perfect for a romantic date night. This local landmark offers a wide range of shows and entertainment: ballets, Broadway road shows, symphony performances, and Arts & Lectures events. Make a night of it with a pre-show dinner. Plenty of great restaurants are nearby, including Benchmark Eatery (with Instagram-worthy cocktails) across the street and authentic Italian cuisine from Ca'Dario around the corner. 3. Watch the sunset together Because of the curve of the California coastline, most beaches in and around Santa Barbara actually face south (not west), making it difficult to find that perfect place to watch the sun set over the ocean together. West-facing Butterfly Beach in nearby Montecito is a beautiful place to end your day. Before the sun goes down, keep your eye on the ocean and you might just see some dolphins. Another rugged, romantic option is Thousand Steps Beach. Take the long stairway down to the beach and arrive on the rocky coastline. At low tide, tide pools are begging to be explored. And as the sun starts to set, the views are simply incredible. When it’s time to call it a night, don’t worry – it’s actually only 150 steps back up to the road, not a thousand. 4. Picnic at the Santa Barbara Botanic Garden Surround yourself and your sweetheart with 78 acres of beautiful foliage. Featuring over 1,000 different plants native to California, the Santa Barbara Botanic Garden has over 5.5 miles of paths to wander, gorgeous Santa Ynez and Channel Islands views, and a friendly picnic area. Check the website before you plan your visit to see the schedule of informative plant talks, morning bird walks and even the occasional beer garden. 5. Explore the ruins at Knapp’s Castle Live out your fairytale romance as you wander through an abandoned castle — of sorts! Knapp’s Castle is actually the ruins of a private mansion that burned down 70 years ago. You can walk through the grounds and explore what remains, including stone steps, archways and fireplaces. But it’s the views more than the ruins that make this spot so special. Located above town on a plot of land surrounded by the Los Padres National Forest, Knapp’s Castle offers stunning 360-degree views of the Santa Ynez Valley. The castle is also the perfect place to take a few photos. Make the romance last Turn Santa Barbara into your second home destination. Become a co-owner of a beautiful luxury vacation home in Santa Barbara and give yourself all the time in the world to relax, reconnect and explore everything the Central California coast has to offer.
By the time spring break comes around, parents and kids alike are itching to get out of the house and mix up the daily routine. Finding a destination that offers something for everyone can be so tedious that it can tempt even the best planners to leave suitcases in storage in favor of a staycation. We’ve compiled a list of the best spring break ideas for families to help you find that perfect destination with less of the stress that comes with planning. They include, in no particular order: Let’s explore these options. 1. Oahu, Hawai’i Best for nature encounters You could spend your entire week at a beach on Oahu and not regret a moment of it. The North Shore and Waikiki Beach are enough to make the plane trip worth it, but this island has plenty more spring break ideas to keep your family busy. Head to Sea Life Park for interactive experiences with dolphins, sea lions and reef fish. Enjoy a historic ride on the Hawaiian Railway Society’s train for stunning views of the coastline. Hike up Diamond Head, a volcanic crater, for a 360-degree view of the island. Take time to pay your respects at the Pearl Harbor National Memorial before heading to the aviation museum. 2. Palm Springs, California Best for resorts Palm Springs has been a popular desert oasis for travelers for decades, so it’s well prepared to deliver on your family’s spring break expectations. There are many resorts in Palm Springs, so whether you want to lounge poolside or splash with the kids at a waterpark, there are options for all. Palm Springs has an aerial tram that will carry you 2.5 miles along Chino Canyon until you reach Mt. San Jacinto. Once there, you can take pictures at the observation deck, stop by the natural history museum or take a break for dinner. And Joshua Tree National Park is a short drive from the city, giving you the opportunity to hike and climb among its unique rock formations. Fun fact: Palm Springs was once the home of Frank Sinatra and his Rat Pack friends. Tours are still held around their old homes. 3. Anaheim, California Best for Disney fans Disneyland has more than enough entertainment to keep your family busy for the week, so you’ll never be short of spring break ideas. The Star Wars: Galaxy’s Edge and Avengers Campus attractions give you and your kids experiences well beyond what you’ve seen on the big screen. Branch out from Disney and catch a Ducks hockey game or swing by Angel Stadium for some baseball. For a more affordable alternative to Disneyland, head over to Knott’s Berry Farm for rides, shows or to spend the day at the waterpark. 4. San Diego, California Best for parks and museums San Diego has one of the most temperate climates you can find, which means plenty of spring break options for families. Expect the weather to be in the mid-60s, great for hanging at the beach and strolling through the city. San Diego Zoo and Safari Park provide the chance to see exotic animals, while SeaWorld gives visitors up-close encounters with aquatic animals. Legoland and Belmont Park should quench your thirst for theme parks, but Disneyland is within driving distance, just in case. The city also has no shortage of museums, with 16 located in Balboa Park alone. 5. San Luis Obispo, California Best for ocean activities Situated between Los Angeles and San Francisco, this coastal city is full of spring break family vacation ideas. Head to Morro Bay for kayaking around oyster farms and bird watching. Stop by Mitchell Park for an afternoon picnic. Spend your day at the beach or rent a surfboard to test your skills on the waves. For land-based thrills, the Vista Lago Adventure Park has ropes courses and zip lines. The Avila Valley Barn features a petting zoo and fresh produce to sustain you through all of your activities. 6. Yosemite, California Best for camping Yosemite is another destination that makes this list of spring break vacation ideas, in part due to how the seasonal weather improves the experience. With mountain snow melting, Yosemite’s waterfalls are in top form. The park also doesn’t see peak crowds until summer, so you’ll have more seclusion to get the perfect pictures. Yosemite has bike rentals and miles of paved paths for touring the area. Experienced climbers can take their shot at renowned routes on El Capitan and Half Dome, while everyone in the family can enjoy stargazing. 7. Park City, Utah Best for outdoor sports Park City is another spring break destination where snow is at the top of every visitor’s mind. However, the area has lots more to offer in the spring, so no matter the weather, your days will be packed with activities. The mountain streams are great for fly fishing, with expert guides available to help you find the most action. Explore nature with no lift ticket required by strapping snowshoes to your boots. Take advantage of the wide open spaces with a family trap shooting competition. Fun fact: Park City was at risk of becoming a ghost town. The miners of the area had the idea to turn it into a resort town and it eventually became one of the top ski destinations in the country. 8. Virginia City, Nevada Best for Old West history Virginia City is a preserved slice of the Old West. It began as a mining town in the 19th century and now is a thriving destination for spring break. The original mines are still open to the public, with tours lasting roughly 30 minutes. There are multiple museums that offer an added taste of what life was like back then. The Fourth Ward School Museum has authentically preserved classrooms, with exhibits and archived resources. The Way It Was Museum provides the opportunity to step back in time and experience the Old West through historical artifacts. 9. Aspen, Colorado Best for skiing Theme parks and oceans aren’t always the priority for spring breaks. Some families want to stretch out winter for as long as possible and get an extra week of use out of their skis. If that sounds like your family, Aspen has what you need. In addition to skiing, the Rocky Mountains have trails accessible for all skill levels, with learning programs that cater to children. You can hop on a dog sled for a rustic tour of the backcountry or swap your skis for ice skates at the free Snowmass Ice Rink. 10. Grand Canyon, Arizona Best for views and hiking The Grand Canyon is a national treasure for good reason, and with that status comes big crowds. However, if you choose to take your family here for spring break, the number of visitors will be far fewer than at peak times in the summer. If you plan on going for a hike, you’ll have a much easier go of it since the daytime temperature hovers around 60 degrees. If hiking isn’t of interest, helicopter tours can take you to the bottom of the canyon. Kids also have the option to participate in the Junior Ranger program. 11. Lake Powell, Arizona Best for boating If you need to be on the water but know you want to avoid the raucous crowds of Lake Havasu, Lake Powell is a great alternative spring break destination for families. You can sleep in a rented houseboat and cruise around for the week. Nearby attractions include Rainbow Bridge National Monument, one of the largest natural bridges in the world, and Antelope and Secret Canyons. Lake Powell is connected to the Colorado River, providing miles upon miles of shoreline to be explored. When you find a spot you like, go ashore for a picnic in privacy. 12. Wisconsin Dells, Wisconsin Best for water parks Families from around the world travel to the Dells to experience the greatest concentration of water parks they could ever hope to find. Weather in Wisconsin is notably unpredictable during spring breaks, but don’t worry about your plans being left to chance — the area has plenty of fun to be had indoors, too. If the sun refuses to come out, you can head to indoor water parks like the Chula Vista Resort. Spring break ideas don’t solely revolve around water, though. Families can rent ATVs and go on guided tours, complete high ropes courses or zip line above the Wisconsin woodlands. Fun fact: Wisconsin Dells is home to America’s largest outdoor water park, Noah’s Ark, which spans 70 acres and has three miles of waterslides. 13. Virginia Beach, Virginia Best for kite flying Take advantage of Virginia Beach’s beautiful coastline by spending the day at the beach, either by jumping into the water or flying a kite in the gusting winds. Multiple festivals are held in the spring as well, focusing on food, art and even Monster Trucks. If your family values farm-to-table food, you’re going to want to check out Virginia Beach. The city is the largest producer of strawberries in the state and, beginning in April, offers the opportunity to pick them for yourself. Other produce and wildflowers are also options. 14. Jamestown, Virginia Best for colonial reenactments Jamestown was the first permanent English settlement in the New World, and residents continue to preserve its important role in American history. Visitors can experience live reenactments of what life was like in the 1600s, with accurate re-creations of forts, ships and villages. Your visit to Jamestown doesn’t have to be all educational. The James River is great for kayaking on your own or with a guided tour. 15. Washington, D.C. Best for blossoms and history The nation’s capital is one of the best spring break destinations for families. It has plenty of entertainment to offer year-round, but seeing springtime cherry blossoms makes it extra special. From late March to mid April, the National Cherry Blossom Festival offers performances and cultural events around the district, plus the blooming trees surrounding the Tidal Basin. Parents can take their kids to a parade, watch fireworks and sprinkle in visits to national monuments and museums. The kids will be having so much fun they might not even realize they’re learning at the same time. 16. Nashville, Tennessee Best for country music Going to Nashville on spring break with kids is a great way to mix your interests with theirs. Take the family to the Country Music Hall of Fame to learn all about the genre’s greatest musicians, then catch a live show at the Grand Ole Opry. Animal lovers will feel right at home at the Nashville Zoo. There are parks galore in Nashville, where your kids can run themselves tired. Of particular note is Centennial Park, home to a full-scale re-creation of the Parthenon. Fun fact: Nashville is the hometown of The Seeing Eye, the first organization to bring service dogs to the United States. 17. Beech Mountain, North Carolina Best for mountain biking Beat the summer crowds to Beech Mountain and take your pick of its many springtime activities. The town, tucked away in the Blue Ridge Mountains near the Tennessee border, has a number of affordable resorts with late-season skiing, snowboarding and tubing. As winter recedes, nearby Buckeye Lake is a hotspot for fishing and canoeing. The area is also becoming well known for its bicycling routes. Whether you prefer to ride on the road or along rocky trails, Beech Mountain has you covered. 18. North Myrtle Beach, South Carolina Best for beaches If you’re coming up short brainstorming spring break ideas for families, why not fall back on a trusted favorite? North Myrtle Beach has activities for all ages and a perfect climate for fun under the sun. It has a slightly more laid-back feel than Myrtle Beach, and has smaller crowds as a result. North Myrtle Beach is still in a convenient position for visitors to benefit from everything the area has to offer. Families can fish from the Cherry Grove Pier, kayak in the ocean or enjoy a swashbuckling dinner and a show at Pirates Voyage. 19. Hilton Head Island, South Carolina Best for wildlife tours Hilton Head Island is brimming with spring break ideas for families. There are over 50 miles of trails that make exploring the island convenient either on foot or by bicycle. The area is relatively flat, so family members of all ages can traverse with relative ease. The weather is warm come springtime, so the public beaches are a big attraction, as are tours to see the island’s alligators and dolphins. 20. Savannah, Georgia Best for festivals There’s no better time to visit Savannah than in the spring, beating the summer heat and enjoying all of the outdoor attractions. Riverboat cruises serve dinner complemented with live music for a luxurious yet relaxed experience. Or stick to land with a series of spring festivals. St. Patrick’s Day is the most popular, but other renowned festivals showcase art and music. Those with a penchant for the supernatural can attend one of their famous ghost tours, which are conducted via trolley, foot and even hearse. 21. St. Petersburg, Florida Best for beaches and gardens Florida is a top destination for spring breakers, and there’s no reason why families should be left out of the mix. St. Petersburg is a great spring break option for families that bypasses the wild side of places like Daytona Beach. St. Petersburg is home to the Sunken Gardens, a haven for over 50,000 tropical plants, along with waterfalls and exotic birds. The celebrated Busch Gardens in nearby Tampa gives family members of all ages the chance to hop on amusement park rides, hand-feed animals and shop for souvenirs. 22. Orlando, Florida Best for theme parks If you’re looking for spring break destinations for families, you can’t go wrong with Orlando. The city has a high concentration of world-class theme parks, no matter your interests. Walt Disney World needs no introduction — classic attractions like Cinderella’s Castle and the Animal Kingdom draw visitors from around the world. If you’re looking for something new, Universal Studios has immersive attractions like The Wizarding World of Harry Potter, Legoland features kid-friendly rides and SeaWorld has the Seven Seas Food Festival through early May. 23. Lake Placid, New York Best for water sports Lake Placid is well known for being a great summer destination for families, but this mountain retreat has plenty to offer in the spring as well. The surrounding Adirondacks have miles of trails for hiking and biking. Spring is also the perfect time to view the blooming wild flowers before the summer heat takes over. Melting snow adds to the rushing rivers, providing a thrilling experience for adventurous travelers who want to try their hand at whitewater rafting. While the weather is warming up at this time of year, Whiteface Mountain is still in operation, allowing your family to ski the slopes that hosted the 1980 Winter Olympics. 24. Boston, Massachusetts Best for urban tours Families that prefer urban beats should set their sights on Boston. The city is brimming with history, and there’s no better way to experience it than by walking the Boston Freedom Trail. You’ll see attractions like the Paul Revere House, the Massachusetts State House, King’s Chapel and more. Boston is also home to the USS Constitution, the country’s oldest warship still afloat. Tours of the boat are offered Wednesday through Sunday, with the museum open daily. 25. Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania Best for botanical gardens City sights might be the first thing that comes to mind when you think of Pittsburgh, but a healthy mix of greenery — indoors and outside — makes it a great choice for family spring break. From mid-March to early April, the Phipps Conservatory puts on the Spring Flower Show, showcasing a unique theme each year. Continue to take advantage of the weather with bike rides along the river or through the woods on hundreds of miles of trails. You can even take the family on a multi-day ride on the Great Allegheny Passage or C&O Canal Trail, stopping at bed and breakfasts along the way. Spring break planning tips Getting the most out of your spring break requires more than simply picking a spot with the most attractions. Let these tips guide your brainstorming of spring break vacation ideas: Set a budget: The average vacation cost for just one person is $1,919 per week. That includes lodging, food, transportation and entertainment. Depending on where you travel and what you want to do, your price could greatly exceed that. Setting a budget early on will help with the rest of your planning by narrowing options and, ultimately, leading to less stress. Pick a destination: Find out what everyone in your family wants to do and look for a destination that can deliver on the greatest number of desires. The destination should also work within your budget. For instance, if everyone wants to hang at the beach, a week at North Myrtle Beach is going to be more affordable than a week on Oahu. Research the area: The internet is filled with travel blogs covering nearly every destination on the planet. Use them to spark new ideas and gain valuable insights into what’s worth your time and money. Always be sure to verify the claims — some blogs could be years out of date and not accurately reflect prices or which businesses are still in operation. Pack efficiently: Think in terms of essentials, not what you might need for every possibility. It’s a lot less stressful getting from point A to point B when each person has only one suitcase. For added benefits, look into how to properly pack bags to get the most out of the space. Sifting through all of these spring break ideas to find the perfect family destination is no easy feat. However, with proper planning, you can find the right spot not just for this vacation, but for all your vacations to come.
Not into fighting for a sliver of sand on a packed beach? Opt for a beach club, where you can splash in the Mediterranean Sea before making your way to a pristine sun lounger (no soggy, sandy towels in sight) and ordering a refreshing adult beverage. Marbella is home to plenty of seaside establishments that will make your Spanish beach adventures both relaxing and refreshing. La Milla Situated on Playa de Nagüeles, La Milla is a sophisticated beach club with a focus on seafood and wine. You can enjoy views of the sparkling Mediterranean from relaxing sun loungers under the shade of palm-leaf umbrellas. If you don’t feel like moving (we don’t blame you), you can order up a delicious feast of king prawns or charcoal grilled sardines delivered straight to you. Or follow the wooden pathway to the restaurant where you can enjoy their full menu, which focuses on products from the Andalusian coast. El Ancla Fifty shades of blue meet you at El Ancla, located a few kilometers from Marbella in San Pedro de Alcantara. A large saltwater pool in soft turquoise hues sits on one side of the boho-style restaurant, and the Mediterranean Sea on the other. Sunbeds can be rented facing either the beach or the pool. No matter which you choose, don’t overlook the restaurant, which offers delicious seafood dishes (think whole seabass baked in salt, tuna tartare that melts in your mouth, clams and sushi). For a special treat, dine under the dappled canopy as you watch the sun set over the water. La Plage Casanis The relatively new La Plage Casanis, on the Estrella de Mar beach in Elviria, knows how to throw a party — the restaurant and club can host up to 250 guests in the summer. You can book wood-frame double sunbeds or choose hammocks to swing the afternoon away. The restaurant is beautiful, with soft wooden touches and a rustic charm. The menu is extensive, offering a variety of local dishes and an extensive wine list. Playa Padre Playa Padre — in the centre of Marbella on Playa del Cable — serves a fusion of Mediterranean and Asian cuisine, with a focus on vegetarian dishes. But don’t just come for the food; the setting is equally appealing, with frothy palm tree umbrellas and a sophisticated, relaxed ambiance. By night, this place turns into a party, hosting DJs, artists and dancers to help you soak up the atmosphere. Chiringuito If you’re looking for a beachfront club to take you from dawn to dusk, look no further than Chiringuito Puente Romano. The beachfront haven serves healthy breakfasts with fresh juices right through to al fresco lunches and dinners. Once night falls, a DJ provides the music for you to dance under the palms, cocktail in hand. Trocadero Petit Playa Located on Marbella’s famed Golden Mile is Trocadero Petit Playa. It has everything you could want for a day of relaxing by the beach: great location, sun loungers, relaxed al fresco dining space and delicious cocktails. Fresh fish is cooked al espeto, and when the sun goes down, lanterns glow softly around the tables. Naô Step into Naô, where poolside beds, big bottles and non-stop music transport you to another world. Enjoy the privacy of a cabana suite or soak up the atmosphere from a pool floatie as magnums of champagne are served trailing plumes of colourful smoke. Located just a kilometre inland from Puerto Banus, Naô offers fresh food both in the restaurant and by the pool. And the fun doesn’t stop at sunset: At night, the club hosts festival parties throughout the high season. If you want to experience all the beach clubs of Marbella, consider owning a turnkey second home in Spain. With Pacaso, you can co-own the home of your dreams.
Nestled in the San Bernardino Mountains, Lake Arrowhead is an idyllic lakefront town and the perfect escape from the hustle and bustle of city life. Just 80 miles from downtown Los Angeles, the “Alps of Southern California” offers endless ways to enjoy a weekend. Here are a few ideas to spark your inspiration. 1. Explore the lake by kayak or boat If you’re lucky enough to be staying lakefront, the lake is yours for the taking. (Lake Arrowhead is a private lake, so you’ll need a home on the water to launch your own vessel.) Spend a warm afternoon navigating the deep blue waters, perhaps even fishing or taking water ski lessons. Not staying on the lake? No problem. You can still experience it from aboard the Lake Arrowhead Queen. During the one-hour guided tour, you’ll learn about the history of the lake and the native cultures of the area, while marveling at some truly gorgeous lakefront mansions (some once owned by celebrities). 2. Wander through Lake Arrowhead Village Located on the southern shore of the lake, Lake Arrowhead Village has been the community hub since the 1920s. Alpine-inspired buildings house over 50 shops and restaurants, as well as the Lake Arrowhead Village Center Stage. It plays host to a popular summer concert series, with tribute bands playing all summer long. Throughout the year, the Village hosts other events, including Oktoberfest, a wooden boat show and holiday festivities. 3. Take a hike Thanks to its mountain locale, there are plenty of hikes to enjoy around Lake Arrowhead and in the entire San Bernardino National Forest. For a long and challenging hike, try Strawberry Peak Trail. At an elevation of over 6,000 feet, Strawberry Peak is the highest in the region, which means it offers beautiful views of the surrounding landscape. The 8-mile out-and-back hike is no walk in the park, with serious elevation gain over the last two miles. The views make it worth the effort, and on a clear day you can see all the way to Los Angeles. If you’re traveling with little ones or simply want something shorter, find your way to Heart Rock, also known as the Seeley Creek Trail. After just one mile, you’ll arrive at its namesake: a large rock with a perfectly heart-shaped indentation. The entire hike offers scenic beauty, with winding mountain paths, towering ponderosa pines and, after a spring rain, a lovely waterfall. 4. Have some family fun at Skypark at Santa’s Village As the name implies, you can actually visit Santa and Mrs. Claus at Santa’s Village during the holiday season. It’s undoubtedly the most popular time of the year to visit Skypark, as the whole village is decorated with Christmas lights, a charming outdoor skating rink beckons and a miniature train takes kids on a magical tour. But there’s plenty of year-round fun to be had at this mountain retreat. You’ll find a mountain bike park (and balance bike track for the little ones), pedal car tracks, bouldering, ax throwing, an archery range, a playground and more. 5. Take a drive on the Rim of the World Scenic Byway For a scenic drive with plenty of pullouts for marveling at mountain scenery and taking photos, the Rim of the World Scenic Byway is a can’t-miss. The 110-mile-long highway weaves through the Inland Empire and goes all the way to Big Bear, but you can easily jump on right outside of Lake Arrowhead. The winding mountain road reaches more than 7,000 feet of elevation in some places, so you’re destined for cool mountain air and incredible views. Popular stops include Silverwood Lake and Big Bear Lake. 6. Make a splash at Lake Gregory If you don’t have access to Lake Arrowhead, Lake Gregory is a wonderful alternative, just 20 minutes to the west. The public lake is the perfect place to cool off on a hot summer day. You’ll find a swimming beach, water slides, an inflatable on-water playground and a splash pad for the littlest swimmers. Boat rentals are also available, and there are plenty of trout in the lake, just waiting to be caught. Make Lake Arrowhead your mountain retreat As a co-owner of a Pacaso second home in Lake Arrowhead, you’ll have your very own luxury getaway, surrounded by the beautiful San Bernardino Mountains. Make it your home base for exploring everything this beautiful area has to offer.
If you’re considering a second home abroad, look no further than Spain. There’s a reason why it’s the world’s second-most popular tourist destination (after France), with approximately 82 million visitors a year. From its sun-drenched beaches, azure blue waters, mystical coves, gleaming mountain ranges and olive-studded hillsides, Spain has long been a favourite among European vacation goers — Brits in particular. It offers the perfect blend of warm hospitality, a climate to put even our best summer days to shame, an easy-going, rich culture and fantastic cuisine — and even better, it’s just a short flight away. If you’re looking for a second home in Spain, these five regions and cities offer sun, beaches and so much more. Costa del Sol Andalusia’s sun-drenched Costa del Sol — which translates to “Coast of the Sun” — stretches more than 150 kilometres along the southern Iberian Peninsula, and is arguably home to some of the most sought-after second home destinations in Spain. Boasting over 325 sunny days a year, it’s no wonder travellers flock there to seek out their own slice of paradise. Málaga is the region’s largest city and offers everything you could want — an airport, museums and excellent authentic restaurants, as well as inland areas which are bursting with ancient Greek, Roman and Moorish history. The renowned Sierra Nevada mountain range is just two hours away, where cyclists can tackle the sheer hillsides and skiing is available during the winter months. Marbella Along the Costa del Sol in the province of Málaga is the exclusive coastal town of Marbella. Within its centre is ‘The Golden Mile’: A one-mile-long stretch of upscale hotels, exclusive clubs, designer boutiques and Michelin-star restaurants. Puerto Banús Marina stands at one end of the gleaming stretch to the west and is packed full of some of the world’s most luxurious super yachts, whilst Marbella lies to the east. Marbella’s allure over the decades can be traced back to Prince Alfonso de Hohenlohe-Langenburg — also known as the Prince of Clubs — who first opened The Marbella Club Hotel in 1954, drawing in celebrities and royalty from around the world. Since then, the area's popularity has continued to grow, firmly placing it among the top destinations in Spain to own a luxury second home. From golden beaches kissed by the Mediterranean Sea, to the striking Sierra Blanca mountains that form Marbella’s dramatic backdrop, there is a corner here to suit everyone, and plenty of fresh seafood to go around. Ibiza The Balearic Islands, located off Spain’s eastern coast, are among the country’s most iconic destinations. Of the four main islands, Ibiza is known as one of the top party destinations in the world, drawing international DJs and party-goers to its world-famous clubs every year. For those seeking a quieter experience, Ibiza has a mellow side and a rich cultural history as well.It is an island of two halves that together, create one of the most famous destinations in the world. It’s where boho-luxe meets party revellers, gin-clear water sparkles in secluded coves, and history is interwoven through Ibiza Old Town — a UNESCO World Heritage site — where Renaissance architecture lines the cobbled streets. If you’re looking for a good time, look no further. This is an island that offers something for everyone. Mallorca Mallorca — often referred to as the crown jewel of the Mediterranean — is the largest of the Balearic Islands and a serious contender when considering a Spanish second home destination. Known for its dramatic limestone mountains, sheltered coves, crystal-clear waters and the vibrant, historic Roman capital of Palma, the island is a treasure trove offering a stunning varied landscape. Head to Puerto Portals — one of the island’s most glamorous spots — for people and yacht watching, or visit Cap de Formentor on the island’s northernmost point for dramatic ocean and mountain views, plus art galleries and citrus orchards in nearby towns. Costa Blanca Costa Blanca, or the “White Coast,” spans 200 kilometres along Spain’s southeastern coast, from Dénia in the north to Pilar de la Horadada in the south. The region has been a popular tourist destination since the 1950s, thanks to its stunning landscapes and famed towns like Alicante and Valencia. Located in southeast Costa Blanca is Alicante, a city known for its long stretches of beaches, the old town of Barrio de la Santa Cruz, its buzzy nightlife scene and palm tree studded boulevards. Valencia, located approximately 156 kilometres north of Alicante, is known as the home of arts and science (and is the alleged birthplace of Paella). The wider region is home to spectacular nature reserves, where coastal caves, waterfalls and scaling mountain crags attract those in search of adventure. A second home here offers the best of Spain’s spectacular and diverse landscape — one where you can sail and dive off the Mediterranean coast, scale the more than 50 mountain peaks (making it the second-most mountainous region in the country), swing your clubs at one of the 18 world-class golf courses or relax on one of the 71 blue flag beaches after catching some waves. A second home of your own If you dream of jumping on a quick flight to your own private escape in a city with fantastic restaurants, one of the best-preserved old towns in the region and year-round sunshine, then consider a Pacaso second home in Marbella. From a stylish villa that overlooks the town’s famous golf courses and spectacular Sierra Blanca mountain range to a sumptuous townhouse-style villa that offers the utmost privacy and stunning 360-degree panoramic views, you’ll find luxury and comfort in one of Spain’s most beautiful settings. Pacaso takes care of the design, furnishings, maintenance and management of the home, so you can simply show up and relax. Browse co-ownership listings in Marbella and discover your dream second home.
Tucked away in Colorado’s Rocky Mountains, Steamboat Springs is an outdoor lover’s paradise, no matter the time of year. When you add in a wide variety of arts and cultural attractions and a dash of Old West charm, Steamboat becomes an idyllic getaway for just about anyone. Here are seven of our favorite things to do in and around this friendly mountain town. 1. Ski or snowboard in “Champagne Powder” Steamboat Springs is known as “Ski Town, U.S.A.” thanks to its six mountain peaks, 3,000 skiable acres and 165 trails, including plenty of tree skiing. Skiers and snowboarders from beginners to Olympians flock to Steamboat Springs every winter for its famous “Champagne Powder” snow — the lightest, driest, fluffiest snow in the world. How? It simply has a lower water content than most other snow. It was named by a local rancher who said in the 1950s that the snow tickled his nose like champagne while he skied. Powder purists say you haven’t truly skied powder until you’ve skied in Steamboat Springs. 2. Soak in the hot springs After a long day on the mountain, there’s nothing better for sore muscles than soaking in natural hot springs. Strawberry Park Hot Springs, just 20 minutes outside of town, is open year-round and offers large soaking pools at varying temperatures. In the warmer months, you can stay overnight, either tent camping or in a cabin — you can even spend the night in a train caboose or covered wagon. If you prefer to soak in town, Old Town Hot Springs is the perfect place to make a splash. The structured pools are fed by natural hot springs and have warm, but not too hot, temperatures. Relax in the smaller hot tub-type pools, swim in the main hot pool or soak in the natural minerals of the Heart Spring. Families will love the seasonal waterslides, too. 3. Ride the Steamboat Scenic Gondola The best way to acquaint yourself with Steamboat Springs is from above on the Steamboat Scenic Gondola. In the winter, you can take a ride up Mount Werner in an enclosed eight-person gondola, whether you’re skiing or not. All year long, you’ll be treated to sweeping views of the surrounding Yampa Valley, with seasonal beauty like spring foliage, summer sunshine, gorgeous fall colors and snowy winter peaks. From the top, you can access hiking and mountain biking trails and nature walks. 4. Explore the Mount Zirkel Wilderness Area Mount Zirkel is the highest peak surrounding Steamboat Springs, reaching 12,182 feet into the sky. The Mount Zirkel Wilderness Area that surrounds it offers almost 160,000 unspoiled acres that are simply irresistible to outdoor adventurers. Part of the Continental Divide National Scenic Trail snakes through the area, and you’ll also find 150 miles of trails that are used for hiking, snowshoeing and cross-country skiing, depending on the season. Some 70 lakes and the headwaters of three rivers round out the fun. 5. Visit Fish Creek Falls One of the best-known attractions in Steamboat Springs, Fish Creek Falls is a stunning waterfall that cascades some 280 feet into Fish Creek Canyon. It’s located within the Routt National Forest, just a few minutes from town. There are many ways to take in the beauty of the falls, from simply walking the paved path to a viewpoint, to challenging hikes that lead to the upper falls. In the coldest part of winter, you may even see adventurous ice climbers making their way up the frozen waterfall. 6. Enjoy music and theater This small town is big on culture. Visitors and locals alike spend evenings and weekends enjoying performances from Opera Steamboat, the outdoor Piknik Theatre and the Steamboat Dance Theatre. The yearly calendar is also packed with festivals, including the Strings Music Festival, WinterWonderGrass Festival, MusicFest, and plenty of free summer outdoor movies and concerts. 7. Live out your Wild West dreams The spirit of the American West is still found throughout the area, from the working ranches dotting the Yampa Valley outside town to the warm and friendly spirit you’ll experience as you explore. You can get in on the fun yourself, whether you want to attend the Steamboat Springs Pro Rodeo Series, take a horseback tour, visit a dude ranch or pick out the perfect pair of cowboy boots at F.M. Light & Sons, which has been outfitting locals since 1905. Enjoy all four seasons in Steamboat Springs As the co-owner of a Pacaso second home in this Colorado mountain town, you’ll quickly become a regular. With a luxury vacation home as your jumping-off point, you can explore all the beauty and charm of Steamboat Springs.
Charleston has an incredibly long history. Just how long? The town was founded in the late 1600s as the English settlement known as Charles Towne. Today, with some 150,000 residents, it is the biggest city in South Carolina. For history lovers, Charleston has all the makings of a storied destination: wartime battles, ghost stories, pirate captures, stunning architecture and plenty of local folklore. Whether you’re a first-time visitor or are returning to learn more, here are the seven sites you won’t want to miss. 1. Charles Towne Landing Charles Towne Landing is the site of the first Charleston colony, established when settlers arrived in the area in 1670. Today, this state historic site gives visitors of all ages a crash course in American Colonial history, done via incredible hands-on exhibits and a self-guided history trail. A popular activity for families, visitors can explore the deck and cabins of a replica 17th century ship like the settlers arrived on, view archeological dig sites and walk the Animal Forest Trail to spot native species present at the time of the early settlers. 2. The Angel Oak Believed to be over 400 years old, the Angel Oak is both a historical treasure and a natural wonder. This Southern live oak is 65 feet high with a circumference of 25.5 feet. This live oak, thought to be one of the oldest east of the Mississippi River, provides an incredible 17,000 square feet of shade — a must when you wander through this beautiful park in the summer. 3. The Old Exchange Building This National Historic Landmark is a must-visit for anyone wanting to learn more about South Carolina history. The Old Exchange Building has been part of the American story since its completion in 1771. Along with its underground Provost Dungeon, the exchange was used as a prison during the American Revolution, and it’s said the notorious pirate Blackbeard was once held there. The building’s history has its share of shame (public slave auctions were held there) and pride (it is one of only four remaining structures where the U.S. Constitution was ratified in 1788). The site is open for guided tours. 4. The Old City Jail The imposing, castle-like and slightly foreboding building in downtown is the Old City Jail. Built in 1802 and used until 1939, the jail housed a range of storied individuals, from plundering pirates and Union Army prisoners during the Civil War to Denmark Vesey, who was jailed for planning a slave revolt. It also has a reputation as Charleston’s most haunted building, and a number of local ghost tours include it on their spookiest tours. 5. Fort Sumter Did you know that the American Civil War started right in Charleston? The Confederacy fired on the U.S. garrison of Fort Sumter on April 12, 1861, and the rest is history. Take a ferry to the fort, where you can wander stone caverns and marvel at the size of Civil War-era cannons. An on-site museum details the fort’s role in the war, and you can opt for either a quick ranger talk and a self-guided tour or a full guided tour. 6. Middleton Place National Historic Landmark Go back in time at Middleton Place. The 110-acre estate of the Middleton family tells the story of both the plantation’s white owners and its enslaved African and African-American workers. The House Museum is filled with family artifacts, including those of Arthur Middleton, a signer of the Declaration of Independence, while Eliza’s House provides insights into the enslaved people who labored and lived there. Visitors can also explore stable yards and 65 acres of the country’s oldest landscaped gardens. 7. Old Slave Mart Museum Charleston played a major role in the tragic history of American slavery. At one time, 35-40% of the Africans brought to North America as slaves were processed through Charleston. Considered the last surviving slave auction gallery in the state, the Old Slave Mart today has an in-depth exhibit detailing Charleston’s slave history. Many museum staff members have traced their history to enslaved people in Charleston. Immerse yourself in Charleston history With its deep history to explore, one trip to Charleston is never enough. Explore Pacaso second home listings and start making your own history in Charleston.
Charleston is a charming, culture-filled South Carolina destination that seems to get more and more popular every year. Some 7 million visitors are drawn to the subtropical weather, an incredible food scene, nearby beaches and the 17 championship golf courses within swinging distance. Whether you’re a first-time visitor or a regular, here are five things you should definitely know about Charleston, nicknamed the Holy City for its history of religious tolerance and numerous places of worship. 1. Being full of firsts Dating from 1736, the Charleston Stage Company's Dock Street Theater is touted as America’s first theater and has since been revived after the Great Fire of 1740, the Civil War and again in 2010. Today, it’s at the heart of Charleston’s artistic scene, hosting over 100 performances each year. Charleston is also home to the nation’s first city-supported college, the College of Charleston, founded in 1770. And just three years later came the Charleston Museum, inspired by the world-famous British Museum and now commonly regarded as America’s first museum. 2. Its many haunted spots Many believers of the paranormal profess Charleston to be one of the most haunted cities in the United States. Multiple companies offer walking tours of some of Charleston’s spookiest sites, including the Old Exchange Building, which has an underground dungeon used as a prison during the American Revolution and once housed the notorious pirate Blackbeard. Less than a mile away, the Old City Jail is a popular stop on ghost tours, and it’s been featured on the TV series “Ghost Hunters” and “Paranormal State.” The jail once housed the city’s most notorious convicts, including the first convicted U.S. female serial killer, Lavina Fisher, who was publicly executed there, wearing her wedding dress. 3. Incredible local food Foodies from near and far head to the South for the food scene, and Charleston offers a culinary experience all its own. With a combination of European, African and Native American influences, the cuisine in Charleston has a long history — and plenty of flavor. You can find iconic local dishes like shrimp and grits and cornbread all over town. Fried green tomatoes make a popular appetizer, and boiled peanuts are so loved, they’re called the “caviar of the South.” You’ll find she-crab soup at many local restaurants — a rich, bisque-like crab soup that’s called “she-crab” because it contains orange crab roe, found only in female crab. For a hearty dinner, try frog-free Frogmore stew — named for the South Carolina town where it originated. This one-pot meal has shrimp, corn on the cob, new potatoes, and smoked sausage. Wash it all down with a glass of Planter’s punch, a cocktail invented at the historic Planters Inn in downtown Charleston. 4. Rich history History buffs can’t get enough of Charleston’s historic buildings, monuments, museums and walking tours. Charleston celebrated its 350th anniversary in 2020, and the city’s most storied historical sites span the centuries. Start at the famous Angel Oak, a live oak tree believed to be over 400 years old. At 65 feet tall and with branches spanning to 180 feet, it creates an incredible 17,000 square feet of shade. Then, check out the 1713 Powder Magazine, the last remaining structure from Charleson’s original walled city from pirate times. The Old Slave Mart Museum is the best place to learn about the tragedy of the once-booming slave trade in Charleston. At one point, as many as 35 to 40% of slaves entered the United States through Charleston. A visit to Fort Sumter is also a must, as you’ll learn more about how the Civil War started, right in Charleston. 5. Proximity to beautiful beaches Just 15 miles from downtown Charleston are some of the East Coast’s most gorgeous beaches and five distinct beach towns to explore. Folly Beach is the closest to Charleston and features an action-packed boardwalk, wonderful locally owned shops and restaurants, white sands and crystal-clear waters perfect for watersports. Isle of Palms is a barrier island located between the Atlantic Ocean and the Intracoastal Waterway. With broad sandy beaches, resort communities, watersports and multiple golf courses, it’s a popular vacation destination for families. Just south of Isle of Palms is Sullivan’s Island, a laid-back beach town popular with locals and visitors alike, and home to the Revolutionary War site of Fort Moultrie. Kiawah Island is the most luxurious of the bunch. It’s a private resort island where you’ll find 10 miles of beaches and the famous Kiawah Island Golf Resort. Finally, Seabrook Island has a serene and secluded feel and ample ways to soak up the South Carolina sunshine, whether your idea of a good time is fishing, golf, tennis, horseback riding or a nature walk to explore the maritime forest and marshlands. What will you love most about Charleston? There’s so much to discover in Charleston and so many ways to spend your time. Whether you love history, art and culture, outdoor activities, food or a little bit of everything, you need ample time to explore. Become a Charleston local when you buy a Pacaso second home.
Cape Cod is an idyllic summer vacation destination located on a hook-shaped, 60-mile-long peninsula jutting into the Atlantic Ocean. While nearly 6 million people visit Cape Cod each year, the shoreline is surprisingly unspoiled, thanks in large part to the National Park Service, which oversees a 40-mile stretch of coastline designated as the Cape Cod National Seashore. The park, stretching from Chatham to Provincetown and covering 43,500 acres, was established by President John F. Kennedy in 1961. A summer resident of the Cape himself, Kennedy wanted to preserve the natural and historic significance of the area. Six separate beaches make up the Cape Cod National Seashore, each with its own distinct charm and recreational activities. Here’s what you need to know about visiting each beach. Coast Guard Beach in Eastham Called “The Great Beach” by American naturalist Henry David Thoreau, this large strand of golden sand on the Cape’s Atlantic side is a regular on lists of the country’s top beaches. The beach takes its name from an old Coast Guard building that still stands on the dunes, and the maritime force had a good reason to be watchful: These waters have been the site of more than 3,000 shipwrecks in the last 400 years. Coast Guard Beach offers a pathway through Nauset Marsh and Nauset Spit, where you can enjoy birdwatching and spot harbor and gray seals resting on sand bars. Fun fact: This beach is where the Mayflower passengers are said to have first spotted land after crossing the Atlantic in 1620. What you need to know: Coast Guard Beach is located at the intersection of Nauset Road and Ocean View Drive in Eastham. During the summer months, the on-site parking lot is reserved for local residents and those with handicap placards. An open-air shuttle provides transportation to the beach from the nearby Little Creek parking lot. Entry to Coast Guard Beach — and all the National Seashore Beaches — is fee-based, and fees vary depending on your mode of transportation and whether you buy a day or annual pass. Nauset Light Beach in Eastham A broad, sandy beach backed by a steep, rocky slope, Nauset Light Beach is named for the Nauset Lighthouse, which is listed on the National Register of Historic Places. (On select days, free lighthouse tours are available, thanks to the Nauset Light Preservation Society.) It’s common to see seals swimming just offshore, which also means that great white sharks could be close by. Be sure to follow all posted directions and listen to the lifeguards. If you’re in the area in the winter when the beach profile is lower, you may be able to spot the brick foundation of one of the original Three Sisters lighthouses. Fun fact: In the late 1870s, the French Transatlantic Cable line that enabled telegraph communications between Europe and North America ran through Cape Cod. You can see the historic French Cable Hut at the northern edge of the parking lot. What you need to know: On-site parking at Nauset Light Beach is extremely limited, often filling up by mid-morning in the summer months. Arriving by bicycle is a smart move. Simply start at the Salt Pond Visitor Center on the paved Nauset Trail, then continue north on Ocean View Drive, past Coast Guard Beach. Marconi Beach in Wellfleet Marconi Beach has a storied history. It is near the communication station used by Italian inventor Guglielmo Marconi to send the first transatlantic wireless signal between the U.S. and Great Britain in 1903. During World War II, the beach was a site for artillery and rocket testing. Today, it’s known for its incredible, unobstructed natural views in all directions, thanks to the high scarp and Atlantic Ocean. It’s often less crowded than other area beaches and the gentle slope of the beach makes it popular with swimmers, boogie boarders and skimboarders. Fun fact: Located near the Marconi Station site, the Atlantic White Cedar Swamp Trail offers a 1.5-mile nature walk through a wide range of flora, including red maples, pitch pines and white oaks. What you need to know: There’s a large parking lot, but this beach is not handicap accessible because of a long set of stairs down to the sand. Head of the Meadow Beach in North Truro Between Truro and Provincetown is Head of the Meadow Beach, a roomy and open beach with plenty of space for roaming. It’s a bit more remote, on the far reaches of the Cape, so there are fewer visitors. Shifting sands mean that sometimes smaller pools of water are created — perfect for younger swimmers. If you time it right and the conditions are perfect, you may come across some tidepools to explore at low tide. Fun fact: At low tide, you can sometimes see the wreck of the Francis, a ship that sank during a storm in December, 1872. What you need to know: Head of the Meadow Beach is dog friendly except during much of the peak summer season, because the beach is a shorebird nesting habitat for the threatened piping plover. Race Point Beach in Provincetown Race Point Beach is at the tip of Cape Cod where it curves back toward the mainland. It’s popular with both families with children and those interested in watersports, as the waves are much smaller than other beaches on the Cape. Typically, the waters are calm and more bay-like, so you’ll often see visitors swimming, kayaking and stand-up paddleboarding. The beach is also the starting point for a 1.75-mile hike to the remote Race Point Lighthouse along the Hatches Harbor Trail. The trail takes you through sand dunes, wooded areas and beautiful marshland — just don’t forget the mosquito repellant. Fun fact: During the spring months, it’s possible to see whales right from the shore. What you need to know: Race Point Beach is rarely packed, thanks to its remote location on the tip of the Cape. Make a day of it by pairing some time at the beach with a visit to the nearby Pilgrim Monument and Provincetown Museum. Herring Cove Beach in Provincetown Since it’s on the bay side of the Cape, Herring Cove Beach has smaller waves and sunset views. Arguably the most popular of all six beaches, Herring Cove Beach offers easy parking, a convenient beach shuttle, picnic area and a seasonal snack bar. The beach can be a bit rocky, but it’s very accessible — beach wheelchairs are available from the lifeguards. If you’re interested in exploring on two wheels, you can ride the Province Lands Bicycle Trail from Herring Cove Beach to the Province Lands Visitor Center and the Beech Forest. The 5.45-mile loop takes you through pine forest, dunes and cranberry bogs. Fun fact: The Travel Channel named Herring Cove Beach one of the best beaches on the East Coast. What you need to know: You’ll find the beach at the end of Route 6 in Provincetown. Lifeguards are on duty during peak summer months, and there’s plenty of parking just a short walk from the beach. Find your favorite Cape Cod beach With so many beaches, historical sites and recreational opportunities, you’ll want more than just a week’s vacation on Cape Cod. When you become a co-owner of a Pacaso second home, you’ll have time to explore like a local, discovering rugged stretches of coastline, taking nature walks to spot flora and fauna, and watching seals and whales frolic in the Atlantic.
Cape Cod is known for unspoiled beaches, historic lighthouses and natural beauty — which are all on display at a whopping 40+ area golf courses. From unassuming municipal courses to super-exclusive country clubs, the golfing opportunities on Cape Cod and nearby islands are seemingly endless. Not sure which course is right for you? You can’t go wrong hitting the links at these courses. Cape Cod National Golf Club in Brewster Named one of the top 20 courses in Massachusetts by Golf Digest, the Cape Cod National Golf Club is one of the Cape’s most famous courses. Over the years, the course has hosted prestigious events like the U.S. Amateur Championship and the U.S. Women’s Open qualifier. It has a championship yardage of 6,954 feet, and is a par 72 course. It’s known as a challenging course, with rolling hills, 12 doglegs, 90 bunkers and more than a few strategically placed ponds. It’s a private course, so to gain access you must play as a member’s guest or book a stay at neighboring Wequassett Resort and Golf Club. Farm Neck Golf Club in Oak Bluffs on Martha’s Vineyard Take the ferry to the island of Martha’s Vineyard and play a round at the Farm Neck Golf Club, with 18 holes on the eastern edge of the island. You’ll enjoy sweeping views of the Vineyard Sound, as well as wooded areas, salt marshes and meadows. And speaking of water, there’s plenty of it on this course, with the 8th hole running almost entirely along the coast and a 15th hole that seems to be more pond than solid ground. Farm Neck is semi-private, so non-members may have to get a little creative about their tee time — but a twilight round on this course is always stunning. Miacomet Golf Course on Nantucket Miacomet Golf Course on Nantucket is the island’s only 18-hole public golf facility. Built on land once inhabited by the Wampanoag tribes who called it “Miacomet” or “The Meeting Place,” this is a links-style course with wide fairways, grassy knolls, plenty of sand and pristine greens. It’s a 6,167 yard, par 72 course, with a course rating of 69.0, making it an approachable course for the vacationing golfer and weekend warrior. The Captains in Brewster In the self-proclaimed “golf capital of the Lower Cape,” The Captains Golf Course boasts two 18-hole public golf courses, the Port and the Starboard. Both are par 72 and feature tree-lined fairways and blissfully few water hazards. Both courses were designed by famed golf course architect Brian Silva, and each hole is named after a historic New England mariner. Highland Links in Truro Established in 1892, the 9-hole Highlands Links Golf Course is a bit of a hidden gem, known to Cape Cod locals but a surprising treat for visitors. It’s one of the oldest golf courses in the country and part of the Cape Cod National Seashore — two facts that make it unique, but this course is much more than just fun facts. Highland Links is a true Scottish links course, set atop incredible bluffs that show off endless Atlantic Ocean views. It’s a family-friendly course that’s affordable, easy to book and attainable for golfers of all levels. Cape Cod Country Club in East Falmouth Billed as the classic Cape Cod golf experience, Cape Cod Country Club is a public 18-hole championship golf course that has hosted a range of state and local tournaments. The course is known for its pristine greens and year-round operations, as well as its signature 9th hole. Don’t be fooled by its par 3 rating – it’s a 165-yard hole where you tee off over water, then have to navigate two sizable bunkers protecting the green. Tee it high and let it fly on Cape Cod How long would it take you to golf all 40+ courses on Cape Cod and the surrounding areas? There’s only one way to find out! Make a Cape Cod Pacaso your second home and start checking some courses off your list. At the end of the day, return to your luxury second home — there’s plenty of space to store your clubs.
Classic Americana abounds on Cape Cod, and there are so many ways to take it all in. With quaint towns, endless historical sites, coastal lighthouses and beautiful beaches, the Cape Cod peninsula is truly an experience. Whether you’re a New England native who longs to spend “summers on the Cape” or a first-timer looking to explore the myriad charms of coastal Massachusetts, Cape Cod has it all. Here are seven wonderful ways to experience the Cape. 1. Cycle the Cape Cod Rail Trail Extending 25 miles from South Dennis to Wellfleet, the Cape Cod Rail Trail mostly follows what used to be the Old Colony Railroad Company route. Today, it’s a bike, walking and horseback riding trail that takes you to the towns of Yarmouth, Harwich, Brewster and Eastham, among others. Plot your course through mostly flat terrain and make your way along bucolic farmlands, salt marshes, beaches and bridges. 2. See where the Mayflower landed While the pilgrims famously settled in Plymouth, the Mayflower actually landed at what is now Provincetown, located on the tip of Cape Cod. Here you’ll find the 252-foot-tall Pilgrim Monument, the tallest all-granite structure in the country. Climb to the top, traversing 116 steps and 60 ramps, and you’ll be rewarded with incredible harbor views. Be sure to leave enough time to explore the Provincetown Museum, with exhibits highlighting the arrival of the pilgrims and the signing of the Mayflower Compact, plus a replica of a 19th-century sea captain’s parlor. 3. Enjoy a whale watching excursion Mid-May to October is peak whale watching season off the coast of Cape Cod. From the deck of a whale watching cruise and guided by a local naturalist, you’re likely to see humpback whales, pilot whales or blue whales. Most tour operators visit the Stellwagen Bank National Marine Sanctuary, the only one in New England. Be sure to take your excursion with a tour company recognized by Whale SENSE for responsible stewardship. 4. Take a ferry to Martha’s Vineyard Located five miles south of Cape Cod, the island of Martha’s Vineyard is 87 square miles and has six distinct towns. Hop on a ferry from Woods Hole, Hyannis or Nantucket, and in a matter of minutes you’ll be exploring this historic vacation spot. Wander on foot or by bike and discover rugged beaches, cute boutiques, charming restaurants and local coffee shops. You can even stop by locations where “Jaws” was filmed. As you wander through towns and villages, keep your eyes peeled for celebrities — Martha’s Vineyard is a popular destination for former first families, Hollywood types and musicians. 5. Explore the Cape Cod National Seashore While millions of people visit the hook-shaped peninsula of Cape Cod every year, its beaches are delightfully unspoiled. Perhaps that’s because almost the entire shoreline is protected by the National Park Service as the Cape Cod National Seashore. Explore almost 40 miles of coastline that includes oceanfront, marshes, grasslands, dunes, wild cranberry bogs and woodlands. Among the best-known beaches are Nauset Beach in Eastham, Herring Cover in Provincetown and Marconi Beach in Wellfleet. As you wander, keep an eye out for waterfowl, turtles, deer, migratory birds and toads. 6. Visit the Sandwich Glass Museum The hamlet of Sandwich, on the Cape’s west end, was a major glassmaking center in the 1800s, and today Sandwich glass is still prized by collectors. The Sandwich Glass Museum shares the history and techniques of traditional glassmaking and displays more than 5,000 pieces of locally produced glassware. Visitors can also see hourly glass-blowing demonstrations throughout the day and take home a piece of glass from the museum shop. 7. Eat all the lobster Lobster bisque. Lobster salad. Whole steamed lobster. Famous lobster rolls. There are so many ways to enjoy this delicacy during your time on Cape Cod. Perhaps the most authentic way to dine like a local is at a classic Cape Cod lobster shack. Try the family-friendly Arnold’s Lobster & Clam Bar in Eastham — it even has an on-site miniature golf course. Sesuit Harbor Cafe in Dennis boasts incredible marina views alongside a massive, Instagram-ready lobster roll. And Wellfleet’s own PJ’s is an unassuming eatery that’s racked up a boatload of awards for its lobster rolls and chowder. Spend summer — and the other seasons — on the Cape Imagine owning a second home on Cape Cod and having all the time you need to enjoy charming towns, local cuisine, beautiful beaches and historical treasures. With your Pacaso second home as a jumping-off point, you can enjoy every moment without worrying about maintenance or management. Check listings and learn more about Pacaso co-ownership.
Located toward the southern end of the Jersey Shore, Ocean City is a classic beach town and a much-loved family vacation destination. The Travel Channel named it the “#1 family beach community in the country,” and it’s easy to see why. There’s so much to do, thanks to the town’s eight miles of oceanfront, crystal-clear bay and 2 ½ miles of boardwalk. With a reputation for cleanliness and a family-friendly vibe (it is a dry town, after all), Ocean City makes a great weekend destination. Here are six activities you've just got to experience for yourself. 1. Enjoy a live performance at Music Pier Ocean City’s Music Pier has been an entertainment destination for music lovers since it opened in 1929. On any given day or night, you’ll find performances by the Ocean City Pops orchestra, traveling entertainers, stand-up comedians, theater companies and more. The pier hosts a summer concert series from July through October. Plus, every Thursday in summer is family night, with free entertainment around town. 2. Take in the beauty of Corson’s Inlet State Park Ocean City can get crowded in the summer, so nearby Corson’s Inlet State Park is a welcome retreat. This 340-acre state park was established in 1969 to protect one of the New Jersey coastline’s last undeveloped areas. The park offers a rich diversity of wildlife living in habitats that include sand dunes, upland areas, marine estuaries and the shoreline. It’s a popular destination for sailing, boating, stand-up paddleboarding, fishing, bird watching, hiking and nature walks. 3. Explore the famous Ocean City Boardwalk No Jersey Shore weekend is complete without a visit to the famous Ocean City Boardwalk. The wide, wood-planked boardwalk is a feast for the senses, whether you’re shopping for souvenirs, enjoying amusements and games, sharing a meal with friends or just people watching. Explore the boardwalk on foot or by bike, stopping by famous local eateries like Ike’s Famous Crabcakes, Polish Water Ice, Manco & Manco Pizza and the famous apple cider donuts at Oves Restaurant. 4. Hit the beach The beach itself isn’t to be overlooked. Ocean City boasts multiple beach locations perfect for putting your toes in the sand. The most popular beach is 9th Street, conveniently located next to Music Pier. Because of its proximity to the boardwalk, you can easily grab everything you might need, from flip-flops and sunscreen to ice cream and drinks. The 23rd Street beach, at the far end of the boardwalk, is a great choice for escaping the crowds and enjoying a quieter day under a beach umbrella. 5. Take the kids to Gillian’s Wonderland Pier A destination for family fun since 1929, Gillian’s Wonderland Pier offers more than 30 rides and attractions on the Ocean City Boardwalk. The 140-foot-high Giant Wheel is a city landmark, while indoor rides like a classic carousel, ride-on fire engines and a train amuse the younger kids. Looking for something a bit more adventurous? Check out the flying swings, Canyon Falls log flume or bungee jump. 6. Explore the Ocean City Historical Museum Located inside the Ocean City Community Center, the Ocean City Historical Museum gives visitors a glimpse into the colorful history of this town, which dates back to 1879. The museum documents the building of the boardwalk, shipwrecks and visits from Hollywood starlets. Soak up the sun in Ocean City Can’t get enough of Ocean City’s beaches, boardwalk and family fun? When you co-own a Pacaso second home, you can make family vacation memories on The Shore in a place of your own.
Atlantic City, New Jersey, is many things to many people. It’s a fun-filled beach town for a family vacation. It’s a shopping destination, whether you’re looking for outlet mall deals or designer boutiques. And it’s perhaps the best-known gambling and nightlife spot on the East Coast. There’s so much to do in Atlantic City, it’s hard to know where to begin. Here are seven of the best things the city has to offer. 1. Wander the famous Atlantic City Boardwalk Arguably Atlantic City’s most famous and enduring site, the Atlantic City Boardwalk stretches five miles along the coast and is packed with attractions. Up early? From 6 to 10 a.m., the boardwalk is open to bike riders, and bike rentals are available. After that, it’s foot traffic only. Visitors shop for souvenirs, dine at local eateries, enjoy amusement park rides, watch street musicians and performers, and explore the piers that attach to the boardwalk at various points along the way. 2. Try your luck at a local casino Whether you play high-stakes blackjack, the penny slots or something in between, Atlantic City’s nine casino resorts offer plenty of ways for you to see if Lady Luck is on your side. Caesars Atlantic City boasts a whopping 145,000 square feet of gaming space. It’s located right on the boardwalk and features two restaurants from famed chef Gordon Ramsay. The most upscale casino in Atlantic City is undoubtedly Borgata, with its Chihuly glass sculptures, marble floors and exclusive poker lounges. Even if gaming isn’t your thing, Borgata offers restaurants by award-winning chefs, a decadent spa and perhaps the city’s best nightlife scene. 3. Get the adrenaline pumping on the Steel Pier Built back in 1898, Atlantic City’s Steel Pier offers over-the-ocean amusement park rides for visitors of all ages. The younger set will enjoy a carousel, bumper cars and spinning teacups. Teen and adult visitors looking for a more heart-racing experience won’t want to miss the chance to get flung around on the Freedom Flyer or go 225 feet in the air in just 1.5 seconds on the Slingshot. Everyone can enjoy carnival games, classic boardwalk fare like funnel cakes and ice cream, and a ride on The Wheel, a 227-foot-tall Ferris wheel with enclosed gondolas. At night, it’s lit by almost 15,000 colorful lights. 4. Check out New Jersey’s tallest lighthouse Absecon Lighthouse is not only the tallest in the Garden State, but it’s one of the oldest remaining lighthouses in the country. Built in 1857 and used until 1933, today the lighthouse offers sweeping views of the Atlantic City skyline and waterfront to those willing to climb the 228 steps to the top. There’s also an on-site museum and a replica of the lightkeeper’s dwelling. 5. Visit the African American Heritage Museum With over 12,000 artifacts, the African American Heritage Museum is a must-visit for its honest portrayal of Black history and culture in Atlantic City. On permanent display are an exhibit exploring stereotypes, a portrait collection, early furniture and fixtures, and a fascinating exhibit about the prosperous Black neighborhood that used to occupy a large section of Atlantic City. You’ll also find rotating exhibits with works from local artists. 6. Do a tasting at Little Water Distillery Ironically located in a Prohibition-era warehouse, Little Water Distillery is the first legal craft distillery in Atlantic City. Owned by two brothers, the distillery has been making spirits since 2016, with current offerings of rum, gin, whiskey and vodka. Stop in for a tasting or opt for a weekend tour that includes history, education on the distilling process, and plenty of opportunities to taste the fruits of their labor. 7. Soak up the sun at Atlantic City Beach No visit to Atlantic City is complete without spending a day at the beach. Atlantic City Beach is a classic East Coast beach, with soft, beige sands, plenty of space and rolling waves popular with families and boogie boarders. Get there first thing in the morning to stake out your spot, then spend the day building sand castles, people-watching and sunbathing. When it’s time for a snack, a souvenir or more sunscreen, you’re just steps from the boardwalk. Become a Jersey Shore regular Put down roots in Atlantic City and along the Jersey Shore as a co-owner of a Pacaso second home. Pacaso manages and maintains it, so you can just arrive, unpack and enjoy everything this area has to offer, from boardwalk to beaches.
Marco Island, a barrier island on Florida’s southwest coast, is known for its laid-back lifestyle and natural beauty. And little is more beautiful than Tigertail Beach, a must-see for every visit to Marco Island. Here’s what you need to know to make the most of your trip to this iconic beach. About Tigertail Beach Given all of Marco Island’s high-rises and resort developments, you might not expect it to be home to one of the most ruggedly beautiful beaches in the Everglades region. Yet the white sands of Tigertail Beach offer just that. One of just two public beaches on Marco Island, Tigertail Beach is actually a new beach. Tigertail Beach was an offshore sandbar until Hurricane Wilma hit the Paradise Coast in 2005 and sand piled up, connecting the beach to the mainland. The inner beach Tigertail is really two beaches in one, known by locals as the inner and outer beach. The inner beach is the most easily accessible, with multiple boardwalks connecting the parking lot with the sand. It’s a great family beach, with a beach cafe serving food and cold drinks, a playground, picnic area, watersports rentals and restrooms. There’s even a bird-watching tower that offers amazing views of the wildlife. The inner beach is a nice place to spend a day and a good launch point for exploring the surrounding mangroves by kayak. The outer beach Tigertail’s outer beach, sometimes called Sand Dollar Beach, is accessible by wading across the saltwater lagoon. This is best done at low tide if you’re carrying a lot of gear or have young children with you, but it can also be done at high tide, when the depth is a few feet. The best place to cross is marked by a floating buoy about 50 yards offshore. The lagoon bottom is a bit mucky and grassy, so you might want to rent a paddleboard or kayak to make the crossing if you don’t want to feel the “squish” between your toes. A word of caution: Sands shift and currents can be strong when the tide is moving in and out. Exercise caution when walking to the north end of the beach at low tide — you could end up surrounded by water when the tide comes back in. Once you’ve made the crossing, your belongings held above your head, you’ll be rewarded with three miles of pristine, secluded coastal beauty. The outer beach boasts soft white sand, beautiful shells in a rainbow of colors, fiddler crabs scurrying around and pods of dolphins frolicking offshore. It’s a popular destination for birdwatchers, as the island is part of the Great Florida Birding Trail. Sit back and look up — you’ll see a wide variety of shore birds, including eagles, osprey, terns and plovers. Before you leave, see if you can find the seashell tree. Visitors who made the trek to the beach often leave messages they’ve written on shells and hung from the branches. Getting there Marco Island is easily accessible from Naples, Florida, via two bridges. Once you have arrived on the island, you can find Tigertail Beach at the end of Hernando Drive. There’s a conveniently located parking lot with over 200 spots for beach lovers. Expect to pay a small fee to park for the day. The beach is open from 8 a.m. to sunset, year-round. Make your home in the Everglades Tigertail Beach is just one of many unspoiled wilderness areas on the Paradise Coast. Give yourself ample time to explore Marco Island and the whole Everglades area when you become a co-owner of a second home through Pacaso. Browse Florida listings today.
With its storied history, diverse mix of cultures and distinctively Southern feel, it’s no wonder South Carolina is a popular vacation destination. And while South Carolina’s cities have a myriad of popular tourist attractions, there are also plenty of unique, off-the-beaten-path ways to spend a day in the Palmetto State. Here are eight of the best. 1. Boneyard Beach Otherworldly Boneyard Beach is located on Bulls Island, just up the coast from Charleston. Because of the way the island is positioned, a seemingly endless array of shells wash ashore here. When you couple that with the skeleton-like remains of a water-stranded forest, you’ll easily see how the beach got its name. Because it’s located in a wildlife refuge, the island is only accessible by boat, and Coastal Expeditions can get you there. Spend the day wandering the pristine beach or exploring the almost 18 miles of hiking trails — just be sure to leave the alligators alone! 2. Pearl Fryar Topiary Garden In the 1980s, to discredit the commonly held belief at the time that Black residents of Bishopville couldn’t keep up their yards, Pearl Fryar taught himself how to garden. He bought a hedge trimmer and, after work and on weekends, created what today is a wonderland of over 150 topiaries. The three-acre garden is free to visit, with donations for its upkeep accepted. It attracts some 10,000 visitors per year who come to marvel at the unique beauty of the property. 3. Poinsett Bridge Located in Greenville County between Greenville and Spartanburg, Poinsett Bridge is the oldest bridge in South Carolina. A stone bridge with a gothic arch, it was built in 1820 and once was the main road between Columbia and Saluda Mountain, allowing travelers to pass over Little Gap Creek. Historians believe it was designed by Robert Mills, architect of the Washington Monument. Today, it’s part of a peaceful, 120-acre nature preserve. It’s a beautiful stop any time of year, but vibrant fall colors make it a truly breathtaking destination every autumn. 4. Haunted Charleston While millions of visitors flock to South Carolina’s largest city each year to marvel at historic architecture, enjoy area beaches and sample Lowcountry cuisine, many don’t know about the city’s spooky past. Charleston is considered one of the most haunted cities in the country. Multiple tour operators escort ghost-hunting travelers through town, regaling them with chilling stories of pirates, shipwrecks, murders and paranormal activity. 5. The Gullah Heritage Trail Hilton Head Island is part of the Gullah Geechee Corridor that runs from Charleston to Savannah, Georgia. The Gullah are descendants of West African slaves and have a long history of living on South Carolina’s most remote islands. The Gullah are known for preserving more of their cultural and linguistic heritage than any other African American community in the United States, and Gullah Heritage Trail Tours let you experience it firsthand. Accompanied by a tour guide of Gullah heritage, you’ll learn about the language, food, music, religion and folktales of the area. 6. God’s Acre Healing Springs A fountain of youth right in South Carolina? God’s Acre Healing Springs got its name during the Revolutionary War, when four badly wounded soldiers were taken by Native Americans to their sacred healing springs. So the story goes, the soldiers were healed, and the springs, located in Blackville, became a destination for those seeking healing from the mineral waters. Today, the spring is open to the public 24 hours a day, with water coming out of an unassuming pipe in the ground. 7. Rocky Shoals spider lilies Between late May and mid-June, an area of the Catawba River in Landsford Canal State Park blooms with an incredible 20 acres of white spider lilies, a rare flower only found in South Carolina, Georgia and Alabama. Take in the beauty of nature from the state park’s observation deck, which can be reached via a 1.5-mile hike. Or rent a kayak or canoe to paddle through the maze of flowers. 8. Tunnelvision Mural Inspired by a dream, South Carolina artist Blue Sky painted an incredible trompe l’oeil mural on the side of a building in downtown Columbia. It’s a super-realistic 50-by-75 foot painting of a craggy tunnel that, if real, would be big enough to drive a car through. (There have been a few close calls, but to date, nobody has tried it.) Want more outdoor artwork? Across the parking lot is the same artist’s work called Busted Plug, a 40-foot-tall sculpture of a fire hydrant that looks like it’s been knocked askew by some similarly oversized vehicle, with water spewing from its broken base. Explore more Give yourself all the time you need to explore South Carolina’s quirks, oddities and hidden treasures. As a Pacaso second home owner in South Carolina, you’ll have the perfect home base for discovering all the things that make the Palmetto State so special.
When it comes to a Hawaiian vacation, can you really go wrong? In short, no, but Hawaii’s different islands appeal to different types of travelers. Whether you’re looking for luxury resorts or unspoiled wilderness, active adventures or rest and relaxation, the six biggest islands in Hawaii have plenty to offer. Read our rundown, designed to help you identify the perfect island paradise for you. Kauai: The Garden Isle Bursting with natural beauty and offering a laid-back lifestyle, Kauai is the oldest of the archipelago’s main islands, the result of volcanic overflow some 5.1 million years ago. Kauai has an incredible diversity of landscapes, from the beautiful Waimea Canyon (the “Grand Canyon of the Pacific'') to unspoiled beaches and Mount Waialeale, the planet’s wettest spot, averaging 451 inches of rain each year. The south side of the island is popular with sunseekers, who flock to Poipu Beach and the area’s many restaurants, shops and amenities. The north shore of Kauai is home to high-end resorts and incredible beauty. The eastern coast, affectionately called the Coconut Coast, is popular with budget travelers and those who want a centrally located home base for exploring the island. No matter where you unpack your bags, Kauai is built for discovery, with ample hiking trails, botanical gardens and jaw-dropping Wailua Falls — easily Kauai’s most recognizable landmark. Oahu: The Gathering Place Oahu is home to 80% of Hawaii’s population and the capital city of Honolulu. Oahu is a popular tourist destination for all kinds of reasons. Not only can you get there via a direct flight from many U.S. mainland cities, but it has a little bit of everything: big-city fun, gorgeous beaches, historical sites and an incredible surf culture. The vast majority of visitors to Oahu stay in the Waikiki area, where large hotels dot the coastline of this world-famous beach. Travelers looking to bypass crowds often head toward the North Shore, Ko Olina and Turtle Bay. There’s so much to see and do on Oahu, you may just be tempted to leave your beach chair and explore. Watching world-class surfers battle the waves on the famous North Shore, sampling the incredible local food scene and learning about WWII history at the Pearl Harbor National Memorial are all great ways to spend a day. Moloka’i: The Friendly Isle Visitors who want to avoid crowded beaches and large resorts may find their perfect island paradise in Moloka’i. The island is only 38 miles long and 10 miles wide, with its largest town, Kaunakakai, boasting a population of just 3,000. Moloka’i is the least visited main island of Hawaii, and visitors aren’t typical tourists. Moloka’i is a wonderful place to really immerse yourself in natural beauty and warm culture. Many visitors volunteer at farms, stay with families and simply observe everyday life on this rugged island. Lanai: The Pineapple Island A truly off-the-beaten-path travel destination, the small island of Lanai is an exercise in opposites. For example, only about 30 miles of the island’s roads are paved, yet 97% of the island is owned by billionaire Larry Ellison, and you’ll find two luxury resorts and championship golf. Lanai is called the Pineapple Island because it was owned during most of the 20th century by the Dole family, who used it to expand their pineapple farming empire. Many of the pineapple fields are gone, and ample exploration awaits. Four-wheeling is a way of life for locals and visitors. Hop in a Jeep and head out, exploring until you find your own private beach. Maui: The Valley Isle Maui is the second-most visited island in the archipelago, after Oahu, and it’s easy to see why. Maui is known for its world-class beaches, incredible whale watching and serious tourist amenities. Whether you want to watch the sun rise from the top of the dormant Haleakala volcano, attend a luau, savor fresh seafood and ocean views, golf at a championship course or drive the incredible Hana Highway along the rugged coastline, Maui has no shortage of incredible experiences. No wonder people say “Maui no ka oi” — “Maui is the best.” Maui is also known as a great snorkeling destination, thanks to the Molokini atoll a few miles offshore. Take a tour to the crescent-shaped island and experience what it’s like to snorkel in an extinct volcanic caldera. Hawaii: The Orchid Isle Commonly known as the Big Island, the island called Hawaii is bigger than all the others combined, and it boasts an incredible diversity of landscapes, from the active Kilauea volcano to rainforests to snow-dusted mountains. The island has six main regions: Kohala, Kona, Kau, the Hamakua Coast, Hilo and Puna. Most visitors stay in the western Kailua-Kona region, drawn by its wonderful weather, great restaurants and shopping, and range of accommodations. On the other side of the island you’ll find Hilo (home to the Hawaii Tropical Botanical Garden) and Puna, the island’s easternmost tip. At Hawaii Volcanoes National Park, you’ll see the world’s largest volcano, Mauna Loa, elevation 13,677 feet. The park is simply begging to be explored, with an incredible 333,000 acres of lush scenery, lava tubes, volcanic activity and more. The Big Island’s beaches are also gorgeous, and vary dramatically from one to the next. Hike to the green sand beach of Papakolea, visit the black sand beach of Punalu’u and strap on a snorkel mask to spot green sea turtles in Kahalu’u Bay. Find your island getaway Which island will you fall in love with? No matter which you choose, there’s so much to explore, and a second home in Hawaii puts it all within reach. Say aloha to your new vacation retreat!
With cactus-dotted deserts landscapes, winding canyons, stunning national parks and ponderosa forests, Arizona is simply bursting with natural beauty. Put on your hiking shoes, grab your camera and prepare to be amazed by the flora, fauna and landscapes of the Grand Canyon State. Not sure where to begin? Here are six jaw-dropping destinations you just have to add to your Arizona itinerary. The Grand Canyon More than 4.5 million people visit the Grand Canyon every year, and for good reason. With its deep ravines, colorful cliffs, winding river and simply massive footprint, the Grand Canyon inspires awe, whether it’s your first visit or your 50th. The canyon is a mile deep, 18 miles wide and an incredible 277 miles long. The South Rim is the most popular stop for visitors, and it’s just 90 minutes from Flagstaff. The more rugged North Rim is less crowded, and it’s open seasonally. Another popular spot is the Grand Canyon Skywalk, a cantilevered, horseshoe-shaped glass bridge extending 70 feet over the rim of the canyon some 4,000 feet below. Other than the requisite standing and marveling at the beauty of the canyon, visitors also enjoy hiking, rafting through the canyon floor on the Colorado River, scenic helicopter rides, camping and more. Antelope Canyon Among the most famous slot canyons in the world, Antelope Canyon is a wonder to behold. Shaped by millions of years of water and wind erosion, this winding sandstone canyon is a must-visit for nature lovers and photographers. Located in northern Arizona near the town of Page and the Utah border, Antelope Canyon is on private Navajo Nation land, which means you’ll need to visit with an authorized tour operator. Choose between Upper Antelope Canyon and Lower Antelope Canyon. The former has easier hiking terrain while the latter attracts a more adventurous set. No matter which route you choose, you’ll marvel at this incredible natural sculpture. Sedona People from all over the Southwest (and far beyond) are drawn to Sedona for its natural beauty and famous vortexes. Located about 90 minutes north of Phoenix and Scottsdale, Sedona wows with red rock landscapes, pristine wilderness and a milder climate than much of the state. Sedona has a long history as a spiritual place, both in the Native American culture and among those interested in the metaphysical, many of whom visit to experience vortexes, swirling centers of energy thought to help healing, meditation and self-exploration. Sedona is also the perfect home base for nature lovers, as myriad hikes, mountain biking trails, horse trails and fishing spots are just a stone’s throw away. Saguaro National Park To get up close and personal with the beauty of the desert, take a trip to Saguaro National Park. The giant saguaro cactus is an Arizona icon found only in a small corner of the United States, including at this vast park. The park has west and east sides, with the city of Tucson in the middle. Both sides offer ample opportunities to take in the desert scenery, with the west side featuring more of the namesake cacti and the east side with plenty of opportunities for hiking and camping. Can’t decide which side to visit? Go with both! The drive between the two sides of the park is only about 30 minutes. Lake Havasu Arizona isn’t all deserts. The west side of the state is home to Lake Havasu, which offers 400 miles of coastline and an enviable 300 days of sunshine a year. Affectionately known as Arizona’s “West Coast,” Lake Havasu offers warm, clear waters and endless watersports. From boating and swimming to fishing and kayaking, there’s nothing quite like taking to the water surrounded by the beauty of the desert. To escape the crowds, spend a day exploring either the Bill Williams River National Wildlife Refuge, a fan favorite area for birdwatchers. Flagstaff Flagstaff is an outdoor lover’s dream destination, located on the western edge of the Colorado Plateau and nestled in the largest ponderosa pine forest in the continental U.S. Unlike many destinations in Arizona, Flagstaff enjoys four unique seasons, including an average of 108 inches of snow in the winter. Surrounded by crisp mountain air, outdoor lovers can enjoy skiing, snowboarding, hiking, mountain biking, camping, rock climbing and more. Flagstaff is also Arizona’s closest major city to the Grand Canyon. Surround yourself with the beauty of Arizona Mother Nature puts on an impressive show in Arizona, from west to east, north to south and in all four seasons. Give yourself ample time to take it all in by owning a second home in Scottsdale, Flagstaff, Tucson, Sedona or Lake Havasu. Browse Pacaso listings in Arizona today!
The Valley Isle of Maui boasts 120 miles of gorgeous coastline, lush inland landscapes and epic sunsets. It’s also quite the foodie destination, with an abundance of fresh seafood, tropical produce and local fare. Sample it all at the same time when you enjoy a meal at one of Maui’s most scenic restaurants. Duke’s Beach House Located just north of Kaanapali Beach at the Honua Kai Resort, Duke’s Beach House is a living tribute to the classic Hawaii lifestyle, complete with incredible sunset views, tiki torches, live music and a laid-back vibe. Favorite dishes include poke tacos, coconut shrimp and a rotating fresh fish menu, based on the catch of the day. Be sure to save room for dessert – the hula pie is a Maui must-have, complete with toasted macadamia nuts and hot fudge. Star Noodle Chef Abby Ferrer’s Star Noodle is known for its unique flavors and family-style dining. In an oceanfront, open-air space on Front Street in Lahaina, customers enjoy everything from kimchi and steamed clams to ramen and Singapore noodles. Arrive in time to watch the sunset and toast the end of another day in paradise with one of the endlessly inventive cocktails. Kimo’s The oceanfront deck at Kimo’s makes everything feel a little more special. From the expansive outdoor deck, visitors can enjoy a wide range of local dishes, from roasted beet salads with local Surfing Goat cheese to “Kimo’s Style” baked fish, with preparations varying based on the catch of the day. Tin Roof Sometimes, the best view is on the beach itself. Located in Kahului, Tin Roof is a takeout-only restaurant that’s popular with both locals and visitors. Order at the counter and head to nearby Kaneha Beach to enjoy your meal with an ocean view. Tin Roof is run by Hilo, Hawaii, chef Sheldon Simeon and his wife, Janice, who founded the restaurant based on their definition of home. Popular dishes include garlic shrimp, ulu mac salad and garlic noodles. Monkeypod Kitchen Monkeypod Kitchen delivers dishes showcasing produce from local and organic farmers, rangers, and anglers from two locations, one in South Maui’s Wailea and a satellite location in Kaanapali. While menus vary seasonally, you can always count on impressive handcrafted cocktails, fresh salads and troll-line caught fresh fish. Not hungry for a full meal? Stop by from 3:30-5 p.m. for stellar happy hour deals. The restaurant offers lovely resort views, but a short stroll will deliver you to the world-famous beauty of Wailea Beach. Mama’s Fish House No list of Maui restaurants is complete without Mama’s Fish House. Located on Maui’s north shore near the town of Paia, this open-air restaurant is right on the water — you’ll know you’ve arrived when you see their fishing boat out front. The family-owned restaurant has an old Hawaii feel and the food is simply incredible. A perfect spot for celebrating a special occasion, Mama’s Fish House changes its menu regularly, but you’ll always find the freshest seafood, farm-to-table ingredients, colorful cocktails and indulgent desserts. Time your meal for sunset for a truly unforgettable experience, but plan ahead: Mama’s Fish House books out three to six months in advance. Be the chef in your local vacation home Sure, restaurant dining is a nice treat, but there’s nothing like cooking for friends and family members in the kitchen of your luxury second home in Maui. Browse Pacaso listings today and find your no-hassle island dream home!
The island of Maui is a little slice of paradise in the Pacific. It’s no wonder the Valley Isle welcomes an incredible 3 million visitors each year. And even though the island is only 48 miles long and 26 miles wide, there are endless ways to enjoy every day. If it’s your first time in Maui, here are eight activities you simply must add to your itinerary. 1. Watch the sunrise from atop the Haleakalā Volcano Maui is home to the Haleakalā Volcano, which is both the island’s only national park and a spiritual site for native Hawaiians. With an elevation of just over 10,000 feet, the peak of Haleakalā offers a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to view a Hawaiian sunrise from above the clouds. You’ll have to arrive early — between 3 and 7 a.m., depending on the time of year — and you’ll want to bring a jacket. Reservations are required if you visit on your own. If you’re going with a tour company, you’ll have the opportunity to follow up the sunrise viewing with a 23-mile downhill bike ride. 2. Snorkel at Molokini There are great snorkeling spots all over Maui — with a snorkel mask, an offshore swim at your favorite beach gives you the opportunity to see colorful fish and often sea turtles. But serious snorkelers will want to set aside a day to take a snorkeling tour to Molokini, a crescent-shaped volcanic crater three miles off Maui’s southwest coast. A marine life conservation area, the waters around the crater are home to sea turtles, 250 varieties of fish and eight varieties of coral. If you visit during the winter months, you can even hear humpback whales singing underwater. 3. Relax on Wailea Beach South Maui’s Wailea Beach is consistently ranked as one of the most beautiful beaches in the world, and it’s easy to see why. It features golden sand, turquoise water, endless palm trees and a winding paved walkway that’s perfect for a sunset stroll. Wailea Beach is great for families, since the waves are usually small and the wide beach has ample space for frolicking. It also has convenient amenities like free parking, restrooms, and food and drinks at nearby resorts. 4. Drive the Hana Highway Easily one of the most famous attractions on Maui, the Hana Highway — commonly called the Road to Hana — is an all-day, stop-and-go scenic drive that takes you through Maui’s rugged northern and eastern regions. Give yourself plenty of time to explore: While the road is only a little more than 50 miles, you’ll be traveling at a meandering pace, thanks to over 600 turns and 59 one-lane bridges. You’ll welcome the slower pace so you can revel in the truly incredible scenery and stop frequently at bountiful fruit stands, gorgeous waterfalls and unspoiled swimming holes. 5. Go to a luau It may seem a bit touristy, but every visitor to Maui should experience a luau at least once. Most of the evening luaus in Maui take place in the Lahaina and Kaanapali areas, with many offered by the larger resorts. While the entertainment and menu will vary a bit based on which luau you choose, you’ll experience traditional Hawaiian cuisine, live music, Polynesian dance and cultural performances, folklore and more. 6. Dine at Mama’s Fish House Located on Maui’s north coast in the town of Paia, Mama’s Fish House is undoubtedly the island’s most famous restaurant, and for good reason. Since 1973, it has been serving up freshly caught seafood, local Hawaiian and Polynesian fare, and gorgeous views. It’s a popular spot for people celebrating birthdays or anniversaries, so you’ll need to plan ahead: The restaurant can book out months in advance, both for lunch and dinner. 7. Go whale watching (if the time is right) Between November and May, humpback whales arrive in the warm waters of Hawaii to breed and birth their calves. Peak whale watching season is between mid-January and March, when you’ll see whales spouting, breaching and swimming with their calves. While you can easily catch the action from the shore, especially with binoculars, a whale watching tour is the best way to see these majestic creatures up close. 8. Golf at Kapalua Hitting the links at Kapalua Resort is a bucket-list activity for avid golfers, and it’s not just because of the incredible views. The resort’s challenging Plantation Course plays host to the PGA Tour’s Sentry Tournament of Champions each January. Schedule your trip around the tournament to see the game’s greatest players in action, or play the course yourself, walking in the footsteps of Tiger Woods, Phil Mickelson, Ernie Els and others. Embrace island life No matter how long your visit to Maui is, it’s never long enough. Set down roots as the co-owner of a Pacaso second home, and explore the Valley Isle’s many treasures. From gorgeous beaches to the rugged upcountry, Maui is a great place to call home. Learn more about how Pacaso is making co-ownership attainable on the Valley Isle.
Surrounded by rugged mountain peaks, Sun Valley, Idaho, is a world-renowned ski destination. In fact, it was recently named the top ski resort in North America by SKI Magazine for a second year in a row. But skiing isn’t the only activity this resort town offers. In fact, it’s a popular destination for anyone who wants to enjoy a mountain retreat — even if strapping on a pair of skis and gliding through fresh powder isn’t your idea of a good time. Here are six other activities you simply must try. 1. Have dinner at Trail Creek Cabin Built in 1937, Trail Creek Cabin is a hunting cabin-turned restaurant that’s perfect for a romantic dinner. The creekside log cabin offers incredible views of Bald Mountain, a cozy atmosphere and steakhouse fare. You can even arrive for your reservation via horse-drawn sleigh, where you’ll be cozied up under wool blankets. 2. Treat yourself to a spa day Conveniently located in the heart of the resort, The Spa at Sun Valley offers almost endless ways to treat yourself. Spa packages include Couples Suite experiences, lifestyle packages with body wraps and massages, and manicures and pedicures. The spa also has a 2,300-square-foot fitness center with gorgeous views. Another great option is Zenergy, a 50,000-square-foot spa and health club offering both traditional spa services alongside acupuncture, personal training, group fitness classes and wellness retreats. 3. See the Milky Way in all its glory Sun Valley and nearby Ketchum are part of the Central Idaho Dark Sky Reserve. This is a designation that means the area is committed to preserving dark skies for stargazing by reducing human-made light pollution. It’s the only such reserve in the United States and only one of 12 in the world! What it means for visitors and locals alike is that on dark nights, it’s one of the best places in the world to stargaze — and one of the few places you can truly experience views of the Milky Way. 4. Ice skate outdoors, year-round Sun Valley Resort’s ice skating rink is one of the few outdoor rinks in the country that stays open all year. In the winter, stop by an open skating session and skate as the snow falls. In the summer months, the rink hosts the famous Sun Valley Ice Shows, where you can see some of the sport’s most famous athletes perform. Don’t forget to bring your autograph book! 5. Take flight on a paragliding adventure Are you looking to get a true bird’s-eye view of this gorgeous mountain landscape? Launch from the slopes of Bald Mountain in the summer (strapped to an expert instructor, of course) on a tandem parasailing flight with Fly Sun Valley. From the launch site on “Baldy” to the landing area at the base, you’ll descend some 3,300 feet over the course of 15-30 minutes — plenty of time to enjoy the views. Want to catch every moment? Your instructor can record the whole thing on a GoPro. 6. Explore on two wheels When warmer weather arrives, the mountain bikers rejoice. Bald Mountain is a mountain biking paradise, with more than 400 miles of singletrack spread throughout the valley. It’s home to the country’s longest purpose-built downhill track, with over 8,100 vertical feet of adrenaline-pumping fun. Load up your bike on the gondola and catch a ride to the top, then enjoy the ride. Looking for a more family-friendly biking experience? The Wood River Trail has 30 miles of paved trails. Embrace mountain living in Sun Valley No matter the time of year and your interests, Sun Valley offers a myriad of activities and recreation, surrounded by incredible natural beauty. Set down roots in Idaho when you buy a Pacaso vacation home. Then, get out and explore!
There’s so much to love about Sarasota and Naples, two sunny cities on the southwestern coast of Florida. When you’re looking for warm Gulf of Mexico waters, white-sand beaches and incredible sunsets, both offer them in spades. But how do you decide where to visit or even buy a second home? Here’s our quick comparison of these two Florida dream destinations. Beaches Winner: Sarasota Both cities have incredible stretches of public beaches and world-class sunsets, but if you’re a classic beachcomber, looking for wide stretches of sand on which to relax, play and wander, Sarasota is the clear winner. The area is home to Siesta Key Beach, which is a regular winner on best beaches list from TripAdvisor, the Travel Channel and Dr. Beach, who lauds Siesta Key’s fine sand, clear water and outdoor recreational options. Outdoor activities Winner: Naples Naples and Sarasota offer a range of recreational activities, thanks to ample days of sunshine and waterfront locations. However, Naples has the edge in outdoor recreation, starting with its huge sportfishing scene — the 1,000-foot-long Naples Pier is the first clue as to the fishing scene in this city! On any sunny day, you’ll also find locals and visitors alike exploring mangrove estuaries, barrier islands and wildlife refuges by kayak. Plus, there are loads of hiking and walking trails, bike trails, golf courses and public parks. Luxury living Winner: Naples It’s no surprise that these two waterfront cities appeal to those looking to live in luxury. Both cities have gorgeous waterfront homes, chic condos and yacht clubs, but Naples is the clear winner in luxury living, with a higher median home price. The city has a stylish vibe and is simply brimming with designer boutiques, upscale eateries, art galleries and impeccably groomed pedestrian paths. Family activities Winner: Sarasota For a beach-loving family, either destination fits the bill. But overall, Sarasota offers more family-friendly activities than Naples, which tends to cater more to a retiree crowd. On any given day in Sarasota, families can discover native and exotic plants and animals at the Sarasota Jungle Gardens, hunt for fossilized shark teeth on Venice Beach, attend a family-friendly festival at Mixon Fruit Farms and splash in the children’s fountain at Bayfront Park. Cultural activities Winner: Sarasota With almost triple the population of Naples, Sarasota is simply a bigger city, and with that comes more opportunities for cultural enrichment. Sarasota boasts a vibrant bayfront downtown, which serves as the area’s civic and cultural hub. A day spent exploring downtown will uncover the Sarasota Opera House, the Florida Studio Theatre, the Burns Court Cinemas and the Westcoast Black Theatre Troupe, which produces performances celebrating the Black experience. Dining Winner: Naples Fresh seafood is always on the menu in Southwest Florida, with catches coming in around the clock from the Gulf of Mexico. But Naples has the edge as far as the dining scene goes, with an incredible 700 restaurants. Naples has an awesome selection of epic brunch restaurants, plus everything from food trucks to fine dining later in the day. Best of all, many of the city’s best dining establishments also boast incredible water views. Nightlife Winner: Sarasota Naples offers a quieter scene, with restaurants and entertainment venues closing earlier. That makes Sarasota the winner as far as nightlife goes. Throughout town, you’ll find great happy hours, live music, bars, dance clubs and comedy venues. Did we mention the tiki bars? There’s nothing like ending your day with your toes in the sand and an umbrella in your drink. You can’t go wrong in Naples or Sarasota No matter which city you choose, there’s so much to explore — much more than you can do in just a weekend. Become a Florida local when you co-own a Pacaso second home. Every time you arrive, simply unpack and start exploring — we take care of the rest.
There’s a reason this part of Florida is called the Paradise Coast. Located south of Naples on the Gulf of Mexico, Marco Island is a popular year-round travel destination for nature lovers, sun worshippers, anglers and just about anyone who enjoys a slower pace of life under the Florida sunshine. There are so many ways to explore the island, it’s hard to know where to start. Check out these 10 fun-filled activities for your next visit to Marco Island. 1. Sink your toes in the sand at South Marco Beach With clear blue-green waters, white sand and plenty of nearby amenities, South Marco Beach is one of the most popular and family-friendly destinations on the island. It’s a great place to add to your shell collection, and if you can take your eyes off the sand for a moment, you may see dolphins swimming offshore. 2. Embrace your inner artist at the Marco Island Center for the Arts Thanks to the natural beauty of the Gulf, Marco Island has been inspiring artists for as long as people have lived here. The Marco Island Center for the Arts celebrates this, with displays of work by local and regional artists. In addition, the center offers a range of art classes for both adults and kids. 3. Sip local brews at the Marco Island Brewery A favorite watering hole for locals, Marco Island Brewery pours their own brews, plus 40 selections from all over the world. You’ll find a menu full of classic pub grub, from burgers and nachos to pizzas and tacos. Best of all, it’s a great place to watch sports on multiple TV screens. 4. Snap a few pictures of the Cape Romano Dome House Accessible by charter boat or kayak, the Cape Romano Dome House is undoubtedly one of the most unique attractions in the area. Cape Romano is a collection of dome-shaped concrete structures originally built as a vacation home for a Florida oil tycoon in the 1980s. Today, they’re abandoned, and erosion and rising sea levels have surrounded them by water. It’s a truly one-of-a-kind place to visit, and also a popular spot for anglers. 5. Kayak the Ten Thousand Islands Marco Island serves as the gateway to the Ten Thousand Islands Wildlife Refuge, a chain of uninhabited islands and mangroves that are a nature lover’s dream. While the island count is actually only in the hundreds, not the thousands, this area is a beautiful place to explore by kayak. Paddle on your own with a kayak rental or hire a local tour company to take you through this unique ecosystem. 6. Hire a fishing charter If sport fishing is on your to-do list, Marco Island is the place to be. The town serves as the perfect jumping off point for a fishing expedition. Hire a knowledgeable local captain and head out into the Gulf of Mexico in search of grouper, tarpon, snook, tuna and king mackerel. 7. Take an eco-tour to see dolphins and manatees The coastal waters surrounding Marco Island are home to a wide range of wildlife, and many are best seen from the deck of a boat. There are multiple tour companies on the island offering wildlife viewing tours. Depending on the time of year you visit, you may see dolphins, manatees and sea turtles. 8. Enjoy a quiet day at Tigertail Beach A more tranquil option than South Marco Beach, Tigertail Beach Park offers fantastic scenery and white sand without all the crowds. It’s also a great place for shelling. Eagle-eyed beachcombers may find conchs, sand dollars, scallops and more. The area is also known for birdwatching, as egrets, herons, sandpipers and osprey call this beach home. 9. Stock up on local produce at the farmers market Held every Wednesday morning at Mackle Park, the Marco Island Farmers Market is a wonderful way to experience island life. Sixty local vendors sell everything from handmade cheeses and fresh flowers to artisan granola and fresh crab cakes. Of course, you’ll also find plenty of citrus fruits. 10. Do some waterfront shopping at the Esplanade Shoppes Designed to resemble a coastal Italian village, the Esplanade Shoppes is an upscale shopping and dining destination right on the waterfront. You’ll find locally owned boutiques, dockside dining and a relaxing courtyard with an open-air bar. Start living the island life Ready to make Marco Island your home away from home? Browse Pacaso listings in the area to find your perfect luxury second home, then start exploring everything Florida’s Paradise Coast has to offer.
Located right on the Gulf of Mexico, Naples is a dynamic and sophisticated Southwest Florida city. With so many great things to do, it’s hard to know where to begin! Start with these 10 must-do activities when exploring Florida’s “Paradise Coast.” Wander the Naples Botanical Garden One of the city’s most popular attractions is the Naples Botanical Garden, boasting 170 acres with seven distinct natural habitats and over 1,000 native plant species. Special garden exhibits showcase plants from Asia, the Caribbean and Brazil. Give yourself ample time to explore the gardens, wander the paths and walk through the Ghost Orchid Boardwalk in search of native orchids. The garden also offers themed monthly educational events for kids. Walk the boardwalk at Corkscrew Swamp Sanctuary Head inland to Corkscrew Swamp Sanctuary to experience the natural beauty of the area. The sanctuary is over 10,000 acres and filled with swamps, marshlands and old growth bald cypress. The well-maintained 2.5-mile boardwalk through the sanctuary offers glimpses of alligators, otters, turtles and deer. It’s also one of the best places in the Western Everglades for birdwatching. Paddle through estuaries and mangroves Kayaking is incredibly popular in Naples, and many local tour companies provide guided excursions through mangrove estuaries, backwater inlets, barrier islands and wildlife refuges. Whether you just want to take a quick early-morning paddle or spend the day exploring the area’s unique flora and fauna from the water, kayaking is the way to go. Sample local seafood Naples has an incredible 700 restaurants to choose from, serving all kinds of cuisine. For a truly local experience, fresh seafood is a definite must. From casual seafood markets to raw bars to multicourse fine-dining establishments, you can treat yourself to fresh gulf seafood for every meal of the day. Watch sunsets from the Naples Pier Since Naples is on the west side of the state, you can watch the sun set every night, and in Naples it’s truly a must-do. The town is known for its colorful and fiery sunsets, and the Naples Pier is the perfect place to get a front-row seat. The pier, constructed in 1888, has been restored and renovated multiple times over the years, most recently in 2017 after Hurricane Irma. Arrive an hour or so before sunset to watch local fishers, grab snacks and drinks, and find the perfect spot along the railing to take in the big event. Dine at Celebration Park’s food trucks Located in the Bayshore Arts District, Celebration Park is home to a permanent open-air food truck park. Sample international cuisine served up from a dozen-plus food trucks, and then find a spot to sit along Haldeman Creek or at a picnic table. There’s even an open-air tiki bar. Picnic at Lowdermilk Beach Park Lowdermilk Beach Park is one of the most popular beaches in the area, with more than 1,000 feet of beachfront, plus loads of amenities: two sand volleyball courts, two playgrounds and a freshwater pond. Want to get an earlier start? You’ll find beachfront yoga classes at the park every Saturday morning. Take an airboat tour through the Everglades This is a quintessential south Florida experience! From your seat on an airboat piloted by an experienced captain, you’ll explore this unique ecosystem and, if you’re lucky, see alligators, snakes, dolphins, manatees, bobcats and maybe even the elusive Florida panther. Most tour providers are based in Everglades City, 30 miles or so outside of Naples. Shop at quirky Tin City Naples is well known for its luxury shopping scene, but for a more unique experience, stop by Tin City. This collection of waterfront shops is the perfect place to find a wide range of items: local art, handmade soaps, jewelry, sweet treats and more. Tin City is also one of several locations for the Stone Crab Festival every October. Meet local artists in the Naples Art District The Naples Arts District has the largest concentration of professional working artist studios and galleries in Southwest Florida, making it a wonderful place to shop for art and watch artists at work. From November through May — on the first Wednesday, first Thursday and third Saturday of the month — stop by for Art Alive, where you can participate in free open studio events in ceramics, photography, painting, sculpture, printmaking and more. Find your second home on the Paradise Coast There’s so much to explore in southwest Florida, it’s impossible to do it all on one vacation. Become a local by co-owning a Pacaso second home and discover the joys of Naples and a second home.
There are many factors to consider when it comes to finding the best family vacation spots. Not only do you need to find a place that has activities and attractions that everyone can enjoy, but it also needs to fit within your budget. That’s why we’ve identified 40 vacation ideas around the United States that are so good you might even decide to make one your second home. We’ve also put together a kids packing list to make your planning a little easier. Best family vacation spots on the water It’s hard to beat a vacation as relaxing as lounging at a beach house soaking up vitamin D. To that end, the best family vacation spots on the water all have excellent coastal access along with a variety of family-friendly activities. 1. Outer Banks, North Carolina If you’re looking for a good mix of simplicity and entertainment in your family vacation, you’ll find it in the Outer Banks of North Carolina. The Outer Banks has over 100 miles of beaches without the congestion of most seaside destinations. Experience the thrill of seeing wild horses while driving on Corolla Beach or fly a kite at Kitty Hawk near where the Wright Brothers first flew. Although the beaches are the primary attraction, there are plenty of other activities to explore. The North Carolina Aquarium offers interactive exhibits with its animals, like manta rays and horseshoe crabs. Since the Outer Banks was home to the lost colony of Roanoke, it has plenty of historical sites to make your visit an educational one as well. Your kids can participate in a scavenger hunt at the Graveyard of the Atlantic Museum or experience what life was like in the 1850s at the Island Farm. 2. Miami Beach, Florida Miami Beach is as rich in culture as it is in entertainment, making it one of the best family vacation spots. Experience scenic views along the 40-block boardwalk while you look for a beach spot to set up for the day. Miami Beach has many parks with different amenities, such as playgrounds, splash parks, volleyball courts or water activities like paddleboarding. If your family gets their fill of sand, you won’t spend too much time trying to come up with other activities. Miami Beach is home to Jungle Island, the Bass Museum of Art and a botanical garden — each offering unique learning opportunities for children of all ages. 3. Hilton Head Island, South Carolina This lively island offers ways to explore by land, air and sea. Take a guided helicopter tour, or rent a bicycle to discover hidden gems on your own. You can also take the family on the water to find the Hilton Head dolphins and sea turtles. Kids of all ages can experience the fun of Adventure Cove, offering mini-golf and arcade games. No trip to Hilton Head is complete without trying the locally sourced seafood, so make sure to sample the catch of the day at one of the island’s many restaurants. 4. Maui, Hawai’i Whether you are looking for adventure or relaxation, Maui can meet you wherever you please. Take a family zip line trip or go snorkeling in the Molokini Crater. End your day with an authentic luau experience while you eat a delicious family-style meal. Just because you’ll be on an island does not mean there aren’t options for a road trip. The Road to Hana is a day-long epic sightseeing tour that takes you through legendary moments in Hawai'i’s history. Along the drive, you can share a view from “Jurassic Park” at Keopuka Rock, make a pit stop for shaved ice and walk through a bamboo forest at Pipiwai Trail. 5. San Diego, California San Diego has long been known for its amazing year-round weather, consistently putting it near the top of the list for vacation ideas. Take advantage of the temperate climate by filling your days with outdoor activities. Visit LEGOLAND or Belmont Park for amusement park attractions right on the beach. There are over 17 museums to choose from around Balboa Park, as well as theaters where the whole family can catch a show and multiple gardens to lounge in with a picnic. Beyond Balboa Park, you also can head to the Birch Aquarium, SeaWorld or the world-renowned San Diego Zoo, all great options for the animal lovers in the family. And what family vacation wouldn’t be complete without a trip to sea on a whale-watching cruise? 6. Branson, Missouri Branson is the family-friendly alternative to Las Vegas you’ve been looking for. Billed as the Live Entertainment Capital of the World, you could spend every hour of the day jumping from comedy to magic to dance performances. Visit Silver Dollar City for over a hundred acres of roller coasters, water rides and campgrounds. Get a one-of-a-kind view of the Ozark mountains by taking the family on a 150-foot-high ride on the Branson Ferris Wheel. To make this 15-minute ride even more appealing, children under 3 ride for free. 7. Mackinac Island, Michigan Mackinac Island is stubbornly resistant to change, and that’s exactly what makes it one of the top places to go on vacation. This small island off the tip of Northern Michigan boasts no cars and no chain hotels, but just because it is small doesn’t mean it doesn’t have a lot to offer. Access the island by ferry and travel around it by bicycle or horse-drawn carriage. Stay at the historic Grand Hotel that is consistently rated as one of the greatest hotels in the world. Treat your kids to Mackinac Island’s famous fudge before visiting Fort Mackinac to learn its history and see soldiers in period-appropriate uniforms firing live cannons. 8. Wisconsin Dells, Wisconsin The Water Park Capital of the World offers plenty of thrills for all ages — both indoors and out. Book a stay in a resort with an attached waterpark for added convenience, or visit the largest outdoor waterpark in the country at Noah’s Ark. After your fingers have pruned, take a river tour on the amphibious WWII Duck boats or enjoy an amazing water skiing show. Don’t forget to stay energized with a hearty all-you-can-eat breakfast at Paul Bunyan’s Cook Shanty. 9. Lake Tahoe, California Sometimes overshadowed by its winter mountain activities, Lake Tahoe has just as much to offer its water-loving summer visitors. A two-mile hike to Cascade Falls will give your family a breathtaking view of a 200-foot waterfall. Adventure seekers can climb across treetops using rope courses or zip lines. For a more leisurely excursion, spend your day on the lake and appreciate its stunningly blue water. Rent a boat, kayak or paddleboard for different levels of activity and experience. You’ll also have the option to take the whole family into the air with a hot air balloon ride over the lake. 10. Sandusky, Ohio Sandusky is synonymous with its main attraction — Cedar Point — and they both sit right on the Lake Erie waterfront. Roller coaster enthusiasts travel from around the globe to experience the thrills of the Roller Coaster Capital of the World, which includes the oldest operating coaster in the world. If your family members aren’t crazy about roller coasters, it doesn’t mean they’ll have a lack of activities to enjoy while in Sandusky. There is also the option to go on a Lake Erie cruise, visit the merry-go-round museum or spend the day at one of Sandusky’s waterparks. 11. Finger Lakes, New York The Finger Lakes are known for pristine landscapes that afford visitors all the water activities one could hope for. The area is surrounded by multiple state parks with dozens of waterfalls. Many are accessible by trails that are easy to walk with your family. Outside of its own water and amusement parks, the Finger Lakes also has a number of museums that are sure to keep your kids entertained. The Strong National Museum of Play is one of the largest history museums in the country and is home to the National Toy Hall of Fame and the World Video Game Hall of Fame. 12. Chicago, Illinois As the third-largest city in the U.S., Chicago is a hard spot to overlook when considering the best family vacation spots. With its size comes many options for entertainment, including on its waterfront. It has ample beaches along Lake Michigan and multiple river tours to learn about different aspects of the city’s history. Millennium Park boasts nearly 25 acres of easily accessible gardens, public art pieces and event spaces. There is the world-class Art Institute, Field Museum, Shedd Aquarium and Adler Planetarium — each offering unique opportunities for your children to learn about the world (and space) around them. Best family vacation spots in the desert If you are looking to avoid crowded beach towns while still getting as much sun as possible, the desert might be up your family’s alley. It has wide-open spaces, picturesque photo opportunities and activities to please everyone. Just be sure to include plenty of sun protection on your kids packing list. 13. Grand Canyon, Arizona The Grand Canyon is more than just a photo opportunity. Grand Canyon activities include hikes of varying difficulties, attending a Native American dance performance, horseback riding to remote waterfalls and riding the Grand Canyon Railway. Securing accommodations around the canyon is highly competitive. It’s recommended to make reservations more than a year in advance for camping and waterfall excursions. 14. Joshua Tree National Park, California Joshua Tree is known around the world for its unique rock formations — making it a must-visit destination for rock climbing and hiking enthusiasts. There are trails for all skill levels, so there are few barriers to entry. Cell phone service is limited, which creates the opportunity to disconnect from the outside world and connect with one another. Camping within the park is possible with a reservation, but there are also campsites nearby that are quality options. Stargazing in the middle of the desert is an experience your kids will never forget — especially if they are only familiar with bright city skies. 15. Sedona, Arizona The best family vacation spots provide experiences that can’t be replicated anywhere else, and Sedona sets that bar. Get breathtaking views of Sedona’s famous red rocks from the comfort of a classic train car. There are multiple options to choose from based on your preferred level of comfort — one option even includes a Wild West reenactment. Aside from its natural beauty, Sedona also features an African wildlife park where your family can safely experience a safari right here in the States. Other options include zip-lining over the exotic animals or feeding a tiger up-close. 16. Scottsdale, Arizona Scottsdale has the best of both worlds when it comes to city life and desert landscapes. You can take your family for a morning hike or jump in a jeep to take a tour through the Sonoran Desert. When the afternoon heat sets in, cool off at one of Scottsdale’s fantastic waterparks. Scottsdale’s Old Town district is also home to a number of art galleries. Every Thursday night, they hold ArtWalk, where the galleries stay open late and treat guests to several complementary activities. Since Scottsdale is conveniently located near Phoenix, it also has easy access to all of the state capital’s attractions. These include a zoo, aquarium and botanical garden. 17. Palm Springs, California Architecture enthusiasts will have their fill in Palm Springs, where Mid-Century Modern buildings fill the neighborhoods. Take a Rat Pack tour to learn why Hollywood’s greatest artists were drawn to this idyllic desert location. Unlike some of the other desert locations on this list, Palm Springs offers all the modern luxuries visitors can hope for on their family vacation. Take your kids on a ride into the mountains on the Aerial Tramway. Shop the boutiques to score retro collectibles and vintage clothing, ride the waterslides at HyTides water park or head out into the wilderness on a jeep, bicycle or horseback tour. 18. Albuquerque, New Mexico Every October, hundreds of hot air balloons gather in Albuquerque for its International Balloon Fiesta. Day and night, the colorful balloons fill the sky, making for an enchanting experience unmatched anywhere else. That’s not all — this city has lots to offer year-round. Albuquerque’s passion for dancing and food is always center stage. Dine on the richest New Mexican cuisine and discover your preference for green or red chiles. Attend a flamenco show or, better yet, take a flamenco workshop. Be sure to stop by the ABQ BioPark Aquarium and Botanic Garden so that your kids can get their fix of all sorts of wildlife. 19. Moab, Utah If any of your kids are in their dinosaur phase, Moab is one of the must-visit places to go on vacation. Mill Canyon has easily identifiable dinosaur tracks and bones. The Moab Giants museum has indoor and outdoor interactive exhibits that bring the prehistoric creatures to life. After you’ve explored on your own, jump into a Hummer for an offroad tour of Moab’s awe-inspiring backcountry. Experience another adventure by rafting through a canyon on the Colorado River. 20. Glen Rose, Texas Dinosaurs can’t be mentioned without including Glen Rose in the list. This small town is home to Dinosaur Valley State Park, where visitors can walk in the tracks dinosaurs left behind millions of years ago. There are options to hike, camp, mountain bike and swim within the park. At Dinosaur World, visitors can walk among more than 100 life-size dinosaurs, participate in a dinosaur dig and see natural fossils. If you’d prefer to see some modern-day creatures, visit the Fossil Rim Wildlife Center, which features multiple endangered species. Your family can get up close and personal as you drive through the park, feeding and photographing the exotic animals. 21. Big Bend National Park, Texas Whether you’re seeking adventure or relaxation, Big Bend has you covered. Take your pick of its many tour options by jumping in a raft, kayak or jeep. Ride into the Lajitas Canyons on a zip line tour. Give your children the opportunity to experience ancient plant and animal life in Big Bend’s own fossil discovery exhibit. After you’ve quenched your thirst for adventure, take a dip in Big Bend’s hot springs. The water is naturally 105 degrees Fahrenheit and has long been thought to have therapeutic value. 22. Santa Fe, New Mexico Santa Fe is brimming with culture and activities, making it one of the best family vacation spots. Spend the day at the Museum of International Folk Art — the largest collection of folk art in the world. Visit the Museum of Indian Arts & Culture to learn about the history of Southwest Native American people through contemporary art. Fans of the psychedelic will love the child-friendly interactive art installation, “Meow Wolf’s House of the Eternal Return.” Older family members will enjoy solving the story’s mystery, while younger children can appreciate the stimulating surroundings. Best family vacation spots in the mountains Some destinations are best experienced during a certain time of year. Mountain destinations, on the other hand, offer unique activities for every season. While many people love the mountains for their winter ski resorts, the summer months create new opportunities to connect with the terrain. 23. Jackson Hole, Wyoming Jackson Hole’s main attraction is its world-class ski slopes that make for a magical family vacation. There are ski routes and programs available for all skill levels, so there’s something for everyone. There are also snowmobiles available for rental and sleigh rides that take you through Jackson’s blankets of snow. In the summer, ski routes turn into mountain bike trails. Wildlife expeditions bring encounters with bears and bison. The Snake River rapids provide a great opportunity for whitewater rafting. 24. Aspen, Colorado Like Jackson Hole, Aspen turns into a verifiable wonderland when its winter snow returns. Gondolas can take you to the mountaintops in comfort. Its Nordic Trail System provides more than 60 miles of cross-country ski trails. In warmer months, you can hit hiking trails with a dog borrowed from the local animal shelter. Aspen also has some of the best fly fishing conditions in North America. Appreciate the scenery of every season by putting on your waders and trying to catch a prized trout. 25. Gatlinburg, Tennessee Gatlinburg pairs southern charm with major attractions. If your family vacation ideas include shopping, hiking and amusements, look no further than this Smoky Mountains gem. Take advantage of Gatlinburg’s close proximity to the Appalachian Trail by hiking a short stretch of it. Visit the top-rated Ripley’s Aquarium of the Smokies to see a stunning collection of sea creatures. Attend Anakeesta, a mountaintop theme park with one-of-a-kind gifts. Or stroll across the longest pedestrian suspension bridge in North America at SkyLift Park. 26. Park City, Utah If you’re wondering where to go on vacation, Park City is one of the most versatile cities on the planet. When snow covers the ground, you can fill your days skiing, dog sledding and snow biking. When summer comes around, you can golf, paddleboard and ride the Alpine Coaster. Visit the Utah Olympic Park to see the 2002 Olympic Games museum, among many other activities. If you’re feeling adventurous, play on the high ropes course or take a trip down the Comet bobsled. 27. Yellowstone, Wyoming Yellowstone was the first national park in the U.S. — and it’s easy to see why the country was so quick to preserve its natural beauty. There are over 1,000 miles of backcountry trails waiting to be explored. The park sits on a volcanic caldera that produces hot springs your family can walk over and hundreds of geyser eruptions you can witness. Since Yellowstone encompasses more than 2 million acres, you can find a diverse range of wildlife. Bears, bison, wolves and elk all roam freely. Bird watchers can see more than 300 species of birds. 28. Yosemite, California Yosemite is another national park that is too good to pass up. While Yellowstone has geysers and a larger variety of wildlife, Yosemite has breathtaking cliffs and a giant sequoia forest. See the famed El Capitan or Half Dome rock formations in person to get the true sense of their magnitude. Yosemite has an abundance of waterfalls to explore, and some have paved trails to provide easy access. Horseback riding provides another option to hit the trails without relying on your own two feet to carry you. 29. White Mountains, New Hampshire The White Mountains offer another sprawling landscape that is as enjoyable in the summer as it is in the winter. The area offers golf, zip lines, waterfall hikes and old-fashioned train rides. Explore the polar caves where you can touch ice even in the middle of summer. In the winter, enjoy one of its many ski resorts. Visit the Ice Castles that artists craft out of hundreds of thousands of icicles. These caverns, tunnels and slides are designed to make you feel like you’re in a fairytale. 30. Glacier National Park, Montana There are few opportunities in the world to hike to an actual glacier — and Glacier National Park has 25 of them. It also has the perfect mix of mountains, meadows, waterfalls and lakes. Your kids can attend the junior ranger program and receive a badge after completing certain activities. The Going-to-the-Sun Road is a 50-mile road that bisects the park and provides scenic views that are hard to beat anywhere else. There are ample opportunities for rafting, kayaking, and horseback riding. When your day’s activities are over, there are comfortable accommodations, both inside and outside the park. 31. Catskill Mountains, New York The Catskill Mountains have been one of the best family vacation spots for city dwellers for over 100 years. Looking for a break from the hustle of the city, families sought leisure in the natural beauty of this historic area. Your family can explore caves going 156 feet into the earth, raft down the Delaware River, visit the Saugerties Lighthouse and cool off with a visit to one of the Catskills waterparks. In the winter, your family can stay at a ski resort, visit the Mountain Top Arboretum and shop for art in local downtowns. 32. Black Hills, South Dakota The Mount Rushmore National Monument is probably the biggest attraction in this area. Just because the icon steals the spotlight doesn’t mean there aren’t plenty of other reasons to visit. The Crazy Horse Memorial has been under construction since 1948 and will become the world’s second-tallest statue after completion. The Badlands are a sight to behold, consisting of 244,000 acres of rugged spires and mixed-grass prairie. Visit Custer State Park to encounter some of its 1,400 free-roaming bison and learn the history of the area. Explore some of the longest caves in the world at Jewel or Wind Cave. Take the kids for a ride down the 2,000-foot alpine slide at Rushmore Tramway Adventures. Best family vacation spots in the city If long road trips don’t agree with your family, checking a major city off your to-do list may be your best alternative. Cities are jam-packed with options for everyone’s taste. There’s education, amusement and activity that are all quick walks or car rides away. 33. New York City, New York The city may never sleep, but your family surely will after a day packed with some of these family vacation ideas. Get amazing views from iconic structures like the Empire State Building and Statue of Liberty. See a collection of the world’s greatest artwork at the Metropolitan Museum of Art. Visit the American Museum of Natural History for an educational and entertaining experience. Lounge in Central Park when your legs are ready for a break. Then see an official Broadway show. 34. San Francisco, California If the chaos of Disneyland seems a little too much for your family vacation, take a trip to San Francisco. The Walt Disney Family Museum can provide your family’s fix of Mickey and friends. While parents browse memorabilia, children can attend storytime among other activities. The Exploratorium is an art exhibit that enables kids to interact with more than 600 installations. Pier 39 is home to wild sea lions, a variety of street performers, a carousel and even features an aquarium. Walk around the largest Chinatown outside of Asia before having a picnic at Golden Gate Park. 35. Austin, Texas Proud to be weird, Austin has all the oddities and entertainment someone could hope for their family vacation to have. The Cathedral of Junk shows kids how a little imagination can turn trash into a work of art. The Salt Lick has mouthwatering barbeque with a side of live music. Kayak to Congress Avenue Bridge to watch more than a million bats fly at sunset. Take your kids for a dip in the naturally spring-fed pool at Barton Springs. Pick your own produce at Boggy Creek Farm. Visit the animals at the Austin Zoo, where each one is a rescue and receiving rehabilitation. 36. Seattle, Washington Seattle is one of the most accommodating cities in the country to families. Take a trip up the Space Needle at the Seattle Center. Then visit the Pacific Science Center where kids of all ages can enjoy the butterfly garden and IMAX theater. If you’re looking to squeeze a little nature into your trip, head to Mount Rainier for hiking or hop on a boat for a whale-watching excursion. The Chihuly Garden and Glass is a kid-friendly museum of brightly colored sculptures of varying shapes and sizes. Shop at the historic Pike Market and watch as the fishmongers throw customers’ purchases into the air. 37. Nashville, Tennessee Nashville has long been the hot spot for country music aficionados, but it has recently been growing in popularity for the general public too. The Gaylord Opryland Resort features an indoor river with boat rides, a waterfall and garden conservatory. Take a tour at the Grand Ole Opry and get treated to a live radio concert. Stop by Centennial Park to see a replica of Greece’s Parthenon. Then drop by the Musician’s Corner to watch live music while you feast on delicious street food. Stroll down the Honky Tonk Highway and take your pick of its many restaurants and music venues. 38. New Orleans, Louisiana Mardis Gras might be the first thing you think of when you hear New Orleans, but this southern gem has plenty to offer families too. Rich in music, food and activities, New Orleans easily makes the list of best family vacation spots. Introduce your children to jazz at Preservation Hall where you can watch live musicians and learn about its history. Have your pick between sweet and savory food like beignets and jambalaya. Attend the Carousel Gardens Amusement Park or take a tour of a swamp to get up-close looks at the native alligators. 39. Denver, Colorado Denver is great to visit at any time thanks to its more than 300 days of sunshine a year. Elitch Gardens has both butterfly-inducing roller coasters and water slides. The children’s museum is perfect for younger children to learn about nature and test their creativity in the featured art studio. The Downtown Aquarium provides the unique experience to have a meal while being surrounded by floor-to-ceiling aquariums. No trip to Denver can be considered complete without visiting Red Rocks Park and Amphitheater. Witnessing a live performance is unlike any other but even if you don’t get tickets for a show, even wandering the park is worth the trip. 40. Minneapolis, Minnesota Minnesota has big city recognition paired with a small city feel. The Children’s Theatre Company puts on interactive performances that are great for all ages. The Minnesota Zoo has a nature-based play area and seasonal shows. The Mall of America brings outdoor activities inside for year-round fun. Ride the roller coasters at Nickelodeon Universe, get a personalized crayon at Crayola Experience or visit the touch tank at the Sea Life Aquarium. This stop alone could take up multiple days. Ultimately, the best family vacation spot is going to be decided by your children’s ages and your individual preferences. Find the location with accommodations that suit your needs best, and you’ll quickly be making memories that will last a lifetime. Who knows — this location could even turn into a permanent part of your family’s life. You may even think of it as a second home.
While it’s sometimes thought of as a Phoenix suburb, the city of Scottsdale, Arizona, has a feel all its own. This desert town is one part Old West, one part resort town, and all fun. Even if you only have a weekend to explore, there’s plenty to discover. Here are our top 10 must-sees on a weekend in Scottsdale. And if you can’t get to all of them, you’ll just have to plan another trip! 1. Wander through Old Town Scottsdale With Western-themed buildings, covered sidewalks and charming shops, Old Town Scottsdale is a great place to spend an afternoon. Shop for art, antiques, Old West-inspired gifts and more. If you find yourself in Old Town on a Thursday evening, be sure to check out the Weekly Art Walk. Once you’ve worked up an appetite, Old Town has a wide range of restaurants and watering holes. 2. Visit Frank Lloyd Wright’s Taliesin West Architecture buffs won’t want to miss the chance to tour Taliesin West, once the winter home of famous architect Frank Lloyd Wright. Today, it’s the headquarters of the Frank Lloyd Wright Foundation, offering guided and self-guided tours, special events and arts appreciation nights. 3. Check out the Penske Racing Museum Do you have a need for speed? Visit the free Penske Racing Museum, which details the lauded career of the Penske Racing dynasty. This two-story museum boasts an incredible collection of cars, trophies and racing memorabilia, including cars that won the Indianapolis 500. 4. Visit Butterfly Wonderland Scottsdale’s Butterfly Wonderland is an opportunity to explore rainforest habitats while walking through the largest butterfly conservatory in the country. It’s home to 70 colorful species from all over the world, and you might even get to see some of them emerge from a chrysalis. There’s also a rainforest reptile exhibit, honey bee exhibit and edible insects – snack time! 5. Hike Pinnacle Peak Stretch your legs as you hike Pinnacle Peak Trail. This 4-mile out-and-back trail takes you to the top of a boulder-strewn, cone-shaped peak with awesome views of the Scottsdale area. Even if you don’t head all the way to the top, the trail is a great way to experience the beauty of the Sonoran Desert. 6. Golf, golf and more golf Scottsdale is a famous destination for golfers, who flock to Scottsdale in the winter months to hit the links under the desert sun. There are over 50 golf courses in Scottsdale proper, with dozens more in the surrounding area. Perhaps the best known course in Scottsdale is TPC Scottsdale, host to the annual WM Open. Both award-winning courses on the property are open to the public, so pack your clubs. 7. Explore the Desert Botanical Garden A popular destination for nature lovers, the Desert Botanical Garden has an incredible 50,000+ plant displays spread over 140 acres. Choose from multiple walking paths that wind throughout the grounds, keeping an eye out for woodpeckers, hummingbirds and famous saguaro cacti. The garden also serves as a natural backdrop for an ever-changing array of art installations. 8. Take the family to McCormick-Stillman Railroad Park A favorite of families with small children, McCormick-Stillman Railroad Park features an open-air mini train that kids can ride around the park. There’s also a vintage carousel, 10,000-square-foot model railway and an on-site museum. 9. Channel your inner cowboy at MacDonald’s Ranch Have an authentic Southwest experience with a horseback riding excursion. MacDonald’s Ranch offers guided trail rides through the Sonoran Desert, both in private and group settings. Back at the ranch, there’s a petting zoo, picnic tables and pony rides for the younger set. And check out the Cowboy Cookout, which pairs either a horseback ride or hayride with a sunset dinner, bonfire and entertainment. 10. Have a spa day Relax and enjoy a day of pampering at one of Scottsdale’s 50+ resort and day spas. Area spas offer a myriad of treatments, with therapies that make the most of botanicals from the surrounding desert. Pair your treatment with a yoga or meditation class and emerge rejuvenated. Make the Arizona desert your second home There’s something magical about Scottsdale, and there’s no way to experience it all in just a weekend. With a luxury second home in Scottsdale, you’ll have ample time to explore and year-round sunshine to encourage exploration. Find your Pacaso today!
Charleston, South Carolina, is simply bursting with opportunities for exploration, whether you’re a history buff, beachcomber or foodie. But this town of roughly 135,000 is also a popular destination for families with kids. Why? It’s packed with family-friendly attractions and activities. Here are eight of our favorite things to do. 1. Visit the South Carolina Aquarium Kids of all ages can get front-row views to over 5,000 creatures, including otters, fish, sharks, turtles, birds and more. The centerpiece of the South Carolina Aquarium is undoubtedly the 385,000-gallon Great Ocean Tank, the deepest in North America. This two-story tank is home to sharks, fish and a 220-pound sea turtle. The kids will also love the interactive touch tank and the Sea Turtle Recovery, where they can see firsthand how turtles are rescued, rehabilitated and released. 2. Wander through the Charleston Farmers Market Located in downtown’s Historic District, the Charleston Farmers Market runs every Saturday from March through November. In addition to plenty of fresh fruits and vegetables, you’ll discover delicious local snacks, crafts and artwork, activities and live entertainment. Grab a casual breakfast or lunch from a local vendor and enjoy some people-watching! 3. Cheer on the Charleston RiverDogs The RiverDogs are Charleson’s hometown Minor League Baseball team. A trip to Joseph P. Riley Jr. Park (AKA “The Joe”) to cheer on the home team makes for a great spring or summer evening. Sundays at this riverside ballpark are family nights, where kids eat free and can even go out on the field before the game. Hang around after the game for player autographs and a chance to meet the RiverDogs mascots, Charlie and Chelsea. 4. Beat the heat at Splash Zone Waterpark The weather can get hot and humid in Charleston, and a day at the Splash Zone Waterpark is the perfect way to cool off. For the younger family members, there’s a rainforest play structure with buckets, sprays and slides. Older kids will love sailing down the 200-foot-long open and tube slides. There’s also a 500-foot-long lazy river with sprays and waterfalls. 5. Explore Folly Beach Folly Beach is located where the Folly River meets the Atlantic Ocean, and it’s the closest beach to Charleston proper. You’ll find white sand, crystal-clear water and plenty of activities like fishing, stand-up paddle boarding and kayaking. There’s also a vibrant boardwalk with locally owned shops, Lowcountry cuisine and live music. 6. Play at the Children’s Museum of the Lowcountry Families with young children won’t want to miss the chance to spend a few hours at the Children’s Museum of the Lowcountry. This interactive museum has permanent exhibits like an art room, theater (with dress-up costumes, of course), organic garden, pirate ship and grocery store. There’s also a special infant and toddler playspace for visitors from birth to age 3, filled with age-appropriate toys and books. 7. Marvel at the Angel Oak Stop by Angel Oak Park to check out the incredible Angel Oak tree. The tree, on a property once owned by the Angel family, is believed to be over 400 years old. It’s an incredible 65 feet tall, with some branches spanning more than 180 feet. Under 17,000 square feet of shade, nature lovers of all ages can get up close to the tree. The park is also a great place to snap a few family photos with this awesome backdrop. 8. Get a hands-on history lesson at Patriots Point Patriots Point Naval & Maritime Museum has a myriad of kid-friendly exhibits. Start by taking a self-guided tour of the USS Yorktown, a WWII aircraft carrier that was home to some 2,000 naval officers and enlisted men. Inside the museum, you can sit in a fighter plane, try out a flight simulator and participate in an interactive scavenger hunt. Find your family’s second home in Charleston Make family memories in Charleston all throughout the year when you buy a Family-Friendly Second Home™ with Pacaso. As a co-owner of a luxury property in South Carolina, you’ll have the perfect home base for exploring with the whole family.
Hilton Head Island is a great getaway for a lot of reasons: Year-round sunshine (thanks to its subtropical climate), award-winning beaches, storied history and endless Southern charm. Yet there’s one more reason to plan a trip to this picturesque South Carolina barrier island: It’s an incredible food destination. Here’s our delicious rundown of great Hilton Head Island restaurants, no matter what you’re craving. For amazing views: Coast Hilton Head Island is, of course, surrounded by water, which means there are plenty of restaurants offering incredible views. One of the best is Coast, located in the Sea Pines Beach Club. Whether you choose to dine indoors or out, you’ll be rewarded with sweeping Atlantic Ocean views. Of course, there’s also the food. Coast’s menu includes all kinds of seafood, from shrimp salad to lobster mac and cheese. For Southern soul food: A Lowcountry Backyard Restaurant With a super-casual atmosphere that feels like a friend’s backyard, A Lowcountry Backyard Restaurant serves up classic South Carolina dishes, including award-winning shrimp and grits. Also on the menu: fried green tomatoes, island crab cakes and the down-home potato chip meatloaf brushed with moonshine BBQ sauce. For dinner and a show: The Jazz Corner This elegant restaurant not only boasts a reputation for great food, but it’s also the best place on Hilton Head Island to catch some live jazz music. At the Jazz Corner, choose from decadent dishes like pomegranate duck, prosciutto-wrapped jumbo scallops or sesame ahi tuna, then treat yourself to an intimate, 50-seat jazz performance. For fresh oysters: Old Oyster Factory Set in a space that was originally an oyster cannery, the Old Oyster Factory delivers sweeping marshland views and — you guessed it — an Instagram-worthy oyster bar. Mollusk lovers can take their pick of oysters on the half shell, oyster Moscovite, baked Creole oysters with Andouille sausage and even an oyster banh mi. For a vegetarian meal: Delisheeyo The restaurant itself is a small cottage, but the surrounding organic gardens at Delisheeyo are where the magic happens. A must-try for vegetarians, vegans and health-foodies, this restaurant serves menu items made with ingredients grown on site. Choose from salads, bowls, wraps, juices, yogurts and smoothies. For an amazing brunch: Skull Creek Dockside Start your day with amazing food and drink offerings, served with killer views, at Skull Creek Dockside. Rave-worthy breakfast entrees include lobster quiche, biscuits and gravy, and fried chicken with waffles. Of course, you can also indulge in one of their famous bloody marys or mimosas. For beachfront fun: Tiki Hut Self-proclaimed as the only beach bar on Hilton Head Island, Tiki Hut offers year-round live music, and there’s something for everyone, from top 40 covers to country, soul and funk. Snacking-friendly foods include coconut shrimp, pulled pork sliders, fried flounder and smoked BBQ wings. Sit back, sink your toes into the sand, and enjoy. For fine dining: Michael Anthony Hilton Head Island isn’t only about Southern cuisine and beachfront dining. It’s also a great place to celebrate a birthday, anniversary or retirement. Michael Anthony’s Cucina Italiana is the perfect celebration destination. It features authentic Italian cuisine, an impressive wine list, and a dessert selection worthy of the most special occasions. Savor Hilton Head Island One visit is never enough to enjoy all of Hilton Head Island’s culinary treasures. Give yourself more time to explore as a co-owner of a Pacaso second home. You can discover your own favorite eateries and experiment with some Lowcountry recipes in your fully equipped kitchen.
Hilton Head Island is a dreamy destination, with picture-perfect beaches, warm and friendly people, and plenty of southern charm. Hilton Head Island is a popular vacation spot for travelers looking to soak up some of the year-round sunshine, thanks to the mild, subtropical climate of South Carolina’s Lowcountry. There’s so much to do on Hilton Head Island, whether you love sinking your toes into the sand of one of the Travel + Leisure-awarded beaches, golfing at a world-class course or learning about the history of the Lowcountry. Here are five things to do on Hilton Head Island that you simply won’t want to miss. 1. Daufuskie Island Considered by many to be a getaway within a getaway, Daufuskie Island is located between Hilton Head Island and Savannah and is only accessible by ferry (keep your eyes peeled for dolphins during the 45-minute crossing). Even though it’s only 5 miles long by 2.5 miles wide, this island is packed with things to see and do. The island is rich with history — artifacts suggest the island has been inhabited for at least 9,000 years! Daufuskie has a rustic, slow-paced feel and few cars, making bicycles the best way to get around. Wander white sand beaches, marvel at gorgeous antebellum homes, learn about slave trade history at the First Union African Baptist Church and enjoy the eclectic local arts scene. 2. Coastal Discovery Museum Hilton Head Island is surrounded by natural beauty and incredible wildlife. Nature lovers won’t want to miss the Coastal Discovery Museum. This non-profit educational center sits on 58 acres and is dedicated to teaching people of all ages about the flora and fauna of the Lowcountry. Walk among giant live oaks draped in Spanish moss. Explore marshlands along tidal Jarvis Creek. Wander through the incredible Karen Wertheimer Butterfly Habitat. Plus, depending on when you visit, you’re likely to come across special events like farmers markets, native plant sales, art markets and family days. 3. Harbour Town Located in the expansive Sea Pines Resort, Harbour Town is a great place to spend an afternoon. Wander the boutiques, then explore your dining options, including casual outdoor cafes and restaurants serving fresh seafood. If you’re looking to get out on the water, Harbour Town is the perfect place to set up a dolphin-watching excursion, kayak tour or fishing charter. Another can’t-miss at Harbour Town? Climbing the iconic red-and-white-striped lighthouse for amazing views of the whole region. 4. Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge Sprawling and lush, the Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge is a must-see for both nature lovers and history buffs. Spread over 4,000 acres, this refuge has 14 miles of trails where eagle-eyed visitors can spot herons, egrets, white-tailed deer, armadillos and even alligators. It’s also considered one of the most important archeological locations in South Carolina, with 115 sites showing proof of early human habitation. The park also has headstones of five Black soldiers who fought in the Civil War. 5. Coligny Beach Hilton Head Island has plenty of beautiful beaches to explore — 12 miles of beach, to be exact. Coligny Beach is a favorite with both locals and visitors, thanks to its wide stretches of sand, picturesque coastline and family-friendly amenities like changing rooms, restrooms and gazebos with swings. Adjacent is Coligny Plaza, which offers shopping, outdoor dining, ice cream, an entertainment stage and a duck pond. Between the beach and the plaza, it’s easy to spend a whole day here. Become a Lowcountry local If Southern charm, incredible beaches and natural beauty are just what you’re looking for, consider buying a second home on Hilton Head Island. As a co-owner of a luxury vacation home, you’ll have the perfect place from which to explore this island’s many treasures.
No matter the season, the town of Bend in Central Oregon is simply bursting with fun activities for visitors of all ages. But there’s something extra special about visiting this town of 100,000 in the peak of winter. Pack your warmest gear and spend some time exploring this outdoor paradise. Here are five of our favorite ways for families to explore Bend during winter. 1. Discover Oregon WinterFest Hosted in Bend every February, the three-day Oregon WinterFest celebrates everything that’s wonderful about winter. While you’ll find your festival standards like live music, arts and crafts, and great food, this event also wows attendees with light-art exhibits, ice carving demonstrations and fire sculptures. Specifically for kids, you’ll find magic shows, science trivia and even a foot race with hot cocoa at the finish line. 2. Hit the slopes Bend is a jumping-off point for skiers and snowboarders of all skill levels. The town is just 30 minutes from Mt. Bachelor, the sixth-largest ski resort in the United States. Thanks to its location in Oregon’s Central Cascades, Mt. Bachelor racks up an impressive 462 inches of snow each year. The resort offers 101 runs and over 4,300 skiable acres. It’s a great place for kids (and adults!) to learn to ski or snowboard. Choose from 2-hour and full-day ski lessons for kids as young as 3 ½. For ages 6+ through adults, you’ll want to check out the “Ski or Ride in 5” program, which turns first-timers into skiers and boarders in just five lessons. 3. Go ice skating Lace up your skates and choose from multiple ice rinks around town. Seventh Mountain Resort is home to Bend’s only open-air ice skating rink. It’s a charming spot day or night, with glittering lights and a forested setting. Check the calendar for special events, like kids’ themed skating sessions and live music events. If the weather’s less than ideal during your visit, head indoors to The Pavilion, Central Oregon’s only full NHL-sized rink. Drop in for a public ice skating session or sign up for figure skating, hockey or curling classes. 4. Take a dog sled ride Mush! Mush! Take a sled dog tour through snowy meadows with incredible mountain views. Oregon Trail of Dreams is owned by Iditarod racer Rachel Scdoris, the first legally blind person to complete the grueling 1,049-mile Alaskan race. These action-packed interactive tours are designed to share her love of dog sledding. Plus, participants can interact with the dogs and help care for them. 5. Warm up at a family-friendly brewery Bend regularly tops lists of cities with the most (and most delicious) breweries, and luckily for parents, many of them are family-friendly. Choose from close to two dozen breweries including the well known Crux Fermentation Project, 10 Barrel and Worthy Brewing. At all three, you’ll find great kids menus, a casual environment and plenty of room to roam. And at Worthy, you can even visit their Hopservatory, an on-site observatory with a powerful telescope, so aspiring astronomers can spot stars, planets and more. Find your family’s second home in Bend There’s no better place to make family memories than in a second home in Bend. Spend days exploring the snowy wonderland together and evenings curled up around a fire, cooking meals or playing games. It’s all within reach when you become a co-owner of a Pacaso in Central Oregon. Plus, Pacaso's Family-Friendly Second Homes™ make it easy to just show up and relax — from cribs and high chairs, to games, streaming services and more, we have you (and your kids) covered.
Talk about a perfect location: The town of Bend is perched along the winding Deschutes River at the base of the Cascade Mountains, making it a haven for outdoor enthusiasts and adventure lovers. But this Central Oregon city of just under 100,000 people draws visitors with all kinds of interests. Here are 10 special ways to spend a weekend in Bend. Get up close with local wildlife The High Desert Museum is a unique museum experience. Located just five minutes outside Bend on 135 wild acres, this museum gives visitors a crash course on the history, flora and fauna of Central Oregon’s high desert. Indoor and outdoor habitats are home to an amazing array of animals, including otters, foxes, porcupines and a special Birds of Prey Center. If you can tear yourself away from the menagerie, the museum also has great historical exhibits, including an American West stagecoach. Watch the sunset from atop a lava dome Created when a now-extinct volcano erupted, Pilot Butte is a cinder cone butte that rises nearly 500 feet above town, making it a distinct landmark visible from almost anywhere in town. Take the short hike to the top of the butte during the day for views of the surrounding mountains, including Three Sisters, Mount Hood, Mount Jefferson and Black Butte, then hang around until sunset — on a clear evening, Mother Nature puts on an incredible show. Go spelunking Bend’s volcanic history not only created buttes above ground, it carved out incredible caves. One of the most popular is Lava River Cave, a mile-long lava tube. Grab a warm jacket (it’s chilly down there, even in summer), closed-toe shoes, a flashlight (and a backup!), and head down the stairs to the start of the cave. You’ll discover a whole underground world, formed over 80,000 years ago and full of ice stalactites, colorful rocks, and twists and turns. Ski the country’s sixth-largest ski resort With a ski season that regularly lasts until May, Mt. Bachelor is a must-ski (or snowboard) destination for winter sports fans. It’s conveniently located less than 30 minutes from Bend and boasts average yearly snowfall of 462 inches. The resort offers 4,323 skiable acres with 101 runs for skiers and boarders of all experience levels. Skiing and snowboarding not your cup of tea? You’ll also find sledding hills, snowshoeing, cross-country skiing and more. Float the river During the warmer months, visitors and locals alike float down the Deschutes River, which winds its way right through the heart of town. Bring your own tube or rent one from a local outfitter, then float your way through town over the course of an hour or two. Don’t forget to pack drinking water and sunscreen! This activity is so popular that the city operates a Ride the River Shuttle during the summer months. For just $4, you can park upstream, have the shuttle drop you off at the float launch, then get picked up at your choice of two stops down river. Say cheers to the local beer scene Bend is a beer lover’s dream, with close to two dozen breweries operating in town. The most famous is Deschutes Brewery, which operates both a public house and a tasting room. Other well-known breweries include Crux Fermentation Project, Boneyard Beer and 10 Barrel. Not sure where to start? Get yourself a designated driver and explore the Bend Ale Trail or visit during the annual Bend Brewfest. Hit the links Most vacation destinations have a golf course or two, but the Bend area really outdoes itself with over 25 golf courses, including a handful designed by legends of the game. Serious golfers will want to check out the award-winning Pronghorn Resort, with courses designed by Jack Nicklaus and Tom Fazio. Nearby resort communities like Black Butte Ranch, Sunriver Resort and Eagle Crest also offer great courses. No matter where you play, you really can’t go wrong, thanks to sunny weather and gorgeous mountain views. Meander through First Friday Art Walk First Friday Art Walk is a great way to familiarize yourself with downtown Bend. Running year-round in any kind of weather, the event is a celebration of all forms of art, from painting and sculpture to music, comedy, acting and more. It also shows off Bend’s small-town charm, with plenty of complimentary snacks and sips. Enjoy an outdoor concert Bend locals make the most of their gorgeous summer weather with plenty of outdoor events at the Hayden Homes Amphitheater, conveniently located on the riverfront in the Old Mill District. All summer long, you’ll find the calendar packed with free and ticketed events, including traveling musicians, comedy performances and the Bend Brewfest. Rent a movie at the last Blockbuster Need a dose of nostalgia before you leave town? Here’s a really unique experience: Bend is home to the last remaining Blockbuster video store. Whether you’re looking to rent a movie, revel in the 1990s vibes or snap a few selfies, no trip to Bend is complete without stopping by. They also have quite the collection of Hollywood memorabilia. Make Central Oregon your second home There’s so much to explore in Bend, one weekend is never enough. Become a local by co-owning a Pacaso second home. With ⅛ to ½ shares available, co-ownership puts a luxury home in Bend within reach.
Just a hop, skip and a jump from mainland Florida but a world away are the picture-perfect Florida Keys. Made up of a 125-mile-long island chain connected by 42 (yes, 42!) bridges, the Keys offer an incredibly wide range of activities and amenities — and where you should stay depends on what you’re interested in. Check out this helpful guide to navigating the 800+ islands in this storied archipelago. Weekend warriors The Florida Keys go on and on — Key West is not only the southernmost point in the United States, but it’s also closer to Cuba than it is to mainland Florida. But what if you’re coming from the mainland and only have a few days to spare? Consider Key Largo. It’s just an hour south of Miami and offers plenty of Keys charm. You can snorkel and dive in John Pennekamp State Park, do some sportfishing, and enjoy fresh seafood served up at colorful local restaurants. (If you haven’t tasted conch before, now’s your chance!) Families Marathon is a 10-mile chain of islands located in the middle of the Florida Keys, and it’s a must-visit for families. Young nature lovers can enjoy interactive experiences at the Turtle Hospital and the Dolphin Research Center. They may even get a chance to swim with dolphins! Marathon is also home to family-style resorts and plenty of kid-friendly restaurants. Underwater adventurers The whole archipelago sits along the Florida Reef, the third-largest coral barrier reef in the world. From Key West to Key Largo, world-class snorkeling and scuba diving spots abound. Located in the Middle Keys, Alligator Reef wows divers with crystal-clear waters and amberjack, angelfish, barracuda and nurse sharks. From Marathon Key, divers can explore the Thunderbolt, a military ship that was intentionally sunk in 1986 to become a dive destination. Some 115 feet below sea level, it is now covered in colorful sponges, coral and hydroid. Alternatively, Islamorada’s Hen & Chickens Reef is the best place to see unique coral formations, some 15 feet high. Anglers With warm, tropical waters come incredible sportfishing opportunities. Islamorada is the self-proclaimed Sport Fishing Capital of the World. Amateur and expert anglers hook everything from bonefish to tarpot to sailfish in this island’s waters. From Big Pine Key, anglers in search of seasonal mahi mahi can book a charter that will give you the best possible chance of catching these prized tropical fish. (Hint: Spring is the peak season for big fish!) History buffs Shipwrecks, pirates and hurricanes, oh my! The Florida Keys have a storied history, making the archipelago a dream destination for history enthusiasts. The best place to start is the Florida Keys History & Discovery Center in Islamorada, with exhibits on the indigenous people who first called the islands home, Spanish treasure fleets, the story of Henry Flagler’s Over-Sea Railway, and more. You may also be interested to know that iconic playwright Tennessee Williams and novelist Ernest Hemingway both called Key West home and both have museums dedicated to their legacies. Couples If you’re looking to (really) get away and reconnect with the one you love, head all the way to Key West. Whether your idea of a romantic getaway is a quaint bed and breakfast or a luxury resort, Key West has it all. Spend relaxing days bicycling through Old Town Key West, wander through the Key West Butterfly & Nature Conservatory, take a sunset sail (with wine, of course), or snap selfies at the Southernmost Point Buoy, the southernmost point in the continental United States. You’ll also want to make time to share a slice of key lime pie, of course. Discover your perfect Florida Keys retreat Browse Pacaso listings in the Keys, and discover the better way to own a second home. As a Pacaso co-owner, you can simply arrive on your favorite island, unpack and relax. We take care of the management, maintenance and more.
The mountain town of Jackson, commonly known as Jackson Hole, is situated in the Teton Range in the Jackson Hole valley, and has long been a favorite destination for snowsports enthusiasts. (Jackson Hole Mountain Resort frequently tops the list of ski resorts in North America, and it’s only one of three ski resorts in the area!) But even if you’ve hung up the skis for the season — or never picked up the sport — there’s plenty to experience in this mountain town all 12 months of the year. Here are 10 activities to check out. 1. Cross Yellowstone National Park off your bucket list The south gate of Yellowstone National Park is just 60 miles from Jackson Hole. It’s worth the drive whether you have a single day or a whole week to explore. Billed as the world’s first national park, Yellowstone is simply bursting with natural beauty, from watching Old Faithful erupt some 130 feet in the air to spotting over 300 species of birds and mammals like bison, bighorn sheep, elk, moose, bears and more. Can’t get enough of national parks? Make time to visit Grand Teton National Park, which is just five miles from Jackson Hole. This awe-inspiring park is known for its spectacular scenery and rugged mountains. 2. Visit the National Museum of Wildlife Art All the natural beauty surrounding Jackson has inspired many artists whose works are a must-see at the National Museum of Wildlife Art. The museum has more than 5,000 pieces of wildlife art, including works by Georgia O’Keeffe, Andy Warhol and John James Audubon. Plan your visit around lunchtime and visit the on-site restaurant, which offers incredible views overlooking the National Elk Refuge. 3. Take a tour on horseback Adventure awaits on half-day, full-day or overnight horseback expeditions outside Jackson, available through multiple outfitters. Whether you’ve never ridden a horse or you’re a seasoned rider, you’ll love the opportunity to take in the valley’s scenery from this vantage point. Double down on the experience with a stay at a local dude ranch. 4. Sip on local spirits Jackson Hole Still Works is the hometown (and only) craft distillery, and it’s worth a stop to sample spirits handmade in small batches from Wyoming-grown ingredients. Each year the distiller chooses a local artist’s work to feature on their labels. You can even book a distillery tour to learn how spirits are made. 5. Embrace your inner cowboy The town of Jackson has a decidedly Wild West feel, so if you’re going to make the most of your visit, you should probably look the part. In downtown Jackson and Teton Village, you’ll find boutiques selling Western gear, from boots and belt buckles to gifts and memorabilia. 6. Dine in a log cabin Just a half block from Jackson’s town square in one of the city’s last remaining historic structures is a log cabin listed on the National Register of Historic Places. Inside, Cafe Genevieve offers a cozy ambience and Southern-inspired brunch items like fried chicken and waffles, biscuits with Cajun gravy, and muffulettas. Pair your meal with bottle service mimosas or a spicy Bloody Mary. 7. Get a birds-eye view of the valley Ascend 4,139 vertical feet in just 12 minutes on the Jackson Hole Aerial Tram. As you ride “Big Red,” you’ll discover 360-degree views of the Tetons, Jackson Hole valley and surrounding mountains. At the top, you can enjoy hiking and running trails, try rock climbing, or simply savor some “Top of the World Waffles” at Corbet’s Cabin, elevation 10,450 feet. 8. Enjoy some live music Jackson Hole has a great live music scene and boasts a year-round concert schedule. Whether you want to listen to live country music at a casual Western pub, take in a free outdoor concert, or enjoy classical music at the annual Grand Teton Music Festival, there’s something for every taste. 9. Soak in the hot springs Just an hour outside of Jackson you’ll find Granite Hot Springs, featuring both a natural hot springs bath and a man-made swimming pool. No matter which spot you choose, you’ll be surrounded by a beautiful forest and mountain landscape. Getting to the hot springs is part of the fun, too. In the warmer months, you’ll drive down a bumpy dirt road. In the winter, the only access is via snowmobile, ski or dog sled — which increases the chances you’ll get the place to yourself! 10. Find your dream vacation home Every season, every month and even every day, there’s so much to explore in this rugged Western outpost. Why limit your visits to once a year? When you co-own a Pacaso second home in Jackson Hole, you’ll have ample time to explore everything Wyoming has to offer — don’t forget to pack your cowboy boots.
Is there a more idyllic name for an oceanfront village than Carmel-by-the-Sea? You’d be hard pressed to find a more charming name — or place — than this Central California coast hamlet just south of Monterey. And since it’s located less than two hours from the Bay Area, it makes a perfect weekend destination. Read on for our guide to spending 36 hours in Carmel-by-the-Sea. And fair warning: A weekend is never enough. Friday, 8 p.m. Arrive in beautiful Carmel-by-the-Sea and start your weekend on the right foot: Enjoy dinner at one of the town’s charming restaurants. Every dining experience is unique here, from the Italian-meets-Californian cuisine of Basil to the Asian fusion favorite Pangaea Grill. Many of Carmel’s restaurants feature outdoor dining, so ask to sit under the stars if the weather’s nice (which it usually is). Saturday, 9 a.m. Get an early start with a walk on Carmel Beach, located at the foot of Ocean Avenue. This beach is perfectly picturesque, with a curving coastline and beautiful cypress trees. Can’t start your day without coffee and breakfast? On your way to the beach, stop by one of the village’s local coffee shops, like the Carmel Coffee House or Dutch Door Donuts, then enjoy a beachfront picnic. Ready to get in some steps? The Scenic Bluff Path (3.5 miles round trip) runs above Carmel Beach and leads you through cypress trees and gardens en route to gorgeous views from Carmel Point. Near the south end of the path, you’ll be able to sneak a peek at Frank Lloyd Wright’s Clinton Walker House. Saturday, 11 a.m. While the downtown core of Carmel-by-the-Sea is just one square mile, every block is brimming with quaint charm. Many of the buildings are designed like fairytale cottages, and inside you’ll find local boutiques, sophisticated art galleries, wine tasting rooms and restaurants. You may notice that the storybook village has no street addresses, mailboxes, parking meters or streetlights! It’s all to preserve the enchanted ambiance. Go ahead, wander away! Once you’ve worked up an appetite, find your way to one of Carmel’s casual lunch spots. Without leaving the village, you can find fresh seafood at Catch, California fare at Village Corner, Italian at Enzo and sushi at Toro. Saturday, 1 p.m. The world-famous Pebble Beach golf resort is just up the road from Carmel, and even if this short weekend getaway doesn’t give you time to play 18 holes, it’s worth a visit — the views from this rocky coastline are nothing short of spectacular. The best way to take in the beauty of Pebble Beach is by taking the scenic 17-Mile Drive. You’ll wind your way through Pebble Beach’s most beautiful spots, with 17 marked viewpoints along the way. Leave ample time to stop, explore and take pictures of white sand beaches, dramatic cliffs and the famed Lone Cypress. Saturday, 4 p.m. No trip to Carmel would be complete without sipping wines produced from grapes grown in surrounding Monterey County. With 20 tasting rooms in the village, it’s hard to know where to start. Luckily, the folks at Visit Carmel have put together a self-guided Wine Walk. The free mobile guide takes you on a walkable wine tasting journey, pointing you in the direction of tasting rooms that offer special perks for Wine Walk participants. Saturday, 7 p.m. After a bite to eat, spend your evening indulging in the wonderful cultural scene in and around Carmel. The town has a reputation for celebrating the arts, so there’s always some kind of entertainment to enjoy. Take in a comedy show, musical performance or movie at the outdoor Forest Theater Guild. Enjoy live theater from the Pacific Repertory Theatre. Or see what’s happening at the Sunset Center, a gorgeous gothic theater that plays host to everything from chamber music performances to stand-up comedy. Sunday, 8 a.m. Is it time to leave already? Pick one last adventure for the day — there’s plenty to do in the area surrounding Carmel, including in next-door Monterey. Of course, the world-famous Monterey Bay Aquarium is a must-see. Need more time? A weekend in Carmel is never enough. If you can’t get enough of this charming coastal town, it may be time to become a regular. When you co-own a Pacaso in Carmel, Monterey or Pebble Beach, you’ll have ample time to explore while being able to relax in your own second home between adventures.
San Diego boasts an incredible 70 miles of coastline and enviable year-round weather, with over 265 days of sunshine each year. It’s no wonder people flock to this Southern California hot spot when they’re craving a beach vacation. “America’s Finest City” is especially popular with families. Check out five of our favorite family-friendly beaches, and don’t forget your sunscreen! La Jolla Shores The vibe: With a wide stretch of sandy beach, gentle waves and an adjacent palm-tree lined park with a playground, La Jolla Shores Beach is a quintessential SoCal family beach. Any day of the week, you’ll see kids flying kites, riding scooters on the boardwalk and splashing in the waves — and there are lifeguards on duty year-round. Location: La Jolla Shores is located in a posh seaside enclave just north of downtown (and blissfully removed from the more raucous beach neighborhood of Pacific Beach). This mile-long, crescent-shaped beach is easily accessible thanks to a large (free!) parking lot. Also nearby: The La Jolla coastline is teeming with aquatic wildlife. Head into the heart of La Jolla to the Children’s Pool or La Jolla Cove, the best places to spot sunbathing seals and sea lions. Mission Beach The vibe: Easily one of San Diego’s most popular and well-known beaches, Mission Beach is bursting with activities, no matter the time of year. South Mission Beach is quieter, with wide stretches of beaches, beach volleyball courts and single-family homes. Head north up the boardwalk and you’ll find yourself at Belmont Park, a beachfront amusement park that’s home to the Giant Dipper Roller Coaster, a restored wooden coaster built in 1925. Location: Situated on a sandbar between the Pacific Ocean and Mission Bay, the two-mile beach is just minutes from downtown San Diego and easily accessible from most central San Diego neighborhoods. Also nearby: If you arrive in Mission Beach via freeways, you’ll likely drive past SeaWorld on your way. Less than a 10-minute drive from Mission Beach, SeaWorld is an ever-popular family attraction. Coronado Central Beach The vibe: Often recognized as one of the best beaches in America, Coronado Central Beach boasts golden sand, small waves and sandcastle creations built on a whim by a handful of local experts. At low tide, kids and parents can often be found exploring the tidepools. Any time of day, boogie boarding, stand up paddle boarding and swimming are popular activities. Location: Coronado is an island community connected to San Diego’s mainland (just a stone’s throw from downtown) by a massive bridge, making the journey just as breathtaking as the destination. Also nearby: Coronado is home to the famous Hotel del Coronado, which served as the backdrop for the Marilyn Monroe movie “Some Like It Hot.” And while your kids may not have heard of the movie, the whole family will enjoy wandering through “the Del,” a National Historic Landmark that’s been charming visitors with its Queen Anne architecture since 1888. Torrey Pines State Beach The vibe: The long stretch of pristine beach is framed by red-hued bluffs at Torrey Pines State Beach, which offers a nature-filled escape just a few minutes outside of town. The park has convenient parking, public restrooms and showers to rinse off the sand. Location: Torrey Pines State Beach is located off Highway 101, north of La Jolla. Stick to the central stretch of sand near the lifeguard towers. Swimming and sunbathing below the cliffs is, obviously, not recommended. Also nearby: The beach is nestled below Torrey Pines State Natural Reserve, a 1,750-acre reserve filled with pine forests, sandstone canyons and family-friendly hiking trails – plus incredible Pacific Ocean views. Ocean Beach Dog Beach The vibe: If your family includes a four-legged member, you won’t want to miss Dog Beach in San Diego’s eclectic Ocean Beach neighborhood. One of the first official off-leash beaches in the United States, Dog Beach is the perfect place to let your pooch dig in the sand, splash in the water and make some new furry friends (humans are welcome, too). Location: Dog Beach is located between Mission Beach and Point Loma on the northern tip of Ocean Beach, where the San Diego River meets the Pacific Ocean. Also nearby: The neighborhood of Ocean Beach is worth a stroll once Fido has had his fun. Walk the Ocean Beach Pier, grab some fish tacos, see how many community murals you can spot, stop in the local surf shops, or simply enjoy some good old-fashioned people watching. Find your favorite San Diego beach Every San Diego local has a favorite beach — which will be yours? Become a co-owner of a Pacaso second home, and have all the time you need to explore San Diego’s fantastic beaches and the many other great activities the city has to offer. Plus, Pacaso's Family-Friendly Second Homes™ make it easy to just show up and relax — from cribs and high chairs, to games, pool floaties, streaming services and more, we have you (and your kids) covered.
From the California coast to the Big Apple, there are many great vacation destinations in the United States, but they don’t all offer year-round appeal — you may not want to spend your summer in the triple-digit temperatures of Phoenix or winter in windy Chicago. Other getaway locales are great destinations, regardless of the month — or the weather report. Here are five of the top year-round vacation destinations in the U.S. Jackson Hole, Wyoming Jackson Hole is best known as a winter destination for skiers and snowboarders. After all, the Jackson Hole Mountain Resort has been named the No. 1 ski resort in North America by Forbes magazine eight years in a row! So while it’s well established that Jackson Hole is a great wintertime vacation spot, it’s also a great anytime destination, thanks to its enviable location near both Grand Teton National Park and Yellowstone National Park. Plus, the Jackson Hole area gives you a chance to live out your Wild West fantasies. Wander the wooden boardwalks of Jackson Town Square, sip a cold brew at a traditional cowboy watering hole, or get yourself a ticket to the famous Jackson Hole Rodeo, which has been running every summer since the 1890s. Naples, Florida Located in southwest Florida along the Gulf of Mexico, Naples is known as both a great place to vacation and to retire. Unsurprisingly, the weather plays a role in the city’s ongoing popularity. Naples averages 280 days of sunshine each year, making outdoor activities like golfing, watersports, fishing and beachcombing year-round pursuits. The city itself is also brimming with activities, including over 700 restaurants, the 170-acre Naples Botanical Garden and a vibrant local arts scene. Sun Valley, Idaho Like Jackson Hole, Sun Valley is known as one of the West’s premier ski and snowboard destinations, and it’s buzzing all winter long with visitors looking to experience some of the best powder out there. Winter in Sun Valley also offers snowshoeing, cross-country skiing, sleigh rides and more. But when the snow melts, a whole world of warm-weather activities emerges. Spring, summer and fall in Idaho bring hiking, fly fishing, rafting, golf, mountain biking and horseback riding – all of which come with fewer crowds than in peak ski season. Lake Tahoe, California/Nevada A true outdoor lover’s paradise, Lake Tahoe is a must-see for active travelers and nature enthusiasts. Straddling the border of northern California and Nevada, Lake Tahoe beckons with incredible views and endless activities, no matter the month of the year. When the weather is warm, the lake is the place to be, whether you’re boating, fishing, swimming or exploring the 72 miles of shoreline. There are also more hiking paths that you can tackle in a lifetime, many of which reward your hard work with waterfalls, incredible vistas, and plenty of peace and quiet. Stick around through winter to spend snowy days at your choice of 15 ski resorts – many of which offer views of the crystal-blue waters of the lake. California wine country The country’s most famous wine region, Napa Valley and nearby Sonoma County, are true must-see (and must-sip) destinations for wine lovers. And thanks to a Mediterranean-style climate, there’s never a bad time to visit California wine country. In addition to the region’s hundreds (yes, hundreds) of wineries, Napa and Sonoma have a reputation for world-class cuisine, indulgent spas, great hiking and biking, and championship golf courses. Plus, since both Napa and Sonoma are less than 60 miles from San Francisco, they’re the perfect place for a weekend getaway, no matter the season. Get a true year-round experience When you own a second home in a year-round vacation destination, you can enjoy everything the destination has to offer without peak-season crowds. Browse Pacaso listings in these destinations and many more to find your perfect vacation home.
With year-round warm weather, an average of 266 days of sunshine each year, and an enviable oceanfront location, San Diego is simply bursting with great activities for visitors and locals with all kinds of interests. Best of all, many of the must-see attractions in this SoCal city are completely free! Here are six of our favorite free ways to spend a day in “America’s Finest City.” 1. Beach, beach and more beach Of course, San Diego is known for its beautiful beaches. The city has an incredible 70 miles of coastline, with everything from flat stretches of golden sand to rocky cliffs to big-wave breaks for surfers. A great first stop is the 4,200-acre Mission Bay Park, which offers beach and bay access, children’s play areas, biking and jogging paths, volleyball courts and more. Other great beaches include the Fido-friendly Ocean Beach Dog Beach, picturesque Coronado Beach and secluded Solana Beach, which sits in front of dramatic bluffs. 2. Spot the seals and sea lions in La Jolla Just 13 miles north of downtown San Diego, the tony neighborhood of La Jolla is the best place to spot the area’s famous seals and sea lions. Start at the rocky beach of La Jolla Cove, either enjoying the view from the boardwalk above the cove or walking down to the sand. The cove is also a popular starting point for snorkelers. Still want more? Head to La Jolla’s Children’s Pool, a beach that earned its name because it was originally designed to be a protected beach for young San Diegans. Today, it’s best known as the place to see harbor seals. Note that the Children’s Pool closes annually from December 15 to May 15, as it’s a popular nesting ground for seals birthing pups. 3. See the murals at Chicano Park Logan Heights (also known as Barrio Logan) is San Diego’s oldest Mexican-American neighborhood. In the heart of the neighborhood, you’ll find Chicano Park, which boasts the world’s largest collection of murals by Chicano artists. On a sunny afternoon, wander through the park to see more than 80 paintings across seven acres. The park, which was designated a National Historic Landmark in 2017, also features sculptures, gardens and playgrounds. If you’re lucky, you just might come across one of the many music and dance festivals held in the neighborhood each year. 4. Hike the bluffs of Torrey Pines Located north of San Diego, Torrey Pines State Natural Reserve is a gorgeous slice of rugged natural beauty just off of Highway 101. There’s a great beach right along the parking lot, but the best views can be found from high above. Explore the 1,750-acre reserve filled with coastal pine forest, sandstone canyons and multiple hiking options, from family-friendly paths to more strenuous trails. No matter which you choose, you’ll be rewarded with stunning ocean views that are truly a must-see. Keep an eye out for paragliders, too. 5. Explore colorful Old Town As the name implies, Old Town is San Diego’s oldest neighborhood. Considered the birthplace of California, the Old Town San Diego State Historic Park gives a glimpse into life in the area in the 1800s. See five original adobe homes, a schoolhouse, blacksmith shop, carriage collection and a museum filled with artifacts discovered in the area. Entrance to the park is free, but fair warning: You might work up an appetite, and Old Town is well known for its Mexican cuisine. Time for some tacos and a margarita? 6. Wander Balboa Park Perhaps one of San Diego’s best-known attractions is Balboa Park, the country’s largest urban cultural park. It’s home to the famous San Diego Zoo and 85+ other attractions, but not everything requires an entrance fee! The Timken Museum of Art is always free, as are the Botanical Building and the many beautiful gardens. The park’s tram is complimentary too. Call San Diego your (second) home In sunny San Diego, every day has a way of feeling like a vacation. So why not put down some roots? When you buy a Pacaso in San Diego, all the details are taken care of, so you’ll have plenty of time to enjoy San Diego’s myriad attractions.
Is there anywhere quite as beautiful as Jackson Hole, Wyoming, in winter? Located in the Teton Mountain Range just south of Yellowstone National Park, the town of Jackson (and the whole 400-square-mile valley known as Jackson Hole) is a bucket list ski destination for powder lovers around the world. But what if you love the Wild West charm of Jackson and the rugged beauty of the Teton Mountains but don’t exactly love spending a day on the slopes? Not to worry. Jackson Hole offers a wide range of winter activities that don’t require skis or a snowboard. Here are five of our favorites. 1. Explore the nearby national parks Yellowstone National Park and Grand Teton National Park are both brimming with tourists during the warm-weather months, but exploring them in the winter is a uniquely wonderful experience. From the comfort of a heated snowcoach (or bundled up for a sleigh ride), you can spot moose, deer, elk, wolves, birds, bison and even watch Old Faithful erupt. 2. Take in the art scene Jackson Hole is home to more than 25 galleries, many of which focus on work created by local artists and photographers. When you arrive in town, be sure to check in with the Jackson Hole Center for the Arts, which manages a calendar of events for the culturally minded. And the National Museum of Wildlife Art boasts over 5,000 works of wildlife art. It’s ideally located on a butte overlooking the 20,000-acre National Elk Refuge. 3. Get your adrenaline fix on a tubing hill Even if you don’t ski, you can still enjoy the winter wind on your cheeks as you speed down a snow-covered hill. Embrace your inner child at snow tubing parks in the Jackson Hole area. You might also decide to brave the Winter Cowboy Coaster at Snow King Mountain. It’s a mountain roller coaster ride that takes you through loops, curves and hairpin turns as you glide down the mountain — the equivalent of a 45-story descent. 4. Go for a soak Just about an hour southeast of the town of Jackson, you’ll find Granite Hot Springs. It’s often crowded in the summer months, but once the snow falls, these mineral springs are only accessible via snowmobile, dog sled, cross-country ski or fatbike. But while it might be a bit of adventure to get there, the reward is worth it. The waters are rich in calcium and magnesium, and the pool is surrounded by picture-perfect forest. 5. Have a spa day While Jackson Hole’s spas might say they cater to skiers and snowboarders treating themselves to a little après-ski TLC, everyone deserves some pampering. Spas and wellness centers in the Jackson Hole area offer massage, facials, acupuncture, yoga and saunas, with many treatments making use of ingredients sourced from the surrounding mountains. Go ahead, stay awhile In winter and throughout the year, Jackson Hole offers an incredible range of activities and entertainment, whether your idea of a good time is relaxing in a mountain hot spring or speeding down a black diamond run. Can’t fit everything you want to do into one quick weekend? Become a part-time Jackson Hole resident! Pacaso offers second home properties throughout the Jackson Hole area, and our co-ownership model makes it easy. We take care of the management and maintenance, so you can just arrive and enjoy everything this idyllic mountain town has to offer.
Every winter, skiers and snowboarders flock to Idaho’s Sun Valley resort for epic powder, heart-pumping downhill runs and some of the best skiing around. SKI Magazine named Sun Valley the top North American ski resort for 2021/2022, the second year in a row it got top honors. But if flying down the slopes isn’t for you, or you just want to try out some new activities, check out these 12 things to do during your next winter vacation in Sun Valley, Idaho. 1. Enjoy a spa day If you’re tired and sore from days spent skiing Bald Mountain and Dollar Mountain — or you simply need a little pampering — a spa day might be just what the doctor ordered. The Spa at Sun Valley Lodge offers an incredible array of spa services, right in the heart of the resort. Choose from facials, eye treatments, massages, body treatments and more. In nearby Ketchum, the award-winning Zenergy Health Club & Spa has a bit of everything. In addition to world-class spa treatments and acupuncture, Zenergy offers nearly 100 fitness classes and small group training sessions each week. They also boast indoor and outdoor saltwater pools and an indoor tennis court. 2. Curl up with a good book and a coffee Pop into Ketchum’s Chapter One Bookstore and pick up the latest bestseller or a well-loved used book. The bookstore has been a local favorite since 1970. Once you’ve found the perfect book, you need a cozy place to curl up. Now, if only you had a nice warm cup of coffee or tea ... Believe it or not, Ketchum’s Starbucks is a must-see — it has a cabin-like feel and floor-to-ceiling log walls. Grab a seat on the leather couch and crack open that new book! 3. Snowshoe or cross-country ski Surround yourself with Idaho’s natural beauty as you get some exercise. The Sun Valley Nordic & Snowshoe Center grooms almost 25 miles of trails daily, making it an ideal destination for a day of cross-country skiing, snowshoeing adventures and other outdoor activities. Grab a map, pay the trail fee and pick up any rental gear you need. First-timers can even schedule a lesson with a local pro. Galena Lodge also has affordable rentals and guided snowshoe tours. Drop by the lodge on Thursday mornings during the winter months for a ranger-led snowshoe tour and learn about winter ecology and animal tracking in the Sawtooth National Recreation Area. 4. Sample local beers and spirits Whether you’re enjoying an apres-ski or just treating yourself to an afternoon happy hour, the area surrounding Sun Valley offers a variety of places to relax with a tasty drink. Just 15 miles from Sun Valley, the town of Hailey, Idaho, is home to the Sawtooth Brewery. Stop by to sample flagship beers and check out the brewing process. They also run the Ketchum Public House, which has 25 beers, wines, ciders and kombucha on tap. Also in Ketchum is the Warfield Distillery & Brewery, which crafts spirits including gin, whiskey and vodka, plus cask ales. Cheers! 5. Listen to live music While the nightlife in and around Sun Valley is admittedly low-key, there are plenty of opportunities to take in some live music. River Run Lodge and Warm Springs Lodge offer live music in the late afternoon on weekends. As night falls, Whiskey Jacques features great music and a lively scene. The Lounge at the Limelight Hotel in nearby Ketchum also has live music Thursday through Monday nights from 6-9 p.m. 6. Indulge in the Ketchum food scene The food culture in this small town is astonishing, with a wide range of culinary options. In the heart of Ketchum is Enoteca, serving Neapolitan-style pizzas fresh from a wood-fired oven. For a mix of Asian-fusion cuisine — Thai Chiang Mai curry or Korean fried chicken, anyone? — be sure to visit Rickshaw. And The Pioneer Saloon is known for authentic Western-themed dining and its famous prime rib. Bon appetit! 7. Hit the ice skating rink Sun Valley Village’s outdoor rink is spacious and beautiful, offering spectacular views of the mountains and valley — you can even schedule lessons for your whole crew. The year-round, full-size indoor rink has a figure skating school and open hockey. Christina Potters Outdoor Ice Rink is another great place to lace up your skates in the winter — it’s the largest non-refrigerated man-made rink in the Northwest, spanning almost two acres. 8. Bowl in your spare time Looking for classic family fun when visiting Sun Valley? Head to the basement of the Sun Valley Lodge for a game at Sun Valley Bowling Alley, a 1950s-style bowling alley (and one of the oldest in the Northwest). Enjoy a fun afternoon or hit the lanes for an evening of bowling and grub. 9. Go horseback riding or sleigh riding Sun Valley offers horseback riding for both seasoned equestrians and novices. Head to Sun Valley Stables for a guided scenic tour or a full day riding experience. You can also book a scenic horse-drawn sleigh ride or sleigh into dinner at Trail Creek Cabin, a highlight during the holiday season. 10. Take a gondola for mountain views Skiing is not the only way to enjoy natural scenery in Central Idaho: Take the gondola up to Bald Mountain for breathtaking mountain views and scenic hiking trails. Be sure to stop by The Roundhouse restaurant at the top, where you’ll delight in delicious fondue and more gorgeous views. 11. Go winter fly fishing Fly fishing season is year-round in Idaho — even when there’s snow. The lighter crowds make it easy for pros and novices alike to snag a catch. Some of the hot spots for fly fishing include Big Wood River, Wood River Valley, Warm Springs Creek and Silver Creek Preserve. Need fishing gear? Head to Silver Creek Outfitters and Lost River Outfitters for top-of-the-line guides and equipment. 12. Embark on a snowmobile adventure Looking for a thrilling activity that doesn’t require too much physical exertion? Try snowmobiling, an exhilarating way to access scenic areas in winter. Take a guided snowmobile tour or rent a snowmobile and equipment at Smiley Creek Lodge. Find your mountain retreat in Sun Valley When you become a co-owner of a Pacaso second home, you simply arrive, unpack and relax. Explore our Sun Valley listings so you can start making unforgettable memories in your luxurious second home.
Monterey Bay is many things: a nature lover’s paradise, a muse to famous writers like John Steinbeck and Robert Louis Stevenson, and an idyllic location for a weekend getaway. (Monterey was also once known as the Sardine Capital of the World, but that’s neither here nor there.) Check out our list of five must-do’s for any getaway to the Monterey Bay area, which spans Santa Cruz to Monterey and Carmel. 1. Visit the famous Monterey Bay Aquarium Monterey is perhaps best known for its eponymous aquarium. Boasting over 200 exhibits and 80,000 plants and animals (most of which are native to California), the Monterey Bay Aquarium is truly a can’t-miss experience. From its bayfront location, you’ll be able to get up close and personal with African penguins, reef sharks, California sea lions and much more. Plus, your visit supports the critical work that Monterey Bay Aquarium scientists are doing to care for the ocean. 2. Take to the water The deep blue waters of Monterey Bay sure are tempting, and there are so many ways to explore them. First, the bay is one of the few places in the world where you can spot whales year-round, thanks to the Monterey Canyon. One of the deepest submarine canyons on the West Coast, it is the perfect habitat for a variety of species. Depending on when you visit, you may see blue whales, gray whales, humpbacks or orcas, along with many other sea creatures. Looking for a more active pursuit? Multiple companies offer kayak and stand-up paddle board rentals. Monterey Bay’s waters remain calm most of the time, thanks to its sheltered location. You might also consider getting your feet wet with some sea creatures at popular tidepooling beaches at Point Lobos State Reserve, Point Pinos and Lovers Point Park. 3. See the sights along 17-Mile Drive This scenic drive takes you through nearby Pebble Beach’s most picture-perfect spots. You won’t miss a thing, thanks to 17 marked viewpoints along the way. Be ready to snap pictures of beautiful white sand beaches, the famed Lone Cypress, dramatic seaside cliffs and the feathered friends that call Bird Rock home. Of course, one of the stops is the world-famous Pebble Beach Golf Links. 4. Explore storybook Carmel-by-the-Sea Just south of Monterey is delightful Carmel-by-the-Sea. Like something out of a storybook, the town is simply overflowing with charm — think quaint bed and breakfasts, boutique shops, art galleries and flower-filled walkways. The town of Carmel is also the perfect place to sample farm-to-table cuisine, accompanied by wine lists showcasing vintages from over 150 area wineries. 5. Learn about Monterey’s role in history Did you know that Monterey was California’s capital city under three separate governments? First Spain, then Mexico, and lastly the United States. History buffs will love the opportunity to learn more in Monterey State Historic Park. You can join a guided walking tour or explore on your own. Just look for the yellow sidewalk tiles that point you in the right direction! Can’t get enough of Monterey Bay? We can’t blame you. If a weekend just isn’t enough, consider putting down roots as the co-owner of a second home in Monterey. Check out our Pacaso listings in the greater Monterey Bay area to discover your own dream vacation property.
Located near the northern end of California’s world-famous Napa Valley, St. Helena is part of the American Viticultural Area, which includes over 400 vineyards and 6,800 acres of grapes. Of course, that means it’s a popular destination for wine-loving travelers. But sipping cabernet sauvignon or chardonnay isn’t the only activity in this bucolic Northern California retreat. Here are five more unexpected experiences, all available right in St. Helena. Savor the Spice Islands Marketplace at the Culinary Institute of America A can’t-miss for foodies, the Spice Islands Marketplace is located on the Greystone campus of the Culinary Institute of America (CIA). This incredible marketplace of culinary items offers everything from kitchen gadgets to hard-to-find spices, plus plenty of local Napa Valley specialties. The Marketplace stocks more than 1,700 cookbook titles, many autographed by their authors. Before or after your visit to the Spice Islands Marketplace, consider taking a tour of the CIA’s school. Depending on the tour you choose, you’ll enjoy wine, a dinner at the Gatehouse Restaurant (with dishes prepared by student-chefs) and behind-the-scenes access to the institute’s historic buildings. Check out Crane Park and the St. Helena Farmers Market Right in the heart of St. Helena and an easy walk from some of the town’s most popular wine tasting rooms is 12-acre Crane Park. A wonderful place to enjoy some fresh air and a picnic, the park has recreation areas for tennis, bocce ball, horseshoes and a playground. If you find yourself in St. Helena on a Friday morning between May and September, bring your shopping tote. The park plays host to the St. Helena Farmers Market, where you’ll find fresh local fruits and vegetables, flowers, olive oil, cheeses, crafts and more. Stop by the Robert Louis Stevenson Museum Literary fans will be delighted by the Robert Louis Stevenson Museum. Located in a wing of the St. Helena Public Library, this free exhibit boasts the world’s largest collection of memorabilia from the author of “Treasure Island.” While you wouldn’t expect the Scottish author to have ties to Napa Valley, he and his wife spent their honeymoon in St. Helena and Napa Valley in the spring of 1880. Plus, he spent his later years in the nearby Bay Area. Treat yourself at the Model Bakery Since 1908, 1357 Main Street in downtown St. Helena has been the site of a delicious local bakery. It’s been the Model Bakery for almost 30 years, run by a mother-daughter duo who serve up delicious artisan treats like scones, croissants, breads, cookies, pies and more, still baked in the original brick ovens. Their famous English muffins made Oprah Winfrey’s annual list of favorite things in 2016. While breakfast is obviously a great time to stop in, the bakery offers a lunch menu with seasonal salads, soups, sandwiches and pizzas. Sip wine in a cave No Napa Valley visit would be complete without at least one wine tasting — and this one is definitely a standout. Make yourself a reservation at Del Dotto Winery for the Cave Experience & Barrel Tasting tour. The Del Dotto family has a long history in winemaking, spanning back to the 1440s in Italy. Their St. Helena outpost pays homage to the family’s Venetian roots, with a cathedral-like structure and an impressive traditional wine cave. On the 90-minute tour, you’ll learn how different wood barrels create different tastes and sample a few right from the barrel. And, since the cave stores more than 45 different wines for your guide to choose from, every visit offers something new. Stay awhile With so much to explore in St. Helena and its surrounding wine country towns of Napa, Yountville, Rutherford and Calistoga, it’s no wonder that many visitors to this charming area decide to make it their second home. If you’re tempted to make California wine country your home away from home, consider Pacaso. When you co-own a second home through Pacaso, you enjoy all the benefits of owning a fully furnished luxury home without the headaches. Just arrive, unpack and say cheers to relaxation.
Affectionately known as “CdM” by the locals, Corona del Mar, California, is a little piece of Pacific Coast paradise in Newport Beach. In Spanish, its name means “crown of the sea,” and despite its humble beginnings, it’s now one of California’s premier destinations to visit and a great place to live. Here are a few fun facts you might not know about this West Coast gem. The fascinating history of Corona del Mar The original price As part of a Mexican land grant in 1875, James Irvine (yes, as in Irvine, California) acquired 108,000 acres of what would later become Corona del Mar. He paid just $150,000 for the land. It used to be a ranch James Irvine used the Corona del Mar land for sheep ranching. In 1904, his son sold 700 acres of it to George E. Hart for $150 an acre. Selling the first lots for very little Hart started selling off lots in Corona del Mar in 1904 for $100 each, with seaside lots fetching as much as $750. The first homeowners were women Best friends Mary Everett and Alice Alden owned the first two homes built in Corona del Mar: the historic Happy House and Quarterdeck. Quarterdeck was demolished in 2017 and a new home built in its place. The new home was listed for sale at $25 million. Sales were slow With no rail service, a pier that kept getting destroyed by waves, and only the rough Back Bay Drive for access, Corona del Mar was hard to reach. It wasn’t until after the Pacific Coast Highway was completed in 1925 that the town started to gain traction. Corona del Mar’s claims to fame John Wayne lived there John Wayne moved to Corona del Mar in 1963, living in an unpretentious beachfront home facing Balboa Island. The Academy Award-winning actor is buried in nearby Pacific View Memorial Park. His yacht, The Wild Goose, is still available for tours. It was the location of the first recorded rescue by surfboard Considered the father of modern surfing, Duke Kahanamoku was also an Olympic swimmer, and in 1928 he used his surfboard to rescue 12 fishermen after their boat capsized off the coast of Corona del Mar. It’s been the backdrop for several movies and TV shows Corona del Mar’s scenic beaches and quaint downtown are featured in the silver screen classics “All Quiet on the Western Front” (1929 Oscar winner), “Macbeth” (1916) and “Cleopatra” (1917). More recent CdM close-ups include “Love Story” (1970), Disney’s “The Thirteenth Year” (1999) and the hit series “Arrested Development.” The area’s cliffs and caves were featured on the long-running TV series “Gilligan’s Island.” Quirky trivia about Corona del Mar It’s one of the top 20 most expensive ZIP codes in the U.S. Corona del Mar was listed as #20 on a list of top 20 most expensive ZIP codes in the U.S. in 2020. A 2021 list puts neighboring Newport Beach at #1. The north-south street names are blooming fun F.D. Cornell took ownership of the Corona del Mar neighborhood in 1916. Historians note that in 1922, the names of all streets running north to south changed from letters to the names of flowers, in alphabetical order, starting with Acacia (actually a flowering tree) and ending with Poppy. Scout’s honor: The history of Jamboree Road In 1953, Corona del Mar hosted the first Boy Scout Jamboree on the West Coast near where Fashion Island mall stands today. Jamboree Road was constructed to get the 50,000 Scouts and their equipment to the site. The last snowfall was in January 1949 It was shocking to Corona del Mar residents then, and it’s never happened since! Fun features of Corona del Mar It has amazing beaches It’s not called “crown of the sea” for nothing. For softer surf and tidepools, check out Little Corona; for bigger waves, hit Big Corona or The Wedge. China Cove and Cameo Shores are popular with locals. It has beautiful gardens and garden centers Sherman Library & Gardens in Corona del Mar has over two acres of gorgeous gardens, complete with a koi pond. If you get inspired to do some gardening of your own, Roger’s Gardens is the plant nursery of all plant nurseries, and is a great spot to get your floral fix. It has an old English pub It might seem out of place on the sun-soaked California shore, but Five Crowns in Corona del Mar is the town’s oldest restaurant, and it was modeled after The Olde Bell, a pub outside London. Matilda “Tillie” Lemon MacCulloch built it in 1936, and rumor has it that it was used as a gambling hall during the 1930s. It has a cool footbridge Built in 1928, the 243-foot Goldenrod Footbridge is another historical feature of Corona del Mar. Not only does it provide handy access to the coast from neighborhoods east of Bayside Avenue, it’s also a scenic spot for selfies. It has gorgeous homes Pacaso listings include stunning second homes in Corona del Mar. Thanks to our co-ownership model, you can enjoy all the benefits of this exclusive ZIP code for less money.
The charming town of Healdsburg — bordered by the Russian River Valley, Alexander Valley and Dry Creek Valley — can’t help but be a go-to destination for connoisseurs of California wine. But with so many Healdsburg wineries and vineyards to choose from, how do you know which are worth visiting? We’ve curated a list of a dozen Healdsburg wineries that will wow your palate and delight your senses. Chalk Hill Estate Located just south of Healdsburg in the Russian River Valley, Chalk Hill Estate is known for its organic on-site gardens, complete with chickens for fresh eggs and bees for honey. Chalk Hill prides itself on minimal interference when it comes to the winemaking process, so you get a true taste of the vineyards. In addition to pinot noir and chardonnay, the winery also offers sauvignon, cabernet, syrah and carménère. Copain Wines The French word “copain” translates to “friend” or “buddy,” and embodies the Copain Wines philosophy that wine is meant to be shared among friends. The winery sits atop a hillside overlooking the picturesque Russian River Valley and offers a relaxed atmosphere. All three tasting options include specially selected bites to accompany the winery’s pinot noir, chardonnay and syrah varietals. Dry Creek Vineyard Known for consistently producing outstanding red, white and dessert wines scored at a 90 or higher, Dry Creek Vineyard is an independent, family-owned Healdsburg winery. Its wines are produced using a blend of grapes from the Dry Creek estate and other local family vineyards. Dry Creek offers an unpretentious, laid-back tasting experience in its chateau-style tasting room or outdoors on the terrace and enchanting Secret Garden. The vineyard and tasting room rank #1 on TripAdvisor’s list of Top Attractions in Healdsburg. Ferrari-Carano Vineyards and Winery A visit to Ferrari-Carano Vineyards and Winery's Villa Fiore in the Dry Creek Valley is a must. The Italianate-style villa is surrounded by manicured gardens and is especially radiant in the spring when the daffodils and tulips are in bloom. Ferrari-Carano has 24 vineyards across 1,200 acres and uses grapes from all three local valleys (plus Napa Carneros and Mendocino Ridge) to produce its cabernet, chardonnay and pinot noir. Gary Farrell Vineyards & Winery Sometimes simple is divine, and Gary Farrell Vineyards & Winery proves that maxim with top-notch pinot noir and chardonnay from its estate in the Russian River Valley. The winery offers tastings with artisan cheese pairings in its scenic and cozy tasting salon or on an outdoor terrace with expansive hilltop views. Gary Farrell has a solid five-star rating on TripAdvisor from nearly 800 reviews touting the stunning scenery, delicious wines and knowledgeable staff. J Vineyards & Winery Known for its sparkling wines, J Vineyards & Winery also prides itself on offering cuisine crafted solely from ingredients sourced from farms within 50 miles of this Russian River Valley winery. Cuisine and wine pairings are served in the elegant J Bubble Room, a space with clean lines and modern, understated elegance, or in the Legacy Lounge on the beautifully landscaped terrace. Tastings include red, white and sparkling wines made with grapes from select coastal climate vineyards throughout the Russian River Valley and Sonoma County. Jordan Vineyard & Winery Jordan Vineyard & Winery is one of the only Healdsburg wineries that offers overnight stays in its chateau to its rewards members. Jordan Vineyard boasts 1,200 acres of land, with more than three-quarters of the property left to the wilderness as part of the winery’s conservation efforts. The winery is also certified pollinator-friendly and fish-friendly. MacRostie Winery & Vineyards MacRostie Winery & Vineyards offers expansive views of the Russian River Valley from the spectacular glass-walled MacRostie Estate house just outside Healdsburg. MacRostie works with 30 chardonnay vineyards and 15 pinot noir sites, creating up to 130 small fermentations each year to collect a broad palate of flavors for its wines. MacRostie has received accolades including Best Winery in Sonoma and Best Tasting Room in Napa, and reviewers on TripAdvisor give the winery 5 stars, citing excellent service and a welcoming atmosphere. Seghesio Family Vineyards One of the oldest Healdsburg wineries, Seghesio Family Vineyards was founded in 1895 and is best known for its zinfandel and heritage Italian varietal wines. The 300 acres of pre-Prohibition vineyards are still family-owned and operated. The Seghesio tasting room in downtown Healdsburg offers a wine garden and a special “Bocce and Bottles” reservation to add a bit more fun to a typical tasting. Silver Oak Winery/Cellars At Silver Oak Winery’s tasting room just 10 minutes east of downtown Healdsburg, you’ll experience the winery’s signature cabernet sauvignon produced with grapes grown in both Napa Valley and Alexander Valley. The contemporary architecture of the space and the outdoor reflecting pools provide an understated atmosphere that enhances the winery’s panoramic views of its 113 acres and the surrounding Alexander Valley. Silver Oak is also LEED Platinum certified, with solar panels that produce 105% of the energy consumed by the operation of the vineyards and winery. VML If you’re looking for the unexpected, VML Wines’ hidden gem with a tasting room near Dry Creek won’t disappoint. An offshoot of Truett-Hurst, VML produces small lots of pinot noir, chardonnay and other varietals each year from a collection of small vineyards in the Russian River Valley, each with a unique microclimate. Each bottle sports a label that’s as surprising and playful as the wine contained inside. Williamson Wines Williamson Wines not only offers white, rosé, bordeaux, pinot noir and sparkling wines, but also the perfect food pairings. This Healdsburg winery allows walk-ins and offers the option to upgrade the bites that accompany tastings to lunch-sized servings, which is great for those in your party who may not want to participate in the wine tasting. All food pairings are recipes developed in-house to perfectly complement the wines they accompany. Find your wine country Pacaso When your second home is in Healdsburg, you have plenty of time to sample the area’s finest vintages. View our Napa/Sonoma listings, and picture your perfect wine country getaway.
With an average of almost 250 days of sunshine a year and miles of beautiful coastline, Miami is an ideal destination for outdoor dining. And no matter what cuisine you’re craving or what vibe you’re seeking, this South Florida metropolis has something for every palate. For ocean views Located at Miami Beach’s hip Eden Roc Hotel, Malibu Farm offers sweeping ocean views just steps from the sand. Recognized by the Miami New Times as the best waterfront restaurant in the city, this laid-back but chic eatery is the East Coast outpost of chef Helene Henderson’s California restaurant of the same name. Sample popular dishes like the avocado pizza with jalapeño ricotta, pan-seared Chilean sea bass with miso tahini or the vegan coconut and tofu with baby bok choy. For live music Colorful and artsy, Little Havana’s Doce Provisions boasts a cozy courtyard that regularly plays host to local musicians, so the ambience simply can’t be beat. On the menu are plenty of Latin-inspired dishes made from locally sourced ingredients, delicious craft beers, and cocktails like mojitos, margaritas and Caribbean rum punch. The menu offers fresh takes on classic Cuban dishes like cubano sandwiches, mixed grill, cod fish croquettes and homemade tostones. For rooftop cocktails See and be seen at South Beach’s Watr at the Rooftop, located at the 1 Hotel South Beach. With comfy couches and reclaimed wood floors, this bar has a decidedly laid-back vibe. Take the elevator 18 floors up for Peruvian-meets-Japanese fare, including award-winning sushi and the classic pisco sour. They take a farm-to-table approach, sourcing ingredients from local farmers whenever possible and pairing them with responsibly sourced meat, fish and seafood. For Instagram-worthy pics Have you ever sipped a tropical cocktail inside a vintage bus? You can at Little Havana’s Casa Florida, which is brimming with photo-worthy backdrops. The outdoor dining setup is perfectly pastel, with irresistible vintage vibes. Casa Florida is known for its brunch, which includes items like a dulce de leche and banana waffle, golden avocado toast and a selection of bottomless cocktails. Cheers! For a rainy day Yes, it does rain occasionally in South Florida, but when it does, there’s no reason to cancel your dining plans. Located in the Wynwood area, the Butcher Shop Beer Garden & Grill has a huge covered beer garden with an impressive selection of craft brews. The menu has hearty fare that pairs well with beer, including a classic Bavarian pretzel, house-made sausages and the churrasco steak burger, which was featured on “Diners, Drive-Ins & Dives.” For space to roam Dining out with high-energy kids can be a challenge, but Coconut Grove’s Glass and Vine gives kids space to burn off energy, while letting parents indulge in delicious contemporary American cuisine. The restaurant’s expansive patio is nestled up against Peacock Park, a nine-acre park with a playground, sports fields and plenty of space to play before or after dinner. For a special occasion Nothing says upscale like dining surrounded by Miami’s most jaw-dropping super yachts. The Deck at Island Gardens serves up incredible marina, downtown and Biscayne Bay views for diners arriving by land or by sea. And no matter what you’re celebrating, the menu is full of surprises that will help you mark any occasion. Indulge in the seafood tower (complete with Alaskan king crab, ceviche, oysters and caviar) or share tableside dishes like a tossed arugula and endive salad in a cheese wheel or the oven-baked salt-crusted Florida snapper. Make Miami your second home If sunny beaches, vibrant neighborhoods and world-class cuisine are calling, maybe it’s time to make Miami your home away from home. Check out Pacaso listings in Miami and learn how we can help you make your hassle-free South Florida vacation home a reality.
Fort Lauderdale revels in its natural setting, offering visitors enticing beaches, exotic botanical gardens and exciting boat tours. We did some digging beyond the top attractions, and these are a few of the hidden Fort Lauderdale gems that are sure to make your stay memorable. The Yard in Wilton Manors This lush and serene village-like area of Fort Lauderdale is a cluster of quirky boutique shops and restaurants tucked away from the bustling downtown. Local favorites in The Yard include The Alchemist cafe and coffee shop for a quiet breakfast or brunch (don’t miss their iced coffee) and Lola’s Bazaar Art and Music for original art, handmade jewelry and vinyl records. Anglins Fishing Pier If you’re looking for a bit of “vitamin sea” minus the sand, Anglins Fishing Pier is a great spot for panoramic views of the Atlantic. Pay a small fee to stroll the pier and watch local fishermen at work, then visit the nearby Aruba Beach Cafe for Caribbean food, tropical drinks and live music. If you want to try catching your own dinner off the pier, you can pay a little more for a fishing permit. The pier shop carries everything you might need, including fishing tackle and bait. Broward County Main Library If an afternoon thunderstorm has you seeking shelter or you just need a break from the Florida sun, consider visiting the Broward County Main Library in Fort Lauderdale. Its soaring atrium and fountain provide a refreshing place to relax with a good book or a game on the library’s oversized chess board. Little ones will love playing pretend in the Active Learning Center play area, while older kids and adults can check out the library’s real moon rock display or get creative in the Creation Station Lab and makerspace. Yellow Green Farmers Market Local vendors offer fresh produce, handmade goods, craft beer and more at the Yellow Green Farmers Market in Hollywood. Sellers also take this farmers market experience up a notch by getting creative with displays. Don’t be surprised if you come across some vegetable art or meat masterpieces amidst the colorful stalls. Secret Woods Nature Center Like its name suggests, the Secret Woods Nature Center is a hidden gem in Fort Lauderdale that many locals don’t even know about. Tucked between Marina Mile Boulevard and the New River, this 57-acre park has a nature trail, butterfly garden, and a kid-friendly nature center with hands-on exhibits. Stroll along the boardwalk through the forest, learn more about local wildlife, rest on the convenient benches scattered throughout the park and enjoy the public art installations along the trail. 15th Street Fisheries Part restaurant, part entertainment, 15th Street Fisheries in the Lauderdale Marina offers a dining experience you won’t soon forget. The restaurant is literally on the water, with glass-bottom floors that let you see into the richness of the Intracoastal Waterway as you eat. At night, the floors are lit up and you can watch the restaurant feeding the local schools of tarpons. Menu items include fresh fish, chowder, gator, shrimp, crab and more. Coconuts Restaurant For fine dining with a lovely water view, Coconuts is a surprisingly laid-back establishment along the Intracoastal Waterway. This pet-friendly restaurant offers dockside dining, a non-fussy dress code (as long as you’re wearing a shirt and shoes, you’re good) and complimentary valet parking. Watch boats as they pass by and view sunsets over the water while enjoying a delicious meal of fresh seafood and key lime pie for dessert. Marando Farms and Ranch Marando Farms and Ranch is an urban farm in Davie, just minutes from downtown Fort Lauderdale. The farm offers a petting zoo and pony rides on the weekends, and it operates its own organic “farm-to-fork” cafe called the Twisted Tomato. Need eggs? Marando Farms lets you collect your own, and you can also purchase fresh, locally grown produce from the farm market. Milk Money Bar & Kitchen If you’re not into the seafood scene, Milk Money Bar & Kitchen has you covered. Situated only a half mile from Fort Lauderdale Beach, this neighborhood cafe offers delicious comfort food, coffee and cocktails at any time of day. The industrial decor has an artsy flair, with crystal chandeliers adding an eclectic touch of elegance to the cozy, laid back atmosphere. Art walks For a dose of culture, you can stroll through art walks at FATVillage in downtown Fort Lauderdale on the last Saturday of the month, art fairs on Las Olas Blvd, Downtown Hollywood's Artwalk the third Saturday of the month, and make sure to check out the Downtown Hollywood Mural Project. Fort Lauderdale Beach Lastly, we include Fort Lauderdale Beach, which isn’t exactly hidden! But the beach does have some hidden treasure. At certain times of day and with the right tide conditions, the beach is a great place to hunt for sea glass — remnants of broken glass worn smooth by the ocean’s shifting sands. Keep your eyes peeled and you might be lucky enough to discover some of Fort Lauderdale’s literal hidden gems! If you’re looking for other beach options, check out our list of the five best beaches in Fort Lauderdale. Looking for a second home? Now that you know where to find hidden gems in Fort Lauderdale, you’ll need a home base. Pacaso can help you find your dream second home in the Fort Lauderdale area. Start today by checking out our Fort Lauderdale listings.
When it comes to Fort Lauderdale beaches, there’s a lot to love. This South Florida city, located just 30 minutes north of Miami, boasts 24 miles of beautiful beachfront. Whether you’re looking for solitude surrounded by nature or a see-and-be-seen vibe, Fort Lauderdale offers plenty of options. Here are five of our favorites in and around Fort Lauderdale for soaking up the sun and sinking your toes in the sand. To experience a quintessential Florida beach: Hollywood Beach Ideally located between Fort Lauderdale and Miami, Hollywood Beach regularly ranks as one of Florida’s top beaches, and it’s easy to see why. It features golden sand, soaring palm trees and a massive brick boardwalk lined by a winding seawall with architectural gates. The 2.5-mile boardwalk is best explored on two or more wheels — bicycles and rollerblades are two of the most popular modes of transportation. The vibe of Hollywood Beach is friendly but upscale, with plenty of luxury hotels, fine dining restaurants, shopping and art galleries in the neighborhood. To avoid the crowds: Hugh Taylor Birch State Park Known as the Central Park of Fort Lauderdale, Hugh Taylor Birch State Park is a 180-acre natural space located between the Atlantic Ocean and the Intracoastal Waterway. A popular first stop in this urban oasis is the park’s Adventure Center, where you can rent canoes, kayaks and paddleboards to explore the gorgeous lagoon. Bicycling, hiking, picnicking, beachcombing and birdwatching are other popular activities. To soak up the sun: Dania Beach Six miles south of Fort Lauderdale, Dania Beach offers soft white sand, rolling dunes, impossibly turquoise water and a peaceful vibe for those looking to lounge in the sun. Dania Beach is also home to the Dania Beach Fishing Pier, for those hoping to catch some dinner. For more active pursuits, Dr. Von D. Mizell-Eula Johnson State Park is just north of the pier and offers kayaking, swimming, hiking and boating. To get underwater: Lauderdale-by-the-Sea Charming Lauderdale-by-the-Sea is located five miles from Fort Lauderdale on a barrier island. While the beach itself is popular with sunbathers and beachcombers, the real action is underwater. A little more than 300 feet from shore is an incredible three-tiered coral reef — no wonder Lauderdale-by-the-Sea was named the Shore Dive Capital of South Florida. There’s an abundance of marine life just below the surface, including tropical fish, spiny lobsters, moray eels and more. Given its proximity to shore and shallow depth, it’s also a popular spot for snorkelers. To catch some fish: Pompano Beach Pompano Beach is such a popular South Florida fishing locale, the town is even named after a fish (pompano are regarded as one of the most delicious warm-water fish). Pompano Beach’s warm, clear waters are ideal for fishing, and the newly renovated Pompano Beach Fishing Pier is a great place to start. Anglers will enjoy wide fishing platforms, ample shade coverage and the chance to catch snapper, mackerel, snook and cobia. Pompano Beach is also a great place to set sail on a fishing charter in search of sportfishing catches like sailfish, mahi mahi, wahoo and kingfish. Find your sunny second home in Fort Lauderdale It takes more than a weekend to discover your favorite Fort Lauderdale beach. Become a regular when you own a second home in South Florida. And when you buy a Pacaso, you can co-own a luxury property at just a fraction of the cost. Plus, we handle all the maintenance and management.
One part world-class ski destination, one part charming Colorado mountain town, Aspen is truly a must-visit location. This community of 7,200 year-round residents has an outsized selection of recreational, cultural and historical attractions. If your travel plans bring you to Aspen in the fall, you’re in for a treat. Thanks to its location in the White River National Forest and its stunning backdrop of the Elk Mountains, Aspen is a well-known destination for experiencing the fall colors — or “leaf peeping” as New Englanders call it. Check out these five great ways to spend a fall day in Aspen — all of which give you beautiful views of the changing leaves. 1. Take a gondola ride Gondolas at Aspen’s picturesque ski resorts have become the best way to get a bird’s-eye view of the fall foliage. Your first option is the Silver Queen Gondola, which offers a 20-minute ride to the top of Aspen Mountain. At the peak, the elevation is a whopping 11,212 feet. You’ll enjoy incredible views of Aspen Highlands and the Highland Bowl, plus hiking trails and a full-service restaurant. Another great option is Snowmass’ Elk Camp Gondola, which offers breathtaking views of the Roaring Fork Valley along the way. Once you arrive at the top, a seemingly endless array of activities await, including ziplining, mountain biking and disc golf, and yard games at the Elk Camp Restaurant. Those in search of even higher vistas can hike to the top of the Elk Camp Chair for views of the Maroon Bells. 2. Visit a ghost town Just 13 miles from Aspen, Ashcroft is a classic ghost town and a can’t-miss, both for the spooky factor and the gorgeous fall colors. At its peak in 1883, roughly 2,000 people, mainly silver prospectors, called Ashcroft home. But, within a few years, the shallow silver deposits ran out and the town was all but abandoned. Today, Ashcroft is recognized on the National Register of Historic Places. Visitors can explore three restored buildings and six in their original condition. 3. Go for a hike Enjoy the crisp fall air while enjoying one of the many area hikes, from short, family-friendly walks in the woods to challenging full-day treks with huge elevation gains. Not sure where to start? Consider hiring a private naturalist guide through the Aspen Center for Environmental Studies. Choose from a morning, afternoon or full-day expedition. ACES guides have a wealth of stories and information about the flora and fauna of the area, as well as its history. 4. Sip a craft beer Aspen’s only craft brewery, Aspen Brewing Company has been serving up delicious brews since 2008. While you can sample its beers at restaurants around town, the best place to try them all is at its gastropub, Aspen Tap. Located in downtown Aspen and open seven days a week, the pub has a daily happy hour, delicious lunch and dinner offerings, and an outdoor patio with great mountain views. 5. Play 18 holes Golf is a popular pastime in Aspen — and not just because your golf ball flies farther at these high altitudes. The Roaring Fork Valley offers a variety of gorgeous golf courses, all of which boast beautiful mountain views and front-row seats to the changing leaves. The Frank Hummel-designed Aspen Golf Club is ranked as one of Golfweek Magazine’s 50 best municipal courses and the best municipal course in Colorado. Other great nearby courses include the Snowmass Club, the Ranch at Roaring Fork and River Valley Ranch. Find your second home in Aspen No matter the season, there’s so much to explore in Aspen that you’ll need more than a weekend. Give yourself the time you need by buying a second home in town. When you co-own a fully managed Pacaso second home, you can treat yourself to your own mountain retreat for less money and hassle.
It’s easy to work up an appetite in Park City. This popular Utah town is a year-round destination for those who love to ski, snowboard, hike, bike, paddle and more. Check out our list of the 15 best restaurants in Park City. Go ahead: Eat like a local every meal of the day! Breakfast Five 5eeds With a menu focused on locally sourced and seasonal ingredients, Five 5eeds offers hearty breakfast fare that will fuel a day on the slopes. Delicious and Instagram-worthy dishes include the colorful acai bowl, smashed avocado and peas on toast, and a flavorful shakshouka (a Moroccan baked egg dish topped with feta). The coffee’s rave-worthy too. Salt Box For a quick grab-and-go breakfast, Prospector Avenue’s Salt Box features delicious takes on breakfast classics. Choose from the Salt Box egg sandwich with honey Sriracha cream cheese, the popular huevos rancheros box, or a breakfast burrito with house-made sausage. Don’t forget about the fresh pastries. Harvest Harvest focuses on sourcing high-quality ingredients from local farmers and small-scale producers, and the result is super-fresh, flavorful offerings like grain bowls and smoothies. They’re also well known for their coffee, which is made from fair trade beans and roasted locally with their own special formula. Deer Valley Grocery-Cafe Located in the Deer Valley Resort, this convenient grab-and-go spot offers favorites like a breakfast wrap with scrambled eggs, guajillo salsa and spiced potatoes; housemade oat yogurt with fresh berries and toasted coconut; and an open-faced bagel topped with smoked salmon and wasabi cream cheese. The Bridge Cafe & Grill Serving American food with a Brazilian flair, the Bridge Cafe & Grill is conveniently located on Main Street, with ski-in/ski-out access in the winter and an awesome outdoor patio in the summer. Locals swear by the create-your-own omelet, “bridge benedict,” and the cristo redentor, a french toast-style ham and swiss sandwich. Lunch Hearth and Hill This family-owned restaurant in the Kimball Junction area has an eclectic mix of lunch fare, so everyone in your party can find something to enjoy: bison patty melts, ahi poke bowls, fish tacos and even ramen bowls. Many of the menu options at Hearth and Hill are available with gluten-free or vegan preparations. Silver Star Cafe This friendly and unfussy outpost was featured on the Food Network’s “Diners, Drive-Ins and Dives” in 2014, and the accolades keep rolling in. The lunch menu at Silver Star Cafe varies by season, but you can count on a variety of wood-fired pizzas and hearty burgers and sandwiches. (You may want to come back for dinner to catch one of the acoustic music dinner shows on Thursday, Friday and Saturday nights.) El Chubasco Ready to turn up the heat? The award-winning El Chubasco serves up burritos, tacos, enchiladas and chile rellenos. Don’t forget to stop by the salsa bar before you dig in — they make more than 20 varieties of salsa every day. Be sure to end your lunch with a classic flan or an irresistible churro! Chop Shop Park City In the sunny summer months, there’s nothing quite like an al fresco picnic. Swing by Chop Shop and pick out a selection of cheese and charcuterie. Each box comes with house pickles, grainy mustard and charred bread. Just select your cheese and meat from a curated collection sourced from premium and sustainable farmers and ranchers. Freshies Lobster Co. Lobster rolls in Park City? Believe it! Freshies serves sustainably caught lobsters, flown in from Maine within 24 hours. You can chow down on three sizes of lobster rolls (including the XL, which is brimming with 5 ounces of lobster) at their Prospector Avenue storefront, or track down their food truck roaming the greater Salt Lake City area. Dinner Purple Sage Located in the old Rocky Mountain Bell telephone building on historic Main Street, Purple Sage has a decidedly Western feel, both in decor and cuisine. Start your dinner with appetizers like honey roasted beets, green chile pork stew or housemade potato chips topped with blue cheese and pepper jack. Entrees include the house specialty veal meatloaf, Utah trout with Yukon gold potatoes, and chicken fried chicken with chorizo gravy. Twisted Fern Don’t let the strip mall location fool you: This restaurant offers deliciously creative takes on American cuisine, with chef/owner Adam Ross at the helm. The dinner menu at Twisted Fern is always evolving, but popular dishes include the double-wide Niman Ranch pork chop, Utah elk loin and fresh Alaska halibut. You also can’t go wrong with a side of the three-cheese macaroni. Boneyard Saloon & Wine Dive Head to this gathering place just north of Main Street and take your pick of two distinct dining options. Boneyard Saloon offers grilled favorites like juicy ribs and award-winning wings, plus Utah beers on tap. Next door, the Wine Dive offers a great variety of wines (some even on tap) to pair with wood-fired artisan pizzas. In the winter months, Boneyard Saloon & Wine Dive offers dining in three rooftop “igloos.” Cortona Italian Cafe On a cold winter evening, nothing warms you up quite like traditional Italian food and red wine. Cortona Italian Cafe makes their pasta from scratch, so you really can’t go wrong. Favorites include the four-layer lasagna, handmade potato gnocchi, fettuccine and meatballs, and veal saltimbocca over gemelli pasta. If there’s room left for dessert, try the homemade gelato. Riverhorse on Main An award-winning fine dining establishment that often appears on national top restaurant lists, Riverhorse on Main is the perfect place to celebrate a special occasion in style. Carnivores will love the steak offerings, including a classic center-cut filet mignon and a 20-ounce cowboy ribeye (the latter accompanied by fingerling potatoes roasted in duck fat). There’s a great vegetarian menu as well, the star being the stuffed portobello and pasta. Can’t decide? Come back for seconds. To truly eat like a local, it helps to be a local! Check out our Park City listings to find the perfect second home in one of Utah’s most delectable culinary destinations.
Park City is known for epic skiing, alpine adventures and the Sundance Film Festival, but that’s just the tip of the iceberg. This charming Utah mountain town has transformed itself from a historic silver mining town into one of the country’s top resort destinations. Park City is a great spot for mountain biking, fly fishing, fine dining and much more. And it’s all just an hour drive from Salt Lake City International Airport. As with other major vacation destinations, Park City offers plenty of exciting activities year-round. If you’re a winter sports enthusiast, you’ll want to visit between December and March for prime skiing conditions. But no matter the season, you can find lots to do. If you want ideas for your next mountain getaway, check out these 22 places to go and things to do in Park City. Summer and fall No snow doesn’t mean no fun in Park City. From outdoor sports to live events, this town embraces warmer weather with plenty of new adventures. Mountain biking: If you’re an adrenaline junkie and you love testing your limits, the nearly 500 miles of Park City mountain biking trails are ready and waiting to challenge your skills. Prime biking season in Park City is mid-to-late May through September. And there’s no need to bring your own bike — shops in the area offer mid-range rentals to premium mountain bikes. You can even book private bike lessons at the Deer Valley Resort. Scenic chairlifts: Once the skiers have retired for the season, the Park City Mountain chairlifts provide a relaxing (and romantic) ride to the top of the mountain for stunning views and access to hiking trails. Hiking: Lace up your boots and head up the hills to take in Park City’s alpine lakes and wildflower meadows – and don’t be surprised if you come across some leftover snow! Must-see trails in order of difficulty include Bloods Lake, Lofty Lake Loop and Divide Lakes. Fly fishing: When the melted snow turns into rivers, Park City is ripe for fly fishing. The nearby Provo River and the Weber River are blue-ribbon fisheries, with easily accessible shorelines and plentiful fish. Park City also has lots of bait shops, outfitters and fly fishing guides for fishers of all skill levels. Water sports: As temperatures warm up, Park City’s rivers and lakes are ideal for whitewater rafting, tubing, stand-up paddleboarding and sailing. You can reserve a guided rafting or kayaking tour ranging from a two-hour session to a full-day experience. Tours cater to different ages and skill levels so your whole family can join in the fun. Deer Valley Music Festival: Pack a picnic dinner and catch a concert under the stars at the Deer Valley Music Festival. The slopeside festival features chamber, classical, pops and country music. The B-52s, Tony Bennett, Diana Krall, LeAnn Rimes, Smokey Robinson, Randy Travis, Gladys Knight, Jewel, and Earth, Wind & Fire have performed at the festival. Park Silly Sunday Market: If you’re looking for some fun on a lazy Sunday, stop by the Park Silly Sunday Market on historic Main Street to shop from local vendors and grab a bite to eat. Held every Sunday from June to September, the nonprofit street festival, arts and farmers market has something for everyone. Winter and spring Winter is when Park City really shines, but there’s usually still plenty of snow in early spring as well. (And a springtime visit to Park City brings emptier slopes, lower lodging rates and a more relaxed atmosphere.) Sundance Film Festival: Every January the stars shine bright in Park City for the Sundance Film Festival, the largest independent film festival in the country. The annual program includes documentary features, short films, episodic content, emerging media and more. Snowshoeing: If you prefer to take in the snowy scenery at a slower pace, snowshoeing on a groomed trail is a fantastic way to enjoy the wonderland that is Park City in the wintertime. Snowshoeing is a great physical activity designed for various skill levels, and Park City’s beautiful scenery makes it even more appealing. Sleigh rides: For a little romance, book a sleigh ride for two — or invite the whole gang and make it a party! You’ll glide through powdery snow and take in picturesque views of Park City. Several area companies offer sleigh rides that will immerse you in winter magic. Dog sledding: Experience the power of paws with a Park City dog sled team led by professional handlers. Choose to ride along or take it to the next level and learn the art of mushing. Sledding companies provide personalized dog sledding tours for adults and families with children, and you can even meet and play with the huskies on some of the tours. Snow biking: If the snowy months have you pining for your mountain bike, snow biking is a fun winter alternative. Hit some of Park City’s designated fat tire bike trails for an exhilarating experience — the most popular trails include Round Valley, Glenwild and Historic Union Pacific Rail Trail, where you can bike up 7,000 feet of elevation. Snow tubing: Snow tubing offers a downhill thrill for the whole family. Lifts and lighted lanes make it fun and easy even after the sun goes down. Head to Woodward Park City for tubes of all skill levels and Soldier Hollow Nordic Center for some of the longest tubing lanes in Utah. Snowmobiling: If you want to explore Park City beyond the slopes, check out one of the many snowmobile companies in the area, which give you access to thousands of acres of land and breathtakingly high elevations. You can zoom through the backcountry or wind your way across acres of private ranchland. At Park City Peaks Snowmobiling, you’ll be able to reach elevations of up to 11,000 feet. Skiing & snowboarding: And of course, Deer Valley and Park City Mountain have slopes for every skill level. At Deer Valley Resort, you’ll find over 2,000 skiable acres and 300 inches of annual snowfall. No matter your age, ability or terrain preferences, this is one of the highest-quality skiing experiences in the world. Any season Park City offers plenty of options to enjoy any time of year. Horseback riding: Looking for an alternative way to experience Park City’s natural scenery? Go horseback riding across Park City’s magical mountain meadows in the warmer months or trot through the serene snowy forest in the winter. You’ll find guided tours of different lengths and for different hours of the day. With access to thousands of acres throughout the valley, horseback riding is sure to deliver a memorable adventure. Tour downtown: The shops and restaurants along Park City’s historic Main Street have plenty to offer. Discover over 100 independent shops and boutiques, 50 local restaurants and performing arts and live performances. (Pro tip: To avoid parking hassles, use the free bus and trolley system to get around town.) Utah Olympic Park: Have you always wanted to try a bobsled? The Utah Olympic Park has one, along with a ropes course, sliding tracks, extreme tubing and the 2002 Olympic Winter Games Museum. The nearly 4000-acre multi-use facility delivers a gold medal experience. Egyptian Theatre: The Egyptian plays a starring role in the annual Sundance Film Festival, but it’s also home to live plays, concerts, comedy and other entertainment year-round. With origins dating back to the early 1900s, the historic Egyptian provides high-quality entertainment experiences for audiences of all ages. Atticus Tea & Coffee: If you love books and beverages (coffee and tea), you’ll love Atticus. With a cozy, quirky atmosphere and owners who love shredding the slopes, this Park City gem is not to be missed. Atticus also sells an eclectic mix of gifts, journals, cards and 65 varieties of loose leaf teas. High West Saloon: Part restaurant, part distillery, part general store and all atmosphere, High West is a Park City icon. It’s the perfect spot to grab some lunch, dinner or a drink with friends. You can also tour the state-of-the-art distillery, see the aging and bottling processes first-hand, and learn about the history of whiskey in Utah. The Spa at Stein Eriksen Lodge: The Alpine Serenity at Stein Eriksen Lodge is one of just two Forbes five-star spas in Utah, and every spa treatment comes with complimentary use of other spa facilities including a sauna, steam room, fitness center, private showers, and hot and cold plunge pools. With 16 treatment rooms, fireplaces and plush sofas, the European-style spa offers 23,000 square feet of ultimate relaxation. Try the Signature Stein massage for an invigorating experience. Live the Park City life Longing for a Park City getaway? The best place to stay in this enchanting town is your own second home. Pacaso co-ownership makes luxury second homes in Park City more attainable. View Pacaso listings in Park City and learn more about how Pacaso can help you make your dream vacation home a reality.
Whether you’re a California native or just wish you were, most people agree that the Golden State’s sunny skies, gorgeous beaches and laid-back culture all add up to the perfect setting for a vacation home. Ocean lovers and desert sun seekers alike can take their pick of amazing vacation homes in California. Check out our California second home heat index to see the latest up-and-coming locations, and read on to imagine the good life in any one of these seven enduring California vacation home destinations. Carmel/Monterey These neighboring Central California towns offer activities for everyone, whether you enjoy beachcombing, wine tasting, golfing, or simply enjoying the beautiful surroundings. Charming Carmel includes Carmel-by-the-Sea, a one-square-mile village with a fairytale feel and storybook cottages. Just north of the village you’ll find the iconic Pebble Beach golf course. From there, head up to Monterey, the larger of the two towns, which boasts a beautifully rugged coastline, a storied history, and the world-famous Monterey Bay Aquarium. And no matter which town you choose, you’ll be able to indulge in California farm-to-table cuisine and wines made with grapes grown in surrounding Monterey County. Laguna Beach If you dream of a sand-and-surf getaway, the artsy community of Laguna Beach is calling. With seven miles of coastline and 20,000 acres of protected wilderness, the community is buffered from the hustle and bustle of bigger California cities. But Laguna Beach isn’t dull — the town’s diverse selection of quirky and unique boutiques, galleries, museums and restaurants means there’s always more to explore. (Fun fact: Laguna Beach has more people per capita employed as artists, designers and media professionals than 90% of the rest of the country.) Newport Beach and Corona del Mar are nearby for a change of pace. Lake Tahoe If you’re looking for California vacation homes with four-season appeal, Lake Tahoe is your dream destination. With a stunning, clear blue lake for summertime boating and water sports, and the highest concentration of ski resorts in America within 100 miles, Lake Tahoe has it all. If you want to be close to the lake, check out the South Tahoe neighborhoods of Stateline, Bijou, City Center and Tallac Village, or travel a little further north to Tahoma. Malibu White sand, blue water and dreamy retreats make Malibu a beach lover’s paradise. Close to downtown L.A., the town offers 27 miles of coastline to the west and stunning hills to the east. There’s something for everyone in this sophisticated yet laid back beach town. Given all that, it’s not surprising that Malibu has some of the priciest real estate not only in California but the entire country. Palm Springs With classic, Mid-Century Modern homes and an air of old Hollywood glamor, Palm Springs has long been a desert oasis for California’s elite. The town is easily accessible from major California cities like Los Angeles and San Diego, and is within a day’s drive of Las Vegas, Phoenix and Tucson. While Palm Springs is popular with the snowbird set for its golf courses and constant sunshine, this desert town has also begun to attract younger crowds and families with the promise of outdoor adventures and star-studded events like Coachella. Palm Springs has restrictions on short-term rentals to maintain its residential feel, making it an even more prized spot for vacation homes in California. Sonoma County With more than 425 wineries, miles of Pacific coastline and towering redwood forests, Sonoma County is truly a place for getting away from it all. Close to Sacramento and San Francisco, Sonoma is an easily accessible spot for vacation homes. And Sonoma County’s 30 small towns are perfect for day trips. San Diego San Diego has more than enough family fun, nightlife, museums, parks and beaches to give you a new vacation experience every time you visit. The San Diego International Airport makes the city easy to get to. Popular neighborhoods include Easter Cross, Mission Hills and La Jolla. Venice For the relaxation of the beach with the electric (and eclectic) buzz of the city, look no further than Venice. Much like its Italian namesake, Venice has its own system of picturesque canals lined with beautiful homes and adorned with arched bridges — and you may even spot a gondola or two. As an L.A. neighborhood, Venice gives you easy access to all that the major metropolitan hub has to offer, including theme parks, entertainment and a major international airport, but its bohemian vibe gives it a down-to-earth, small-town feel. Bring your bikes, skateboards and rollerblades to take in the sights of this historic neighborhood. More California gems To see more of what the Golden State has to offer, check out Pacaso’s full lineup of listings for luxury vacation homes in California and beyond, and learn more about how Pacaso’s co-ownership LLC model can turn your dream of second home ownership into a reality.
With its dramatic cliffs along the Pacific shoreline, Malibu boasts some of California’s most stunning terrain — perfect for a day of hiking. Whether you’re into mountain views, wildflowers, canyons or coastal trails, Malibu has a hike for you. 1. Solstice Canyon Loop Nestled in the Santa Monica Mountains, Solstice Canyon Loop is one of Malibu’s most beloved trails, popular for its varied terrain and easy 2.6-mile loop. Sights include the remains of the mid-century Roberts Ranch house, the historic Keller stone hunting cabin, shaded canyon views, the Solstice waterfall and nearby brook, and the Pacific as the grand finale. Wildlife buffs might also see a variety of bird species like acorn woodpeckers and red-tailed hawks. 2. Escondido Falls Trail Escondido Falls Trail is an easy, dog-friendly, 3.8-mile round-trip hike leading to a scenic waterfall surrounded by old growth trees. The falls are at their peak during the earlier months in the year or following autumn rains, but this comfortable trek is beautiful year-round. The hike begins near the Pacific Coast Highway and follows a single path through wildflower fields, sage and across small streams. From there, you can opt for an easier route to the lower level of the falls, which is 50 feet high. The top tier boasts unbeatable views and access behind the waterfall, your reward for climbing 150 feet of steep rock. This is a popular trail, so you’re likely to be sharing the path with fellow hikers. Parking is available for $8 at the Winding Way Parking Lot. 3. Mugu Peak Trail Located in Point Mugu State Park, the Mugu Peak Trail is about 6.5 miles with an elevation gain of 1,225 feet. It’s an all-season hike that’s especially beautiful in the spring. The Santa Monica Mountains are the star of the Mugu Peak Trail, which winds all the way to the Pacific through Ventura County. Much of the landscape you’ll see on this hike will be distinctly Californian: scrubby coastal grasses, yucca, cactus, meadows full of wildflowers (especially in the spring), distant canyon ridges and the ocean. Mugu Peak is marked with an American flag and offers sweeping 360-degree views — perfect for a quick snack and rest before heading back down. 4. Backbone Trail to Sandstone Peak and Mishe Mokwa Trail Get ready to break a sweat, because this hike is a challenge! The Backbone Trail is actually quite long — 70 miles total — but this offshoot combines two smaller hikes. Along the Backbone Trail portion, you’ll feel the burn along numerous switchbacks up to Sandstone Peak. Inspiration Point is a highlight, looking out to the ocean. You’ll likely spot climbers on Echo Cliffs along your trek, too, since the cliffs are a favorite hangout for seasoned climbers looking to master one of its 200 routes. 5. Point Dume Cove Trail If surfside is more your style, you’ll love this laidback hike. Maxing out at 1.4 miles, the Point Dume Cove trail is great for all skill levels and features stunning views of Santa Monica Bay. This is a heavily trafficked trail since it’s so accessible, but you do have the added benefit of heading down to the shore once you wrap up. At the cove, be sure to take a peek at the tide pools! If you’re especially lucky, you might even catch a glimpse of seals sunning themselves or whales out in the bay. 6. Zuma Ridge Trail At 5.4 miles round-trip, the Zuma Ridge Trail is popular but less heavily trafficked than most other hikes on our list — at least by people. Horses are a common sight on this trail, which offers views of the ocean and mountains. A creek will keep you company along the way, along with a number of trees with foliage that changes with the seasons. Zuma Canyon has an entire system of trails managed by the National Park Service, so it’s easy to shorten your hike or extend it up to a full 10 miles. 7. Paseo Miramar Just off the west side of the Pacific Palisades, you’ll find local favorite Paseo Miramar. A steady upward climb makes for a true workout, and at the top, you’ll find unencumbered views of the coast. The Parker Mesa Overlook is especially pretty in the early morning or late afternoon. One thing to keep in mind: There is no weekend parking at this popular spot, but there is street parking nearby that can add to your total distance. Explore Malibu from your second home Malibu has so much to offer, and if you own a second home with Pacaso, you won’t miss a minute. Maintenance and management is all taken care of, so as soon as you arrive, you can lace up your hiking boots and hit the trails.
It’s no secret that Breckenridge is a world-class ski town. But Breckenridge’s charm doesn’t stop once the snow melts; in fact, the warmer months open up a whole new world of things to do in this Rocky Mountain wonderland. No matter what you love – from mountain biking to massages – Breckenridge has something for you. For outdoor enthusiasts Breckenridge’s combination of sunny skies, mild high temperatures in the low 70s and gorgeous mountain scenery make it ideal for outdoor fun. Cruise along historic Main Street on a rented bike from Breckenridge Ski & Sport to take in the sights, or hit some mountain trails for a scenic hike or geocaching. For fun on the water, try kayaking on Lake Dillon or stand-up paddleboarding on Maggie Pond. Fly fishing is another relaxing way to spend a day on one of Breckenridge’s many rivers, creeks, lakes and reservoirs. Golfers can play three different Jack Nicklaus signature golf courses while enjoying stunning mountain views at the Breckenridge Golf Club. There’s also a host of public courts available at the 88,000-square-foot Breckenridge Recreation Club. For adrenaline junkies If you need a little more adrenaline in your outdoor activities, Breckenridge has you covered. The mountains are rich with hundreds of single-track trails for avid mountain bikers, and the town even has some kid-friendly trails and bike parks with pump tracks to cater to the young riders in your family. If you’re looking for even more heart-racing fun in the mountains, you can rent a 4x4 Jeep or ATV for an off-roading tour of Peaks 7 and 8. Breckenridge is also known for its whitewater adventures, with whitewater rafting trips down the rapids of the area’s many rivers, including the Blue, Arkansas, Colorado and Eagle. If you’re more of a solo adventurer, the kayak park on the Blue River has 15 water features for the ultimate whitewater kayaking experience. For fun with the kids If you’re not sure what to do in Breckenridge with the kids, Epic Discovery should be your first stop. Located at the Breckenridge Ski Resort, this outdoor adventure park at the base of Peak 8 is easily reached with a free scenic gondola ride courtesy of BreckConnect. Once you arrive, kids will have a blast with the park’s alpine slide, GoldRunner Coaster, summer tubing, mini golf, zip line, climbing walls, ropes course and more. For fun that’s a little more laid-back, kids can step back in time as they pan for gold and explore one of Breckenridge’s three gold mines, or they can just hang out at the Blue River Plaza, where big kids can splash in the shallow water of the Blue River and little ones can explore the play area. For fun without the kids Breckenridge is home to a variety of fine dining options, and many restaurants have happy hours so you can relax with a drink on a patio overlooking Main Street. Other romantic Breckenridge adventures include hot air balloon rides, ice skating at the Stephen C. West Ice Arena and horseback riding through Peaks 9 and 10, with expansive views of the Continental Divide. In summertime, the town hosts numerous summer festivals, among them the Breckenridge Summer Beer Festival, Breckenridge Hogfest: Bacon & Bourbon, and the Breckenridge International Festival of the Arts. Art lovers will also enjoy a visit to Breck Create, an interactive art studio that calls itself “a hub for creative experience.” For low-key relaxation When trying to figure out what to do in Breckenridge, you may find that some of the best activities are things you don’t really have to “do,” like getting a massage at one of Breckenridge’s many spas or wellness centers, or shopping at quirky boutiques like Wandering Daisy or Joy of Sox. If you want a little dose of history, try a relaxing train tour in the Rocky Mountains or explore the history of Breckenridge at the Breckenridge Welcome Center’s free interpretive history museum. After strolling through the museum, sit back and enjoy the sites of the historic town while relaxing in the adjacent Blue River Plaza. For a home away from home With so much to do year-round in Breckenridge, you might want to visit more often. Fortunately, buying a luxury second home in Breckenridge is more attainable than ever with Pacaso’s co-ownership LLC model. Visit Pacaso to see second home listings in Breckenridge and learn how Pacaso can help you turn your dream of second home ownership into a reality.
Ready for your moment in the sun? Famous for fantastic weather, iconic beaches and lively nightlife, Miami is a top-tier global destination. There’s almost never a bad time to visit — average temperatures in Miami rarely fall below 70 degrees, making it the ideal year-round getaway. But Miami is more than just its weather. The city also beckons visitors with major league sports, world-class dining and a diverse arts scene. Known as a sizzling entertainment hotspot for grownups, Miami also has loads of wholesome options for the little ones in your life. Whether you’re planning ahead for a vacation or need some last-minute fun to occupy an afternoon, here are 19 entertaining family-friendly things to do in Miami with kids. Is Miami a good vacation destination for kids? Miami is a superb kid-friendly destination. The sunny climate alone is ideal for kids — they can play all day long — and for parents, that keeps things simple and lets you pack light. Art museums, beaches, aquariums, wildlife and cultural districts provide countless immersive activities for the family. All-day kid-centric destinations If you’re looking for a full day of fun things to do in Miami with kids, these family-friendly local spots will keep you going until dinnertime (and maybe even after). Indoors Phillip & Patricia Frost Museum of Science (aka Frost Science) With a three-level aquarium, dome-screened planetarium, elaborate mirror maze and plenty of hands-on exhibits, Frost Science is both fun and educational for kids of all ages. Why kids approve: Almost every exhibit is interactive and includes a hands-on, sensorial activity. Why parents approve: Parents will get to see their kids learn science and enjoy time in the museum. Miami Children’s Museum Playing pretend is the name of the game at the Miami Children’s Museum. Your kids will have a blast exploring the kid-sized bank, cruise ship, grocery store, construction zone, firehouse and other interactive exhibits Why kids approve: Kids get to fuel their imagination with the museum’s mini replicas of real-life places. Why parents approve: The fun exhibits teach kids about everyday subjects like health, wellness and careers. Outdoors Zoo Miami Miami’s subtropical climate allows Zoo Miami to keep animals normally only seen south of the equator. The 750-acre zoo is home to more than 3,000 animals, plus several children’s play areas and rides for even more adventure. Why kids approve: Animals and play areas — need we say more? Why parents approve: The zoo has multiple cafes, restaurants and vending machines throughout to keep everyone fed and comfortable. Miami Seaquarium Miami Seaquarium offers many interactive experiences for families looking for kid-friendly fun in Key Biscayne. Cool off in the splash zone of the aquarium’s dolphin and seal shows, and get up close and personal with the wildlife through a dolphin encounter, scuba-like reef encounter, sea turtle exhibit or seal swim. Why kids approve: Big animal encounters are sure to excite any kid. Why parents approve: The Seaquarium is a fantastic place for parents to keep kids entertained and get a cool respite from the heat. Everglades Alligator Farm Experience the Everglades like a true adventurer by taking an airboat ride to see alligators in the wild, then watch professionals feed and handle alligators and snakes in a live show. Why kids approve: What’s more fun than seeing adults interact with alligators? Why parents approve: Parents can introduce their kids to wild animals in a safe and educational environment. Jungle Island Take the kids on a stroll through an Everglades exhibit and see a variety of wildlife including tortoises, parrots, kangaroos, lemurs and exotic birds at Jungle Island, an interactive zoological park. Why kids approve: There are many rare and exotic creatures for kids to discover. Why parents approve: A combo zoo and waterpark gives parents the best bang for their buck. Oleta River State Park Go for a family bike ride on one of the many bike trails at Oleta River State Park. As the largest urban park in Florida, Oleta River State Park offers all-day family fun. Why kids approve: The miles and miles of bicycle trails make it safer for beginners. Why parents approve: It’s an ideal place for parents to enjoy active time with their kids of all ages. Requires a swimsuit Venetian Pool If the heat has you and your kids longing for a dip in some cool waters, the Venetian Pool in Coral Gables is a stunningly beautiful option for those over 3 years old. Its waterfalls and grottos make it extra fun for kids to explore. Why kids approve: The shallow pool is perfect for all-day play, and ice cream and pizza will keep the young ones going for hours. Why parents approve: Beyond packing a swimsuit, Venetian Pool provides everything you might need for a family outing. Tidal Cove Seven waterslides, splash pads, a surf simulator, rentable cabanas and a lazy river make Miami’s Tidal Cove water park a refreshing time for everyone. Why kids approve: Young thrill-seekers will love the waterslides and surfing simulators. Why parents approve: You can kick back with a cocktail while the kids slip and slide all afternoon. If you’re in the neighborhood If your grownup plans are taking priority but you want to keep the littles content, here are some no-prep, quick, fun things to do in Miami with kids. Indoors The Poppet Project Located in the El Portal neighborhood, The Poppet Project defines itself as a children’s drop-in art, craft and science studio where kids can have access to all the art and craft supplies they need to get creative. Why kids approve: From paint to molding sand, the possibilities for creativity are endless. Why parents approve: Kids can get creative and make a mess — and you don’t have to clean it up! Skyviews Miami Want to see Miami from above? The huge observation Ferris wheel at Skyviews Miami offers 15- to 20-minute rides in climate-controlled gondola cars with epic views of the city from 200 feet in the air. Why kids approve: A Ferris wheel is one of those rides almost any kid will enjoy. Why parents approve: It’s a comfortable ride for the whole family, and kids under 4 ride for free. Outdoors Lee & Tina Hills Playground If your kids just need to work out some wiggles, stop by this soft-surface playground with a huge play sculpture at Bayfront Park in downtown Miami. Why kids approve: The playground offers various play sculptures like a pirate ship, slides and waves along with sculptures of turtles, manatees and dolphins. Why parents approve: Bayfront Park’s open lawns, walkways and performance venues provide many options for relaxing, playing and exercising. Wynwood Walls The colorful Wynwood arts district is home to more than 70 galleries and museums, with bright murals everywhere you look. Wynwood Walls is an outdoor museum/park with 35 larger-than-life murals, plenty of green space and free entry for ages 12 and under. Why kids approve: Kids have the freedom to roam and run around anywhere in the museum. Why parents approve: Neighboring restaurants make it easy to fuel up while watching kids do what they do best. Cape Florida Light A beloved cultural landmark and the oldest structure in Miami-Dade, the Cape Florida Light combines history and adventure. Bring the kids here for a guided tour. Why kids approve: Young adventurers love to climb to the top of the 65-foot lighthouse for a breathtaking view of Key Biscayne. Why parents approve: Kids get to learn some history. Plus, the nearby Bill Baggs State Park is available for relaxing on the sand and swimming. Last-minute fun Here are our top picks for fun family-friendly things to do in Miami with kids when you only have a couple of hours – pair it with a meal or ice cream, and you’ll have a happy crew. Indoors Launch Trampoline Park Located right next to Miami-Dade Airport, this park takes regular sports like basketball, dodgeball and gymnastics and amps them up with trampoline surfaces. Why kids approve: The ninja course and slack line with foam-filled crash pits below are perfect for kids who want to test their stunt skills. Why parents approve: Any activity that balances thrill and safety should be a win in your book. Artechouse For something fresh and different that will captivate curiosity-seekers of all ages, check out Artechouse, a digital interactive art gallery experience in Miami’s South Beach. Why kids approve: Curious kids love touching everything they see, and here it’s no exception. Every installation is tactile and interactive. Why parents approve: Kids aren’t the only ones who can have fun here — there’s plenty for adults to enjoy. FunDimension FunDimension in Wynwood caters to kids and adults with laser tag, bumper cars, an indoor playground, arcade and a world-class restaurant and lounge. Why kids approve: There are options for kids of any age. Plus, bumper cars — who doesn’t like those? Why parents approve: You can watch the little ones have fun while sipping beer or coffee. Outdoors Thriller Miami Speedboat Adventures Bring your kiddos over age 3 and hop in a speedboat for a 45-minute riding-the-waves tour around the Port of Miami. Check out multimillion-dollar waterfront mansions, the Miami skyline and more. Why kids approve: Adventurous youngsters will go nuts for the speed and thrill of the tour. Why parents approve: It’s a thrill for everyone in the family, especially parents who want to cruise the water “Miami Vice”-style. David T. Kennedy Park Bring a picnic, a frisbee and the dog to this picturesque waterfront park on Biscayne Bay. Why kids approve: The shaded playground and greenspace provide plenty of room to roam. Why parents approve: Kennedy Park is a great place to relax while the kids enjoy themselves. Requires a swimsuit Flamingo Park A beach walk-in leads to a 36-acre park with playgrounds and swimming pools. You can swim in the larger pool area, head to the playground or enjoy one of the many sports courts at Flamingo Park. Why kids approve: Kids will love the aquatic play area, tire swings and swimming pools in this multi-use park. Why parents approve: Flamingo Park is a great last-minute option for families looking for a spot to cool off. Matheson Hammock Park If you want a beach experience without the risk of waves for little ones, the artificial bayfront "atoll pool" at Matheson Hammock Park is a great option. Nature trails and convenient canoe and kayak rentals are other reasons why locals love this park. Why kids approve: The park offers an open but safe place for kids to splash around, and a centrally located playground provides another option for fun. Why parents approve: This feels like a trip to the beach without the trouble, and parking is usually plentiful. It's a great place to relax for a few hours and enjoy a picnic. Find your sunny retreat in Miami If Miami is calling to you, perhaps it’s time to find your new home away from home. Explore our Miami listings so you can start making unforgettable memories in your second home today. Each Pacaso home is outfitted with kid-friendly amenities to make family time a breeze.
Bored by the idea of a luxury vacation on yet another white sand beach? There are so many more options for your next luxury vacation. From glamping ranches in the mountains of the American West to safari resorts in the African desert, these luxury vacations are anything but routine. For personal enlightenment Vacationing provides the perfect opportunity for self discovery. Consider trying some luxury vacations designed to help you relax, reflect and recenter. Vana Malsi Estate Tucked away in the Indian Himalayas, the forested Vana Malsi Estate encourages you to truly leave the world behind and start anew. Your luxury wellness package includes meals, airport transportation and special clothing to wear during your introspective retreat. The estate’s website invites visitors to achieve “equilibrium” through a variety of treatments and consultations in its Ayurveda Center, Tibetan Healing Center or a private treatment room in your forest villa. Amanwana If your inner peace requires ocean views, just east of Bali on Moyo Island you’ll find Amanwana, a glamping island resort consisting of only 12 canvas-topped suites adjacent to the island’s picturesque jungle and white sand beaches. Explore the abundant jungle and coral reefs in the protected marine park, then unwind with Amanwana spa wellness rituals and ceremonies designed to cleanse and restore. For mingling with the wild When your view comes alive with creatures usually only seen in zoos, it can make for a truly magical luxury vacation experience. Little Kulala Little Kulala’s private villas offer thatched roofs, private plunge pools, indoor/outdoor showers and rooftop sleeping areas where you can drift off under a starry Namibian sky. This wilderness resort also offers nature drives, scorpion night walks and safaris by hot air balloon and horseback to help you get up close and personal with the creatures of the African savannah. Angama Mara If you’re a fan of “Out of Africa,” you’ll love Angama Mara. This luxury Kenyan camp was the setting for the epic 1985 film adaptation, and its expansive views of Maasai Mara remain largely unchanged 35 years later. Watch the drama of the great migration – the largest mass movement of land mammals in the world – unfold from your hillside villa’s floor-to-ceiling windows, or take in the views from a hot air balloon or open-air vehicle safari drive. For the greater good Adding elements of humanitarianism and philanthropy to your luxury vacation can turn an indulgent pursuit into a more fulfilling experience. Fogo Island Inn The icy waters of Newfoundland probably aren’t at the top of your list of luxury vacation destinations, but the stark beauty of Fogo Island Inn might change your mind. Its stunning contemporary design with floor-to-ceiling windows overlooking the Labrador Sea will wow you, but its commitment to community and sustainability will inspire you. The Inn’s Economic Nutrition Mark shows the impact the inn’s profits have on the community, and its accredited environmental strategy goes above and beyond standard environmental requirements. Ol Jogi The 58,000-acre Ol Jogi ranch/conservancy in Kenya combines luxury vacations with dedicated conservation: 100% of all profits from its seven private residences go toward supporting conservation efforts. Enjoy the massive reserve’s 400 elephants, 50 black rhinos, giraffes, baboons and more while appreciating all the luxuries of manicured gardens, richly decorated colonial-style interiors and meals prepared from the property’s organic garden by the onsite French chef. For a wilderness adventure Sometimes you want an opportunity to feel the heart-racing exhilaration that only the most exciting wilderness experiences can provide – but you also want to end your day amid some serious creature comforts. Ultima Thule Lodge Over 100 miles from any road, the Ultima Thule Lodge outside of Anchorage, Alaska, doesn’t have phone service, but the guest-centric hospitality more than makes up for it. And who needs a phone when you have Wrangell-St. Elias, the largest National Park in North America, as your backyard? You can hike, fish, kayak and fly (using the lodge’s fleet of small airplanes) through vast expanses of pristine wilderness. Food is served family style in the main lodge, prepared with wild game and products from the onsite greenhouse. Paws Up Ranch If you ever dreamt of being a cowboy or cowgirl, The Resort at Paws Up is your dream come true – but with a luxury twist. Enjoy glamping in tents with heated floors and jetted hot tubs, or taking up residence in one of the ranch estate houses. Spend your days exploring the Montana ranch’s 37,000 acres on horseback, by ATV, mountain bike, raft, skis, dogsled, sleigh, zip line or hot air balloon. Test your skills with archery, fly fishing, geocaching and clay shooting. For privacy, customization and value If your idea of true indulgence is a place to call your own, with the freedom to live like a local and enjoy luxury vacations at your own pace, consider owning a luxury vacation home. Pacaso’s fully managed co-ownership LLC model lets you own a luxury second home for less money and hassle. Explore our luxury listings in some of the nation’s top destinations.
Don’t get us wrong: With superstars like Phil Mickelson playing courses like PGA West and La Quinta, we know the Palm Springs golfing scene is on par with the world’s best. But if fairways and sand traps aren’t for you, don’t worry – there are plenty of other things to do in Palm Springs besides golf. Broaden your horizons Living Desert Zoo & Gardens With a focus on conservation and ecological responsibility, the nonprofit Living Desert Zoo & Gardens is home to over 500 animals representing more than 150 species, with habitats mimicking those found in Africa and Australia. Palm Springs Air Museum Rated as one of the best in the world, the Palm Springs Air Museum not only offers visitors an up-close look at decommissioned aircraft, but also wheels-up flights in several historic planes, including the T-33 Shooting Star jet trainer and PT-17 Stearman. Wind farm tour If you’ve ever spotted those giant white turbines towering above the desert and wondered how they work, you’ll find the answer at a Palm Springs Windmill Tour. The private wind farms in Palm Springs and the Coachella Valley offer both self-driving tours and bring-your-own-bike tours. Moorten Botanical Garden At only one acre, it may be small, but the Moorten Botanical Garden is mighty. This private arboretum and popular Palm Springs event venue boasts an ever-changing landscape with over 3,000 different plants native to the desert. IG-worthy photo ops Sonny Bono statue Perched on the edge of a fountain in beautiful downtown Palm Springs, Sonny Bono’s statue will have you singing, “I got you, babe,” as you snap a selfie at this memorial to the music icon and former Palm Springs mayor. Lucille Ball statue If you love Lucy, be sure to stop by and grab a selfie with her likeness cast in bronze on Palm Canyon Drive. Say, “cheese” – or better yet, “Vitameatavegamin!” Volkswagen spider It may have started out as a bug, but it graduated to a full-on arachnid when the welders at now-defunct Hole in the Wall Welding took a VW Beetle and added eight larger-than-life legs. The property is now a private home, but you can still snap a pic of the creepily awesome Volkswagen VW Beetle Spider while you’re in Palm Springs. Walk of Stars Take a pic with some of the most famous names of years past – Ginger Rogers, Elizabeth Taylor, Frank Sinatra, Marilyn Monroe, Elvis Presley and more – at the Palm Springs Walk of Stars as it winds its way through downtown. Baby statues Like an eerie, crawling army in a giant sandbox, “The Babies” is the work of artist David Černý, and its anti-consumerism message will either inspire you … or give you nightmares. (May the odds be ever in your favor.) Nature and scenery Palm Springs Aerial Tramway Among the more popular things to do in Palm Springs, the aerial tramway gives you a chance to beat the heat. Take a 10-minute ride in a rotating tram car to Mt. San Jacinto State Park, and enjoy the cooler mountain air and stunning views from over 8,000 feet above Coachella Valley. Tahquitz Canyon Located on the Cahuilla Indian Reservation, Tahquitz Canyon and Indian Canyons have beautifully maintained hiking trails, including a two-mile loop that leads to a magical 60-foot waterfall. Sunnylands Estate Twelve acres of public gardens await you at Sunnylands Estate, the site of several presidential summits. Tours of the property’s sprawling mansion sell out quickly, so book early. Coachella Nature Preserve With rare wildlife, native plants and several palm oases, Coachella Nature Preserve is a pristine 20,000-acre wilderness ideal for hiking, horseback riding and birdwatching. Delightfully kitschy International Banana Museum Indulge in a banana milkshake as you explore more than 25,000 banana-related items in the one-of-a-kind International Banana Museum about an hour outside of Palm Springs. World Famous Crochet Museum Made even more famous thanks to its appearance in HSBC ads around the globe, the pint-sized World Famous Crochet Museum in Joshua Tree is always open, with museum curators Bunny (a crochet dog) and Buddy (a crochet alligator) on hand to welcome visitors. Cabazon Dinosaurs Be sure to add the iconic roadside Cabazon Dinosaurs to your list of things to do in Palm Springs. Dinny, a brontosaurus replica, and Mr. Rex, a tyrannosaurus rex, can be seen from Interstate 10, and their prehistoric attractions include a gift shop, fossil dig and a museum with a unique take on Earth’s natural history. Nightlife and fun with friends Agua Caliente Casino You’ll feel like you’ve crossed the state border when you enter the Las Vegas-esque 24-hour Agua Caliente Casino. When you need a break from flirting with Lady Luck, enjoy live entertainment and cocktails at the Cascade Lounge. Escape Room Palm Springs If you have an adventurous spirit and a penchant for puzzles, Escape Room Palm Springs has six escape room experiences for you to try. Purple Room & Supper Club Be transported back to Palm Springs’ golden era when Frank Sinatra and Dean Martin crooned onstage at the Purple Room and Supper Club at the Club Trinidad Hotel. The club continues the tradition of live entertainment ranging from comedy shows to jazz. Art, architecture and fashion Palm Springs Visitors Center Designed as a gas station in 1965, this space-age building has been repurposed as the landmark Palm Springs Visitors Center, and it’s worth visiting for the architecture alone. Palm Canyon Drive boutiques and galleries If you’re in the market for something unique or couture, the shops and galleries along the palm-lined Palm Canyon Drive provide a one-of-a-kind shopping experience. Stop by on a Thursday to enjoy VillageFest, a lively outdoor street fair. Palm Springs Art Museum The Palm Springs Art Museum features contemporary artwork, paintings and sculpture centered around the many layers of desert culture, including Indigenous Americans and the American West. Architecture tour Home to several Mid-Century Modern architectural gems, the Historic Tennis Club and Old Las Palmas neighborhoods of Palm Springs are rich in design history. Plan your own tour to check out the Palm Springs Tennis Club, the Del Marcos Hotel and Elvis’s Honeymoon Hideaway, or schedule a guided tour to hit all the Palm Springs architecture highlights. Live like a local If the charm of Palm Springs has you itching for more of its sunshine and intrigue, check out Pacaso’s Palm Springs listings and learn how Pacaso’s co-ownership LLC model can help you own a luxury hideaway in this desert oasis.
The old real estate adage “location, location, location” is never more true than when you’re deciding where to buy a vacation home. Your second home location should be a place where you can enjoy the activities, scenery and weather you love. While everyone’s preferences are different, here are 10 great vacation home locations. One of them could end up being your second home paradise. 1. Palm Springs Why should you buy a second home in Palm Springs? There’s something special about the California desert town, known for its Mid-Century Modern architecture, sweeping views of the mountains that surround the Coachella Valley and thriving arts community. Palm Springs attracts people wanting to escape cold-weather climates, and it’s easy to see why. From November to April, temperatures are reliably in the 70s and 80s. Things start heating up in May and stay hot through October. Palm Springs is an ideal location for those who like it hot — but a house with a pool is a must all 12 months of the year. The city is also located within driving distance of Los Angeles, San Diego and Disneyland, making it easy to add day trips to your Palm Springs getaway. Median home price: $775,000 2. Lake Tahoe Lake Tahoe attracts outdoor enthusiasts and nature lovers. Whether you love to ski, hike, boat or simply sit back and take in breathtaking alpine views, Lake Tahoe is a dream vacation home location, with many home buyers looking to the area for investment properties. The lake itself straddles the California-Nevada border, with multiple small towns making up the greater Lake Tahoe area. From the mountain estates of Incline Village to the world-class skiing of Olympic Valley to family-friendly South Lake Tahoe, this mountain getaway has a place for everyone. Warm weather brings umbrella-packing beachgoers to the lake while the winter season attracts skiers seeking the fresh powder. However, if you want to avoid the crowds and find the biggest deals on lodging, the best times to visit Tahoe are between March and May and September and November. Median home price: $767,000 3. Napa Valley Calling all wine lovers! California’s Wine Country may just end up being your home away from home. America’s most famous wine region, Napa Valley, is home to nearly 500 wineries, making it an oenophile's dream. The region’s Mediterranean climate makes it an ideal year-round destination, with August to October and March to May being the best times to visit for perfect weather and al fresco wine tastings. Of course, there are also plenty of non-wine related activities to enjoy: You can sample world-class cuisine, cycle the Napa Valley Vine Trail, go up in a hot air balloon to see views of vineyards and valleys, check out local art festivals or tee off on championship golf courses. Median home price: $1,000,000 4. Newport Beach Southern California is simply brimming with sunny beach towns, and each one is a great vacation home destination. What sets Newport Beach in Orange County apart is its luxurious feel. This coastal enclave of 87,000 residents boasts more than 400 restaurants, the upscale Fashion Island outdoor mall and the largest recreational harbor on the West Coast (in case boating and yachting are your thing). Families can also enjoy many kid-friendly activities in Newport Beach, including outdoor playgrounds, electric boat rentals and nature preserves. Did we mention that Newport Beach enjoys 277 sunny days a year? Median home price: $3,700,000 5. Malibu Channel your inner Hollywood celebrity in Malibu, a popular getaway for the rich and famous. Malibu offers 27 miles of coastline along the famed Pacific Coast Highway. Surfing, sunbathing and beachcombing are obviously popular ways to spend your day, but you’ll also find plenty of ways to soak up the sun in the surrounding Santa Monica Mountains. Hiking, horseback riding and nature walks are popular with locals and visitors. For those who want something a little less physical, hit up the Malibu Farmers Market, plan a visit to the historic Getty Villa or taste wine at an amazing mountaintop estate. If California vibes, stunning beaches and outdoor activities call to you, consider making Malibu your second home. Median home price: $4,800,000 6. Vail If you’re more interested in snow than sand, Vail might be your ideal second home location. While Colorado’s Rocky Mountains offer some 30 different ski areas, Vail Ski Resort is the largest, with 5,317 skiable acres. You’ll find three charming Bavarian-style villages at the base of the mountain, plus second home properties including condominiums and single-family lodges throughout the area. What’s more, once you’ve conquered the resort’s 195 ski runs (is that even possible?), Beaver Creek is just a short drive away, and you can be in Breckenridge in about an hour. If you’re more of a summer person than a winter person, you’ll find many warm weather attractions in Vail — among the varied options are mountain golf, outdoor concerts, whitewater rafting and even guided hikes with a llama. Median home price: $1,900,000 7. Park City Once a silver mining town and today a world-class mountain getaway that plays host to the famous Sundance Film Festival, Utah’s Park City is brimming with things to do. In the winter months, Park City residents can ski 7,300 lift-served acres of alpine terrain, explore the forest on a cross-country ski trail, snowshoe through natural scenery, or even take a dog sled tour. When the weather warms up, Park City offers adrenaline-inducing mountain biking trails, fun-filled festivals, thrilling water sports, and wonderful dining and nightlife. Median home price: $1,700,000 8. West Palm Beach There’s a reason many residents of the Northeast flock to Florida in the winter. West Palm Beach offers the perfect year-round combination of beautiful beaches and exciting entertainment and activities. West Palm Beach is home to SunFest, Florida’s largest waterfront music festival. The city’s four distinct retail and entertainment districts feature casual bars, vibrant nightclubs and great shopping. For the artistically inclined, the town has a dynamic performing arts center and a wonderful art museum. Oh, and balmy temperatures fluctuate between a low of 75 degrees in January to a high of 90 in July and August. Median home price: $375,000 9. Maui Over 3 million people visit the Hawaiian island of Maui each year, so if you’re among them, why not make it official? The Valley Isle offers many types of vacation homes: resort-style condominiums, golf course properties and waterfront villas. When you feel like playing tourist, there’s plenty to do on a trip to Maui, including a volcanic park hike, catamaran snorkeling tours, breathtaking scenic drives, whale watching, golfing and evening luaus. When you want to escape the crowds, there are plenty of stretches of idyllic beach. With temperatures that rarely fluctuate outside of the 70s to 90s range, there’s almost never a bad time to visit the island. Median home price: $1,100,000 10. Hilton Head Island Is there any place quite as charming as Hilton Head Island? With a laid-back feel and welcoming vibe, there’s plenty to love about Lowcountry living. This South Carolina escape boasts a mild, subtropical climate year-round and award-winning beaches along with many can’t-miss activities. The island is known as a great destination for families, thanks to activities like bike-riding, fishing and kayaking. And although the island is only 69 square miles, it’s packed with an incredible 33 golf courses. Is it time to tee off yet? Median home price: $669,000 Find your Pacaso home in the right location Whether Palm Springs is your passion or Park City is perfect, you can find a great vacation home with Pacaso. Browse our listings, and see how you can enjoy all the benefits of owning a second home in a sought-after location, without the hassles of traditional second home ownership and property management. Methodology To curate the destinations in this article, we selected perennially popular second home real estate markets with consistent home buyer demand, plenty of activities to choose from, and a diverse array of climates and environments. The medium home price for each destination was compiled using data from Realtor.com in May 2022.
Dreaming of a vacation home in Lake Tahoe? Who wouldn’t be, with its crystal-clear alpine waters, stunning vistas and endless year-round recreation opportunities. But before you take the plunge (the water’s cold!), here are five key questions to ask yourself. 1. What type of home fits my needs? As a popular multi-season vacation and recreation destination, Tahoe offers all kinds of properties, from condos and timeshares to single-family homes and full-fledged mountain chalets. Vacation home owners in Tahoe tend to pick properties based on their personal interests — would you rather be close to one of Lake Tahoe’s six world-class ski resorts, or along the shores of the lake for summer watersports? Simply put: What kind of memories are you hoping to make in Lake Tahoe? (More on Tahoe’s specific neighborhoods below.) 2. How much can I afford? Just like any real estate purchase, what you can afford comes down to your interest rate, down payment amount and your level of comfort with the monthly payment. When considering a Tahoe vacation home, however, there are a couple more factors you should keep in mind. First, you may be considering using the home as a vacation rental, given the area’s popularity with tourists. If so, you’ll need to factor in property management fees, increased maintenance costs and potential tax intricacies. Second, Lake Tahoe gets an average of 200-plus inches of snow each year, so winter maintenance like snow removal is crucial to keeping your home in good condition, and it can be expensive — as well as tricky to manage from afar. To maximize your vacation home budget, consider buying a Pacaso. As a co-owner of a second home in Lake Tahoe, you can enjoy all the benefits of ownership without the full price tag. Instead, you could own a budget-friendly ⅛ share of a property that might otherwise be out of reach. 3. Where should I buy in Tahoe? Believe it or not, there’s no actual city called “Lake Tahoe.” The famous lake is called Lake Tahoe, of course, but the name also refers to the entire area surrounding this recreation destination. The lake itself straddles the California-Nevada border, and the biggest towns are on the north and south ends of the lake, as well as along the Truckee River. Here’s a quick rundown: Tahoma: The town of Tahoma, California, is on the western shore of the lake. A popular summer destination for outdoor enthusiasts, Tahoma offers seemingly endless hiking trails and is home to gorgeous Meeks Bay Beach. Truckee: With a charming historic downtown, a vibrant cultural scene and easy access to North Lake Tahoe’s most popular ski resorts, Truckee is (not surprisingly) a very popular vacation home location. Incline Village: This hilly enclave boasts magnificent mountain estates and ample activities. Summer brings the Lake Tahoe Shakespeare Festival and adrenaline-pumping mountain biking, while winter sees skiers flocking to Mt. Rose Ski Tahoe and the Diamond Peak Ski Area, the latter of which is within city limits. Tahoe City: The small mountain town has an enviable location where the Truckee River meets Lake Tahoe’s north shore. Residents of Tahoe City love its walkable downtown, lakefront boardwalk and historic sites (some of which just may be haunted). Olympic Valley: Located halfway between Truckee and Lake Tahoe, Olympic Valley is considered one of the best places to ski in the U.S. Since hosting the 1960 Winter Olympics, Palisades Tahoe (formerly Squaw Valley) has been a haven for experienced skiers looking for long, steep runs. South Lake Tahoe: The largest of the cities surrounding the lake, South Lake Tahoe offers something for everyone, whether you’re looking for family-friendly activities, casinos and nightclubs, or outdoor recreation. 4. How often will I use the home? According to our Second Home Sentiment Report, only 25.6% of second home owners used their home more than four weeks a year. Close to a third said they use their home more in the wake of Covid-19, but over half say they use it the same amount. What’s more, among would-be vacation home owners, almost 17% say they won’t use the home enough to justify the purchase. When you buy with Pacaso, you can co-own as much of a single-family home as you’ll use for just a fraction of the cost of full ownership — and you’ll never have to worry about it sitting unused. 5. Would renting it out cover my ownership costs? When you’re buying a second home in a popular destination like Lake Tahoe, it can be tempting to try to recoup some of your ownership costs by turning it into a vacation rental. However, the vacation rental market in Lake Tahoe is highly seasonal, with the bulk of rentals taking place during the relatively short winter and summer recreation seasons. And, when you factor in property management fees, it can be hard to make short-term rentals pencil out. In addition, short-term rental regulations in some municipalities can restrict owners from offering nightly rentals of their properties. One benefit of Pacaso is that homes are occupied only by owners and their guests, and they are never rented. This means you are free to enjoy your second home without the stress and hassle of managing a rental property. Discover your Lake Tahoe second home with Pacaso If snowy winters, sun-kissed summers and incredible natural beauty are your top criteria for a second home destination, Lake Tahoe might be just the right place for you. Take the first step by viewing our Tahoe listings and learning more about Pacaso co-ownership.
For almost half a century, California’s Napa Valley has reigned as one of the world’s top wine destinations. With rolling green hills and vineyards that stretch for miles, it’s an ideal spot to own a second home or escape for a weekend. Many of Napa’s top vineyards offer outdoor tasting and seating areas to take advantage of the year-round mild weather. For anyone looking for a taste for the good life, these al fresco spots offer a safe, sun-soaked way to relax with a favorite bottle or a new find. Whether you’re planning a one-time jaunt or considering a second home in Napa Valley, raise a glass to these seven vineyards with outstanding outdoor wine experiences. Sequoia Grove Private tables and plush couches offer plenty of seating options on Sequoia Grove’s sprawling patio. Guests have a view of the 14-acre Estate Vineyard and sit adjacent to the 110-year-old barn where the vineyard was founded in 1979. With several custom tastings available, including a dedicated Cabernet Sauvignon flight, this vineyard offers a one-of-a-kind Napa Valley wine experience beneath the shade of the sequoia trees. Artesa Artesa’s modern architecture was designed to take full advantage of the stunning Napa Valley landscape. Guests can enjoy the estate’s avante-garde art while sipping a top-tier pinot, then move to the hillside patio with views of the Mount Veeder foothills. For those more interested in a virtual event from the comfort of their second home, the winery offers a suite of online tastings. And fun fact: This vineyard is no stranger to the screen — Artesa was a prime location for shooting the Amy Poehler movie “Wine Country.” Cakebread Cellars At Cakebread Cellars, customers sip wines grown all over Napa Valley in one location. What began with the purchase of a 22-acre parcel in 1972 grew into a collection of 15 vineyards across 1,600 acres. The resulting wines — standouts like Dancing Bear Ranch Cabernet Sauvignon grown on nearby Howell Mountain and Carneros Chardonnay Reserve — can be enjoyed on the expansive lawns or sitting outside the state-of-the-art visitor center. If guests are feeling peckish, Cakebread offers small bites as well as cooking classes, both making good use of the on-site culinary garden. Ashes and Diamonds A self-described “love letter to Napa Valley,” Ashes & Diamonds merges old-school technique with a modern aesthetic. The iconic zig-zag roof extends from the building to provide a shady outdoor space for sampling their classic California offerings. Purchase a tasting, glass, bottle or full picnic with wine pairings to enjoy on the grounds. This vineyard is as much about cultivating flavor as it is about cultivating culture — the patio and surrounding lawn are a hub for food, music and film events. St Clair Brown St. Clair Brown has a refreshing take on the Napa Valley scene: The boutique winery is also a nano-brewery. Located in downtown Napa’s Rail Arts District and founded by two women with deep wine industry experience, St. Clair Brown offers patrons tastings in a verdant urban oasis of seasonal raised beds and fruit trees. All wine and beer are made on site. Salvestrin Salvestrin is an off-the-beaten-path family-run winery with plenty of outdoor space to enjoy a good bottle of hand-crafted wine. The expansive patio overlooks the vineyards that have been owned, farmed and operated by the Salvestrin family since 1932. Bouchaine Tucked away in the southernmost tip of the Carneros countryside, Bouchaine is a low-key Napa Valley vineyard that offers a next-level outdoor experience. One side of the outdoor space has a distinct backyard feel, with adirondack chairs and picnic tables arranged throughout the gardens. Around the corner, just outside the rustic farmhouse tasting room, is a space with comfortable couches and fire pits perfect for kicking back. Guests can’t go wrong with a glass of Bouchaine’s signature chardonnay, or with the magnificent view of Mount Diablo in the distance. Cheers to a Napa Valley second home As a co-owner of a gorgeous Napa Valley second home, you’ll enjoy all the perks of second home living with far fewer headaches. Pacasos come professionally designed, scheduling is a breeze and we take care of the property management. All you have to do is uncork a Napa Valley wine and enjoy your second home. Check out our listings to get started.
From the stunning rocky coastline to gorgeous weather to the possibility of a run-in with your favorite celebrity, time spent in the exclusive enclave of Malibu is tempting for many reasons. With 27 beachfront miles on the west side of the famed Pacific Coast Highway (or PCH, as the locals call it) and spectacular rolling hillsides to the east, Malibu offers both a relaxed, beachy vibe and an air of elegance and sophistication. If Southern California is calling and you’re considering purchasing in the Golden State, put on your sunglasses, pack some SPF 30 and discover eight reasons why Malibu might just be the perfect place to buy your second home. 1. There’s a neighborhood and a home for everyone While Malibu is known for its incredible waterfront mansions, there are actually a variety of neighborhoods and property types to satisfy every buyer, from contemporary single-family houses to sleek condos to sprawling ranches. Where you choose to buy in Malibu comes down to your interests and budget, more than anything. Are you looking for oceanfront luxury? Try Malibu Colony or coveted Carbon Beach — also known as Billionaire’s Beach. Equestrians will feel right at home in Malibu Canyon or Winding Way, the latter of which is entwined with a network of riding trails. Looking for solitude? Malibu’s canyon neighborhoods — Trancas Canyon, Bonsall Canyon, Ramirez Canyon and Latigo Canyon — offer lush natural habitats, plenty of wildlife and room to roam. 2. That SoCal sunshine can’t be beat It’s no surprise that sunshine abounds in the ‘Bu (yes, that’s the town’s nickname). Malibu boasts an idyllic 281 days of sun per year. The combination of warm weather and gentle, cooling ocean breezes give Malibu a Mediterranean climate that’ll make you feel like you’re on a permanent vacation. 3. The views speak for themselves We could wax poetic about Malibu’s views all day — the sweeping ocean vistas from Solstice Canyon, the rocky outcropping of Point Dume, and the sprawling sands at Zuma Beach. But there’s really nothing like taking in these views in person … especially if you can do it from the balcony of your second home. 4. You’ll love soaking up the surf culture When conditions are just right, surfers flock to Malibu’s world-famous surfing breaks, like they have for a century. And whether you’re a surfer yourself or just like the laid-back surf town vibe, you’ll love learning about the ‘Bu’s storied surf history. The beach now known as Surfrider was once a private estate, which means that enterprising surfers in the 1920s and 1930s had to sneak across the property to access the legendary point breaks. By the early 1960s, Malibu was the center of California’s surf culture — and that laid-back, sand-between-the-toes lifestyle remains part of the city’s unique charm. 5. Endless activities await While staring at the surf and basking in the sun are worthwhile ways to spend any day in Malibu, the town’s 16,000 residents are an active bunch, as reflected in the myriad festivals, events and entertainment options. Spend a sunny Sunday morning at the Malibu Farmers Market, where you’ll find farm-fresh fruits and vegetables, organic treats, artisan wares and fresh flowers. On one of Malibu’s rare rainy days, plan a visit to the historic Getty Villa, home to a collection of over 40,000 Greek, Roman and Etruscan antiquities. When evening falls, hit up the Malibu Playhouse or the Lisa Smith Wengler Center for the Arts at Malibu’s Pepperdine University. Whenever your friends and family want an excuse to visit (not that they need one!), suggest they come during one of Malibu’s wonderful annual events, including the Malibu Film Festival, the Malibu Arts Festival and the Malibu Triathlon, which is held every September. 6. Delicious dining is ready to tempt you Whether you’re in the mood for a casual al fresco lunch, beachside fine dining or farm-to-table fare, Malibu has it all. Here are a few must-try’s: Snag a reservation for sushi at famed chef Nobu Matsuhisa’s eponymous Malibu outpost, indulge in classic fish and chips from Malibu Seafood or brush up on your Malibu history at Neptune’s Net. 7. The outdoors are calling Warm weather and plenty of unspoiled natural areas make Malibu the perfect getaway for outdoor enthusiasts and nature lovers. Hikers can choose from the many miles of hiking trails that weave through the Santa Monica Mountains or treat themselves to incredible views from coastal hikes. Watersports opportunities abound, so you can spend every weekend trying something new. Charter a fishing boat, rent a kayak or take a private surf lesson from one of the many surf shops that dot the coastline. Oh, and speaking of the coastline, keep your eyes peeled between early December and May and you may see a gray whale or two — their migration route runs right past Malibu’s beaches. 8. Malibu’s wine country is on the rise While many parts of California are already world famous for their wine production, Malibu is relatively new on the scene — it became a recognized American Viticulture Area in 2013. Wine lovers will find Malibu’s burgeoning wine scene to be friendly, flavorful and bursting with beautiful views — the winding road leading to the mountaintop estate of Malibu Rocky Oaks Estate Vineyards is a true must-see. Discover your Malibu oasis If laid-back luxury is calling, Pacaso offers picture-perfect second homes in Malibu. As a co-owner, you’ll get all the perks of owning a second home without all the hassle. We’ll handle the maintenance and property management tasks, so you can just show up and go straight into vacation mode. The beach is waiting! View Pacaso listings to get started.
If you live in Northern California and love to ski, Lake Tahoe is the place to be. Home to the largest concentration of ski areas in the state — including the two biggest ski resorts — Tahoe offers something for everyone. Whether you’re looking for easy runs, small crowds or expert chutes, you’ll find them in the peaks above this alpine lake. The exact number of Tahoe-area ski resorts is hard to pin down, depending on how wide of a radius you’re willing to draw, but it’s fair to say there are about 14 ski areas surrounding the lake. Half of those resorts are 30 minutes or less from lakeside towns, so it’s a quick trip to the slopes. The big 6 If you’re looking for some of the highest-quality trails and a variety of terrain while skiing in Lake Tahoe, you can take your pick of these six premier ski areas, three in North Tahoe — Palisades Tahoe, Northstar and Mt. Rose-Ski Tahoe — and three in South Tahoe — Heavenly, Sierra-at-Tahoe and Kirkwood. Palisades Tahoe Palisades Tahoe (formerly Squaw Alpine) is a top destination for skiing in Tahoe, and if you’re staying at the upscale Village at Palisades Tahoe, the slopes are just steps away. The resort made a name for itself in 1960 as the host of the Winter Olympics, and since merging with neighboring Alpine Meadows in 2011, the Palisades Tahoe resort is the largest in Tahoe with a combined area of 6,000 acres. A continuous shuttle offers transportation between the two base areas, but experienced skiers can opt to travel from slope to slope via backcountry terrain. The long, steep runs at Palisades attract speed-seekers and extreme skiing enthusiasts, but it has plenty of beginner trails as well. Alpine has fewer runs and is the more relaxed, family-friendly side of the resort, so newer skiers might choose to start there. Since one lift ticket gives you access to all the runs, you can sample both sides and see which suits you best. Quick stats Terrain: 25% beginner, 42% intermediate, 33% advanced Trails: 245 Northstar Situated on Mount Pluto, an extinct volcano just above the northwest tip of the lake, Northstar is known for short, steep runs and lots of intermediate terrain across its 3,170 acres. It offers award-winning snowboarding terrain parks and a number of gladed runs for those who enjoy a forested setting. Popular with families and recreational skiers, it also stands out for its après-ski experience. You’ll find all the amenities you could want in a ski vacation, with ample dining, shopping and spa options at the base area. On the mountain, you can take a break at one of three lodges, all with stunning views. Quick stats Terrain: 13% beginner, 60% intermediate, 27% advanced Trails: 100 Mt. Rose-Ski Tahoe Smaller than some of the other Lake Tahoe resorts, Mt. Rose was a lesser-known local favorite that rose to major-league status when it opened The Chutes in 2004. These super steep, tree-lined runs entice serious skiers with their 1,500-foot vertical drops and 40-55 degree pitches. The resort is surrounded by skiable backcountry, extending its 1,200-acre range. Novice skiers won’t be left behind, either — half the runs are suitable for beginner and intermediate skiers and snowboarders. The resort is located on the Nevada side of the lake, about 30 minutes from Reno and 20 minutes from the north shore towns of Incline Village and Crystal Bay. Quick stats Terrain: 20% beginner, 30% intermediate, 40% advanced, 10% expert Trails: 65 Heavenly At 4,800 acres, Heavenly is the biggest ski resort in South Tahoe — and the largest single Tahoe ski area, if you count Palisades and Alpine Meadows as separate resorts. It’s just minutes from the south shore and spans South Lake Tahoe, California, and Stateline, Nevada. It boasts the highest elevation in Tahoe, giving it a vertical drop of 3,500 feet — unmatched on the West Coast — and an extra-long 5.5-mile run. It caters to intermediate skiers but has good beginner runs and a handful of expert trails. It offers three lodges and two base areas, one on either side of the state line, or you can ride the 2.4-mile gondola up to the slopes and enjoy spectacular views along the way. After your day of skiing in Tahoe, you’ll find plenty of dining, shopping and nightlife options in Heavenly Village and downtown South Lake Tahoe. Quick stats Terrain: 8% beginner, 62% intermediate, 25% advanced, 5% expert Trails: 97 Sierra-at-Tahoe About 16 miles southwest of South Lake Tahoe, Sierra-at-Tahoe is well-suited to a day of family fun. Three-fourths of the runs are beginner or intermediate, and two lifts are reserved for beginner skiers. Still, there are quite a few advanced trails over the resort’s 2,000 acres, plus freestyle terrain parks for skiers and snowboarders looking to perfect their jumps and 180s. The slopes are largely protected from the wind, making it one of the more consistently enjoyable locations for skiing in Lake Tahoe. Quick stats Terrain: 25% beginner, 50% intermediate, 25% advanced Trails: 47 Kirkwood Head a bit further south from Tahoe’s south shore and you’ll reach Kirkwood, which ski enthusiasts will tell you is well worth the drive. One of the more remote Tahoe-area resorts, it draws smaller crowds but the variety of natural terrain attracts those with a true love of the sport. Skiers will find an excellent mix of trail options across 2,300 acres, including wide runs, chutes and open bowls — and lots of powder owing to the region’s abundant snowfall. While the resort is known for challenging terrain — it offers the most expert runs in Tahoe — its Timber Creek section is designed for less experienced skiers. Quick stats Terrain: 12% beginner, 30% intermediate, 38% advanced, 20% expert Trails: 85 The best views Skiing in Tahoe isn’t just about the big, full-service resorts. Plenty of smaller ski areas offer great rewards, whether you want beautiful views, lighter crowds or a more casual atmosphere. Homewood You can’t get much closer to the lake than Homewood, located along the west shore, and you’ll be dazzled by spectacular views of Lake Tahoe from every run. Plus, you’ll escape the crowds, save money on lift tickets, and enjoy the friendly and welcoming vibe. And with 1,260 acres of skiable terrain, there are plenty of good runs to choose from. Quick stats Terrain: 13% beginner, 46% intermediate, 36% advanced, 5% expert Trails: 67 Diamond Peak Just minutes from Incline Village on the north shore, Diamond Peak is one of the smaller Tahoe ski areas at 655 acres, but it’s worth a visit. This community-owned and easily accessible resort is popular with locals, has a balanced mix of terrain and offers some of the best views of the lake. Quick stats Terrain: 18% beginner, 46% intermediate, 36% advanced Trails: 30 The Donner trio You’ll find several resorts situated northwest of the lake along the Donner Pass, just 30-40 minutes from either the north shore or Tahoe City. What they lack in upscale amenities, they make up for in lower prices and ample snow. Boreal Skiers itching to get in the first run of the season should check out Boreal, which typically opens earlier than the other Tahoe-area resorts. It’s also the most accessible to Bay Area residents, just off the interstate and farthest west from the lake. Its small size — 480 acres — is offset by big snow and inexpensive lift tickets, making it a good option for newer skiers who aren’t ready to pay two or three times the price to try out the swankier Palisades Tahoe or Heavenly resorts. Quick stats Terrain: 26% beginner, 29% intermediate, 44% advanced Trails: 33 Sugar Bowl The largest of the Donner ski areas at 1,650 acres, Sugar Bowl averages the most snowfall of all the Tahoe resorts. Skiers will find wide slopes, narrow glades, backcountry terrain and a charming, homey atmosphere. The resort provides everything for a great day of skiing in Tahoe, but you’ll feel like you’re in an old-world European village, owing to its historic roots — open since 1939, it’s one of California’s oldest resorts. Quick stats Terrain: 17% beginner, 45% intermediate, 26% advanced, 12% expert Trails: 100 Donner Ski Ranch Near Boreal, Donner Ski Ranch is one of the only independent, family-run ski resorts in the area. Modestly sized at 505 acres, it offers a relaxed day of skiing with short lift lines and low prices in support of its mission to make the sport accessible to everyone. Even older than Sugar Bowl, Donner opened in 1937 and has been a family destination for decades, offering friendly staff and a good mix of terrain. Quick stats Terrain: 25% beginner, 50% intermediate, 25% advanced Trails: 52 Find your Lake Tahoe ski home If skiing in Tahoe is one of your downtime priorities, Pacaso offers amazing second homes in Lake Tahoe. As a co-owner, you’ll enjoy all the benefits of a luxurious second home with less hassle. We take care of the maintenance and property management, you just show up and relax (or strap on your skis). View our Tahoe listings to get started.
A desert oasis within the Coachella Valley, Palm Springs evokes images of swanky, mid-century Hollywood — Frank Sinatra and his Rat Pack pals built homes here — and it continues to be a vacation destination for celebs like the Kardashian clan and Leonardo DiCaprio. The resort town’s proximity to Los Angeles has made owning a second home in Palm Springs a desirable option for SoCal residents wanting an easy weekend getaway. Despite its glitzy aura, Palm Springs is a welcoming haven for all travelers — no show biz credentials required. Anyone looking to escape the winter chill will find nothing but sun and pleasant temperatures during the colder months, and heat-seekers can get their fill from May through October, when temps typically reach the 90s and 100s. Whether you’re planning a one-time visit or considering a second home in Palm Springs, here are five interesting places to check out while you’re there. Palm Canyon Drive and the Walk of the Stars Palm Canyon Drive is the “Main Street” of Palm Springs, weaving through the city and the heart of downtown. It’s classic Palm Springs, with a bit of everything: retro architecture, boutiques alongside trinket shops, restaurants and entertainment venues. If you’re exploring the city on foot, you can’t miss the Walk of the Stars. Hundreds of stars honoring celebrities and other notable figures line the sidewalks along Palm Canyon Drive and adjoining streets. Did you know? After his music career, Sonny Bono got his start in politics in Palm Springs, serving as mayor from 1988 to 1992 — and of course there’s a star in his honor. Tahquitz and Indian Canyons The Coachella Valley has a rich indiginous history, and the Cahuilla people have inhabited the area for thousands of years. The Agua Caliente Band of Cahuilla Indians owns land in and around Palm Springs, including the Tahquitz and Indian Canyons. Both sites are culturally and ecologically significant, and visitors can learn more about the history of the land and tribes while exploring the beautiful desert landscape. Don’t miss the hike to Tahquitz Falls, featured in Frank Capra’s 1937 film “Lost Horizon.” Palm Springs Vintage Market This monthly pop-up market is the venue for vintage treasure hunters. Whether your style is kitsch, classic or downright quirky, the vintage market has collectibles, antiques and all sorts of interesting finds. With the rising interest in Mid-Century home restoration, the market focuses on offering authentic, quality vintage wares that owners can incorporate into their interior design. For those with second homes in Palm Springs, the vintage market is the perfect place to find one-of-a-kind decór for your Desert Modern home. Palm Springs Aerial Tramway Built in 1963 and modernized in 2000, the aerial tramway transports visitors nearly 6,000 feet up over 2.5 miles to Mountain Station in Mount San Jacinto State Park. The complex construction techniques earned the structure a historical civil engineering landmark designation, and after updates were completed, it became the world’s largest rotating tram car. Temperatures at the top can be up to 40 degrees lower than at the base — a refreshing change, depending on the season. Mountain Station includes a restaurant, museum and an information center, and serves as a gateway to miles of hiking trails within the state park as well as the stunning vistas of the Santa Rosa and San Jacinto Mountains National Monument. Palm Springs Visitor Center Admittedly, a visitor center is not usually a prime attraction — but if you’re picturing an airport-style info kiosk or a drab municipal building, think again. The Palm Springs Visitor Information Center is an architectural gem, originally built as a gas station in 1965 and designed in a modern, futuristic style. Experience the Jetsons vibes while enjoying the picturesque backdrop of the San Jacinto Mountains. And since you’re there, you might as well pick up a postcard and get some insider tips on other area activities. Find your desert escape Pacaso offers exceptional second homes in highly desirable West Coast markets. Our second homes in Palm Springs include resort-like amenities within the privacy of your own luxurious home. With co-ownership, you choose the amount to own, so you can maximize your time in your home — while Pacaso takes care of maintenance and property management. View our listings to get started.
Lake Tahoe has long been a vacation destination, popular with regional residents and a must-see for many global travelers looking to experience a gem of the American West. The lake spans the California-Nevada border and is generally divided into two main regions: Tahoe North and Tahoe South. North Lake Tahoe is dotted with small towns, but the area’s main draws are outdoor recreation and quiet relaxation. An aura of luxurious tranquility has bolstered the region’s high-end reputation — with higher prices to match. The south shore once catered to more casual tourists with an array of souvenir shops and inexpensive roadside lodging. Over the past couple of decades, however, the region has undergone a dramatic transformation. Visitors to South Lake Tahoe — the name of the largest town and a reference to the region as a whole — now have a multitude of upscale hotels to choose from, as well as nightlife and entertainment options not available in the small towns to the north. If you’re looking at real estate, there are many reasons to consider buying a second home in South Lake Tahoe. The south shore has something for everyone Tahoe’s southern region offers an ideal combination of outdoor and indoor activities. From your second home in South Lake Tahoe, you can experience the area’s natural beauty, abundance of recreational activities and breathtaking views while enjoying the amenities of an entertainment destination. Kayak by day, then try your luck at the casinos at night. Or hit the slopes at Heavenly Ski Resort, then cozy up with a craft cocktail at the Heavenly Village. Whatever your interests, there’s no shortage of options in South Lake Tahoe. It’s an ideal family destination During the snowy season, families can ski or snowboard at one of several nearby ski areas. Heavenly is the closest to the south shore, spanning the border towns of South Lake Tahoe, California and Stateline, Nevada. It’s Tahoe’s largest ski resort, with multiple base lodges and a 2.4-mile gondola providing spectacular views. Two other ski areas, Sierra-at-Tahoe and Kirkwood, are within 45 minutes of South Lake Tahoe. For kids (and kids at heart) who prefer to slide their way down the slopes, Adventure Mountain, about 12 miles south of South Lake Tahoe, offers the region’s largest groomed tubing and sledding area. In warmer months, canoe or kayak on the lake, hike to a local waterfall or try whitewater rafting on the milder rapids of the south fork of the American River or the Carson River. Families with second homes in South Lake Tahoe can also take advantage of the many local summer and day camps, including sports camps, art camps and classic camp experiences. Adults can play all day — and night If you’re seeking some grownup adventure, but not the rugged mountaineering kind, you have plenty of options. Play a round at one of the area’s championship golf courses, book a sightseeing or dinner cruise or check out the galleries and shops around town. If luck is on your side, go all in at one of Stateline’s world-class casinos, which offer premium gaming, dining and entertainment. Later, dive into the vibrant South Lake Tahoe club scene or kick back at a brewpub and sample local craft beers. It’s easy to explore the rest of the lake Despite its alpine setting, most areas surrounding Lake Tahoe are easily accessible. For people with second homes in South Lake Tahoe, it’s a scenic, one-hour drive to the north shore. The western route takes you along the California side of the lake, with several quaint towns and state parks to explore, including Emerald Bay, where you’ll find Lake Tahoe’s only island and historic Vikingsholm Castle. The eastern route passes through Nevada, with stellar views and a chance to stop for a refreshing swim at Sand Harbor, a state park on the northeast shore known for its great beaches and home to the annual Lake Tahoe Shakespeare Festival. Find a second home in South Tahoe Discover your Tahoe home away from home with Pacaso. Our luxury second homes offer the benefits of true ownership without the hassles of maintenance and upkeep. As a co-owner, you purchase the amount of ownership that meets your needs, allowing you to get the most out of your second home. View our Tahoe luxury listings, and take the first step toward co-ownership in one of the West’s most beautiful locations.
Often described as the crown jewel of the Sierra Nevada, the North Lake Tahoe region attracts visitors from around the world — and it can be an ideal second home destination. It’s a central location for your second home in Tahoe Olympic Valley, off Tahoe’s northwest shore, is a popular base camp for winter recreation and a sought-after location for buyers considering a luxury second home in Tahoe. The Village at Palisades Tahoe offers dozens of boutique shops and restaurants, and several North Lake Tahoe communities are minutes away. Tahoe City, a lakeside town at the headwaters of the Truckee River with fine dining, casual coffee shops, galleries and plenty of water activities, is about seven miles east. Just 10 miles north is Truckee, a former “Old West” town on the National Register of Historic Places, now home to a vibrant arts and culture community. Within 30 minutes of Olympic Valley, at the northern tip of Lake Tahoe, are Kings Beach and neighboring Crystal Bay (which sits at the California-Nevada border). These towns offer more dining and entertainment options as well as beautiful beaches and shoreline strolls. Your second home is steps away from the slopes Olympic Valley gained global recognition when it hosted the 1960 Winter Olympics, and it’s still regarded as one of the best places to ski in the country. After merging with neighboring Alpine Meadows in 2011, the combined Palisades Tahoe resort (formerly Squaw Alpine) is the largest of Tahoe’s many ski areas. Boasting long, steep runs, Palisades Tahoe appeals to experienced skiers looking to hone their skills, but it also offers a number of easy to intermediate runs, making it a good option for outdoor enthusiasts of all abilities. For those looking for winter fun with a little less effort, the family-friendly “SnoVentures” section of the resort offers tubing (including adult-sized tubes!) and mini snowmobiles, as well as a beginner slope for first-timers who aren’t quite ready for the main runs. And if you’d rather not brave the snow at all, you can appreciate the mountain from the comfort of the aerial tram, which takes riders on a 2,000-foot ascent to High Camp, elevation 8,200 feet. With so many options, Olympic Valley is an excellent choice when it comes to second homes in Tahoe, whether you love the chill of fresh powder as you fly down the slopes or just want to take in the snow-capped mountain views. You can enjoy North Tahoe activities all year While snow sports dominate the winter months, people with second homes in Tahoe have plenty of reasons to plan stays throughout the year. Here is a sampling of North Tahoe activities: Hiking: Olympic Valley residents can easily explore several local hiking trails from the base of the mountain or via the tram-accessible High Camp. And for those willing to venture a bit further, a short car ride provides access to hundreds of miles of North Tahoe trails suitable for relaxed family outings or multi-day backpacking adventures. Golf: If you prefer gentle green slopes to steep white ones, there are many world-class golf courses in North Lake Tahoe. And when your second home is in Tahoe’s Olympic Valley, you have a championship course in your own backyard: The Links at Squaw Creek. Surrounded by mountains and designed with environmental stewardship in mind, this unique course complements the area’s natural beauty. Beaches: While Tahoe is known for snow, it is equally popular for its namesake lake and surrounding beaches. Visitors savor the opportunity to enjoy the clear blue waters, and North Tahoe beaches offer something for everyone, from sandy shorelines to rocky crags, bustling boardwalks to secluded coves. Dining and entertainment: Despite the small populations of most Tahoe-area towns, the steady stream of visitors has encouraged a thriving food, music and arts scene. If you choose a second home in Tahoe’s Olympic Valley, you’ll have ample dining options at The Village at Palisades Tahoe. And if you’d like to enjoy a water view with your meal, you’ll find a range of lakeside casual and fine dining options a few miles away. For more ideas, peruse these activities for every week of the year in North Tahoe. Find your second home in Tahoe Buying a second home in Tahoe is now more attainable with co-ownership. Pacaso gives you true ownership in a luxury, one-of-a-kind property in one of the most desirable areas in the West. Purchase the amount of ownership that meets your needs, while avoiding many of the hassles of whole home ownership (no need to buy a snow blower!). View our Olympic Valley and other Tahoe luxury listings, and start planning your alpine adventures today.
If you would describe your ideal getaway as a place with natural beauty, outdoor recreation and stunning views, Lake Tahoe may be just what you’re looking for. With its pristine waters, pleasant summers and storybook winters, it’s no surprise that buying a second home in Tahoe is an aspiration for many. Whether you’re familiar with the region or just starting your search, here are 5 things to consider before buying a second home in Tahoe. 1. There’s no town called ‘Lake Tahoe’ Tahoe refers to the entire region around the lake, which is split across California and Nevada, and includes about 75 miles of shoreline. If you’re looking at second homes in Tahoe, start by familiarizing yourself with the area, which is broadly divided into northern and southern regions. North Tahoe: Kings Beach (CA) and Incline Village (NV) on the north shore are known for their beaches, while Tahoe City, situated on the west shore alongside the Truckee River, is a favorite of kayakers and other water sport enthusiasts. A few miles north of the lake you’ll find the town of Truckee, where you can explore its historic “Old West” sites and vibrant cultural scene. North Tahoe also boasts the largest number of ski resorts in North America, so whether you like deep powder, backcountry adventures or Nordic trails, you’ll find it here. South Tahoe: South Lake Tahoe (CA) and Stateline (NV) are the largest towns around the lake and are popular tourist destinations. They cater to the nightlife crowd, with resorts and casinos (on the Nevada side), but there’s no shortage of opportunities for outdoor enthusiasts, from hitting the slopes at Tahoe’s largest ski resort to hitting the trail in search of one of the many local waterfalls. 2. Tahoe is a year-round destination People often associate Tahoe with snow, and for good reason. This alpine lake is nestled high in the Sierra Nevada mountains, and those looking for a winter wonderland will not be disappointed. People flock to the region during ski season, but if your idea of December bliss involves sipping tea by the fire while gazing out at the snow-covered pines, that’s reason enough to stay during winter. Whatever your interests, if you plan to spend time in Tahoe during the colder months, be prepared for snowy roads. Spring might be called “winter lite” — it’s not uncommon to see snow in May — which is a boon for spring-breakers looking for one more ski holiday. If you don’t mind milder temperatures (think 40s and 50s, with an occasional 60-degree day), spring is a quiet, peaceful time at the lake. Summer is the most popular time to stay in Tahoe, with comfortable temperatures in the 70s and 80s, and water activities ranging from slow, quiet paddles to thrilling water-skiing adventures. Hiking trails abound, or you can relax on your deck, lounge at the beach, or window-shop at a small-town boutique. Fall has the benefit of summer weather — expect warm temps in September and into October — but fewer tourists. And the fall foliage is spectacular. Whatever your interests, buying a second home in Tahoe gives you the unique opportunity to enjoy the area’s beauty throughout the year. 3. Tahoe is great for kids Many people choose second homes in Tahoe because it’s an ideal destination for all ages. The extended winter provides plenty of time for skiing, ice skating, sledding and tubing, and summer activities range from swimming, paddle boarding and whitewater rafting to kid-friendly hikes and even a gravity-propelled mountain roller coaster. And year-round, you can explore historic sites and museums, nearby state parks, abundant national forest land and much more. Whether you have kids, grandkids or are a kid at heart, you’ll look forward to your time in Tahoe. 4. Yes, there are bears! Bears are part of the Tahoe environment, but there’s little reason to worry. With a few precautions, you and the wildlife can happily coexist. Bears can be persistent when it comes to food — one human’s trash is another bear’s treasure — so remove temptations. When you own a second home in Tahoe, you learn that garbage can become a bear buffet, so you’ll need to keep outdoor containers secured (often by using a bear-safe enclosure for your bins), and avoid keeping food in your car. And — this may seem obvious, but it’s worth emphasizing — don’t approach a bear, even if it seems “friendly” or is the cutest baby cub you’ve ever seen. Enjoy the natural scenery, but keep your distance from wild animals. 5. It will (literally) float your boat Boating enthusiasts have many options, and if you own your own vessel, you may be interested in buying a second home in Tahoe right on the lakefront — what could be better than walking out to your dock and going for a sail? For boat owners without water frontage, the lake is dotted with marinas providing slip and dry storage rentals. The nearly century-old Tahoe Yacht Club offers boating information and events for power boaters and sailors alike. If you are an occasional boater, you can rent a craft for a day or weekend from locations all around the lake. Finding second homes in Lake Tahoe If Tahoe sounds like your ideal second home destination, seize the opportunity to co-own a luxurious property in this gem of the West. View our listings to see second homes in Tahoe available now, and take the next step toward co-ownership of a second home you can enjoy for years to come.
Choose your dream location, and start enriching your life today. With Pacaso, you can co-own an epic second home in some of the most sought-after destinations — for 1/8 the cost. Why wait? We have listings in desirable second home locations across the country and in Europe, with plans to expand globally. Whether you love to hit the slopes or surf the waves, you'll find a Pacaso that suits your lifestyle and fits your family. Browse our active listings, or join our email list to receive updates when new homes are added. Current Pacaso destinations Arizona Scottsdale California Carmel - Monterey Lake Arrowhead Lake Tahoe (including South Lake Tahoe, Truckee, Tahoma, Olympic Valley and Incline Village) Napa - Sonoma Valley (including Napa, Sonoma, Healdsburg and St. Helena) Palm Springs (including Palm Desert, Rancho Mirage, Indian Wells and La Quinta) San Diego - Encinitas Santa Barbara Santa Cruz SoCal beaches (including Malibu, Newport Beach, Corona del Mar, Balboa Island and La Jolla) Colorado Aspen Breckenridge Steamboat Springs Telluride Vail Florida Delray Beach Fort Lauderdale The Keys Marco Island Miami West Palm Beach Hawai'i Maui Idaho Sun Valley Massachusetts Cape Cod Nantucket New Jersey NJ beaches (including Avalon, Beach Haven and Ocean City) Oregon Bend South Carolina Charleston (including Kiawah Island, Isle of Palms and Sullivan's Island) Hilton Head Island Utah Park City Wyoming Jackson Hole Europe Marbella, Spain London, UK Don’t see your dream location? Let us know where you’re interested in owning a second home. Buyer demand is an important factor in our market selection!
There’s a lot to love about both Big Bear and Lake Arrowhead. Both are charming California alpine towns nestled in the San Bernardino Mountains, less than two hours from Los Angeles. And while both boast summer lakefront fun and winter snow play, there are five key differences you’ll want to know before picking your favorite. 1. Lake access: Big Bear Both towns have mountain lakes as their centerpiece, but Big Bear Lake is much larger than Lake Arrowhead. And that’s not the only difference. If you’re headed to Lake Arrowhead for some watersports fun, it’s important to know that the lake is privately owned. That means lake access is limited to local homeowners and their guests living right on the water or within about a one-mile perimeter, known as Arrowhead Woods. Without a home here, the only way to enjoy some time on the water is if you’re staying at a waterfront resort, camping at the campgrounds on either side of the lake, or enjoying a guided boat ride on the Lake Arrowhead Queen. Big Bear Lake is open to all and offers a wide range of watersports, thanks to multiple marinas and boat launches dotting the shoreline. For a day, a weekend or longer, enjoy boating, kayaking, canoeing, paddleboarding, fishing or guided tours. 2. Winter sports: Big Bear While both Big Bear and Lake Arrowhead get enough snow in the winter to give you that cozy winter wonderland feel, Big Bear is far and away the better option for those looking for snowsports activities. Big Bear sits at an elevation of roughly 7,000 feet — 2,000 feet higher than Lake Arrowhead — and averages 50-plus inches of snow a year, compared to 37 inches in Lake Arrowhead. And there’s even more snow at Snow Summit and Bear Mountain, two ski resorts in the Big Bear area. They’re known for some of the best skiing and snowboarding in Southern California, with a combined 400 acres, 25 lifts and 55 runs. Snow Summit is a great destination for beginners and families, while Bear Mountain delivers more challenging terrain. 3. Village offerings: Lake Arrowhead Both mountain towns have a downtown “village” that serves as the hub for locals and visitors alike. While both villages offer dining, shopping and entertainment, Lake Arrowhead Village is especially big on charm. You’ll find over 50 shops and restaurants, plus plenty of special events throughout the year. Perhaps the most popular event is the Summer Concert Series, which runs from Memorial Day Weekend to Labor Day Weekend with tribute bands performing on the Center Stage multiple times each week. 4. Ease of access: Tie Which destination is easier to get to? That depends on where you’re coming from. From Los Angeles, both are fairly easily accessible by car, but Lake Arrowhead is a bit closer. In fact, you’ll pass Lake Arrowhead on Highway 18 en route to Big Bear. Also, since Big Bear is larger and more popular, you’re more likely to hit weekend traffic heading in and out of town. If you’re traveling by air, you’ll only have one option: Big Bear. The town has a small airport, Big Bear City Airport, that’s popular with jet setters who travel by private or charter plane. 5. The vibe: Tie Which mountain retreat you fall in love with depends on your preferences. Lake Arrowhead is widely considered to be an upscale retreat, with more private residences than resorts and far fewer visitors each year. Many call Lake Arrowhead their home away from home for its solitude and slower pace of life. Big Bear is a better known vacation destination, which means more people — and more activities. Adventure travelers and outdoors lovers flock to Big Bear all year to enjoy their favorite adrenaline-pumping activities and active pursuits. Find your second home in the mountains Whether your style is Big Bear or Lake Arrowhead, you’ll find great Pacaso co-ownership opportunities. Discover your dream second home today and start exploring this unique part of Southern California.
Once the glamorous refuge of gentlemen, private members’ clubs in London have evolved to become elite establishments where celebrities, creatives and professionals come to play. Some of these former “gentleman’s clubs” have been part of the capital’s scene since the late 1700s, while others are newcomers. Here are nine of our favourite clubs to see and be seen. Annabel’s A stalwart on the private members’ club scene, Annabel’s towers over four floors of its Grade I Listed Georgian mansion building on Mayfair’s Berkeley Square, having moved just two doors down from its original location. Founded in 1963, Annabel’s describes itself as one of the most elegant clubs in the world, and the place to entertain and be entertained. 5 Hertford Street One of the more secretive members’ clubs, 5 Hertford Street is inconspicuously located in Mayfair behind an unmarked maroon door. Membership in the club — frequented by royals, politicians and celebrities — is hard to attain, requiring two references from existing members before undergoing a strict vetting process. Those who are accepted can enjoy all-day dining in a number of private dining rooms, LouLou’s nightclub downstairs, and their very own cigar shop. Maison Estelle Set behind the dark inky hues of 6 Grafton Street (designed by Sir Robert Taylor in 1772), Maison Estelle is an elegant members’ club created by Sharan and Eiesha Pasricha, the power couple behind the Hoxton hotels group and Gleneagles in Scotland. The club offers a restaurant, several bars and a nightclub for those inside the seductive exterior. Soho House What would a private members’ club roundup be without mention of the globally renowned Soho House? Spanning across countries and continents, this membership group has taken the world by storm. Part of its success can be put down to the inclusivity of this exclusive group – members are allowed to invite three friends via their Soho Friends membership. With hotels, restaurants and bars from New York to Istanbul, it’s the club of choice for “curious, kind people to work, rest and play.” Don’t miss their signature spicy picante. George Founded in 2001, George features a restaurant, bar and canopied decking that overlooks Mayfair’s Mount Street. Inside, Art Deco touches meet with artwork by David Hockney. The club is currently undergoing a major refurbishment, but is due to reopen soon. The Twenty Two “Dedicated to the art of lingering,” The Twenty Two is a West London hotel and cultural space with a private members’ club and a round-the-clock restaurant serving up modern British fare with European influences. The grand hotel offers 31 opulent suites and bedrooms, plus a mews house for larger groups. The Edwardian manor — and former family home — is located on Grosvenor Square, with interiors designed by Natalia Miyar in a bold, maximalist fashion, said to have been inspired by the opulence of 18th century France. The Ned Occupying a 29,450-square-metre Lutyens-designed bank headquarters built in 1924, The Ned is comprised of a hotel, private members’ club — Ned’s Club — and 10 restaurants. Created in 2017 by Nick Jones — founder of the Soho House & Co. group – The Ned houses some incredible architectural features, including the original bank vault which leads into the aptly named The Vault bar and lounge, through the Midland Bank strongroom. Upstairs, members can enjoy the Cowshed spa and rooftop restaurants. Albert’s at Beaufort House, Chelsea Located on The King’s Road is Albert’s private members’ club in elegant Beaufort House. Extending over the upper three floors, Albert’s contains a club-room with an all-day restaurant and bar, a private dining room and the Penthouse Champagne Bar. The club says it blends quintessential English charm with lively inflections of Italian passion. Plenty of natural light, geometric patterns and rich warm tones help to set the scene. The Arts Club, Mayfair The Arts Club was founded in 1863, making it the oldest and most established club on our list. Created “to provide a sanctuary for those with a professional or amateur relationship with the Arts, Literature and Sciences,” the club has Charles Dickens, Paolo Tosti and Frederic Leighton among its members. To this day, art remains very much at the core of the club, with permanent and temporary collections curated by Wedel Art, live music and events. It continues to attract a diverse membership who can enjoy Mediterranean and Japanese cuisine in its two restaurants, sip on cocktails in Leo’s bar, or enjoy a cigar from the Cuban cigar lounge tucked away on the second floor.
Just two hours from Los Angeles but a world away, Lake Arrowhead is a charming mountain getaway surrounded by the San Bernardino Mountains. While the lake itself is reason enough to call Lake Arrowhead your home away from home, it’s also a great destination for outdoor lovers. The area has trails and hikes for all skill levels, many offering incredible views. Pack your hiking shoes and check out these five must-try adventures. Will Abell Memorial Trail If you’re hiking with kids or just short on time, the Will Abell Memorial Trail is the perfect place to spend a couple of hours. It’s just 1.9 miles with 419 feet of elevation, but it delivers plenty of natural beauty. From the trailhead, you’ll quickly find yourself in the woods, ascending gradually to a lookout with views of Lake Arrowhead. The story of how this trail came to be is interesting, too. Once destined to be a luxury residential development, the San Bernardino Mountains Land Trust purchased these 80 acres in 2011 and worked to reforest the area and build the trail, which is named for a longtime Land Trust volunteer. Lake Gregory Trail For those looking for a relaxing stroll, take a short drive to nearby Lake Gregory. There’s a 2.3-mile, mostly flat loop trail that makes its way around the edge of the lake. It’s a popular trail for families and dog owners, and the views of the lake are simply beautiful. Walk the loop in the morning and then find a spot at Lake Gregory Regional Park. Unlike Lake Arrowhead, which is privately owned, Lake Gregory is open to the public and has ample space for swimming and watersports. Arrowhead Pinnacles Trail A 4.6-mile out-and-back trail less than 20 minutes from town, Arrowhead Pinnacles Trail is a moderately difficult hike with an elevation gain of 1,000 feet. Unlike the more forested trails common in the area, the landscape surrounding this trail is more like rocky scrubland. The first mile starts off easy, but before you know it, you’ll find yourself scrambling over rocks and boulders to stay on course. It’s recommended you download a GPS map ahead of time. The cairns left by earlier hikers help point the way, too. While you may twist and turn a bit along the way, at the peak you’ll be rewarded with sweeping views of the Mojave Desert, Silverwood Lake and Mt. Baldy. Crafts Peak Trail At 7.2 miles long and an impressive 1,500 feet of elevation gain, this scenic out-and-back hike is perfect for those who are up for a challenge. Crafts Peak Trail begins at the Green Valley Campground and winds along forest service roads, through rocky inclines, ponderosa forests and finally, you’ll arrive at the peak. Scramble to the top of the rock formation for spectacular views — on a clear day, you can see all the way to Big Bear. Children’s Forest Exploration Trail As the name implies, this 9-mile, out-and-back hike was designed by the U.S. Forest Service, in collaboration with children across the country. Inquisitive young hikers will enjoy interpretive panels located along a 0.75-mile interpretive tail loop. The National Children’s Forest offers multiple ways for young people to learn about being stewards of the land. There’s a visitor information center, environmental education program and youth volunteer opportunities. The great outdoors are calling in Lake Arrowhead There are so many great Lake Arrowhead hikes that a quick weekend getaway just won’t suffice. Co-owning a Pacaso second home in the “Alps of Southern California” gives you ample time to explore the many beautiful trails near this lakefront community.
Marbella, Spain, is the ultimate year-round holiday destination. With its expansive Mediterranean coastline, beautiful landscapes and an average of 325 sunny days every year, this Costa del Sol town offers something wonderful in every season. Autumn Summer crowds have all but dispersed, leaving quiet beaches, open tables at the most popular restaurants, and a warm autumnal glow. Walk, run or bike along the 10km-coastal promenade that stretches from Puerto Banus to Cabopino. If you’d prefer to take it easier (we don’t blame you), head to Marbella Old Town. Delightful during any time of the year, the streets are less crowded in fall, making this the perfect place to spend the afternoon. Autumn is also a great season to travel inland to visit to the spectacular city of Ronda. Perched on dramatic cliff faces and surrounded by prehistoric settlements dating to the Neolithic era, Ronda is one of the most beautiful cities in Andalusia. For centuries, it has produced olive oil from the surrounding ancient olive groves. LA Organics opened in the 1990s and uses ancient techniques to produce organic olive oil. The company plans to build a Philippe Starck-designed facility dedicated to ecological agriculture, gastronomy and culture. Winter Thanks to a microclimate created by the nearby mountains, winter months in Marbella are pleasant, with temperatures ranging from 8 to 17 degrees. Golfers will be keen to make use of the mild climate — with the highest concentration of golf courses in the world (64 courses line the way between Malaga and Sotogrande), Marbella offers plenty to choose from. Among many highly-rated courses, Los Naranjos Golf Club is certainly one to put on your list. For those wishing to enjoy some winter sports, the Sierra Nevada Mountain range is home to the largest ski resort in Andalusia. It’s just a 2.5-hour drive from Marbella, meaning you can ski in the morning and be back on the beach by the sunset. Over the Christmas and New Year period, there is plenty to do to embra e the festive spirit. Marbella hosts a Christmas market, and the Marbella Club Hotel offers al fresco dinner and drinks by its beautiful bar with an open fire and heaters. Ring in the New Year like a local by heading to Plaza de los Naranjos in the town centre. Enjoy a bottle of Cava and punnet of grapes before watching the fireworks light up the sky over the coast. Spring Spring brings clear, warm days — perfect for exploring the stunning, varied landscape surrounding Marbella. There’s no better place to hike than at La Concha, a conch-shaped mountain in Sierra de la Nieves Natural Park behind town. On clear days, you can see Gibraltar and the north coast of Africa from the top. About seven kilometres inland from the coast — between Marbella, Ronda and Estepona — is Benahavis, a mountainous village nicknamed the "dining room of the Costa del Sol" thanks to its renowned restaurants. Spend time exploring the area via mountain bike before stopping off for a well-earned feast. Whilst we’re feeling active, why not have a game of tennis at Puente Romano Tennis & Paddle Club? The facility offers eight top-quality clay courts, two plexipave courts, a fully equipped gym, sauna, Turkish bath and massage room. Summer By now, Marbella is really living up to its sunshine coast name, with temperatures peaking in the mid to late 30sin July and August. The streets fill with visitors, and there’s a real buzz in the air as people head to the beach, fill sun beds and play in the soft Mediterranean swell. There are plenty of water sports to enjoy over these months, and with sea temperatures sitting around the mid-20 degrees mark, it’s the perfect time to take a dip. The hotter days and larger crowds also mean parties are on the agenda, and the Starlite Festival is a great place to start. This two-month music and cultural event is held over July and August at the Cantera de Nagüeles in Marbella. Guests can watch music from the auditorium and dine in the Starlite restaurant before dancing the night away in the sessions area. Enjoy Marbella all year Co-owning a luxury second home in Marbella means you can enjoy year-round sunshine and all the delights in this coastal destination. Relax in your carefully curated holiday home and get to know the area like a local.
Hugging the River Thames, the chic Chelsea area of West London is one of the most prestigious neighbourhoods in the capital. The affluent area is famed for its designer boutiques and fine dining along the busy King’s Road. We’ve picked 10 of our favourite Chelsea restaurants serving a world of culinary treats. Rabbit This farm-to-fork neighbourhood restaurant is geared for the eco-conscious diner who knows that good food is all about high-quality, no-fuss ingredients. Rabbit aims to take the flavours of the English countryside and firmly transplant them to Chelsea’s famous King’s Road. This is wholesome, zero-waste dining with a focus on seasonal produce that is foraged or locally grown. All the livestock comes from the family farm in West Sussex, and their delicious small plates can be washed down with a glass of English wine from their own vineyard, Nutbourne. Don’t miss the Sunday roast or eight-course “Local and Wild” tasting menu. Stanley’s Found just a few minutes’ walk from Sloane Square, along Sydney Street, this restaurant and bar take inspiration from the English country garden. Stanley’s features a charming inner courtyard, timber-clad outdoor booths and an orangery where guests can eat, drink and relax. Dine on a feast of delicious seasonal plates like Trombetta Courgette with lemon and ricotta or whole grilled sea bream, ending with mouth-watering desserts. Pair with the Stanley’s Elderflower Collins (or one of their healthy fresh-pressed juices) to transport yourself into your own English garden sanctuary. Daylesford Organic Daylesford is the heavyweight of the locally sourced, seasonally produced, organic farm shops. This where quality organic produce meets with a bright café, serving from breakfast through to supper. Their Sloane Avenue store is one of several of their London establishments, and their menu is inspired by the rhythm of the seasons. The produce, grown on their organic farms, aims to inspire us to live in balance with nature — and it tastes good, too. The Ivy A stalwart on the Chelsea restaurant scene, The Ivy Chelsea Garden is hard to miss on the King’s Road — it’s seasonally decorated in swaths of foliage that welcome guests into its Art Deco-inspired space. Think bright, think colourful and think tasty. The Ivy serves from breakfast to dinner, offering everything from modern British cuisine to café favourites. Their rear garden is a sanctuary on sunny days, whilst the orangery and lounge bar complete the lineup. Kurobuta Chelsea Moving away from the English garden-inspired establishments and jumping straight into the world of Japanese izakayas (which translates to stay-drink-place), Kurobuta serves tapas-style plates whilst you enjoy a casual drink with friends. Feast on mouth-watering selections — from Bao buns and sushi rolls to classic street food and Japanese salads. Claude Bosi at Bibendum Located in the iconic Michelin House on the Fulham Road, Claude Bosi at Bibendum has become one of Chelsea’s most iconic restaurants. Who could miss the huge stained glass windows depicting Bibendum, commonly known as the Michelin Man? And who would want to miss French cuisine that has earned the restaurant two Michelin stars? The ground floor Oyster Bar serves lunch and dinner, and the signature restaurant offers an array of specialties, including the 10-course taster menu said to be amongst the most inventive in London. Sophie’s Steakhouse When a restaurant’s motto is “Great food, great drinks and great fun” you know you’re in for a good time. Sophie’s Steakhouse is where meat and martini lovers can rejoice, as the place is famed for its 10-ounce martinis, and their meat is sourced from British suppliers before being dry-aged for one month in house. If you’re not craving steak, opt for a hearty bowl of Moules Marinière or the superfood salad. Chucs Cafe Chic Chucs Cafe serves all day, making it a great option whether you’re catching up with friends or enjoying a romantic dinner. Start the day with a hearty breakfast bowl, or get transported to Italy for lunch and dinner, thanks to a feast of pizza, pasta and rice options. Riccardo’s Born out of a love of Tuscan-style dining and cuisine, Riccardo’s focuses on the premise that each guest should try a little bit of everything. Small, starter-size dishes form the menu, created from authentic Italian recipes — some passed down for generations. Wild Tavern Transport yourself to the Mediterranean thanks to the ingredients and flavours at Wild Tavern. The menu offers options from both land and sea, plus homemade pasta. End the meal with an amazing dessert or an espresso martini. If you want to explore these restaurants and more of Chelsea’s many charms, consider owning a second home in London. With Pacaso, you can co-own the home of your dreams.
Looking for a sunny beach-town escape? Look no further than Newport Beach. This coastal city attracts visitors with its natural beauty, yacht community and casual yet sophisticated vibe. Like other Southern California cities, Newport Beach is great to visit almost any time of the year. Ten distinct neighborhoods comprise the city, each offering a vibrant lifestyle and array of attractions. As a center of upscale shopping and fine dining, Newport Beach may not be the most obvious destination for a family-friendly California getaway. But this seaside spot has quite a few hidden gems geared for family fun. We’ve picked some of the best Newport Beach activities to entertain your whole crew. Explore the hottest family-friendly spots Before you plan your family adventure, jot down some of these top destinations within Newport Beach that anyone in your family can enjoy. Newport Pier hosts the Dory Fleet Fish Market and serves as an ideal spot for cyclists and skaters. Corona del Mar State Beach is one of the most popular shorelines in the city and a haven for surfers, sunbathers and swimmers. Balboa Island is home to charming cottages, chic coastal shops and eclectic restaurants. Picnic at a playground Sometimes all you need for a great family outing is a cooler of food, a shady spot and some fun playground equipment. Marina Park and its adjacent beach playground and picnic area on Balboa Island are a perfect place to relax and play. TeWinkle Park is in nearby Costa Mesa and offers a playground and green space for little ones, plus a skate park for older kids. Bonita Canyon Sports Park has a soccer field, baseball diamonds, basketball courts, tennis courts, pickleball courts, a playground and shaded picnic areas. Get out on the water The Pacific is calling! Enjoy a day out on the water with one of these family adventures. Davey’s Locker offers whale watching tours, deep-sea fishing excursions and more for the whole family. Duffy Electric Boat Rentals lets you be the captain of a private canopy boat while you explore Newport Beach Harbor. Marina Park Sailing Center offers stand-up paddleboard and kayak rentals to families with kids ages 6 and up. Burn off some energy If you’re looking for something that will get everyone totally tuckered out by the end of the day, try some of these energetic Newport Beach activities. Balboa Fun Zone on Balboa Island is one of Newport Beach’s most popular spots, offering carnival rides, delicious goodies and arcade games. Newport Dunes is technically a camping destination, but its inflatable water park is open to non-campers, and you can also rent kayaks and paddleboards for a full day of fun in and on the water. Murder Mystery Scavenger Hunt is a four-hour tour with a twist. Cover three miles of Newport Beach on foot while trying to be the first team to find the clues and solve the mystery. (Note: Hunts are open to all ages, but are likely too challenging for children under 12. All players under 18 must have a release signed by a parent or guardian.) Get back to nature Expand your family’s horizons by exploring botany and biology together at these beautiful and enriching Newport Beach destinations. Centennial Farm is a working farm in nearby Costa Mesa that offers interactive farm animal experiences and tours of its well-cultivated gardens. The Upper Newport Bay Nature Preserve includes 135 acres of land surrounding the bay and is open for hiking, biking and wildlife watching. The Peter & Mary Muth Interpretive Center at the reserve has interactive displays that are perfect for kids. Sherman Library & Gardens in Corona del Mar has a 2.2-acre botanical garden, complete with fountains and a koi pond. Catch a bite to eat at the on-site Cultivar Restaurant. The Environmental Nature Center is home to 3.5 acres of walking trails, plus a nature museum and a popular seasonal butterfly house. Hit the beach Whether you want to ride the waves or bask in the sun, a list of Newport Beach activities for the whole family wouldn’t be complete without mentioning the best local beaches. Crystal Cove State Park is just south of Newport Beach and includes four different beaches. Check out this map for the best spots to swim, surf, bodysurf and view tidepools. Little Corona del Mar Beach is one of the most popular beaches in Newport Beach for families, thanks to its calm waters, tidepools and no-stairs access. The Wedge at the southernmost tip of Balboa Island is a great spot to hang out and watch skilled bodysurfers catching waves up to 30 feet high. Broaden your horizons If your crew needs a little more culture in their lives, here are a few opportunities for cultural and educational enlightenment. Segerstrom Center for the Arts is a gorgeous, 3,000-seat theater in Costa Mesa that hosts theatrical performances and concerts. (Right next door, the brand-new Orange County Museum of Art is set to open in October 2022.) The Art + Soul Collective offers art classes and parties for families and friends to enjoy together. Newport Beach Public Library has seven branches throughout Newport Beach, Balboa and Corona del Mar where you can catch a family-friendly story time or curl up with a good book. Eat, shop and be merry Not all Newport Beach shops and eateries are ideal for families, but these are well suited for kids and teens. Fashion Island is a spacious outdoor mall for families needing retail therapy and a bite to eat. The fountains and high-end boutiques give it an upscale ambiance, but the fast food and mainstream retail shops keep it affordable. Ruby’s Diner got its start at Balboa Pier in Newport Beach and has grown into a small chain serving American classics. It even offers a kids menu, with favorites like pancakes, french toast and mac & cheese. Anthill shopNplay is a toys, clothing and accessories store in Westcliff Plaza. You shop while your kids romp in the play area. Need more time to see it all? With so many fun family activities to choose from, consider a second home in Newport Beach. Make memories in the sunshine when you co-own a beautiful second home in greater Orange County. Whether you're out on the town or lounging at home, Pacaso's Family-Friendly Second Homes™ make it easy to just show up and relax — from cribs and high chairs, to games, pool floaties, streaming services and more, we have you (and your kids) covered.
Sun, sand and that endless summer feeling … what’s not to love about Southern California? If you’re dreaming about buying a vacation home in California, it’s hard to know where to begin. Whether you’re looking for a quiet getaway, a big social scene or a laid-back surfer feel, every beach town is a little different. Start your search here, with five great Southern California beach towns to own a second home. Malibu The vibe: Malibu has a feel that is at once super-luxury and delightfully low-key. With 27 miles of Pacific coastline, you might spot your favorite Hollywood celebrity walking their dog along Billionaire’s Beach, but you’ll also see plenty of shaggy-haired, sun-kissed surfers catching waves at iconic Surfrider Beach. With rugged canyons directly east of the often-narrow beach, Malibu is also a paradise for nature lovers, from equestrians to hikers to bird-watchers. Home types: While Malibu is known for its exclusive beachfront properties, this beach town also boasts a wide range of property types in a variety of architectural styles. You’ll find modern waterfront condominiums, sprawling hillside retreats with views of Santa Monica Bay, and ranch-style properties set in the canyon landscape. Live like a local: Catering to the many Los Angeles residents who spend their summers just up Highway 101 in Malibu, this beach town is full of celebrity-owned restaurants as well as offshoots of upscale, big-city favorites. See if you can snag an uber-exclusive membership at Little Beach House by Soho House, dine on seaside sushi at Nobu Malibu, or try the Malibu-style fish tacos at Rande Gerber’s Cafe Habana (oh, and karaoke on Wednesday night is popular with celebs). For a lower-key social scene, spend a Sunday morning at the Malibu Farmers Market or take a surfing lesson from a local surf shop. Santa Monica The vibe: Whereas Malibu has the feel of an outdoorsy getaway, Santa Monica is the perfect Southern California vacation home destination for those who want their days to be more go-go-go than nice and slow. A coastal city just west of downtown Los Angeles, Santa Monica is a vibrant, colorful outpost featuring sprawling beaches, paved biking and running paths, and the iconic Santa Monica Pier. Santa Monica residents soak up every drop of that Southern California sunshine, whether they’re enjoying an al fresco brunch, playing beach volleyball or meandering down the Third Street Promenade to peek into its myriad of boutiques. Home types: Given the oceanside locale, pretty much every vacation home in Santa Monica is blissfully close to the beach. You’ll find classic single-family homes on tree-lined streets, modern beachfront stunners and high-rise condominium buildings with unparalleled views. No matter where you put down roots, you’ll find Santa Monica to be wonderfully walkable, with outdoor plazas and wide sidewalks that connect you with dining, shopping and entertainment. Live like a local: Santa Monica is a wellness-focused beach town — after all, it was home to the first Muscle Beach, before it was moved down the coast to Venice. Sunny days are best spent on active pursuits like lawn bowling at Douglas Park, a bluffside yoga class at Palisades Park, or walking through one of the city’s four weekly farmers markets, which have been lauded by Travel + Leisure. Newport Beach The vibe: 87,000 people call this coastal community home, perhaps because life here has the feeling of being on a permanent luxury vacation. Upscale Newport Beach boasts more than 400 restaurants, the ultra-chic Fashion Island outdoor mall, five-star hotels, and world-class golf at the oceanfront Pelican Hill Golf Club. Newport Beach also has a nautical feel: Newport Harbor is the largest recreational harbor on the West Coast, so the boating and yachting scene is prominent. Home types: Newport Beach offers a wide range of home types, with single-family homes in upscale residential areas, peaceful, bayfront living in Dover Shores, and closely arranged oceanfront condos, townhomes and freestanding houses that line the ocean boardwalk, just steps from the sand. Live like a local: With near-perfect weather and less than 10 inches of rain per year, almost every day in Newport Beach is the ideal beach day. If you ever get tired of sinking your toes in the sand and watching the waves crash (but who would?!), you can treat yourself to the variety of annual events. The Newport Beach Jazz Festival, International Film Festival, Newport Boat Show, and Christmas Boat Parade are among the best known. Laguna Beach The vibe: Tucked away on the southern edge of Orange County, with Crystal Cove State Park to the north and Dana Point to the south, the hidden gem of Laguna Beach has a friendly, small town feel. Midway between Los Angeles and San Diego, this town of 23,000 is known for its vibrant art scene, with famous art festivals, gallery exhibits, art classes and the popular First Thursdays Art Walk. There’s a strong sense of community in this coastal town, making volunteering and local events a great way to get to know your neighbors. Home types: Homes in Laguna Beach include historic estates, quaint beach bungalows and modern luxury properties. Find peace and privacy away from the beach-going crowds in one of Laguna Beach’s upscale gated communities, or choose a neighborhood like Irvine Cove, with its own private beach. Love to be in the middle of the action? The neighborhood known as The Village is among Laguna Beach’s most walkable, as it’s close to both the beach and downtown’s many amenities. If your idea of charm includes picket fences and quirky cottages, look no further than charm-filled South Laguna Village. Live like a local: A paradise for nature lovers, Laguna Beach is surrounded by unspoiled natural beauty. Spend a leisurely morning exploring the town’s seven miles of coastline, which offer your typical sandy beaches, but also sea caves, tide pools and bluffs. If you can tear yourself away from the beach, you’ll find 20,000 acres of protected wilderness. Put on your hiking shoes or hop on your mountain bike to explore hundreds of miles of trails, and you’ll be rewarded with dramatic landscapes and take-your-breath-away ocean vistas. La Jolla The vibe: Head south from Orange County and you’ll find yourself in the enclave of La Jolla, the hilly neighborhood that’s technically part of San Diego proper but has its own small-town feel. Compared to the rest of San Diego, La Jolla residents enjoy a slightly slower, more relaxed pace of life. From wandering the boutiques of downtown La Jolla to marveling at the coastline’s craggy cliffs and abundant marine wildlife, La Jolla offers Southern California living with an idyllic feel. Home types: With residents ranging from college students attending the University of California San Diego to a large population of retirees, La Jolla’s population is diverse, which means the homes are too. Beachfront neighborhoods like La Jolla Cove and Bird Rock tempt with multi-million-dollar homes (and views that can’t be beat). There are also plenty of condominiums and townhomes, plus inland properties near the university. Live like a local: The first step is making sure you’re pronouncing the neighborhood’s name right: It’s pronounced “la hoy-a.” Once you’ve got that down, you’re ready to embrace everything this seaside retreat has to offer. And while there’s plenty to do on land, La Jolla’s most exciting activities happen on the water. Snorkel among leopard sharks in the late summer (they won’t bite), take a nighttime kayak expedition to see bioluminescent creatures glowing in the dark water or compete with the local sea lion population for the best sunning rock at La Jolla Cove. Find your SoCal second home with Pacaso Your beachside oasis could be within reach when you buy your California vacation home with Pacaso. As a co-owner of a second home in Southern California, you’ll enjoy all the benefits of owning, at as little as ⅛ of the cost of full ownership.
When you think of Park City, you probably picture snow-covered peaks and a charming village that looks like it belongs in a snowglobe. And you wouldn’t be wrong. Park City is a true winter wonderland, with 7,300 acres of lift-served ski terrain, spread across two different resorts. The city’s famous slopes hosted skiing and snowboarding events for the 2002 Salt Lake City Winter Olympics. But winter isn’t the only time to enjoy this mountain retreat. No matter the month, Park City offers great activities and amenities for all kinds of vacationers. Here are five of the most popular things to do in Park City during the summer, or any other season. 1. Live out your Olympic dreams The venues built for the 2002 Winter Olympic Games are now yours to explore at the Utah Olympic Park. You can zipline high above the complex, complete a canyon ropes course, innertube down the landing hill of a nordic ski jump, or take a ride down the track used for Olympic bobsled, skeleton and luge events. And yes, you will be riding in a real bobsled, driven by a professional pilot. But this activity isn’t for the faint of heart: You could reach 60 miles per hour during your one-minute ride down the hill. Looking for something a little more low key? Take a guided tour of the venue and bring Olympic history to life. 2. Explore the great outdoors When the temperatures heat up and the snow melts down, a whole world of outdoor adventures emerge in and around Park City. Hike the Armstrong Trail for fantastic city views, explore 28 miles of mountain biking on the Mid-Mountain Trail and cool off with a river rafting excursion down the Weber River. You can even channel your inner cowboy: Multiple outfitters operate around the Park City area, so you can take in the landscape of the Wasatch Mountains on horseback. 3. Savor your dining options No matter the meal or the cuisine, Park City has an incredible array of restaurants and cafes. Start your day at Five5eeds, known for its great coffee and local, seasonal fare. Casual lunch spots abound, including plenty of healthy and vegetarian choices at Main Street’s Harvest. Try the roasted sweet potato stack or Vietnamese banh mi salad. For an upscale dinner experience, make a reservation at Firewood. The fine dining restaurant offers multi-course menu options with meals cooked over a wood fire. Fans of craft distilleries also won’t want to miss a tour at High West Distillery. If you can’t make the 30-minute drive out to the distillery, don’t worry — they have a saloon right in town. 4. Live like a local Locals and visitors alike know how to have a good time in Park City. Especially in the summer months, the town is brimming with events and festivals. On Wednesday nights in the summer, there are free concerts at the Deer Valley Resort Amphitheater. Don’t forget to pack a picnic dinner, made with ingredients you picked up at the Park City Farmers Market, which is open every Wednesday afternoon in the summer months. There’s also the Park Silly Sunday Market, offering a fun street-festival vibe with live music, a beer garden and Bloody Mary bar, and an eclectic array of food and craft vendors. 5. Immerse yourself in the arts Park City hosts the world-renowned Sundance Film Festival every winter — the largest independent film festival in the United States. But this town of roughly 8,000 is also home to another arts-related festival in the summer: the Kimball Arts Festival. For the last half-century, professional artists from all over the world apply to have their work included in the three-day event. Over 50,000 visitors flock to Main Street every August to view and buy art pieces, as well as to enjoy live music and indulge in gourmet food and drinks. Find your all-season getaway with Pacaso With a second home in Park City, you can enjoy all your favorite activities, from skiing in the winter to hiking in the summer. Discover your vacation home with Pacaso and co-own a luxury Park City second home at a fraction of the price. Check out the latest listings.
Sonoma may be known for its vineyards and wineries, but its rich history and scenic vistas also have a lot to offer. Whether you’re traveling with kids or wine just isn’t your thing, here are some things to do in Sonoma that don’t involve vino. 1. Hit the fairways Founded in 1920 and billed as a vintage golf course, the Sonoma Golf Club offers breathtaking views of the Mayacamas Mountains across its 177 rolling acres. The classic mediterranean-style clubhouse includes a steam room, spa, swimming pool and fitness room. Other top-rated area courses include The Links at Bodega Harbour on the coast with ocean views, Northwood Golf Club in Santa Rosa where you can play near towering redwoods along the Russian River, and Windsor Golf Club, which has hosted PGA and LPGA tournaments. 2. Take a hike Drink in panoramic vineyard views from the 3-mile out-and-back Sonoma Overlook Trail. The trail is a bit rocky so leave strollers (and dogs) at home. If you want to experience California’s soaring redwoods, head to Armstrong Redwoods State Natural Reserve for a hike through these inspiring giants, and enjoy views of the Russian River Valley. Sugarloaf Ridge State Park is another prime hiking destination, and home to a stunning waterfall at the headwaters of Sonoma Creek. 3. Go wild Safari West is a 400-acre wildlife preserve located just north of Santa Rosa. Take a safari in an open-air vehicle and interact with species usually seen only in zoos or Africa. Safari West also offers glamping and an onsite cafe. If you’re looking for native wildlife, Sonoma County Wildlife Rescue is home to a variety of local critters, and offers both public and private tours. 4. Get back in the saddle Channel your inner cowboy with an old-fashioned trail ride across the beautiful Sonoma countryside. Sonoma Valley Trail Rides offers equestrian experiences at the Bartholomew Estate Winery and other Sonoma vineyards. Horse N Around Trail Rides in Bodega Bay can take you on a picturesque beach trail for views of the Pacific, or give you a true Western experience with a ride through a local cattle ranch. 5. Treat the kids What child isn’t intrigued by a train? At Sonoma Traintown Railroad, ride a miniature train as it chugs through the scenic 10-acre property to a petting zoo. Other rides at this family amusement park include a carousel, Ferris wheel and other carnival-like attractions. If your child has an active imagination, turn it loose at the Children’s Museum of Sonoma County, where pretend play is king. Kids can become restaurateurs, scientists, dentists and more! 6. Get pampered When you’re looking for more relaxing things to do, Sonoma has more than 40 spas and wellness centers. Osmosis Day Spa gets top billing from TripAdvisor reviewers, with its zen gardens providing a peaceful escape from everyday life. Other local spas with rave reviews include the holistic healing Soulstice Mind + Body Spa, The Best Day Spa in Santa Rosa and Magical Massage & Inspiration Gallery, a spa that actually began inside a wine barrel! 7. Step back in time Sonoma has a rich history, and among its many fascinating sites, Mission San Francisco Solano is a must-see. Part of Sonoma State Historic Park, it is the last mission established in California (July 4, 1823). If literary history is more your thing, check out the home of novelist Jack London at Jack London State Historic Park. The park includes 29 miles of beautiful backcountry hiking. Interesting area museums include the Charles M. Schulz Museum in Santa Rosa, where you can learn all about the creator of Snoopy and his pals; the Pacific Coast Air Museum, a family-friendly exploration of aircraft in Santa Rosa; and the quirky Hand Fan Museum in Healdsburg. 8. Get an adrenaline rush Sonoma isn’t all bucolic vineyard views and peaceful wine tasting — some of the most fun things to do in Sonoma are quite exhilarating. At the Sonoma Raceway, you can watch pros or get experience on the track, and at Simraceway Performance Driving Center, you can blast down California’s longest go-kart racetrack at an adrenaline-pumping 70 mph. For nature-centered thrills, Sonoma Zipline Adventures offers both daytime and nighttime canopy tours through the forest. Or make your own way through Sonoma’s forests, mountains and ranches by venturing out on one of Sonoma’s many mountain biking trails. 9. Shop ‘til you drop Whether you’re into outlets or antiques, Petaluma is a shopper’s paradise and offers free parking garages downtown. Healdsburg is another shopping mecca, with a variety of boutiques, art galleries and artisan wares. If you want to stick closer to Sonoma, check out the shops in Sonoma Plaza. Bonus: If there are wine lovers in your group, they’ll have plenty of tasting options nearby! 10. Press your luck If you’re ready to raise the stakes on your visit to Sonoma, the Graton Resort & Casino is happy to oblige. With 100 table games and more than 3,000 slot machines, you can play the day and night away. Just north of Healdsburg, River Rock Casino is a gaming destination more suited to the “low rollers,” with its Rockin’ Pennies Room that boasts the largest collection of penny slot machines in one location. 11. Tickle your tastebuds Wine isn’t the only thing worth tasting in Sonoma. Many local wineries like Williamson Wines in Healdsburg offer brunch, lunch and dinner menus to please every palate. For an alternative to a standard meal, why not try an olive oil or chocolate tasting? Round Pond Estate, Long Meadow Ranch and The Olive Press offer olive oil tastings, and small chocolate shops like Wine Country Chocolates and The Chocolate Cow are fun places to go for a sweet treat. Enjoy Sonoma from your second home basecamp Considering all of Sonoma’s charms, you might be thinking it’s the perfect spot for a second home. Check out Pacaso’s stunning Sonoma listings, and learn how a co-ownership LLC can make your Sonoma dream home a reality.
For some, there’s nothing better than a laid back vacation at the shore — sun, waves and miles of beach to explore. Others want their time off to be bursting with city charms like bustling shopping streets, new restaurants and museums to discover. Here’s our take on what makes both great destinations — plus, an option for creating your very own home away from home. Why cities are the best 1. Food for all Great cities mean great restaurants — from high-end fine dining establishments to cozy neighbourhood cafes. Avoid touristy hot-spot areas and spend some time scoping out restaurants that really deliver the goods. 2. Soak up the culture The rhythm and energy of a city are almost palpable, especially in a capital like London. The hustle and bustle and throngs of people going about their daily life mix with a rich history and fascinating architecture. Even a short visit gives you a real sense of place. 3. See the sites Every city is home to must-see sites — and London is no exception, with Big Ben, Buckingham Palace, The London Eye, just to name a few. Check those off your to-do list if you’d like, but try exploring off the beaten path. Lesser-known pockets of any city may surprise and delight you. 4. Move like a local Tube, bus, electric bike or scooter? With a wide selection of public transport offered in most cities, exploring has never been easier. Moving like a local is also a great way to see the city in a different light. Whether you’re squeezing onto an overpacked tube at rush hour or cruising down a street with the wind on your face, there’s no wrong way to get around. 5. Ticket for one A city break is the ideal trip if you want to spend some time on your own. Linger at an outdoor cafe with a new book, watch people in a city park or snag a ticket for a hot show. There’s plenty of entertainment on offer, and London — home to approximately 250 theatres — is a great place to watch big productions like “Les Misérables" and “The Phantom of the Opera” or edgy new work from an up-and-coming playwright. Why beach holidays are the best 1. More time to relax In our fast-paced lives, having dedicated time to switch off and do nothing is a true luxury. Life seems to slow down by the water, with nowhere to be but the beach. It’s much easier to fully relax and unwind with the sound of waves in the background. 2. Fun in the sun The best beach holidays happen under sunny skies and starry nights. With an average of 320 sunny days every year, Spain’s Costa del Sol or “sunshine coast” is an ideal year-round destination. 3. Make a splash Swimming, paddle boarding, kayaking, surfing or simply walking along the shore line — a beach vacation is the perfect time to get active. In the summer months, the sea temperature in Marbella reaches the mid to high 60s, whilst over the winter it drops to a manageable 58 Fahrenheit . Spain, here we come! 4. Catch of the day A beach holiday needn’t mean you forgo eating great local food. Many of Marbella's beach restaurants serve right to sunbed, offering a wide variety of fresh seafood and delicious Spanish delights. A beach holiday is the perfect time to dine on the local catch of the day. 5. Feeling beachy There’s nothing quite like spending an entire day at the beach to leave you feeling relaxed and recharged. The potent mix of the sun’s vitamin D, alluring waves and warm sand offers the perfect cure to a stressful lifestyle. Find your perfect escape Pacaso offers amazing second homes in more than 40 destinations worldwide, so we have you covered whether you love escaping to the beach or the city. Find a co-owned second home that’s right for you.
With great weather and stunning settings, it’s no wonder that Marbella, Spain, is a golfer’s haven. The wider Andalucía region is home to more than 100 courses, earning the nickname the “costa del golf.” Marbella has 21 prestigious courses, each offering world-class golf. Here are seven of the best. Aloha Aloha Golf Club is a members-only course in Nueva Andalucia with dramatic La Concha mountain framing the skyline. Designed by Javier Arana — considered to be one of the best Spanish course designers of all time — Aloha has hosted the PGA tour three times in recent years and is known as one of the most well-kept private members courses in Spain. Zagaleta Spanning over 2,000 acres, the prestigious members-only Zagaleta Country Club has two of Spain’s most beautiful golf courses: Old Golf Course and New Golf Course. Old Course is a championship standard course in a park-like setting with wooded hills and views of Marbella, a verdant valley and the sea. New Course, opened in 2005, is a par 70 course with a challenging gradient guaranteed to leave you feeling exhilarated. Rio Real Designed in 1965 by Javier Arana, Rio Real Golf Course is one of the most established courses on our list. It has been recognized by the Royal Spanish Golf Federation as one of the best courses in Spain in terms of beauty, layout and prestige. The course is just a five-minute drive from the town center, alongside the River Rio which plays an integral part in its design. Villa Padierna Situated midway between Marbella and Estepona, Villa Padierna enjoys a sheltered, coastal environment flanked by mountains. The resort offers three courses with 54 holes for varying skill levels: the challenging Alferini, the rewarding and undulating Flamingos, and the fast and fun Tramores. There’s something for everyone. Finca Cortesin Finca Cortesin has been rated one of Spain’s best courses by Golf Digest. Olive and cork trees line the challenging 18-hole championship course designed by Cabell Robinson. The service here goes above and beyond: Players are treated to cold water and fresh fruit on the course and the resort features a Michelin-starred restaurant. The course has hosted many prestigious professional tournaments. Las Brisas Real Club de Golf Las Brisas — designed in 1968 by the celebrated Robert Trent Jones Sr. — is the ultimate stalwart on the Marbella golfing scene. Having hosted two world championships and said to be a favorite of the Spanish royal family, the club is known for exclusivity. Prospective members must apply for an interview and prove a maximum handicap of 24 for men and 32 for women. Members enjoy the botanical garden setting, excellent service and fine dining. La Quinta Designed by Ryder Cup winners Manuel Piñero and Antonio Garrido, La Quinta opened in 1989 as an 18-hole course and has since expanded into a 27-hole complex. Situated in Benahavis — also known locally as Golf Valley — the course can be enjoyed by both amateurs and professionals. Framed by a dramatic Sierra Blanca mountain range with Mediterranean Sea views, the course is divided into three nine-hole zones. “A” course (also called San Pedro) has wide fairways for bold driving; “B” course (The Ronda) is the shortest of the three nines with a tight course and challenging green; and “C” course (Guadaiza) is the longest with a tournament layout. La Quinta has hosted the Spanish Open on the Ladies European World Tour. Get in the swing with Pacaso If you’re dreaming of a luxurious second home close to some of the world’s most prestigious golf courses, check out Pacaso homes in Marbella to find your perfect retreat.
London is packed with seemingly endless forms of entertainment for both adults and kids. Samuel Johnson once said, “When a man is tired of London, he is tired of life” — simply replace “man” with “person.” Admittedly, if you partake in all of our favorite activities, you might get a bit weary! Go to the theater There are an endless variety of shows in the West End to keep little ones entranced and thrilled. Nowhere apart from Broadway comes close to the variety and level of live theater – except that in London, it’s nowhere near as expensive. Some suggestions: The Lion King: The musical’s famous phrase “Hakuna matata” means “no worries” in Swahili, and you’ll have no worries about the whole family being entertained by this glorious and inspiring production. Wicked: Everyone hates wicked witches, right? You might want to rethink that after seeing this musical that tells the story of Oz from a different perspective. Harry Potter and the Cursed Child: The Boy Who Lived lives again in this masterpiece production of a play based on an original story by J.K. Rowling, John Tiffany and Jack Thorne. See some critters London can be a wild place — especially at the city’s remarkable aquarium and zoo. SEA LIFE London Aquarium: Experience the richness of the undersea world, with displays of 500 species in 14 themed zones, from polar adventures to a coral kingdom. Kids can even touch starfish and sea anemone in the rockpool. Families looking for savings can bundle a visit to the aquarium with a trip to another top London attraction. ZSL London Zoo: London is filled with exotic creatures, but the best selection of the non-human ones are gathered here, just by Regent’s Park. From fierce felines to scary spiders, gorgeous gorillas to mischievous meerkats, this conservation and biodiversity hotspot will thrill and enthrall. Be a tourist London has a never-ending selection of things to see and do. Even if you think you’ve seen it all, you might be surprised! London Eye: Since opening in 2000, the London Eye has been an iconic Thameside attraction. Hop in a pod and rise gently but swiftly upwards for a unique and unforgettable view of the thriving city below. London Duck Tours: This hop on/off bus tour will make you feel like the ultimate tourist — and there’s nothing wrong with that! These guys will show you the sights and fill you with facts that would astonish even a native Londoner. Indoor fun This is Britain, so inevitably, it will rain at some point. Here are our suggestions to keep the kiddos entertained when outside is just not an option. Pottery Cafe: Fancy getting creative? At cafes in Battersea and Fulham, you can decorate pieces of handmade English pottery (Royal Stafford and Emma Bridgewater among them) with paints and sponges. You’ll create the perfect conversation piece and London souvenir. Warner Bros. Studio Tour London: Harry Potter stimulated the imaginations of young and old alike. This studio tour offers a glimpse behind the curtain to explore how the movie magic was created, with authentic costumes, props and sets. Expelliarmus! Madame Tussauds™ London: Get up close to some of the most important figures in history, entertainment, politics and culture — or at least wax versions of them. Take a selfie with the likenesses of Beyonce or Brad Pitt, and check out British icons like David Bowie and Queen Elizabeth II. The museum goes beyond wax, with an interactive Marvel 4D cinematic show and a Star Wars set. The London Dungeon: Brits are a lot nicer to miscreants and wrongdoers these days than they were in the past. The London Dungeon delves into London’s gory and violent past. This one isn’t for the faint of heart — or young children. Natural History Museum: Ready for a comprehensive look at life on Earth since it arose hundreds of millions of years ago? From dinosaurs to megafauna, from hairy worms to ancient humans, this museum shows the complexity and wonder of living things. Science Museum: Fancy having your mind blown in an afternoon? Then this is the place. Kids will enjoy the Wonderlab, an interactive gallery with seven zones that let you see lightning strike and travel through space under a canopy of stars. Spots for afternoon tea Nothing is more quintessentially English than afternoon tea. And London provides a plethora of family-friendly options for this classic repast. Mad Hatter's Afternoon Tea: The Sanderson London hotel retains the zany, eclectic style bestowed upon it by Philippe Stark, and this afternoon tea inspired by “Alice in Wonderland” is perfectly in keeping. The infusions and scones get curiouser and curiouser as the afternoon progresses… Charlie & The Chocolate Factory Afternoon Tea: Inspired by the iconic Roald Dahl story, this afternoon tea at the One Aldwych hotel recreates some famous classics dreamed up by Willy Wonka. Fear not, you will leave inspired and intact, unlike poor Violet Beauregarde, Mike TeeVee and Augustus Gloop. Explore the parks London is so tree-filled and verdant that it fits the UNESCO definition of a forest! (More than 20% woodland.) Take full advantage of these glorious spaces that can make you forget you’re in the centre of a metropolis. Hyde Park: This is London’s most iconic park. From Speaker’s Corner, where anyone can jump on a soapbox and speak their mind, to boating on The Serpentine, this space is quintessential London. And don’t miss the Diana Memorial Fountain, made of Cornish granite. St. James's Park: Where else could you feed pelicans in a delightful green space sandwiched between the seat of government in Whitehall and the King’s London residence at Buckingham Palace? Pelicans have lived in St. James’s Park for over 400 years, and were a gift to Charles II — and now their descendants can be seen by King Charles III. Battersea Park: Dating from the mid-1800s, this park has everything you’d want for a family wander: a boating lake, sports facilities, a mini zoo, a yummy cafe and river views. That’s the perfect family Sunday sorted. Diana Memorial Playground: A quirky, delightful and very fitting tribute to a princess who loved children, this playground has more than a million visitors every year. Don’t worry: There’s lots of seating for weary adults while the kids rush around exploring the pirate ship and other attractions! If you want to explore these family-friendly attractions, consider owning a second home in London. With Pacaso, you can co-own the home of your dreams and create lifelong memories with your family.
Ideally located south of West Palm Beach and north of vibrant urban hubs like Fort Lauderdale and Miami, Delray Beach offers a melting pot of food cultures and styles. Whether you’re looking for a casual spot to gather with friends, the perfect date night destination or you just want to sample something new, these six Delray Beach restaurants are yours for the taking. City Oyster & Sushi Bar Calling all seafood lovers. This downtown restaurant serves up an ever-changing menu of fresh oysters from both the East Coast and West Coast. It’s the perfect date night restaurant, thanks to a huge wine list, full sushi menu and plenty of ambience — the decor at City Oyster is all antique brick, tin ceilings and oak floors. Oh, and be sure to save room for dessert: An in-house bakery is located above the restaurant. Cabana El Ray The greater Miami area is simply bursting with Cuban culture, and in Delray Beach, Cabana El Rey is the best place to sample authentic Cuban and Nuevo Latino cuisine. Favorite dishes include the seafood ceviche, tostones rellenos (fried green plantains with chicken sofrito), empanadas and sea bass. The coconut brownies are the perfect way to end your meal. Dada Every visit to Dada is deliciously unique. Located in a historic house downtown, each room in the restaurant has a different theme and features works from local artists. On a warm evening, the outdoor patio is the place to be, with hanging lanterns, large trees and live music. The new American cuisine features a wide range of interesting options like braised short ribs, bolognese, pork schnitzel and grilled artichokes. Papa’s Tapas If you’re the kind of person who wants to try a little bit of everything instead of committing to one entree, head to Papa's Tapas. The charming family-owned restaurant in the Pineapple Grove District has a menu full of small plates, including traditional Spanish tapas fare like croquetas, calamari, meatballs Andalucia and sauteed octopus. Bring a few friends and dig into the Instagram-worthy paella, which includes seafood, chicken and vegetarian options. El Camino Satisfy your craving for flavorful Mexican fare at El Camino, where everything on the menu is made in house, including tortillas and sauces. Choose from creative takes on Mexican favorites, like pork belly tacos with pineapple slaw, squash blossom quesadillas and queso fundido with roasted mushrooms. Pair it with your favorite tequila from a list of literally hundreds of options. Can’t get enough of El Camino? Come back for late-night happy hour, available from midnight to 2 a.m. nightly. Lionfish The Delray Beach outpost of the famous Lionfish Seafood restaurant in San Diego, Lionfish Delray is the place to enjoy the freshest sea-to-table fare, caught in an environmentally responsible way. The menu showcases simple but sophisticated preparations of fresh swordfish, scallops, snapper and lobster. You can even sample the namesake lionfish, an invasive species that’s ravaging the Caribbean — but it tastes delicious in a citrus-infused ceviche, so why not do your part to remove these pests from the ocean? Dine anytime in Delray Beach As the co-owner of a luxury second home in Delray Beach, you’ll have endless opportunities to get to know the local food scene and discover your favorite restaurant. Find your luxury home away from home in South Florida today.
When you’re planning a winter getaway, there’s nowhere quite like Colorado — and the ski resort towns of Vail and Aspen are two of the Centennial State’s most famous destinations for skiers. But how do you decide which one to visit (or where to set down vacation-home roots)? After all, they’re both nestled in the Rocky Mountains, they both get over 300 inches of snow each year, and they’re both world-class ski and snowboarding destinations. Here’s our quick rundown to help you decide. Why choose Vail For convenience The town of Vail is just 100 miles from Denver, making it a convenient getaway for both Denver-area residents and travelers flying into Denver International Airport. You can drive yourself along scenic Interstate 70 into Vail, hire a driver or take a shuttle. American Airlines also operates flights between 14 U.S. cities and Eagle County Regional Airport, which is just 35 minutes west of Vail. Whatever transportation option you choose, it's easy to escape to Vail, even if only for a couple of days. To find ski runs for every level Vail is the fourth-largest ski resort in North America, behind Whistler Blackcomb, Park City and Big Sky. It’s known for its seven-mile-wide back bowls and epic powder, but this mountain resort isn’t just for double black diamond skiers. There are over 5,000 acres to explore, with beginner, intermediate and advanced runs. And since the resort sits at an elevation of 11,570 feet, the ski season is blissfully long so you’ll have plenty of time to improve your skills. For a laid-back atmosphere Compared to Aspen (and other winter resort towns), the vibe in Vail is decidedly laid-back. After a long day on the mountain, there’s no need to get all dressed up for dinner or an apres-ski cocktail. The dining scene in Vail has a little bit of everything, from casual diners and local coffee shops to fine dining restaurants. Vail’s hometown breweries are also a popular place to relax after a day in the snow or the shops. For a (slightly) more affordable vacation Simply put, it’s hard to find bargains in Colorado ski resorts, especially in the peak winter season. Accommodations and meals can be pricey, and you’ll pay a premium the closer you are to the resort itself. But savvy and spendthrift travelers can snag more affordable hotels or vacation rentals with a bit of advance planning. The spendy lift ticket though? There’s no getting around that. Why choose Aspen To avoid the crowds Because it’s farther from Denver (a roughly four-hour drive without traffic), Aspen is quite a bit less crowded than Vail. And since Aspen is home to four separate ski resorts, there’s room for everyone. Compared to Vail and other Colorado resort towns, in Aspen you may enjoy shorter lift lines, less crowded restaurants and emptier (heated) sidewalks. For variety in skiing Aspen’s four ski resorts are Aspen Mountain, Aspen Highlands, Buttermilk and Snowmass. Aspen Mountain is the favorite of many locals, but it’s not beginner-friendly. In fact, there’s not a single beginner run on the mountain, and 65% of its runs are ranked advanced or expert. Aspen Highlands is also popular with intermediate to advanced skiers and snowboarders. Beginners tend to head to Buttermilk, which features plenty of well-groomed beginner runs. Snowmass is the largest of them all, with plenty of diverse terrain. It's perhaps best known for Long Shot, an incredible five-mile-long intermediate run that’ll leave your legs shaking. For mountain town charm Originally a silver mining town in the 1880s, Aspen is bursting with small-town charm and plenty of history. The Aspen Historical Society offers guided walking tours of the town’s landmarks, including the 130-year-old Wheeler Opera House and the iconic Hotel Jerome. Of course, plenty of Aspen’s charm can be absorbed just spending a snowy afternoon walking through town. To have an upscale experience Aspen has a chic, sophisticated feel, with plenty of luxury shopping, fine dining, five-star accommodations and the best après-ski scene, according to Conde Nast Traveler. While it only has roughly 6,600 year-round residents, in the winter Aspen becomes a see-and-be-seen destination for the wealthy and famous. Hollywood legends Jack Nicholson, Goldie Hawn and Kevin Costner all own second homes in Aspen. You can’t go wrong either way Whether Vail or Aspen is more your style, there’s so much to love about winter in the Rocky Mountains. Find your dream second home in Vail or Aspen with Pacaso, and enjoy hassle-free co-ownership of your own mountain home.
Both Aspen and Breckenridge are known for epic peaks and alpine atmospheres, but which is a better choice for your ski vacation this winter? To help you decide, we’ve dug into what each of these Colorado towns has to offer and how they differ. Location, location, location First, let’s talk logistics. How easy is it to get to Aspen vs. Breckenridge? Breckenridge is about a 90-minute drive from Denver, making it easily accessible whether you live in the city or you’re flying into the Denver airport. But Breckenridge’s proximity to a big city means its slopes can get pretty crowded during peak season. Aspen, about four hours from Denver, has its own small airport serviced by a limited number of major airlines. You might pay more for the convenience of flying in, but it’s nice to land right in the middle of the action. Ski space When it comes to skiable acres, Aspen comes out the clear winner. Aspen’s core village consists of three ski resorts — Aspen Highlands, Aspen Mountain and Buttermilk — which comprise 2,185 skiable acres across 238 runs. Add in Aspen Snowmass, just 30 minutes away, and you have another 3,132 acres and 94 runs, giving you a total of 5,317 skiable acres across 332 runs within a 10-mile radius. Breckenridge comes in at 2,908 skiable acres across 155 runs, but it’s all contained within a single ski resort, so you have more options than you might have at a single Aspen resort. Breckenridge also has five peaks, while Aspen has four. Aspen has a total of 37 lifts vs. 34 at Breckenridge, but Breckenridge also boasts the tallest chairlift in North America, the Imperial Express SuperChair. Bang for your buck Skiers and their money are soon parted, but if you’d like to postpone the sad farewell, Breckenridge will keep you and your cash together longer. For the 2021-22 ski season, a Breckenridge lift pass will cost you $80-$150 a day, while at Aspen you’ll spend $120-$180. According to ChampionTraveler.com, this price trend also holds true for lodging in the two Colorado towns. Expect to pay an average of $203 a night in Aspen vs. Breckenridge, where lodging averages around $132 per night. Alpine atmosphere and fun for non-skiers Not everyone is a fan of shredding the slopes, and fortunately both Aspen and Breckenridge have loads of fun winter activities for any non-skiers in your group. Check out opportunities for fat biking, ice skating, snowmobiling, dog sledding, fly fishing and more in and around both towns. Breckenridge and Aspen are also walkable, with downtown shopping, galleries and museums when you need a break from the slopes. Aspen is a favorite ski destination among celebrities, so it has a more upscale, posh feel. Breckenridge is more laid-back, but still well-maintained and charming. Mountain munchies When it comes to food, Breckenridge and Aspen offer a multitude of dining options, though Aspen leans toward fine dining while Breckenridge has a variety of casual eateries. If you’re looking for slopeside service, keep in mind that Breckenridge has only one full-service restaurant on the mountain, while Aspen has several. Winter events and festivities Finding a great ski town is about more than just the snow. Breckenridge and Aspen really shine when it comes to each town’s annual events and festivals. During the winter months, Breckenridge is best known for its tree lighting and Race of the Santas to kick off the holiday season. December also brings Breckenridge’s four-day Ullr Fest, a raucous celebration of the Norse god associated with skiing. Ullr Fest events include a polar plunge, town bonfire, parade and plenty of horned Viking headgear. January brings the International Snow Sculpture Championships, and the town hosts its own one-day Mardi Gras in February. To help plan your trip, check out the town’s event calendar. Aspen takes its Ullr appreciation to a whole new level with family-friendly Ullr Nights every Friday from December to April at Snowmass. Enjoy gondola rides, night tubing and snow biking, bonfires, s’mores and more. The end of December brings the festive 12 Days of Aspen, followed by the Winter X Games in January and the Bud Light Spring Jam in March, with live concerts downtown and competitions on the mountain. Plan your stay around these and other events. The bottom line When it comes to Aspen vs. Breckenridge, where should you go skiing this winter? It depends on what you’re looking for. You’ll spend a little more on travel, food, lodging and skiing at Aspen, and you might have fewer crowds to contend with. Breckenridge doesn’t have quite as many acres to ski and fewer dining options than Aspen, but it’s also less expensive, easier to access and has a more laid-back vibe. The good news is that no matter which town you pick, both have plenty of slopes, runs and lifts to keep you busy, and both have enough festivals, eateries and fun activities to make your trip memorable. Learn more If you’re dreaming of a second home in either of these ski destinations, check out Pacaso listings in Aspen and Breckenridge, and find out how Pacaso’s co-ownership LLC model can turn your dream into a reality.
Life in Palm Springs comes with a lot of perks. The mountains offer a stunning backdrop for days on the golf course or seeing the sights. And 350 days of sunshine each year make it an ideal spot for indoor/outdoor living. Whether you’re searching for a second home to call your own or planning a trip to one of the town’s several resorts, Palm Springs is a true hot spot (and not just because it’s located in the desert). These seven stunning spaces showcase some of the great living this Southern California city has to offer. Desert paradise Find your paradise at this head-turning 4-bedroom Palm Springs Pacaso. The home's indoor/outdoor layout make the San Jacinto Mountains a stunning natural backdrop. Glass doors open to expand the living space and provide access to the home’s sparkling lap pool. With more than 50,000 pools in greater Palm Springs, the area boasts more swimming holes per capita than anywhere else in the country. Pacaso listing: Amber — Palm Springs | $660,000 for ⅛ ownership Outdoor oasis When a drop of rain falls in Palm Springs, you’ll know about it — it’s often headline news. But you won’t feel it underneath the grand veranda which looks out on this one-acre Old Las Palmas estate. Rain or shine, this Pacaso’s covered living space offers a cool escape from the desert heat. Pacaso listing: The Oasis — Palm Springs | $873,000 for ⅛ ownership Contemporary masterpiece The amenities in this Palm Springs Pacaso is reminiscent of a five-star resort. An open floor plan, round kitchen, multiple entertaining areas and views of the pool provide an inviting an and luxurious space to sink into the SoCal lifestyle. Pacaso listing: Mountain Vista — Indian Wells | $355,000 for ⅛ ownership Courtyard brilliance Casa Del Sol's walled courtyard is perfect for watching the stars — or entertaining them. Just under two hours from Hollywood, Palm Springs has long been a place celebrities love to live and play. This modern, new-construction home offers the ultimate privacy and relaxation with indoor/outdoor spaces and a zero-edge pool. Pacaso listing: Casa Del Sol — Palm Springs | $495,000 for ⅛ ownership Second home living in Palm Springs Palm Springs is a true desert oasis and an ideal place to own a second home. The benefits and beauty of life in this historic city can be yours throughout the year when you own a Pacaso. We simplify finding, buying and owning a second home so you can do more than just visit this sought-after California sanctuary. Check out our listings to get started.
Thanks to its South Florida location, Delray Beach boasts a blissful 235 days of sunshine a year. But even in paradise, raindrops occasionally fall. While a rainy day in Delray Beach may ruin your plans for a day at the beach, there are plenty of indoor activities to enjoy. Here are some of our favorite ways to wait out the weather. Browse the Delray Beach Market Spanning 150,000 square feet in the heart of downtown, the Delray Beach Market is a great place to spend a rainy morning, afternoon or evening. This food hall hosts dozens of food and drink vendors, from craft beers and burgers to pizza and ice cream. But it’s more than just a place to grab a bite. On any given day, the market is bursting with live music, happy hours, art pop-ups and community events. Visit a retro arcade Treat yourself to a dose of nostalgia at Silverball Retro Arcade. It’s actually a working arcade and a museum built in one. It boasts more than 100 video games and pinball machines, dating as far back as the 1930s and spread across 9,000 square feet. Best of all, you pay a flat fee for an hour or day pass, instead of having to pick and choose games based on how many quarters you have left! There’s also a weekday afternoon happy hour with food and drink specials you won’t want to miss. Learn about the history of Palm Beach County Learn about this area’s rich history at the Palm Beach County History Museum, housed in a converted 1916 courthouse. Admission is free, and the permanent People and Places exhibit is a perennial favorite. Additionally, the Historical Society unveils a new special exhibit each fall. They also host a wide variety of special events and offer free guided tours. Have a science day with the whole family The Cox Science Center and Aquarium, located just up the coast in West Palm Beach, is an ideal destination for budding scientists. This interactive museum has permanent exhibits about weather, outer space and the flora and fauna of South Florida, as well as rotating exhibits. There’s a special playground for the youngest visitors as well as a planetarium. You’ll also want to spend some time checking out the 10,000-gallon aquarium, which houses native fish, stingrays, eels and seahorses. Enjoy a night of entertainment A mainstay since 1947, the Delray Beach Playhouse hosts all kinds of entertainment acts, including live music, tribute bands, Broadway shows, comedy acts and movies. Would you rather be a show than watch one? The on-site Playhouse Arts Academy offers acting, singing and dance classes for aspiring performers of all ages. Try a new restaurant South Florida is incredibly diverse, which means that the culinary scene in Delray Beach is top-notch — sample Mexican pork belly tacos and Cuban seafood ceviche. Delray Beach is also a wonderful place for fresh seafood at oyster bars, sushi restaurants and upscale sea-to-table establishments. Enjoy Delray Beach, rain or shine When you’re a regular in Delray Beach, one rainy day won’t get you down. You can wait out the weather from the comfort of your luxury Pacaso second home. Then, once the storm passes, you can get back to soaking up that South Florida sunshine.
Picture a classic California boardwalk: A towering wooden roller coaster, brightly colored amusement park rides and a humming arcade — all set against a backdrop of palm trees and the blue ocean. You’ve just conjured up the Santa Cruz Beach Boardwalk, an icon of the central California coast since 1907. Thinking of taking a trip to this postcard-perfect family destination? Here are five things you need to know. Getting there The Santa Cruz Beach Boardwalk is just 10 minutes from downtown Santa Cruz, a beach town of 62,000 located 70 miles south of San Francisco and 35 miles north of Monterey that's known for sandy beaches, redwood forests and great surfing. But the boardwalk is an anchor of waterfront fun. Especially in the summer months and on weekends, the boardwalk area can get crowded and finding parking can be a challenge, so plan to arrive early in the day. Attractions The boardwalk is home to two National Historic Landmarks: the 1911 Looff Carousel and the 1924 Giant Dipper wooden roller coaster. These two attractions are a great place to start your day of fun. After you’ve crossed those two classic rides off your list, you’ll find a wide range of rides for everyone from little kids to serious thrill-seekers. Favorites include the Sea Swings, Sky Glider, bumper cards, Wave Rider slide and the Cyclone. The rides are just the beginning, though. There are two on-site arcades, miniature golf, laser tag, bowling and a spooky Fright Walk, which takes brave visitors under the Boardwalk for some haunting fun. Be sure to save time to test your luck on a few classic carnival games on the Midway. Try long-shot basketball, knock down some clowns, bust some balloons or knock over a stack of milk bottles in pursuit of stuffed animal prizes. Admission to the boardwalk itself is free, but you’ll have to pay for the rides and other attractions. Savvy visitors and those who enjoy the attractions regularly may want to opt for the unlimited wristbands or even a season pass. The food It’s always best to arrive at the boardwalk hungry, as the classic carnival fare is almost impossible to resist. Treat yourself to corn dogs, garlic fries, turkey legs or pizza. Ready to indulge your sweet tooth? Choose from saltwater taffy, churros, funnel cakes, deep-fried Twinkies, ice cream in freshly made waffle cones, and more. You’ll also find espresso, fresh-squeezed lemonade and local craft beers. Special events No matter the time of year you visit, the Santa Cruz Beach Boardwalk offers plenty of special events. Choose from fun runs, cultural events, outdoor concerts, movie nights, food and drink-related events, and holiday celebrations. Visiting during non-peak times can mean great discounts and perks, such as discounted arcade games on weekdays and Monday night football specials. In the winter months, you can reserve a private fire pit so you can stay warm while enjoying your favorite snacks and treats. The beach Despite its proximity to the action-packed boardwalk, the beach here is delightfully clean and primed for family fun. Enjoy a wide sandy shoreline, warmer-than-expected water and ample space for recreation like boogie boarding and beach volleyball. If you’re traveling with young kids, head for the area where the San Lorenzo River meets Monterey Bay. It’s a great place for the youngest of beach lovers to splash around in small pools of calm water. Beach facilities include public restrooms and lifeguards in the busy summer months. Enjoy life on the California coast Santa Cruz makes the perfect home base for enjoying everything Central California has to offer. With a luxury Pacaso second home in Santa Cruz, you’ll have ample time to enjoy the fun and dynamic scene on the boardwalk, plus explore nearby coastal towns, historical sites and the rugged natural beauty that makes the region so special.
With year-round sunshine, iconic beaches and picturesque mountains, Southern California might just be paradise. When you add vibrant cities, world-class dining, nightlife and outdoor recreation, SoCal offers endless possibilities for visitors and locals alike. Comprising the lower third of the Golden State, Southern California includes Los Angeles, Santa Barbara, Ventura County, Orange County, Palm Springs and San Diego. If you’re making a list of things to do in Southern California, there’s one thing you should keep in mind: You won’t be able to fit it all into one trip. Here’s our list of what to do in SoCal to get you started. World-renowned beaches People from all over the country (and beyond) flock to Southern California for the perfect combination of sunny weather and beautiful beaches. Whether you prefer the peaceful coastline of Santa Barbara County, the world-famous Santa Monica Pier or the vintage SoCal vibe of San Diego’s Ocean Beach, you could easily spend a whole vacation just deciding which beach is your favorite. Year-round hiking Thanks to the diversity of landscapes in Southern California, the region is home to some of the best hiking trails in the country. A favorite is Ryan Mountain Trail in Joshua Tree National Park, located just east of Palm Springs. This three-mile out-and-back hike is a challenge, with 1,050 feet of elevation gain in less than a mile and a half. At the peak, you’ll be rewarded with sweeping views of the park. A popular dog-friendly hike is Brush Canyon Trail up to the Hollywood sign in Los Angeles. This 1,050-foot climb takes you to the peak of Mount Lee. From there, you can see the Griffith Observatory, the Lake Hollywood Reservoir, the Santa Monica Mountains and Dodger Stadium. Watersports In Southern California, you can get on or in the water almost any time of year, in many different ways. Sailing Just because you’re at the beach, you don’t have to stay on the shore. You can take a ferry or a cruise from Long Beach to Catalina Island on a day trip. Catalina is just one of the offshore places to visit in Southern California — you can also sail from Oxnard to the Channel Islands in about an hour. Surfing Nothing says California quite like surf culture. Some of the best surfers in the world hail from these beaches. Throughout the region, you can watch surfers catching waves, with the most challenging swells often happening around Orange County’s Huntington Beach Pier, Windansea Beach in La Jolla and Surfrider Beach in Malibu. Want to try surfing for yourself? San Onofre State Beach in San Clemente, dubbed “Old Man’s Beach,” is a great place to learn how to surf. San Onofre offers an inclusive, beginner-friendly atmosphere and remains one of the friendliest surf communities in the nation. Kayaking A short drive north of San Diego, La Jolla Cove is a dream destination for kayakers of all skill levels. A 15-minute paddle out into the cove provides a glimpse into sea life that can’t be found near the shore, including sea turtles, seals and exotic fish. Shopping, restaurants and nightlife Southern California is home to several Michelin-starred restaurants, as well as legendary nightlife districts like Los Angeles’s famous Sunset Strip and San Diego’s Gaslamp Quarter. The region also has more than its share of high-end retailers. Laguna Beach, Huntington Beach and La Jolla are all known for their exclusive boutiques, not to mention Rodeo Drive in Beverly Hills. A better way to see it all One visit to Southern California is never enough. When you own a second home in Southern California, you can spend more time exploring. Pacaso co-ownership puts your SoCal vacation home within reach.
When the summer sun is shining, the Jersey Shore calls. Pack your SPF and your towel and head out in search of your favorite beach on the over 140 miles of Atlantic Ocean coastline in the Garden State. Not sure where to start? Here are five perennial favorites. 1. Asbury Park Beach Known for: A classic wooden boardwalk and plenty of songs written about the beach by New Jersey’s own Bruce Springsteen. The vibe: On any summer weekend, you’ll find the beach packed with families jockeying for the perfect spot to cool off. This family-friendly beach has plenty of activities, including a classic pinball arcade, oceanfront mini-golf, and enough food trucks and stalls that everyone can get just what they want for lunch. If your family includes the four-legged variety, you’ll be happy to know that in the off season, the beach is pet-friendly — nearby Wonder Bar even hosts a regular Yappy Hour. Don’t miss: The Stone Pony has been the place to enjoy live music in Asbury Park since 1974. In the summer, they move outdoors, hosting an oceanfront concert series on the Stone Pony Summer Stage. 2. Avalon Known for: Endless opportunities for outdoor recreation, whether your idea of a good time is kayaking, paddle boarding, fishing, surfing or just frolicking along the white sand beach. The vibe: Avalon is a picture-perfect beach town, filled with pristine shoreline, large dunes and stately beach homes. The town’s motto is “cooler by a mile,” which ostensibly refers to Avalon’s position one mile farther into the Atlantic than other nearby barrier islands, but you can’t deny that it has an upscale feel. Don’t miss: Walk the Avalon jetty, accessible on the northern side of town. The wide, quarter-mile-long jetty gives you incredible views of the coastline. On a clear day, you can see all the way to Atlantic City. 3. Beach Haven Known for: Pristine beaches and crystal-clear waters, ideal for fishing, swimming and beach combing; a small-town feel; everything you need within walking distance. The vibe: Beach Haven, located on the southern end of Long Beach Island, has all the trappings of a classic beach getaway: charming local shops and food vendors, quirky local signage and a popular amusement park. Don’t miss: The town, founded in 1874, boasts a wonderful array of well-kept Victorian architecture. Tour pre-1900s homes and buildings alongside a local guide. 4. Ocean Grove Known for: A quaint and quiet feel with a century-old religious tradition and unique tent houses on the shore. The vibe: Once known as a summertime religious retreat, Ocean Grove is now popular with families who want to enjoy the Jersey Shore without all the ruckus. With a laid-back and welcoming feel, Ocean Grove is a magnet for artists, writers and the LGBTQ community. Don’t miss: Set aside an afternoon to explore the Main Avenue Galleria, where you can shop for fine art, pottery, jewelry, mosaics and wood carvings from local artists. You can even embrace your inner artist with an art class, available for all ages and abilities. 5. Cape May Known for: Being New Jersey’s original seaside resort — and its award-winning beaches. The vibe: The Cape May Historic District is listed on the National Register of Historic Places, so you can expect a classic beach getaway with ample dining options, a low-key feel and plenty of summer events, among them a strawberry festival, air show, jazz festival and harvest festival. Don’t miss: Walk through town early in the morning to marvel at the pastel colors and intricate details of the many 19th-century homes sprinkled through town. Feeling brave? Take the Historic Haunts tour of the Emlen Physick Estate, known as Cape May’s original haunted house. Lay claim to your favorite New Jersey beach Every Jersey Shore beach offers something different — which will be your favorite? Co-owning a Pacaso home in a New Jersey beach town is a great way to take in everything this East Coast paradise has to offer.
Isle of Palms — a narrow barrier island just a short drive from Charleston, South Carolina — is an idyllic getaway with plenty to do. Explore the beautiful beaches, enjoy outdoor recreation or indulge in the local cuisine. Not sure where to start? Here are six must-do activities for any trip to Isle of Palms. Hit the beach While Isle of Palms is only seven miles long, there are more than 50 beach access points, so you’re always just a short walk from sinking your toes in the sand. Residents and local officials are dedicated to keeping the beaches pristine, which means you’ll enjoy crystal-clear waters and litter-free sands. Best of all, you don’t have to lug around a lot of stuff. Isle of Palms County Park rents beach chairs and umbrellas, and sells snacks and drinks. Beaches on the islands are also dog friendly, with leash rules varying depending on the season. Explore the barrier island ecosystem Isle of Palms has an enviable location adjacent to the longest stretch of untouched coastline on the Eastern seaboard. Immerse yourself in the natural beauty of the marshland with a kayaking or stand-up paddleboarding expedition. Local outfitters like Coastal Expeditions offer guided tours through Morgan Creek and connecting salt marsh estuaries. Keep your eyes peeled for dolphins, sea turtles, pelicans, egrets, herons and more. If you’d rather explore at your own pace, kayak rentals are available around the island. Enjoy live music at The Windjammer An Isle of Palms icon for a half-century, The Windjammer is one part beach bar, one part music and event venue. On any given day, stop by for appetizers, burgers, seafood and cold drinks — all served up with ocean views, of course. And, it’s dog friendly! Be sure to check out the events calendar for local and traveling musical groups as well as cover bands. The Windjammer also regularly hosts beach volleyball tournaments. Tee off at Wild Dunes Resort The centerpieces of Isle of Palms’ Wild Dunes Resort are undoubtedly the signature golf courses designed by Tom Fazio. The Links Course and the Harbor Course have been named among the best courses in the state by Golf Digest. All 36 holes are open to the public and designed to challenge players at every skill level — and the incredible water views don’t disappoint. Sample fresh Lowcountry cuisine Lowcountry cooking in Isle of Palms is more than just a meal — it’s a part of the culture. Chefs take inspiration from West African cooking brought to the area during the slave trade and continued in the Gullah culture, along with English, French and Caribbean influence. Of course, fresh local seafood like shrimp, clams, crab and fish play an important role. Classic must-try dishes include Frogmore Stew, a combination of spicy sausage, shrimp and corn on the cob; shrimp and grits; and hoppin’ john, a simple dish of black-eyed peas, rice, bacon and onion. Popular Lowcountry restaurants include Coastal Provisions, Acme Lowcountry Kitchen and Long Island Cafe. Take an excursion to historic Charleston If you can tear yourself away from the beach for a day, Isle of Palms is just a short drive from historic downtown Charleston. With over 300 years of history, Charleston is full of stories. Popular stops include the Patriots Point Naval & Maritime Museum, the Old Slave Mart Museum and Fort Sumter National Monument, where the Civil War started in 1861. Self-guided and guided downtown tours are a great way to get the lay of the land — you may even want to take a ghost tour to discover the city’s haunted past. Find your retreat in South Carolina Pacaso can help you own a Lowcountry home away from home. With a second home near Charleston, you’ll have everything you need to explore the Isle of Palms and the rest of the Palmetto State, without having to worry about maintenance and upkeep.
Whether you’re looking for flower-filled meadows, roaring waterfalls or mountain vistas, hiking in Telluride does not disappoint. We’ve compiled a list of the most popular Telluride hikes, ranging from easy riverside strolls to challenging rocky climbs. And just like Pacaso, most of these trails are dog friendly. According to alltrails.com, leashed dogs are permitted except on Via Ferrata. Easy Telluride hikes Bridal Veil Falls — It’s virtually impossible to find a list of the best Telluride hikes that doesn’t mention the Bridal Veil Falls Trail. This 3.6-mile out-and-back trek ends at the top of Colorado’s tallest waterfall (365 feet) and can also be accessed by bike or four-wheel-drive vehicle. Bear Creek Trail — Accessible right from downtown Telluride, Bear Creek Trail is a 4.4-mile out-and-back trail that takes you through the Bear Creek Preserve to the 80-foot Bear Creek Falls. Keep in mind that this trail gets busy during warmer months, so plan to hike early in the day for fewer crowds. Cornet Creek — If you’re looking for short and sweet, Cornet Creek is your hike. The trailhead is conveniently located at the end of North Aspen Street in downtown Telluride. Enjoy a half-mile out-and-back hike to the beautiful Cornet Falls, but be prepared: The trail is steep, so it’s best to wear sturdy shoes. San Miguel River — With multiple access points from downtown Telluride, the 3.3-mile San Miguel River Trail lets you choose your distance. The flat terrain is easy for hikers of all levels, but the trail can get busy as it’s quite popular with runners. Moderate Telluride hikes Blue Lake — There are few better ways to spend a day in the Colorado wilderness than taking this Telluride hike through an old-growth forest to a sparkling subalpine lake. A round trip to Blue Lake is about 5.25 miles, and majestic views of mountain peaks along the way make the 2,000-foot elevation gain worth every step. Hope Lake — If you’re a lake lover, then Hope Lake should definitely be on your list of top Telluride hikes. The road to reach the trailhead is a bit rough (leave the sedan at home and bring the SUV) but the 6-mile roundtrip lake trek is rewarding, with waterfalls and beautiful mountain views. Jud Wiebe Trail — Another trail that’s easily accessible from town, the 2.7-mile Jud Wiebe loop offers amazing views of forests, meadows and mountains. It’s one of the earliest trails to be clear of snow, so it’s perfect for taking advantage of warmer early spring days. Challenging Telluride hikes Sneffels Highline — If you’re looking for a challenging trek with top-of-the-world views, plan a full day to experience the 13-mile Sneffels Highline loop. Be prepared for loose rocks and potentially deep snow, even during the summer months. Ballard Mountain — Who needs a stair climber when you have Ballard Mountain? You’ll gain close to 4,000 feet of elevation on this 6.4-mile out-and-back trail, but you’ll also be rewarded with stunning views of Telluride below. Be prepared for couloir crossings and snow on this trail as well. Via Ferrata — Italian for “Iron Way,” Via Ferrata may only be 3 miles long, but that doesn’t include the treacherous vertical ascents up rock faces. This trail/climb is only for those who are adept at both hiking and rock climbing. Those without helmets and harnesses need not apply!
Like something out of a postcard, Santa Cruz is a quintessential California beach town. With a vibrant surf culture, wide stretches of pristine coastline and an endless array of recreational opportunities, Santa Cruz is a must-visit. Not sure where to start? Pack your beach bag and come along to these six beautiful beaches in and around Santa Cruz. 1. Main Beach As the name implies, Main Beach is in the heart of all the action: the Santa Cruz Beach Boardwalk. Arguably the city’s most popular destination, the boardwalk boasts an historic carousel, wooden roller coaster, classic arcade and thrill rides. The beach itself is bustling with activity, with people of all ages swimming, playing beach volleyball, sunbathing and picnicking. It’s a great spot for families, as the waves are generally calm and predictable, and there are public restrooms and the beach is staffed with lifeguards in the busy summer months. 2. Natural Bridges State Beach Looking for fewer crowds and more natural beauty? Drive a few miles up the coastline to Natural Bridges State Beach. Named for the stunning natural rock bridge just a short distance offshore, this beach is best at low tide, when tide pools are ripe for exploring. Just keep an eye on the tide because you won’t want to get trapped as parts of the beach become inaccessible as the water rises. This beautiful spot is a great place to whale watch and witness the monarch butterfly migration every fall and winter. 3. Capitola Beach Capitola Beach, at the north end of Monterey Bay, is best known for the brightly colored, terraced buildings lining the beach. (They make a perfect backdrop for photos.) Waves are usually gentle here, thanks to its position in a small cove. There’s plenty of sand for building castles and sunbathing, but if you decide you want to explore, you can head to the fishing pier or check out the restaurants and shops within walking distance. 4. Four Mile Beach Named because it’s just four miles from Santa Cruz, Four Mile Beach is simply gorgeous. The beach features rugged cliffs, wave-formed rocky sculptures and dramatic crashing waves. It’s located within Wilder Ranch State Park, so there’s plenty to explore, including streams, redwood forests and pasturelands. 5. Pleasure Point Beach Unless you’re visiting at low tide, there’s not much sand to speak of at Pleasure Point Beach. However, there’s a great reason to visit: It’s the perfect vantage point to watch surfers at the Hook, one of Santa Cruz’s most famous surf spots. Bring a picnic or snack and watch the locals show off their skills. 6. Seacliff State Beach Located in nearby Aptos, Seacliff State Beach is popular with runners and beachcombers, as it connects to neighboring New Brighton State Beach and Sunset Beach to form a 12-mile stretch. While this beach features sweeping ocean views, plenty of sand and a fishing pier, it has one attraction that’s truly unique: A sinking ship. Right off the end of the pier you’ll find the SS Palo Alto. Originally built for World War I but never used, it was decommissioned and turned into an entertainment complex. When the Depression hit, it was abandoned and today is a habitat for coastal birds and marine life. Find your favorite Santa Cruz beach Every Santa Cruz local has their favorite local beach. Which one will be yours? When you become a co-owner of a Pacaso second home in Santa Cruz, you’ll have ample time to explore every stretch of coastline and pick your favorite.
With its Old Hollywood charm and understated contemporary glamor, Palm Springs is the perfect getaway if you’re looking to kick back and relax in the sun. But buying a second home in Palm Springs isn’t only about the laid-back ambiance – the town also boasts an ideal location, steady real estate appreciation and short term rental ordinances that protect homeowners. Read on to learn more about what this classic desert oasis has to offer second home buyers. Abundant sunshine Expect to enjoy 350 days of sunshine in Palm Springs each year, with an average of 3,233 hours of golden rays warming its desert sands annually. You’ll very rarely – if ever – have to worry about rain ruining your outdoor plans. While it’s true that Palm Springs summers are scorchers, the cooler nearby San Jacinto Mountains offer a welcome respite. Spring, winter and fall in Palm Springs are usually milder, with winter highs in the 70s and highs in the early spring in the mid-80s. The average high for the city is 89, and the average low is 60. Location, location, location Palm Springs is less than two hours from Los Angeles by car, and just over two hours from San Diego. It’s also within a day’s drive of Phoenix, Tucson and Las Vegas. If you live in one of these metropolitan hubs, buying a second home in Palm Springs gives you a convenient weekend getaway. If you’re not from the West, buying a second home in Palm Springs can provide you with a convenient home base to explore exciting cities across California, Nevada and Arizona. As an added bonus, Palm Springs International Airport was named one of the top 10 most stress-free airports in the U.S. by smartertravel.com. Fun in the sun In the past, Palm Springs has been geared toward the snowbird set, with entertainment options focused on golf, tennis, shopping, gardens and museums. But escape rooms, spas, live comedy shows and jeep tours have started cropping up around town, catering to a more adventurous demographic. Casinos, bars, concert venues and fine dining establishments also rev up the city’s nightlife, and the surrounding protected wilderness areas are drawing more outdoor enthusiasts to the region for hiking, rock climbing and other daytime desert adventures. International attractions Host to major international events for golf, music and film, Palm Springs is steadily climbing the ladder onto the world stage. Don’t be surprised if buying a second home in Palm Springs has you rubbing elbows with some superstars. The PGA Tour comes to town every January at Palm Springs courses like PGA West and La Quinta Country Club, featuring big names like Phil Mickelson and Adam Long. January is also when the city hosts the Palm Springs International Film Festival, which has drawn A-list celebrities like Jennifer Lopez, Antonio Banderas and Robert DeNiro. If music is more your thing, you’ll love Coachella. Hosted at the Empire Polo Club in nearby Indio, Coachella is one of the most famous music festivals in the world. Headliners regularly include artists like Beyonce, Madonna, Coldplay and Lady Gaga. Limited short-term vacation rentals The city of Palm Springs has tough restrictions on short-term rental properties like Airbnbs. Short-term rentals are limited to one property per owner, and owners must pay an annual fee to register the property as a short-term rental with the city. Other ordinances include in-person guest check-in, signed guest contracts and limits on numbers of guests. Owners are charged hefty fines for noncompliance. These strict rules are designed to ensure a higher quality of life for residents, which is great if you’re thinking of buying a second home in Palm Springs. Restrictions also free up real estate inventory for buyers, since investors can’t snatch up multiple properties for vacation rental listings. Rising home values Real estate values in Palm Springs are experiencing steady growth, rising an average of 10.9% year over year. Over the past 20 years, natural real estate appreciation in the area has reached an accumulated 147%. As prices continue to rise, it’s the perfect time to let Pacaso help you find your Palm Springs dream home. Pacaso’s proven LLC co-ownership structure makes buying a second home in Palm Springs more attainable and less hassled, so you can start enjoying all that Palm Springs has to offer.
Scottsdale is an attractive place to live, drawing young professionals, families and plenty of retirees who move to the desert in search of warmer weather. And not only did Scottsdale top the list of cities people moved to in 2020, but there are plenty of part-time residents — the famous “snowbirds” who fly south each winter. Bordered by Phoenix, the Tonto National Forest, the McDowell Mountains and the Salt River, Scottsdale provides easy access to both big-city amenities and outdoor activities. Here are six reasons to make this small city your home. Year-round sunshine Scottsdale boasts an incredible 330 days of sunshine a year, with winter highs dropping down only to the high 60s. That makes Scottsdale an ideal place for those who love spending time outdoors. Spring and fall bring warm, sunny days, while things really heat up in the summer months, when you’ll find temperatures regularly hitting triple digits. But did we mention it only rains 11 inches a year? Fun-filled festivals No matter the time of year or your interests, there’s always plenty going on in Scottsdale. Take your pick of the Scottsdale Arts Festival (March), the Arizona Taco Festival (October), and the 10-day Scottsdale International Film Festival (November). Sports fans will also find plenty to watch in the greater Phoenix area, including Major League Baseball spring training and the WM Phoenix Open golf tournament. 50+ golf courses With year-round sunshine and wide open desert landscapes come golf courses, and Scottsdale has no shortage of them. In fact, Scottsdale is a well-known golf destination, with over 50 golf courses in Scottsdale itself and dozens more in the greater Phoenix area. Some of the most famous courses in Scottsdale are TPC Scottsdale, Troon North and We-Ko-Pa. Endless recreation options Scottsdale’s enviable location in the Sonoran Desert makes it a dream for anyone who loves staying active. With clean and well-maintained parks, abundant hiking trails, horseback riding, river rafting and hot air ballooning, every sunny day in Scottsdale is an opportunity to explore. Feeling like a road trip? The Grand Canyon is just a few hours’ drive away. A dynamic arts scene Scottsdale has a vibrant arts community, with a seemingly endless array of galleries, events and public art installations. A great place to start is Old Town Scottsdale, which has a wide range of outdoor art displays. The Old West-themed downtown also plays host to a weekly Art Walk on Thursday evenings. And if architecture is of interest, you’ll want to set aside time to visit Frank Lloyd Wright’s Taliesin West, home of the Frank Lloyd Wright Foundation. Delicious dining With over 800 restaurants in Scottsdale, it would take a long time to run out of places to try. Whether you’re looking for a fun happy hour spot, a family-friendly brunch locale or a fine dining restaurant to celebrate a special occasion, Scottsdale has them and more. Serious foodies will love experiencing every bite of this inventive culinary scene. At FnB, James Beard Award-winning chef Charleen Badman showcases the flavors of Arizona. And at SumoMaya, a Mexican-Asian fusion restaurant, the tapas are deliciously creative – think Wagyu carne asada. And that’s just the beginning. Are you hungry yet? Find your second home in Scottsdale Is the endless sunshine of the Sonoran Desert calling you? Find your second home in Scottsdale. When you become a co-owner of a Pacaso, you’ll enjoy all the benefits of vacation home ownership without all the hassles. Simply arrive at your luxury home, unpack and start exploring everything “The West’s Most Western Town” has to offer.
What is a momcation? A momcation is a stress-relieving vacation for moms, parents and caregivers who deserve a break from their familial responsibilities. You know what they say — moms know best. Their daily dose of care and attentiveness can keep an entire family happy, healthy and asleep by bedtime. It seems like the only thing moms don’t know is when to take a break. Being a mom or parent is a full-time job. That’s where a “momcation” comes in. Per the name, it's a relaxing vacation for moms — and well, any parent or caregiver — who deserve and need to get away from it all. Whether you’re a new mom, a hardworking single parent or a seasoned caregiver, you can easily turn a weekend getaway to a beach house or second home into a personal vacation (without the family). Read our guide on how to plan the perfect momcation for any parent and discover the top 12 places to go when you need a break. Why should you take a momcation? Effective momcations result in parents returning to their families refreshed, recharged and ready to be the best version of themselves. Although there doesn't have to be a specific reason to take a break, here are some common motivating factors for booking a momcation: To prioritize self-care by nurturing the state of your mental health. Lead by example and inspire your family to prioritize their own inner well-being, manage their stress levels and explore new methods of self-discovery. To rediscover yourself after putting everyone’s needs above your own. Indulge in all the things you have set aside or discover an entirely new version of yourself to debut when you return home. To celebrate your journey of parenthood thus far. Have your children reached an important milestone? You played an integral role in that success and deserve to rest. Some of you have been there and done that, got the momcation shirt about it (it’s a thing!), but for those who haven't, get to know our top planning tips before packing your bags and heading to the most dreamy destinations for momcations, dadcations and any parent getaways. 8 tips for planning a mom’s (or parent's) getaway For moms and other caregivers to truly be present during their break from parenthood, they should thoughtfully address and account for their fears and stressors before embarking on their trip. Momcations can last a couple days or a couple weeks and are ideal for parents with children of all ages. Here are a few momcation ideas and best practices to help you plan for a getaway of your own. 1. Prepare the family for your momcation Set your family up for success while you are on your vacation. Some moms, parents and caregivers may find creating a daily schedule helpful. Be proactive in your approach and attempt to mitigate any potential risks related to your absence. The goal is for your family to remain independent during the length of your momcation. Answer any questions they may have now and clarify that communication will be limited while on your getaway. 2. Invite your friends (optional) Every mom has a different way of melting the stress away. For some, a good book and a quiet beach do the trick. For others, nothing beats a night out on the town with their best friends by their side. Take some time to consider your wishes and let your friends know how they can support your vacation dreams. 3. Go somewhere you’ve never been before Now is the perfect opportunity to use those miles you’ve been saving. Bearing no one else’s needs in mind, enjoy a first class seat to a luxury destination of your choosing. When planning your momcation, put yourself first. Don't stress about things like a family-friendly vacation home or your partner's taste in food — this is a trip for you. 4. Indulge in luxury amenities Whether you're searching for a weekend getaway nearby or considering purchasing a second home for routine getaways, make luxury amenities a priority. Without kids, partners and pets, you can enjoy amenities like home gyms and plunge pools to their fullest potential. 5. Take advantage of being alone Once you have arrived to your momcation destination, take advantage of the fact that you are responsible for only one person during this trip: you. Do the little things that being a parent keeps you from doing like taking a midday nap or enjoying an extended happy hour on the beach. 6. Find a moment of stillness From getting the kids dressed in the morning to tucking them in at night, moms are constantly in motion. That is why one of the best momcation ideas is to find a moment of stillness during your trip. This can be taking a meditation class, booking a spa treatment or simply sitting alone and reflecting. Revel in your alone time and show gratitude for having no other responsibilities other than rest and relaxation. 7. Spend time in nature Venturing to the great outdoors can be a challenge when the whole family is involved. Alone, however, it can be an extremely cathartic experience that you shouldn't skip. Spending time in nature can look like eating dinner on your private lanai, doing yoga on the beach, or hiking through mountain trails. However you choose to connect with nature, try to let go of any lingering stress during the adventure. 8. Create an exit strategy Having a hypothetical backup plan can put some moms at ease knowing they are still prepared if disaster strikes. Exit strategies are for emergencies only and you should create one with the goal of never needing it. If peace of mind is what you need to enjoy your momcation, create multiple plans of action that your family can utilize before calling you as their last resort. The top 12 places for moms (or parents) who need a break From white sandy beaches to the European countryside and cities that never sleep — when you need a break, there is a destination for every kind of momcation you can imagine. 1. Malibu, California Only an hour from Los Angeles, Malibu, California, offers a wide array of fine dining establishments (complete stunning views of the Pacific Ocean) and luxury spa options to help moms relax and unwind. This parent-approved destination is ideal for anyone hoping to rub elbows with California’s celebrities while sipping cocktails by the beach or embarking on one of Malibu’s many hidden gem hikes. 2. Los Cabos, Mexico If cultural immersion is high on your priority list, but you don’t want to venture too far from your family, Mexico is the place for you. Los Cabos, Mexico, is a seaside town on the tip of the Baja peninsula. This destination blends relaxed beach vibes with luxury amenities like charter boats and golf courses to create the ultimate getaway experience. The nightlife is never lacking in Los Cabos — and it's only a short plane ride home. 3. Maui, Hawai’i The Hawaiian islands are home to some of the most beautiful flora and fauna in the world, and Maui is no exception. From black sand beaches to whale watching and an unbeatable sunset, Maui, Hawai’i, is a momcation destination full of adventure and tropical bliss. Foodies will feel right at home on this tropical island famed for restaurants that capitalize on freshness and panoramic ocean views. Snorkeling and volcano hiking are also fun things to do on the Valley Isle. 4. Miami Beach, Florida As far as American vacations are concerned, it is hard to compare against the subtropical climate and decadent culture of Miami Beach, Florida. Take a mom’s trip to this postcard of a city. Soak up the sun while enjoying Florida’s fusion cuisine, or play volleyball on the stretch of white sand. Take a day trip into the Florida Keys or venture out into the Caribbean if time permits. 5. Cape Cod, Massachusetts Cape Cod, Massachusetts, is bursting with New England charm. One day, you're enjoying Martha’s Vineyard, the next, you're exploring the dramatic coastline. In between island hopping and beach bumming, get your fill of freshly caught lobster. It pairs well with the local wine selection and craft brews. 6. New York City, New York New York City, New York, is an ideal location for an adults-only second home retreat. Indulge in all of the best parts of being alone while exploring the Big Apple. Take yourself to a Michelin Star restaurant or curl up with your favorite book at Central Park. Before you leave, stroll down Fifth Avenue’s shops and browse through luxury stores to your heart’s content. 7. Aspen, Colorado If warm and cozy vibes are what your soul is looking for, then Aspen, Colorado, is where you need to be. This vacation destination is perfect for moms and caregivers who crave sleep and alone time. Wake up to a morning coffee overlooking the Aspen's autumn colors, or visit in the winter to enjoy hot spring dips and skiing on a blanket of snow. 8. Napa Valley, California You can find art, wine and relaxation in copious amounts whenever you take a momcation to Napa Valley, California, and the gorgeous vineyard setting alone is enough to melt the stress away. Not a fan of wine? Hot air balloon rides and themed dinner trains are some of the best things to do in Napa Valley. Like any luxury destination, you will also find plenty of spas, fine dining establishments and celebrities roaming around the valley. 9. Marbella, Spain Are you ready and able to travel to the land of fairy tales and flamenco? Located along the Mediterranean is Marbella, Spain, a charming Spanish town that truly has it all. Enjoy year-round sunshine in Southern Spain, complete with a few dozen beaches, golf clubs and wineries. For the ultimate luxury getaway, choose from one of the many exclusive beach clubs in Marbella. 10. Bali, Indonesia Few places compare to the breathtaking landscapes of Bali, Indonesia. The island has rapidly developed into vacation central and boasts some of the dreamiest amenities available. Farm-to-table freshness is a normal encounter at local eateries, and the beaches are the perfect place to try a new water sport or set sail towards adventure. Although maintaining a vacation home from afar can seem challenging, Bali makes it worth it. 11. London, United Kingdom From day trips to the English countryside to pub crawls by Big Ben, London, U.K., is a tantalizing backdrop for any momcation. Bear in mind that a second home in London also grants you easy access to the rest of Europe. France and Spain are short ferry rides away when you call London your home away from home. With the British pound at an all time low, now is a great time to consider investing in a second home that doubles as a momcation retreat. 12. Las Vegas, Nevada Las Vegas, Nevada, is known as Sin City due to its plethora of bars, clubs and non-stop nightlife. It is one of the most inclusive momcation packages around and ideal for any mom that needs to let loose and dance the night away. Owning a second home near Vegas also means you are a short drive away from the natural beauty of Southern California and the Pacific Ocean. Considering if you should buy or rent your next vacation home? Read our comparison guide to learn which option is best for you. While waiting for your getaway to arrive, learn how to curate a tranquil space just for parents within your own home. This could be the perfect place to continue fine-tuning the details of your dream getaway or scout for a second home.
